http://www.bizflips.com/library/pdf-new/Legrand/catalogue by Brochures Uk Ltd

INCLUDING:

2010/11

PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND INFORMATION NETWORKS

CATALOGUE WIRING DEVICES

P. 12 Radio/Zigbee lighting control and automation mechanisms

P. 13 Radio/Zigbee touch plates and other functions

P. 48 Bticino 2 wire system

P. 55 Bticino 8 wire system

P. 74 Arteor wiring devices

P. 120 Synergy wiring devices

P. 192 Insulated surface mounting consumer units

P. 193 Metal surface mounting consumer units

P. 204 DLP Contour PVC-U trunking selection chart

P. 206 DLP Contour dado 195 x 50 3 compartment

P. 218 Isolating switches

P. 219 DX RCDs, MCBs and RCBOs

Enclosures and equipment

P. 242 Atlantic steel enclosures

P. 246 Atlantic stainless steel enclosures

Power control, connection and cabling accessories

P. 266 Power supplies and transformers

P. 282 Viking 3 terminal blocks

P. 310 Hypra plugs and sockets

P. 312 Hypra Prisinter sockets

RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL

Home systems

Door entry

Wiring devices

Home circuit protection

INDUSTRIAL

POWER

Cable management perimeter systems

Isolation, protection, control and signalling

Industrial plugs, sockets and combined units

Catalogue number index P. 341

Index of protection IP-IK P. 352

P. 18 BUS/SCS lighting control and automation mechanisms

P. 24 BUS/SCS temperature control and sound distribution

P. 29 BUS/SCS home management and door entry systems

P. 34 Home networks

P. 57 Bticino analogue system

P. 59 Access control

P. 61 Door entry kits

P. 67 Salsa chimes, bell push, bells and transformer

P. 165 Clipper large rocker switches and back boxes

P. 169 Plexo weatherproof wiring devices

P. 173 Tenby Rapid Clamp earth clamps

P. 176 Lighting and lighting management

P. 193 Metal flush mounting consumer units

P. 193 Accessories and protection devices

P. 195 Irish consumer units, protection and modular devices

P. 198 Supply units

P. 207 DLP Contour skirting 150 x 50 2 and 3 compartment

P. 209 DLP Contour universal 150 x 50 1 and 2 compartment

P. 213 DLP Contour trunking accessories

P. 213 Contractor floor box

P. 222 Changeover switches and fuse carriers

P. 225 Push buttons, control switches, indicators, transformers and buzzers

P. 226 Power contactors

P. 230 Time switches and light control switches

P. 248 Marina GRP enclosures

P. 251 Equipment and locking accessories

P. 255 Ventilation and heating

P. 259 Industrial boxes and Nylbloc terminal strips

P. 294 Distribution blocks

P. 298 Transcab and Lina 25 cable ducting

P. 301 Cable marking and Starfix ferrules

P. 306 Colring and Colson cable ties

P. 324 Hypra combined units

P. 329 P17 Tempra plugs and sockets

P. 335 P17 Tempra self-assembly combined units

P. 338 Clang heavy duty truck and trailer plugs and sockets

Legrand in the UK... Powered by specialists The Legrand Group is the world’s leading manufacturer of wiring devices and cable management systems. With specialist brands including Bticino, Electrak and Zucchini, the Legrand Group also offers cutting edge solutions in door entry and power distribution.

Legrand has revised its UK structure into a clear organisation of brands and key product areas. The result is three new business units... each Powered by specialists. • Specialist brands • Specialist sales teams • Specialist knowledge The Legrand Group... the world specialist, adapted and applied to our market to deliver the very best in service and solutions.

WIRING DEVICES

Much more than just a vast selection of switches and sockets... Legrand’s wiring devices business unit includes door entry and home systems, lighting management, consumer units and much more.

POWER AND DATA

Energising the workstation... from transformers and panel boards, through rising main busbars and distribution boards to power track and desk modules.

CABLE MANAGEMENT

Legrand’s established Swifts, Salamandre and Arena-Walsall ranges give our cable management business unit a firm leadership position in the UK.

Throughout 2010, we will be introducing three new catalogues to represent our new business structure: • Wiring Devices • Power and Data • Cable Management

find out more at www.legrand.co.uk 3

Together, lets try to make

1+1+1 +1+1= LESS SuSTainabiLiTy coMMiTMEnT From design through to manufacturing, the Legrand Group favours materials and processes that respect people and the environment. By doing so, the Group reduces the impact of its activities whilst reinforcing its economic performance and the attractiveness of its products and services. The Legrand Group’s commitment to reducing greenhouse gas emissions and its impact on the environment can be demonstrated at three levels... • Management of manufacturing and logistics sites • Efficient and environmentally aware product design • Product functions that help to avoid energy waste

LighTing ManagEMEnT energy saving

putting a stop to energy waste Up to 20% of a buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s electricity bill can be attributed to lighting. Legrandâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s new occupancy sensors can help cut this cost. hoME SySTEMS

energy saving

energy savings and greater control around the home In addition to a wide range of stand-alone devices, Legrand's new Arteor range of wiring devices also incorporates a wide selection of home automation functions. TiME SwiTchES

energy saving

simple programming to help ensure power is only used when needed Time switches can be set up using simple on-screen instructions or, alternatively, using a data key which can be programmed on your PC using its very own software. kEy fob SwiTchES

energy saving

helping to reduce power consumption in hotels Key fob switches, part of Legrand's modular wiring device offer, are a simple example of how energy can be saved... in this case, meeting the specific needs of the hotel industry.

find out more at www.legrand.co.uk 5

alphabetical list

A Access control audio door entry kits ...................................... 61, 65 door bells, bell pushes and transformers ........................................................ 67 two wire door entry systems ................................ 48 video door entry kits - B/W ............................ 61, 65 video door entry kits - colour ............................... 61 AlphaRex time switches ............................................ 230 American standard socket outlet ................................ 93 Analogue door entry systems ..................................... 57 Architrave switches ................................................... 162 Arteor home automation ............................................. 12 Arteor wiring devices audio and video sockets ............................ 90 to 91 BS socket outlets ........................................... 76, 93 blanking plates .............................................. 76, 96 cable outlets .................................................. 76, 96 cooker control unit ............................................... 75 curtain and blind control ..................................... 86 data sockets ............................................... 90 to 91 detectors (gas and water) .................................... 92 dimmers .............................................................. 81 electronic switches .............................................. 79 fused connection unit .......................................... 76 home automation ................................................. 12 home networks .................................................... 34 hotel equipment .......................................... 87 to 89 International socket outlets .................................. 93 key switches ........................................................ 84 lighting control ..................................................... 84 mechanical switches ............................ 74, 77 to 78 plates ...................................................... 102 to 111 push buttons ........................................................ 80 RJ11 and RJ 45 sockets ...................................... 94 shaver sockets ............................................... 75, 88 support frames .................................................... 97 thermostats .......................................................... 86 telephone sockets ............................................... 94 TV sockets ........................................................... 94 USB sockets ........................................................ 95 AstroRex light control time switches ......................... 235 Atlantic enclosures Atlantic stainless steel ....................................... 246 Atlantic steel ...................................................... 242 Audio door entry kits ............................................. 61, 65 Audio and video sockets .................................... 90 to 91

B Back boxes metalclad surface mounting ................................ 57 metal surface mounting ..................................... 166 moulded surface mounting ............................... 167 steel flush mounting ........................................... 166 Bathroom lighting mirror light ......................................................... 184 shaver lights ...................................................... 184 Bells bells with cover .................................................... 67 bell pushes .......................................................... 67 bells and buzzers .............................................. 225 Blanking plates Arteor.............................................................. 76, 96 Synergy metalclad.............................................. 156 Synergy modern................................................. 138 Synergy traditional.............................................. 148 Synergy white ..................................................... 126 Boxes industrial boxes ................................................. 258 metalclad surface mounting .............................. 157 steel flush mounting .......................................... 166 surface mounting metal...................................... 166 surface mounting moulded ................................ 167 Bticino door entry systems access control ..................................................... 59 analogue system ................................................. 57 boxes and chassis ............................................... 45 door entry kits ...................................................... 61 eight wire system ................................................. 55 entrance panels ................................................... 42 function modules ................................................. 43 handsets .............................................................. 48 internal hands free units ...................................... 48 IP door entry systems .......................................... 54 Sfera function modules ........................................ 43 switchboards ....................................................... 55 system components ............................................ 50 technical information ........................................... 62 two wire system ................................................... 48 Bulkhead lighting ....................................................... 185 BUS/SCS technology ...........................................18 to 31 actuators .............................................................. 20 automation control ............................................... 18 door entry systems .............................................. 30 home management ............................................. 29

key covers ............................................................. 9 lighting control ..................................................... 18 power supplies .............................................. 20, 27 scenario controllers ...............................................18 SCS cables............................................................21 sound distribution..................................................26 temperature control ...............................................24 touch screens ................................................ 24, 29 two wire door entry systems..................................30

CAB 3 cable markers ................................................ 303 Cable ducting .............................................................298 Cable management systems .................................... 206 Cable marking systems (CAB 3) ............................... 303 Cable outlets Arteor ..............................................................76, 96 Synergy metalclad ..............................................155 Synergy modern .................................................136 Synergy traditional ..............................................146 Synergy white .....................................................124 Cable ties Colring ............................................................... 306 Colson ............................................................... 306 Cavity floor service outlet boxes contractor floor box ........................................... 213 Ceiling accessories lampholders and pendants .................................183 Ceiling switches ..........................................................182 Changeover switches ................................................ 222 Clang truck and trailer plugs and sockets ............................................. 338 Chimes (Salsa) wireless chime kits .............................................. 67 Clipper large rocker switches ................................... 165 Colour video door entry kit .......................................... 61 Colring cable ties and tool ........................................ 306 Colson cable ties and tool ........................................ 306 Cooker control units Arteor ....................................................................75 Synergy modern .................................................136 Synergy traditional ..............................................146 Synergy white .....................................................124 Combined units Hypra ................................................................. 310 P17 tempra ........................................................ 334 Consumer units insulated dual RCD split load ............................. 192 insulated high integrity dual RCD split load ....... 192 insulated surface mounting units ....................... 192 Irish consumer units ........................................... 195 MCBs ................................................................. 194 metal flush mounting ..........................................193 metal surface mounting units ..............................194 RCBOs ................................................................194 RCDs ..................................................................194 transformers .......................................................194 Contactors ........................................................ 194, 226 Contractor floor box .................................................. 213 Control switches and push buttons ........................... 225 Cover plates (Arteor) ......................................... 102-111 Curtain control ............................................................ 86

Data sockets Arteor ..............................................................90-91 Synergy metalclad ..............................................156 Synergy modern .................................................137 Synergy traditional ..............................................147 Synergy white .....................................................125 Data modules (home networks) ...................................19 Decorative bulkhead lighting weatherproof bulkhead lighting ......................... 185 Detectors gas........................................................................ 92 water .................................................................... 92 Digital video door entry kits .........................................61 Dimmer units Arteor ....................................................................81 Synergy modern .................................................131 Synergy traditional ..............................................141 Synergy white .....................................................121 Distribution blocks distribution blocks ............................................. 296 distribution terminal blocks ............................... 294 extra-flat distribution blocks .............................. 296 modular style distribution blocks........................ 295 stepped distribution blocks ............................... 296 Distribution terminal blocks fully shrouded .................................................... 294 partly shrouded ................................................ 294 unshrouded ...................................................... 294 DLP PVC-U Contour trunking systems dado – 195 x 50.................................................. 206 selection chart ................................................... 204

skirting – 150 x 50 ............................................. 207 skirting – 195 x 50 ............................................. 208 universal – 105 x 50............................................ 211 universal – 150 x 50............................................ 209 universal – 195 x 50............................................ 212 universal – 195 x 65............................................ 210 Door bells, bells pushes and chimes .........................123 Door entry kits audio door entry kits .......................................61, 65 two wire audio and video door entry kits .............61 video door entry kits - B/W .............................61, 65 video door entry kits - colour ................................61 Door entry systems ..................................................... 48 Double pole socket outlets Arteor ....................................................................76 Synergy metalclad ..............................................154 Synergy modern .................................................132 Synergy traditional ..............................................142 Synergy white .....................................................121 Double pole switches Arteor.....................................................................75 Synergy metalclad ..............................................155 Synergy modern .................................................135 Synergy traditional ..............................................145 Synergy white .....................................................121 DX auxiliaries ............................................................ 221 DX MCBs ................................................................... 220 DX (RCBOs) .............................................................. 221 DX (RCDs) ................................................................. 219

Earth clamps ............................................................. 173 Eight wire door entry systems ..................................... 55 Enclosures air conditioning .................................................. 255 Atlantic stainless steel ....................................... 246 Atlantic steel ...................................................... 242 equipment for Atlantic and Marina .................... 251 industrial boxes ................................................. 258 Marina................................................................. 248 Energy-saving pendant sets ..................................... 184 Euro-US standard socket outlet .................................. 93

Fan control .................................................................. 86 Ferrules ..................................................................... 301 Floor boxes (contractor box) ..................................... 213 Free standing enclosures (Marina) .............................248 French standard socket outlet ..................................... 93 Fused connection units Arteor ....................................................................76 Synergy metalclad ..............................................153 Synergy modern .................................................135 Synergy traditional ..............................................145 Synergy white .....................................................123

Garage / outbuilding supply unit .............................. 198 German standard socket outlet .................................. 93 Grid system Arteor ................................................................. 164 Synergy ............................................................. 158

Heavy duty truck and trailer plugs and sockets ....... 338 Home automation..........................................................12 Home networks ........................................................34-36 audio modules ..................................................... 34 data modules ....................................................... 34 enclosures ........................................................... 34 power supplies .................................................... 35 speakers .............................................................. 35 telephone modules .............................................. 34 video modules ..................................................... 34 volume control ..................................................... 35 Hotel equipment ................................................... 87-89 Hypra combined units IP 44 units .......................................................... 310 IP 66/67-55 units ................................................ 314 undrilled empty boxes ....................................... 325 Hypra industrial plugs and sockets IP 44 appliance inlets ........................................ 311 IP 44 plugs ........................................................ 310 IP 44 sockets ..................................................... 310 IP 44/55 sockets ................................................ 311 IP 66/67-55 appliance inlets .............................. 314 IP 66/67-55 plugs .............................................. 314 IP 66/67-55 sockets ........................................... 314 IP 44/55 Prisinter sockets .................................. 311

Indicators ................................................................. 225

Industrial boxes PC range ........................................................... 260 PP range ............................................................ 260 PS range ............................................................ 259 PVC range ......................................................... 262 Industrial plugs and sockets Hypra appliance inlets .............................. 311, 314 Hypra plugs ............................................... 310, 314 Hypra Prisinter sockets ...................................... 311 Hypra sockets .................................... 310, 314, 311 P17 Tempra appliance inlets ............................. 329 P17 Tempra plugs ............................................. 329 P17 Tempra sockets .......................................... 329 International standard socket outlets .......................... 93 IP door entry systems ................................................. 54 IP table ...................................................................... 352 Isolation and protection changeover switches .......... 222 Isolating switches ...................................................... 218 Isolating switches DX-IS ................................................................. 218 Legrand Lexic ................................................... 218 Vistop ................................................................. 218 Isolator switches Synergy modern .................................................131 Synergy traditional ..............................................141 Synergy white .....................................................120

Key operated switches Arteor ....................................................................84 Synergy white .....................................................120 Key switched sockets Synergy metalclad ..............................................154 Synergy traditional ..............................................143 Synergy white .....................................................122

Lampholders.............................................................. 183 Large rocker switches................................................ 165 Legrand door entry kits................................................ 65 Legrand Lexic devices bell transformers ................................................ 225 buzzers............................................................... 225 changeover switches.......................................... 218 discrimination / selectivity tables........................ 224 DX RCDs ............................................................ 219 indicators ........................................................... 225 isolating switches .............................................. 218 push buttons and control switches .................... 225 safety transformers ............................................ 225 Light control switches Arteor ................................................................... 84 Microlux ............................................................. 237 Lighting and accessories bathroom ............................................................ 184 decorative bulkheads ........................................ 185 lampholders ...................................................... 183 mirror light ......................................................... 184 pendant sets ...................................................... 183 safety lampholders ............................................ 183 safety pendant sets ........................................... 183 shaverlight ......................................................... 184 weatherproof bulkheads ................................... 185 Lighting environment controller ................................. 82 Lighting management commissioning tool............................................. 176 dual technology sensors ................................... 176 PIR sensors ....................................................... 176 radio switch sensors .......................................... 177 ultrasonic sensors ............................................. 176 Lina 25 cable ducting .............................................. 299

P17 Tempra ....................................................... 329 Pendant sets energy-saving pendant set ............................... 183 safety pendant sets ........................................... 183 standard pendant sets ...................................... 183 Perimeter trunking systems DLP Contour PVC-U trunking ............................ 206 Pilot lights Plexo IP55 .......................................................... 171 Plexo modular mechanisms IP 55 emergency stop ................................................ 170 flush mounting frame ......................................... 171 key operated switches ....................................... 170 pilot light ............................................................. 171 socket outlet ...................................................... 171 surface mounting box ........................................ 171 time lag switch ................................................... 170 Plexo weatherproof IP 55 push buttons ...................................................... 170 socket outlets ..................................................... 170 switches ............................................................. 170 Plexo weatherproof IP 66 Arteor adaptors ................................................. 169 fused spur unit ................................................... 169 M20 cable gland ............................................... 169 push buttons ...................................................... 169 socket outlets ..................................................... 169 switches ............................................................. 169 Plexo industrial boxes ............................................... 258 Plugs and sockets Clang truck and trailer ....................................... 338 Hypra industrial ................................................. 301 P17 Tempra industrial ........................................ 329 Power contactors ...................................................... 226 Power supplies filtered ................................................................ 266 for door entry systems ................................... 20, 27 for home networks ............................................... 35 non-filtered ........................................................ 266 Prisinter (Hypra) ........................................................ 311 Push buttons Arteor ................................................................... 80 Legrand Lexic ................................................... 225

R Radio/Zigbee technology ....................................12 to 17 automation control ................................................12 dimmers ...............................................................12 lighting control ......................................................12 roller blind switches ..............................................12 scenario controllers ..............................................12 touch plates ..........................................................12 weatherproof switches .........................................12 Rapid clamps .............................................................173 RCBOs ...............................................................194, 221 RCDs DX .......................................................................219 Residential ..........................................................194 RCD sockets Synergy metalclad ..............................................154 Synergy modern .................................................133 Synergy traditional ..............................................143 Synergy white .....................................................122 Rex control switches AlphaRex digital time switch ............................. 230 AstroRex light control switches ......................... 235 MicroRex analogue time switches ..................... 233 MicroRex digital time switches .......................... 234 RJ 11 sockets .............................................................. 94 RJ 45 category 5e and 6 ............................................ 94 Roller blind control ........................................................86

Marina GRP enclosures free standing ..................................................... 250 wall mounting .................................................... 248 Marking systems for cables ........................................................... 303 for Viking terminal blocks .................................. 303 MCBs discrimination tables ......................................... 224 Legrand Lexic ................................................... 220 residential .......................................................... 194 tripping curves .................................................. 223 MicroRex time switches analogue ............................................................ 233 digital ................................................................. 234 Mobile P17 Tempra combined units ......................... 334 Mobile sockets .................................................. 312, 329 Multi-standard socket outlet......................................... 93

Salsa chimes .............................................................. 67 Shaver lights................................................................184 Shaver sockets Arteor ............................................................. 75, 88 Synergy modern................................................. 134 Synergy traditional.............................................. 144 Synergy white ..................................................... 123 Single pole switches Clipper.................................................................165 Synergy metalclad ..............................................154 Synergy modern .................................................130 Synergy traditional ..............................................140 Synergy white .....................................................120 Sirens ..........................................................................225 Skirting lights ................................................................84 Socket outlets Arteor (modular) ....................................................93 Arteor (monobloc) .................................................76 Synergy MEIGaN ................................................152 Synergy metalclad ..............................................154 Synergy modern .................................................133 Synergy Part M ...................................................151 Synergy traditional ..............................................143 Synergy white .....................................................122 Speaker sockets .......................................................... 95 Starfix crimping tools and ferrules .............................. 30 Structured wiring ......................................................... 34 Supply units garage / outbuilding supply units ...................... 198 electric shower supply units .............................. 198

P17 Tempra combined units self-assembly .................................................... 335 surface mounting ............................................... 334 P17 Tempra industrial plugs and sockets IP 44 appliance inlets ........................................ 329 IP 44 plugs ........................................................ 329 IP 44 sockets ..................................................... 329 Panel mounting sockets Hypra ................................................................. 310

Surface mounting boxes Synergy metalclad ............................................. 157 Switch sensors ............................................................ 76 Synergy wiring devices grid modules ..................................................... 158 grid systems ...................................................... 160 media plates ...................................................... 153 MEIGaN sockets ................................................ 152 metalclad ........................................................... 154 modern black nickel .......................................... 130 modern matt black ............................................ 130 modern nickel .................................................... 130 modern silver ..................................................... 130 Part M sockets ................................................... 151 traditional brushed steel .................................... 140 traditional polished steel ................................... 140 traditional satin brass ....................................... 140 white .................................................................. 120 white standard engravings................................. 128

Telephone modules (home networks) ......................... 34 Telephone sockets Arteor ....................................................................94 Synergy metalclad ................................................56 Synergy modern .................................................137 Synergy traditional ..............................................147 Synergy white .....................................................125 Tempra (P17) plugs and sockets IP 44 appliance inlets ........................................ 329 IP 44 plugs ........................................................ 329 IP 44 sockets ..................................................... 329 Terminal blocks (Viking 3) accessories ....................................................... 286 heavy duty terminal blocks................................. 292 terminal blocks with screw connection ............. 282 terminal blocks with spring connection ............. 284 Terminal strips Nylbloc .............................................................. 263 Thermostat .................................................................. 86 Time switches AlphaRex digital ................................................ 230 AstroRex light control switches ......................... 235 MicroRex analogue ............................................ 233 MicroRex digital ................................................. 234 Time-lag switch .................................................. 237 Time delay switch ................................................ 84 Transcab cable ducting ............................................ 299 Transformers bell transformers ....................................... 195, 225 compact transformers ....................................... 271 control transformers .......................................... 269 safety transformers ............................................ 225 Truck and trailer plugs and sockets ............................338 Trunking systems DLP Contour PVC-U trunking ............................ 204 TV, radio and satellite sockets Arteor ....................................................................94 Synergy metalclad ..............................................156 Synergy modern .................................................137 Synergy traditional ..............................................147 Synergy white .....................................................125 Two wire audio door entry kit ...................................... 61 Two wire door entry systems ...................................... 48 Two wire video door entry kit ...................................... 61

Unswitched socket outlets Synergy modern .................................................133 Synergy traditional ..............................................142 Synergy metalclad ..............................................154 Synergy white .....................................................122 US-Euro standard socket outlet .................................. 93 USB sockets..................................................................95

Video door entry kits ............................................. 61, 65 Video modules (home networks) ................................ 34 Viking 3 accessories ....................................................... 286 heavy duty terminal blocks................................. 292 terminal blocks with screw connection ............. 282 terminal blocks with spring connection.............. 284

Wall mounting enclosures air conditioning .................................................. 255 Atlantic stainless steel ....................................... 246 Atlantic steel ...................................................... 242 equipment for Atlantic and Marina GRP ............ 251 industrial boxes ................................................. 258 locking accessories ........................................... 254

Yokes (Synergy grid) ................................................. 162

Radio/ZigBee technology ArteorTM

P. 10 Introduction to Radio/Zigbee technology

P. 16 Introduction toBUS/SCS technology

BUS/SCS technology ArteorTM

P. 23 Actuators, dimmers max. loads selection chart P. 29 NEW Home management system

Home networks

P. 32 Introduction to Home networks

Home systems NEW IN 2010 Radio / Zigbee lighting control and automation mechanisms (p. 12)

BUS / SCS

lighting control and automation mechanisms (p. 18)

P. 12 NEW Lighting control and automation mechanisms

P. 18 NEW Lighting control and automation mechanisms

P. 13 Touch plates

O N O N

NEW

P. 19 NEW Key covers

O FF O FF

O N

O FF

P. 24 NEW Temperature control

P. 25 Temperature control installation

P. 30 NEW Door entry systems

P I

P S

P. 34 Home networks structured wiring

1 2 3 4 5

P. 13 NEW Other functions

P. 14 Switches, dimmers max. loads selection chart

P. 20 NEW Actuators, BUS power supplies accessories

P. 22 Lighting control installation

P. 26 NEW Sound distribution

P. 28 Sound distribution installation

P. 31 NEW Accessories for video door entry systems

P. 36 Structured wiring technical characteristics

ZigBee* radio technology The standard for radio (wireless) solutions, ideal for refurbishment, small new installations and increasing the number of control points, without damaging the walls.

INTeRAcTIvITy of fuNcTIoNs

WIRING DIAGRAM

ZigBee radio technology is an international low consumption radio communication standard. This technology can be used in addition to the BUS system. Operating at a frequency of 2.4 GHz, it can be used, via transmitters (wireless) and receivers, to control lighting, roller blinds and technical detectors. It can also control scenarios, and allows bi-directional communication between devices.

* ZigBee Certified product â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Manufacturer Specific Profile

Dimming control

or Dimmer

Dimming control with touch plate

SCENARIO CONTROL

LIGHTING CONTROL RECEIVER DIMMER SWITCH

4 SCENARIO CONTROL

(See p. 12)

Indicates the light intensity via LEDs

For lighting, roller blinds…

ROLLER BLIND CONTROL INDIVIDUAL RECEIVER ROLLER BLIND SWITCH (See p. 12) Controls any type of electric roller blind motor

From dimmer Motor

B A NL

A A + B

B N

A Indicates lighting control B Indicates roller blinds control

TECHNICAL ALARM TECHNICAL DETECTORS (See p. 13) Warning of water or gas leaks

NEW

ArteorTM Radio/ZigBee lighting control and automation

5738 40

5738 25

5738 20

5738 37

5738 70

5738 49

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Switches and dimmers max. loads selection chart (p. 14) Mechanisms equipped with white or black round cover plates and magnesium circular push control, to be equipped with 2 module plates (p. 98-111) Standard rocker plates and plates can be replaced by touch plates (p. 13)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Control mechanisms (receivers) 100-240 V

To be installed in flush mounting boxes min. depth 48 mm 2 modules to be equipped with support frames (p. 97) White Black Switches without neutral 5738 12 5738 13 1 gang switch 300 W - with blue LED status indicator supplied To be mounted on 2 module support frame

Switches with neutral 1 5738 22 5738 23 1 gang switch 2 500 W with blue LED status indicator supplied To be mounted on 2 module support frame 1 5738 24 5738 25 2 gang switch 2 x 1 000 W with blue LED status indicator supplied To be mounted on 2 module support frame 1 5738 26 5738 27 3 gang switch 3 x 1 000 W with blue LED status indicator supplied To be mounted on 2 module support frame Roller blinds switches 1 5738 40 5738 41 Switch with preset function To be mounted on 2 module support frame

Leading/trailing edge dimmers without neutral 5738 16 5738 17 300 W - with blue LED level indicator To be mounted on 2 module support frame 5738 20 5738 21 600 W - with blue LED level indicator To be mounted on 2 module support frame

Universal dimmers with neutral 1 5738 28 5738 29 300 W To be mounted on 2 module support frame Dimmers 0-10 V 1 5738 32 5738 33 For fluorescent lamps 1 000 W with 0-10 V ballasts To be mounted on 2 module support frame

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Remote control transmitters

1 1

Surface mounting (no wiring needed) Supplied with batteries and support frames 2 modules White Black Switch transmitters 5738 34 5738 35 For 1 gang switch 5738 36 5738 37 For 2 gang switch

Dimmer transmitters

5738 38 5738 39 For dimmer

Roller blinds switch transmitters

5738 42 5738 43

For roller blinds switch

Scenario controllers

Surface mounting (no wiring needed) Supplied with batteries and support frames 2 modules White Black For BUS or radio installations 1 5738 48 5738 49 4 push buttons to control 4 scenarios (1 scenario can control several functions : shutters, lighting...)

Mobile scenario controllers

Pocket remote controller 1 5738 70 4 push buttons to control 4 scenarios (1 scenario can control several functions : shutters, lighting...) Can be used with all radio flush mounting control mechanisms IR/RF remote control 1 0882 32 4 push buttons to control 4 scenarios and general ON/OFF

Scenario controllers with specific marking for hotels (see p. 88) ZigBee : Certified product Manufacturer Specific Profile

ArteorTM Radio/ZigBee

NEW

ArteorTM Radio/ZigBee

lighting control and automation touch plates

5737 54

NEW

other functions

5737 91 5738 73

5738 57

5738 66

Technical characteristics (p. 15) Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

White or black touch plates to replace standard rocker plates and plates

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Touch plates for switch receivers and transmitters

5737 50 5737 51

For 1 gang mechanism

5737 54 5737 55

For 2 gang mechanism

5737 64 5737 65

For 3 gang mechanism

White

British standard fixing centres

Black

Touch plates for dimmer receivers and transmitters

British standard fixing centres

Black

5737 58 5737 59

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Other ArteorTM functions

Mechanisms equipped with white or black cover plates and magnesium circle for control, to be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and 2 module plates (p. 98 to 111) To be installed in flush mounting boxes min. depth 40 mm "Water heater" switches White Black 1 5738 46 5738 47 DP switch 20 A with "Water Heater" marking 2 modules to be mounted on 2 module support frames Technical alarms 2 modules

5738 72 5738 73

5738 74 5738 75 Transceiver

Actuator 100-240 VA - 10 A

For 1 gang mechanism Gateways SCS/ZigBee 2 modules 1 5738 56 5738 57 Allow the extension of a BUS/SCS system with ZigBee devices

White

Touch plates for roller blind switch receivers and transmitters Black

5737 68 5737 69

White

British standard fixing centres For 1 gang mechanism

Touch plates for scenario controllers Black

5737 90 5737 91

British standard fixing centres

Weatherproof switches 230 VA

Can be controlled with switch transmitters Mechanisms supplied with black rocker plates Surface mounting

5738 58

Switch with neutral 2 500 W

5738 60

Switch with neutral 2 x 2 500 W

Control mechanisms 100-240 VA

For installation in false ceiling Can be controlled with transmitters Mechanisms supplied complete

5738 62 Switch 2 500 W

5738 64

5738 66 Dimmer for ballasts 0-10 V For fluorescent lamps 1 000 W

Leading/trailing edge dimmer 600 W

ZigBee : Certified product Manufacturer Specific Profile

ArteorTM Radio/ZigBee

switches and dimmers max. loads selection charts

n Switches and dimmers maximum loads at 230 V Universal

Leading edge

Incandescent lamp

Halogen lamp

ELV halogen with ferromagnetic transformer

ELV halogen with electronic transformer

Fluorescent tube

Compact fluorescent lamp

LED

Fluorescent lamps with 0-10 V ballast

Reducer motor for shutter

5738 12/13

300 W

300 VA

–

5738 22/23

2 500 W

2 500 VA

1 250 VA

–

250 VA

5738 24/25

2 x 1 000 W

2 x 1 000 VA

2 x 500 VA

–

2 x 100 VA

5738 26/27

3 x 1 000 W

3 x 1 000 VA

3 x 500 VA

–

3 x 100 VA

5738 40/41

–

500 VA

2 500 W

2 500 VA

1 250 VA

–

250 VA

5738 16/17

300 W

300 VA

–

5738 20/21

600 W

450 VA

600 VA

–

5738 28/29

300 W

300 VA

–

160 VA

–

5738 32/33

–

1 000 VA

–

5738 66

–

1 000 VA

–

5738 64

600 W

450 VA

600 VA

–

SWITCHES

Cat. Nos.

5738 62

DIMMERS

Trailing edge

ZigBee : Certified product - Manufacturer Specific Profile

ArteorTM Radio/ZigBee touch plates

n Transformation into touch plates version of standard control mechanisms (receivers) and remote control transmitters equipped with rocker plates Remote control transmitter with support frame (supplied) By removing fins, can be adapted to other standards fixing centres 1

Control mechanism (receiver) with support frame (not supplied) 1

2 3

n Selection chart for association of touch plates Touch plates Function

Touch control switch 1 gang

Touch control switch 2 gang

Touch control switch 3 gang

Touch control dimmer 1 gang

Touch control roller blinds switch 1 gang

4 scenarios touch control

Associate mechanism

Colour

BS fixing centres

White

5737 50

Black

5737 51

White

5737 54

Black

5737 55

White

5737 64

Black

5737 65

White

5737 58

Black

5737 59

White

5737 68

Black

5737 69

White

5737 90

Black

5737 91

Control mechanism (receiver)

Remote control transmitter

5738 12 5738 13 5738 22 5738 23

5738 34 5738 35

5738 24 5738 25

5738 36 5738 37

5738 26 5738 27

â&#x20AC;&#x201C;

5738 16 5738 17 5738 20 5738 21 5738 28 5738 29

5738 38 5738 39

5738 40 5738 41

5738 42 5738 43

5738 48 5738 49

ZigBee : Certified product - Manufacturer Specific Profile

BUS/SCS technology With just 2 dedicated wires, it's now easy to create scenarios that incorporate multiple functions for large living areas... lighting, automation, video door entry, etc.

MUltipliCation of fUnCtionS With no SpaCe ConStraintS BUS/SCS technology can manage various different functions at the same time via 2 wire extra low voltage cables. It enables a number of functions to be integrated through scenarios and is designed to adapt to the userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s environment as required.

WirinG DiaGraM

Power supply

BUS line 27 V

2 3

Touch screen

Actuators

3 1

Consumer unit

Room

DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

SCENARIO CONTROL

AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

SCENARIO CONTROL

CENTRAL UNIT FOR TEMPERATURE CONTROL

(See p. 18)

(See p. 30)

For activation of 4 scenarios

Access control and intercommunication with other units

(See p. 24)

ROLLER BLIND CONTROL ROLLER BLIND CONTROL (See p. 18) Controls any type of electric roller blinds

Can manage up to 99 zones

From actuators

Motor

230 V

BUS line 27 V

A A

BUS line

BUS line BUS line

A Touch Screen

Video display

A B A B

A Indicates lighting control B Indicates roller blinds control

DIN RAIL ACTUATORS AND HOME MANAGEMENT DIN RAIL ACTUATORS (See p. 20) To be associated with load and control mechanisms

TOUCH SCREEN

SOUND DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER (See p. 26)

(See p. 29) Activation of 4 scenarios, temperature and sound distribution functions

NEW

ArteorTM BUS/SCS

lighting control and automation control mechanisms

5739 74

5739 02

5739 00

5739 04

5739 05

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Micropush control mechanisms

To be installed in flush mounting boxes Basic functions To be equipped with round version key covers (p. 19) and plates (p. 98 to 111) 1 5739 74 2 module mechanism Control for the activation of 1 actuator for single or double loads, or 2 actuators for single load, or independent double loads for lighting and shutters 1 5739 75 3 module mechanism Control for the activation of 3 actuators for single or double loads, or 2 actuators for single load or independent double loads Basic and special functions To be equipped with round version key covers (p. 19) and plates (p. 98 to 111) 1 5739 87 2 module mechanism Control for the activation of 4 scenarios, soft-start and soft-stop of dimmers, sound distribution functions and activation of devices installed on different BUS branches Scenario controller Equipped with white or magnesium round version rocker plates, to be equipped with White Magnesium plates (p. 98 to 111) 1 5739 02 5739 03 2 module mechanisms Control for the activation of 4 scenarios stored in the DIN scenario module Cat. No. 0035 51 (p. 21)

IR receivers

Equipped with white or magnesium square version cover plates, to be equipped with White Magnesium plates (p. 98 to 111) 5739 00 5739 01 To be associated with remote control Cat. No. 0882 31 Can receive up to 16 commands

Pack

Cat. Nos. Touch

control mechanisms

Equipped with white or black touch plates Basic functions Control for the activation of 1 single actuator for single or double loads, or 2 actuators for single load, or independent White Black double loads for lighting and shutters 5739 08 5739 09 2 module mechanisms For British Standard flush mounting boxes

Basic and special functions Control for the activation of 4 scenarios, soft-start and soft-stop of dimmers, sound distribution functions 1 5739 04 5739 05 2 module mechanisms Can control up to 4 scenarios For British Standard flush mounting boxes

5739 12 5739 13 3 module mechanisms Can control up to 6 scenarios For British Standard flush mounting boxes

Touch screens

Equipped with white or magnesium surround, to be equipped with plates 98 to 111) 5739 16 5739 17 1.2â&#x20AC;&#x2122;â&#x20AC;&#x2122; touch screen for activation of 4 scenarios or temperature, or sound distribution functions To be equipped with 2 module plates

White

Magnesium (p.

Scenario controllers with specific marking for hotels (see p. 88)

Mobile scenario controller

Advanced IR remote controller 1 0882 31 4 push buttons to control 4 scenarios (1 scenario can control several functions : shutters, lighting...) To be used in association with IR receiver Cat. Nos. 5739 00/01

Full technical guide available on request Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9020

NEW

ArteorTM BUS/SCS

lighting control and automation key covers

5739 64

5743 61

5743 65

5743 71

5743 79

5743 76

5743 63

5739 68

5743 68

5743 91

5743 92

5743 85

5739 70

5743 87

5743 82

White or magnesium round version key covers For BUS / SCS micropush control mechanisms (p. 18)

Pack

5 5

Cat. Nos.

1 module key covers

For micropush control mechanisms Regulation symbol 5739 64 5739 65 Left-hand side mounting 5743 60 5743 61 Right-hand side mounting White

Magnesium

OFF

ON/OFF marking 5 5743 77 5743 79 Left-hand side mounting 5 5743 76 5743 78 Right-hand side mounting ON

OFF

2 module key covers

For micropush control mechanisms White Magnesium 5743 86 5743 87 Regulation symbol ON

OFF

5743 90 5743 91 Dimmer symbol

5743 92 5743 93 Light symbol

5743 82 5743 83 ON/OFF marking

5743 84 5743 85 Up/down symbol

5739 70 5739 71 2 functions without marking

OFF

Up/down symbol

5743 62 5743 63 Any mounting

Any mounting

Dimmer symbol 5 5743 69 5743 71 Left-hand side mounting 5 5743 68 5743 70 Right-hand side mounting

Cat. Nos.

Pack

OFF

Light symbol

5743 65 5743 67

Without marking

5739 68 5739 69 2 functions

Special key covers

For 3 module micropush control White Magnesium mechanisms 5739 72 5739 73 Central rectangular key cover for Cat. No. 5739 75

ArteorTM BUS/SCS

NEW

lighting control and automation

0038 42

0026 02

0036 52

0026 22

Technical characteristics (p. 22-23)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

DIN rail actuators 100/240 VA - 50/60 Hz

N/O contact To be associated to loads and control mechanisms (p. 18) 0038 41 1-output relay for controlling 1 circuit Maximum load : 16 A resistive load 2 DIN modules 0038 42 2-output relay for controlling 2 circuits Maximum load per circuit : 6 A resistive load or incandescent lamps 1 x 500 VA for roller blinds with end stops 2 DIN modules 0038 44 4-output relay for controlling 4 circuits Maximum load per circuit : 6 A resistive load 2 DIN modules 0026 02 Relay with 4 x 16 A outputs 6 DIN modules

To be associated to loads and control mechanisms (p. 18) for dimming control Leading edge dimmers 1 0036 52 Maximum load : 60 - 1 000 W / 230 VA - 50 Hz 4 DIN modules Trailing edge dimmers 1 0036 53 Maximum load : 0.25 to 1.7 A / 230 VA - 50 Hz 4 DIN modules Leading/trailing edge dimmers 1 0026 21 1-output - 100/240 VA - 50/60 Hz Maximum load : 1 000 W 6 DIN modules 1 0026 22 2-output - 100/240 VA - 50/60 Hz Maximum load : 400 W 6 DIN modules For electronic ballast 0-10V 1 0036 56 Maximum load : 500 VA 2 DIN modules 1 0026 11 1-output Maximum load : 1 000 VA Max. inrush current : 50 mA 6 DIN modules

RJ adaptor

0488 72 For connecting Cat. Nos. 0026 02/21/22/11 to the BUS

Cat. Nos.

1 1

BUS power supplies

0035 60 Input voltage : 230 VA output voltage 27 V= Maximum consumption : 300 mA Maximum current supplied : 1.2 A 8 DIN modules 5739 95 Input voltage : 110 VA output voltage 27 V= Maximum consumption : 300 mA Maximum current supplied : 1.2 A 8 DIN modules 5739 97 Input voltage : 127 VA output voltage 27 V= Maximum consumption : 300 mA Maximum current supplied : 1.2 A 8 DIN modules

DIN rail dimmers

Pack

Contact interfaces

Allow the connection between traditional wiring devices such as switches, time delay switches or external sensors and BUS installation to control 2 actuators for single function or 1 actuator for double functions 2 independent contacts 0035 53 2 DIN modules 5739 96 Basic modularity To be installed in flush mounting box

NEW

ArteorTM BUS/SCS accessories for automation

0035 51

0035 52

0035 62

0492 13

0492 19

0492 37

Technical characteristics (p. 22-23)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Additional DIN devices

Memory module for actuators 1 0035 52 Restores the last state of an actuator in case of a power failure 2 DIN modules Scenario module 1 0035 51 Allows creation of scenarios by linking different functions Up to 16 scenarios 2 DIN modules SCS-SCS gateway (extension) 1 0035 62 Allows the extension of the installation or the integration between different functions Suitable for larger installations 2 DIN modules

1 1

SCS cables

2 wire cable for BUS system Conform to IEC 45-5 and IEC 20-20 0492 31 Length 100 m 0492 32 Length 500 m

Virtual configuration

Virtual configuration software 1 0492 90 Comprising : 1 CD with software for PC

Additional devices

USB cable 1 0492 34 Programming cable BUS spare clamp 10 0492 22 Used to connect the various system components (controls, dimmers, etc) to the BUS line

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Plug-in jumpers for all devices

Individual plug-in jumpers

10 0492 00 10 0492 01 10 0492 02 10 0492 03 10 0492 04 10 0492 05 10 0492 06 10 0492 07 10 0492 08 10 0492 09 5 0492 10 5 0492 11 5 0492 12 5 0492 13 5 0492 14 5 0492 15 5 0492 16 5 0492 17 5 0492 18 5 0492 19 5 0492 20 5 0492 21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GEN GR AMB AUX ON OFF O/I PUL SLA CEN ↑↓ ↑↓M Plug-in jumper kits

0492 37 Kit with : AUX, GEN, GR, AMB, ON, OFF, O/I, PUL, SLA,CEN, ↑↓, ↑↓M 0261 45 Kit with "0 to 9" jumpers (10 pieces of each figure)

Full technical guide available on request Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9020 21

ArteorTM BUS/SCS

lighting control and automation

n System principle The lighting control system allows the management of different functions in a simultaneous and integrated way All the components of the lighting control system are interconnected via an electronic circuit that can be programmed : the BUS The information is exchanged through the 2 wire BUS cable at low voltage (27 V= ) There are two types of devices in the system : - the controls units, which are connected only to the BUS cable and - the actuators, connected both to the BUS cable and to the 230VA power line for managing the connected load When the lighting control system devices are configured properly, it is possible to manage the load as follows : - control for a single load - control for one or more load groups - simultaneous management of all loads It is also possible to carry out special functions, which are hard to achieve with conventional electrical systems These functions are called scenarios One scenario is a set of simultaneous control of multiple groups of loads, used in order to modify the environment according to the userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s needs An example of a scenario can be represented by the simultaneous activation of lights, which can be set by the user after getting inside the building by using one single control device or by using the touch screen menu

n Installation principle Consumer unit Control units Touch screen Cat. No. 5739 16 or 5739 17

Scenario module Cat. No. 0035 51

Power supply

Cat. No. 0035 60

Scenario controller Cat. No. 5739 02 or 5739 03

Touch control mechanism Cat. No. 5739 04 or 5739 05

230 VA

2 wire cable for BUS Cat. No. 0492 31

Din rail actuator Cat. No. 0038 41

Din rail leading/trailing edge dimmer Cat. No. 0026 22

Din rail actuator Cat. No. 0038 42

Actuators

Loads

Scenario controllers can manage zone 1, 2 and 3

Lighting source Zone 1 : Kitchen

Lighting source Zone 2 : Dining room

Roller blinds, shutters Zone 3 : Shutter control

n Actuators and dimmers max. loads at 230 V Universal

Leading edge

Incandescent lamp

Halogen lamp

ELV halogen with ferromagnetic transformer

ELV halogen with electronic transformer

Fluorescent tube

Compact fluorescent lamp

LED

Fluorescent lamps with 0-10 V ballast

Reducer motor for shutter

0038 41

3 500 W

1 000 VA

–

0038 42

2 300 W

500 VA

250 VA

–

500 VA

0038 44

1 400 W

500 VA

70 VA

–

500 VA

0026 02

4 x 1 000 W

4 x 500 VA

–

4 x 100 VA

0036 56

–

10 x 55 VA

–

0026 11

–

1 000 VA - 50 mA

–

0026 21

1 000 W

500 VA

–

0026 22

2 x 400 W

2 x 250 VA

2 x 400 VA

–

0036 52

1 000 W

1 000 VA

–

0036 53

–

400 VA

–

ACTUATORS

Cat. Nos.

DIMMERS

Trailing edge

NEW

ArteorTM BUS/SCS temperature control

5739 20

5739 19

5739 23

5739 24

5739 16

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Central units for temperature control

Equipped with white or magnesium square version keypad cover plates, to be equipped with special plates (p. 106, 108 and 111) Supplied with support frame, flush mounting White Magnesium box and 7.2 V battery Cat. No. 0675 18 5739 18 5739 19 Temperature control central unit Can manage up to 99 zones

Probes

5739 22 5739 23 Temperature setting range : from 3 °C to 40 °C with dial for adjustment of +/- 3 °C relative to the set temperature and for the modality selection 5739 24 5739 25 Temperature setting range : from 3 °C to 40 °C with manual/ automatic speed selection for fan-coil

Cat. Nos.

DIN rail actuators 100/240 VA 50/60 Hz

Actuator with 2 independent relays 1 0035 79 For single and double loads : 6 A resistive 3 A motorised valves and pumps 2 DIN modules Actuator with 4 independent relays 1 0035 80 For single, double or mixed loads : 6 A resistive 3 A motorised valves, pumps and fan-coils 2 DIN modules

To control the room temperature of heating and cooling system Equipped with white or magnesium square version cover plates, to be equipped with plates (p. 98 to 111) To be installed in flush mounting boxes White Magnesium 2 module mechanisms 22.5 x 45 mm 5739 20 5739 21 Temperature setting range : from 3 °C to 40 °C

Pack

1 1

Power supply

0035 60

Input voltage : 230 VA output voltage 27 V= Maximum consumption : 300 mA Maximum current supplied : 1.2 A 8 DIN modules

Battery for temperature control central unit

0675 18 7.2 V battery for central unit

SCS cables

2 wire cable for BUS system Conform to IEC 45-5 and IEC 20-20 0492 31 Length 100 m 0492 32 Length 500 m

Plug-in jumpers (p. 21)

Touch screens

Equipped with white or magnesium surround, to be equipped with plates White Magnesium (p. 98 to 111) 5739 16 5739 17 1.2" touch screen for activation of 4 scenarios or temperature, or sound distribution functions To be equipped with 2 module plates

Full technical guide available on request Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9020 24

ArteorTM BUS/SCS temperature control

n Installation principle Consumer unit Control units Central unit Cat. No. 5739 18 or 5739 19 can manage up to 99 zones

Power supply

Cat. No. 0035 60

Probe Zone 1 Cat. No. 5739 22 or 5739 23

230 VA

Probe Zone 2 Cat. No. 5739 22 or 5739 23

Probe Zone 99 Cat. No. 5739 22 or 5739 23

2 wire cable for BUS Cat. No. 0492 31

Actuator with 2 independent relays Cat. No. 0035 79

Actuator with 4 independent relays Cat. No. 0035 80

Actuators

Loads

Heating

2 Zone 1

Zone 2

NEW

TM Arteor BUS/SCS for example: xxxxxxx

sound distribution xxxxxxxx

5739 76

5739 67

5739 26

5739 29

5739 16

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Amplifiers

Flush mounting amplifier

5739 76

2 x 1 Wrms - 2 modules To be equipped with round version key covers (below) and plates (p. 98-111)

DIN rail amplifiers 1 0035 85 2 x 1 Wrms - 100/240 VA 4 DIN modules 1 0035 83 2 x 30 Wrms - 100/240 VA 10 DIN modules 1 module key covers For flush mounting amplifier Cat. No. 5739 76 White

5739 66 5739 67

5739 64 5739 65

RCA inputs

Loudspeakers

mounting 5739 28 5739 29 8 ohms - 100 W To be installed in flush mounting box min. depth 80 mm 5739 77 16 ohms - 12 W To be installed in flush mounting box Cat. Nos. 0893 79 or 0892 79 White

Left-hand side mounting with marking

Equipped with white or magnesium square version cover plate, to be equipped with White Magnesium plates (p. 98 to 111) 1 5739 26 5739 27 For connecting a stereo source to the system 2 module mechanism

Right-hand side mounting with marking

OFF

Magnesium

Pack

Magnesium Flush

Surface mounting 1 5739 78 8 ohms 140 W False ceiling mounting 1 5739 81 8 ohms - 100 W Ă&#x2DC; 240 mm 1 5739 82 8 ohms - 20 W Ă&#x2DC; 100 mm 1 5739 83 8 ohms - 50 W Dimensions : 600 x 600 mm (equal to false ceiling panel)

Cat. Nos.

Touch screens

Audio/video signal distribution devices

0035 84 Multi-channel matrix with cross-connection, mixing switch functions for distribution of the stereo sound source signal and audio/video signals 8 inputs (first 4 for the 2 wire audio/video system and others for stereo sound source) 8 outputs 10 DIN modules 5739 98 Audio/video node for mixing audio/video sources (max. 4 sources) 6 DIN modules

DIN RDS radio sources

0035 87 RDS stereo radio tuner with coaxial connector for external aerial antenna Supplied with depth compensator for DIN rail 4 DIN modules 5739 89 RDS stereo radio tuner Supplied with depth compensator for DIN rail 4 DIN modules

DIN stereo control sources

0035 86 For stereo sources IR remote control possible RCA/RCA and jack cables to connect to IR transmitters 4 DIN modules

Flush mounting boxes

For loudspeaker Cat. No. 5739 77 2 0893 79 For dry partitions - 2 x 3 modules 2 0892 79 For concrete walls - 2 x 3 modules

NEW

TM Arteor for example: BUS/SCS xxxxxxx

sound xxxxxxxx distribution (continued)

5739 32

5739 88

0634 35

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Connectors

Equipped with white or magnesium square version cover plates, to be equipped with plates (p. 98 to 111) White Magnesium 1 module mechanism 5739 32 5739 33 8 contact connector to link interface Cat. No. 0035 86 to the BUS

Attenuator

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Power supply

0634 35

Power supply unit for sound system Input voltage : 230 VA output voltage 27 V= Maximum consumption 1 A 8 DIN modules

BUS cable

For sound distribution and video door entry system 1 5739 99 200 m

0035 89 To be connected at the end of the line of the outputs of audio/video node and multi-channel matrix

Insulator

5739 88

Adapts the signal coming from external sound sources to the sound distribution system

Full technical guide available on request Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9020 27

ArteorTM BUS/SCS sound distribution

n Installation principle Consumer unit Control units Loudspeaker Cat. No. 5739 28 or 5739 29

Power supply Cat. No. 0035 60

Amplifier Cat. No. 5739 76 + key cover Cat. No. 5739 66 + 5739 64

Attenuator Cat. No. 0035 89

230 VA

DIN rail amplifier Cat. No. 0035 85

Attenuator Cat. No. 0035 89

Audio/Video node Cat. No. 5739 98

Loudspeaker Cat. No. 5739 28 or 5739 29

RCA input Cat. No. 5739 26 or 5739 27

Hi-Fi chain DIN RDS radio source Cat. No. 0035 87

Loudspeaker Cat. No. 5739 28 or 5739 29

ArteorTM BUS/SCS

NEW

home management system

5739 16

5739 60

5739 63

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Local management

1.2" touch screens Equipped with white or magnesium surround, to be equipped with plates White Magnesium (p. 102 to 111) 1 5739 16 5739 17 1.2" touch screen for activation of 4 scenarios or temperature, or sound distribution functions To be equipped with 2 module plates 3.5" touch screen Supplied with support frame and with white and magnesium cover plate, to be equipped with special plates (p. 106, 108 and 111) 1 5739 60 3.5â&#x20AC;&#x2122;â&#x20AC;&#x2122; touch screen to control all BUS functions : lighting, temperature, intruder alarm and sound distribution To be installed in flush mounting box Cat. Nos. 0892 79 or 0893 79 10" multimedia touch screens Equipped with white or magnesium cover plate, to be equipped with special plates White Magnesium (p. 106, 108 and 111) 1 5739 62 5739 63 10" touch screen for the control of the house : all BUS functions, door entry system, multimedia (web, radio, webcam...) Surface mounting

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Other devices

Multimedia interface 1 5739 94 For management of : BUS functions, door entry system, via TV or VGA monitor To send signals on sound distribution system from a DVD player, MP3 or Hi-Fi For management of multimedia contents (ex. playlist) Supplied with remote control device Supervision software 1 0492 49 Can be used in order to tune up the system's functions through a computer, and to follow them on real time basis Scenario scheduler 1 0035 65 Allows setting up of up to 300 scenarios with pre-set conditions (time and logical type) 6 DIN modules Scenario scheduler power supply 1 0035 64 Provide power for Web server and scenario scheduler Cat. No. 0035 65

Flush mounting boxes

For 3.5" touch screen Cat. No. 5739 60 2 0893 79 For dry partitions - 2 x 3 modules 2 0892 79 For concrete walls - 2 x 3 modules

Remote management

Web server gateway TCP-IP 1 5739 92 Allows the communication between a BUS/SCS installation and a TCP/IP network 10 DIN modules Interface with other systems 1 5739 93 Gateway open - Konnex Allows communication/ compatibility with EIB/KNX installation and products 6 DIN modules

Full technical guide available on request Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9020 29

TM NEW for Arteor example: 2 wire xxxxxxx

ArteorTM 2 wire

xxxxxxxx door entry systems

door entry systems

n Video door entry system Dimensions of video internal display units Cat. Nos. 5739 50/51 33·2

151·5

5739 52

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Video internal display units

n Audio door entry system Dimensions of audio internal units Cat. Nos. 5740 11 and 5743 11 45

White

Magnesium

5739 50 5739 51

Equipped with support frame Hands free internal unit 2.5" LCD colour display Possible integration in BUS system To be equipped with special plates (p. 106, 108 and 111) To be installed in flush mounting box Cat. Nos. 0893 79 or 0892 79

Audio internal units White

Magnesium

5740 11(1) 5743 11(2)

Equipped with : - microphone, - loudspeaker - 2 hang-up push buttons - 1 door release push button - 2 auxiliary push buttons for other functions Volume adjustment for communication and call tone, and with bell cut-off indicator Allows intercom between several rooms Supplied complete with special flush mounting box, cover plate and plate

Optional cameras For outdoor use 1

5739 86

5739 52 5739 53

White

Magnesium

2 wire colour camera

For ﬂush mounting 2 wire colour camera with swiveling lens Automatic adjustment of focus and brightness Built-in microphone Equipped with white or magnesium cover plates, to be equipped with plates (p. 98 to 111) To be installed in flush mounting box 2 modules

Power supply 1

0634 35

Power supply unit for sound system Input voltage : 230 VA output voltage 27 V= Maximum consumption 1 A 8 DIN modules

Flush mounting boxes 2 2

0893 79 0892 79

For video display unit Cat. Nos. 5739 50/51 For dry partitions - 2 x 3 modules For concrete walls - 2 x 3 modules (1) Supplied with white plate (2) Supplied with mirror black plate

40·2

113

5739 50

TM Arteor for example: 2 wire xxxxxxx (continued)

NEW

video xxxxxxxx door entry systems

0634 34 Pack

1 1

0634 31 Cat. Nos.

Door entry: Door entry: do more with do more with 22 wires wires

Up to 3,900 apartments, 20 handsets per apartment, 96 video entrance panels... Up to 3,900 and apartments, 20 handsets per all with just and 2 non-polarised wires panels... apartment, 96 video entrance all with just 2 non-polarised wires

Accessories for video door entry systems

2 wire video adaptor 0634 34 Video adaptor Use one adaptor per power supply 2 DIN modules Video signal distributor 0634 32 Video distributor with 4 outputs for intercom module for up to 5 units Interface for auxiliary control 0634 31 Relay for auxiliary commands Allows the connections of auxiliary functions such as lighting, automatic door opening... 4 DIN modules Intercommunication module for up to 5 units 0634 38 Intercommunication units. Max. capacity : 5 gang 4 DIN modules Door release 0634 33 Door release relay C/O volt-free contact : max 24 V= 8 A resistive 4 A inductive 2 DIN modules Extension interface 0634 39 Extension interface increases system limits in distance and number of internal and external units Video signal converter 5740 38 Video signal converter from coaxial to 2 wire BUS for 12 V= CCTV cameras : the CCTV camera is directly supplied via a terminal 2 wire/IP interface 5740 39 For extended systems with IP backbone and 2 wire support Virtual switchboard software 5740 43 Virtual switchboard software for managing entryphone and video entryphone calls The software (for Windows operating systems) can be installed on any fixed or mobile PC and is used to receive, manage and transfer calls from inside and outside Offers home video control with cyclical CCTV vision, day and night functions and the ability to display the alarms present in the various apartments - Operating systems supported : Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 and Windows Vista - Software required : NET Framework 2.0 or later

From individual properties to major gated developments, Bticino 2 wire door entry systems enable to add From individual properties to major gatedyou developments, value to 2any project, both systems new buildenable and refurbishment. Bticino wire door entry you to add

Full technical guide available on request Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9020

to any project, build and refurbishment. Avalue choice of audio andboth videonew entrance panels, together our and stunning units deliver A choice with of audio videointernal entrance panels, unparalleled style. together with our stunning internal units deliver unparalleled style.

i i

For more information See p. 48-53 For more information See p. 48-53

31 31 31

Home networks: music, video, data everywhere With Legrand home networks users can enjoy distributed audio and video around the house as well as access to computer and telephone networks wherever needed.

With this flexibility, rooms blend seamlessly into one, yet each with the capacity for independent control, allowing users to see, hear and interact with whatever they want, wherever they want. Users can enjoy their favourite CDs, MP3s, radio station or even the audio signal from their TV anywhere in the house. Legrand home networks will also distribute sound from a central source to speakers throughout the home.

KEYPAD VOLUME CONTROL (See p. 35) Sound distribution from a central source to loudspeakers throughout the house

TV SOCKETS (See p. 94) Distribution of TV, VCR, DVD and HD signals from a central point to every TV set in the house

DATA SOCKETS (See p. 90) Access high-speed internet and computer networks throughout the house. Share printers, scanners and any other connected peripherals

TELEPHONE SOCKETS (See p. 94) For multiple telephone and fax lines into the house. With a simple “plug and play” connection, add new phone lines as and when required

ENCLOSURES AND MODULES

(See p. 34) Enclosures accept audio, video, data and telephone modules

Contact details United Kingdom North, Great King Street B19 2LF Birmingham,

Customer Sevices: Fax: 0845 605 4334 4333 Tel: 0845 605 es@legrand.co.uk E-mail: legrand.sal Technical Support: Fax: 0870 608 9021 9020 Tel: 0870 608 k@legrand.co.uk E-mail: technical.u

To find out more about Legrand home network solutions visit:

ARTEOR

tion Systems /Home Automa Wiring Devices

Republic of Ireland 15/16 Holly Avenue, Park, Stillorgan Industrial Dublin Stillogan, Co. Support: and Technical Customer Services 01 295 4671 Fax: Tel: 01 295 9673 d.ie E-mail: info@legran

and Ireland): Head office (UK Limited , B19 2LF Legrand Electric North, Birmingham Great King Street 608 9004 9000 Fax: 0870 Tel: 0870 608 .co.uk Website: www.legrand

www.legrand.co.uk ™

ARTEOR

ion Home Automat Wiring Devices/

Systems

to order your FREE copy of the latest brochure

NEW

home networks

ArteorTM and Synergy速 structured wiring

6338 21

6339 93

6338 53

6338 01 + 6338 23 (telephone module) 6338 26 (data module - switch) 6338 28 (video module)

6338 02

6338 27

6338 25

Installation principle (p. 36-37)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Enclosures

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Modules (continued)

Enclosures to be equipped with audio, video, data Video modules (continued) or telephone modules 1 6338 30 1 x 4 LNB satellite diplexer 1 6338 01 Capacity : 3 single size modules or 1 double size and Size : single module 1 single size module Dimensions: 295 x 115 x 100 mm 1 6338 02 Capacity : 10 modules (single or double size modules can be integrated) 1 6339 93 SMATV distribution over RJ 45 Dimensions : 500 x 355 x 95 mm (5 - 2400 MHz) Enclosure 20" with screw on cover Size : 2 single modules Equipped with power supply and line amplifier Modules Advanced audio modules To be installed inside enclosures 1 6338 21 Single source - 4 zone audio distribution module Size : single module

6338 53 4 sources, 8 zone audio distribution module High quality stereo music in 8 rooms Passes infrared remote control signals 24 V - 60 W Size : double module

Advanced audio modules - surface mounting 1 6338 22 RCA - single source input IR engine Input gain control For surface mounting

6338 48 RCA - triple source input IR engine Input gain control For surface mounting

Video modules To be installed inside enclosures 1 6338 27 1 x 4 bi-directional passive splitter/combiner Size : single module

6338 28 1 x 8 bi-directional passive video splitter/combiner Size : single module

6338 29 2 x 2 enhanced bi-directional video amplification Size : single module

0516 93 RJ 45 - IEC patch cord for TV network Length : 2 m

Data modules To be installed inside enclosures 1 6338 25 4 port router/switch (10/100 Mbits) De-select routing function mechanical switch 12 - 15 V 300 mA 3.5 - 4.5 W Size : double module

6338 26 10/100 Base-T auto-sensing switch 5 port - Auto-configuring Provides connectivity for a local area network 12 - 15 V 300 mA 3.5 - 4.5 W Size : single module 6338 33 Patch cord (RJ 45 - RJ 45)

Telephone module To be installed inside enclosures 1 6338 23 4 x 12 telephone module High performance RJ 45 telecom distribution Provides flexibility and convenience Size : single module

NEW

home networks

ArteorTM and Synergy庐 structured wiring (continued)

5727 93 + 5750 71

6338 99

6338 45

Pack

6338 50

Cat. Nos.

Power supplies

6338 32 Multi-voltage power distribution module Distributes : - 15 V= to up to 4 locations - 12 V= to up to 2 locations - 5 V= to up to 1 location Supplied with 24" power cord jumpers 6338 40 15 V= power supply Includes a BS cord alimentation 6338 41 24 V= power supply Includes a BS cord alimentation For audio modules Cat. Nos. 6338 21/53

6338 51

5727 94 + 5750 71

Cat.Nos

Pack

Keypad volume control distributed audio

White Magnesium Arteor

5722 93 5727 93

echanisms equipped with white M or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames and plates (p. 98 to 111) 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Built-in IR receiver

Synergy White Anthracite

High efficiency speakers with low distortion 1 6338 43 6路5" inch in-ceiling round speaker (pair) 1 6338 44 Dual voice coil stereo speaker 6路5" inch in-ceiling round speaker

echanisms equipped with white M or anthracite square cover plates To be equipped with support frames and plates (p. 164) 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Built-in IR receiver

RCA local source inputs

Arteor White Magnesium

Loudspeakers

6338 45 Outdoor speakers pair - 90 dB Black Also suitable for moisture rich environments such as bathrooms or saunas

Controls

6338 46 Dual IR emitter Used to control audio sources via audio distribution system To be connected on single or triple source input Cat. Nos. 6338 22/48 To be used with universal IR receiver Cat. No. 6338 47 6338 47 Universal IR receiver for remote control Cat. No. 6338 50 To be used with dual IR emitter Cat. No. 6338 46 6338 50 Universal learning remote control Control all distributed audio keypads at the same time from anywhere in the house

see p. 98-111

6338 65 6338 64

5722 94 5727 94 Allows user to plug in devices like portable audio players and computer audio outputs Mechanisms equipped with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames and plates (p. 98 to 111) 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Synergy White Anthracite

llows user to plug in devices A like portable audio players and computer audio outputs Mechanisms equipped with white or anthracite square cover plates To be equipped with support frames and plates (p. 164) 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Accessories

1 6338 72

1 6339 91 1 6339 92

Brackets 2 module mounting bracket Allows mounting of 2 single size modules Horizontal or vertical mounting 3 module mounting bracket Allows mounting of 3 single size modules Horizontal or vertical mounting RJ 45 patch panels 4-way - CAT 5e RJ 45 bloc unit/UTP 4-way - CAT 6 RJ 45 bloc unit/UTP

Installation tools

EZ crimp tool EZ RJ 45 connectors

For Arteor plates

1 10

6338 66 6338 68

6338 73

6338 99 6338 51

TV and data sockets (p. 94-95) 35

home networks

ArteorTM and Synergy速 structured wiring - audio

n Installation principle for distributed audio system : 4 source input - 8 zones You can listen to any one of four audio sources in up to 8 different locations at the same time 6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Portable MP3 Player (Not included) Single Source Input Cat. No. 6338 22

RCA Local Source Input

Keypad Volume Controller

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Four Sources 8 Zone Distribution Module Cat. No. 6338 53 Keypad Volume Controller 24 V 2.5 A Power Supply

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Triple Source Input Cat. No. 6338 48 Keypad Volume Controller Universal IR Receiver Cat. No. 6338 47

RCA Local Source Input

Keypad Volume Controller

Dual IR Emitter Cat. No. 6338 46

Audio Sources (Entertainment Room)

RCA cable Cat. 5e cable Loudspeaker cable

Universal Remote Control Cat. No. 6338 50

Portable MP3 Player (Not included)

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Technical characteristics - High-quality stereo music in 8 rooms - Select from four unique music sources in every room - Amplified keypad volume controller - Local source inputs allow different music in three rooms - Infrared remote control for easy sound management - Expandable up to 32 locations Composition of the installation - Keypad volume controller in each room - Local source input in desired room (local listening) - Loudspeakers in each room - 4 sources 8 zone distribution module in enclosure - Single and/or triple source input devices Cat. Nos. 6338 22 and/or 6338 48 in living room

n RJ 45 plug wiring installation Plug your cable with connector - Strip your cable and untwist the pairs - Cut/cross alll wires - Connect wires in EZ RJ 45 connector as shown - Crimp connector with EZ crimp tool Cat. No. 6338 99

TIA 568 A wiring standard

Locking clip

Brown Brown White

8 7

Orange Blue White

6 5

Blue Orange White

4 3

Green Green White

2 1

1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

home networks

ArteorTM and Synergy速 structured wiring - audio (continued)

n Installation principle for distributed audio system : single source input - 4 zones You can listen to the same audio sources in up to 4 different locations at the same time Keypad Volume Controller

RJ 45 Socket

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Keypad Volume Controller

Single Source 4 Zone Distribution Module Cat. No. 6338 21

Single Source Input Cat. No. 6338 22

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Keypad Volume Controller

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

24 V 25 A Power Supply RCA Local Source Input

Keypad Volume Controller

6.5" In-Ceiling Loudspeakers

Dual IR Emitter Cat. No. 6338 46

(Existing homeowner equipment)

Portable MP3 Player (Not included)

Universal Remote Control Cat. No. 6338 50

RCA cable Cat. 5e cable Loudspeaker cable

Technical characteristics - High-quality stereo music in 4 rooms - Infrared remote control for easy sound management - Amplified keypad volume controller Composition of the installation - Keypad volume controller in each room - Loudspeakers for each room - Single source 4 zone distribution module in enclosure - Single source input device Cat. No. 6338 22 in the living room

n RJ 45 plug wiring installation Plug your cable with connector - Strip your cable and untwist the pairs - Cut/cross all wires - Connect wires in EZ RJ 45 connector as shown - Crimp connector with EZ crimp tool Cat. No. 6338 99

TIA 568 A wiring standard

Locking clip

Brown Brown White

8 7

Orange Blue White

6 5

Blue Orange White

4 3

Green Green White

2 1

1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

P. 42 Sfera modular entrance panels selection chart

P. 48 NEW 2 wire system internal units and handsets

Bticino door entry systems

P. 55 8 wire system handsets

P. 57 Analogue system handsets

P. 59 Access control

Bticino door entry kits

Door entry systems

Legrand door entry kits

Salsa chimes 速

P. 61 Vandal resistant entrance panels

P. 65 1 way kits

P. 67 Salsa chimes and bell push

NEW IN 2010 Bticino

2 wire video handsfree internal units (p. 48)

Bticino

Sfera digital audio / video speaker module (p. 49)

P. 44 Sfera monobloc entrance panels selection chart

P. 46 Vandal resistant scrolling entrance panels selection chart

P. 47 Linea 2000 metal push button panels

P. 49 2 wire system Sfera function modules

P. 50 2 wire system components

P. 51 2 wire system composition tables

P. 55 8 wire system Sfera function modules

P. 56 8 wire system components

P. 57 Analogue system Sfera function modules

P. 58 Analogue system components

P. 62 Entrance panels dimensions

P. 63 Internal units and handsets dimensions

P. 54 IP system interface

P. 61 Standard kits

P. 65 Multi-way kits

P. 66 Wiring diagrams

P. 67 Salsa wireless chime kits

P. 67 Bells and isolating transformer

Legrand

1 way door entry kits (p. 65)

Door entry solutions chimes, kits and complete systems Legrand, together with its Group brand, Bticino, offers complete solutions for any door entry requirements, including the very latest in 2 wire and IP technology.

GLOBAL LEADERS IN DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS Legrand's door entry portfolio includes its Group brand, Bticino, which offers key developers and installers a wide choice of innovative and bespoke door entry solutions, supported by pre-sales design and enhanced service options.

With a number of manufacturing sites concentrated in Italy, as well as a successful, wellknown brand in more than 60 countries around the world, Bticino represents the very best in Italian design and innovation.

DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS Audio and video handsets, monobloc, modular and vandal resistant entrance panels, and a variety of technologies to suit every application.

DOOR ENTRY KITS Cost effective audio and video kits for basic door entry requirements in small installations.

DOOR CHIMES Including wireless versions that can be simply fixed to the wall without any cabling.

OTHER LEGRAND SYSTEMS AND RANGES

i i

Arteor wiring devices See p. 74 Arteor home automation See p. 12

Bticino door entry systems Sfera modular entrance panels

FLUSH MOUNTING RANGE OF FINISHES(1)

BOXES AND CHASSIS

SURFACE MOUNTING RAINSHIELDS (OPTIONAL)(2)

SURROUND PLATES(1)

SURFACE MOUNTING BOXES WITH CHASSIS AND SURROUND PLATE(3)

(1) Cat. Nos. show Silver finish as standard. For other finishes (Ice or Alugrey) replace the last digit with the corresponding suffix. E.g : 3321 01 = speaker unit Silver 3321 02 = speaker unit Ice 3321 03 = speaker unit Alugrey

suffix 1 Silver

3311 30 3 modules

3312 31 3 vertical modules

3314 91 9 modules

3313 91 9 modules

3314 61 6 modules

3313 61 6 modules

3314 31 3 modules

3313 31 3 modules

3314 41 4 modules

3313 41 4 modules

3314 21 2 modules

3313 21 2 modules

3314 11 1 module

3313 11 1 module

suffix 2 Ice

3311 20 2 modules

3312 21 2 vertical modules

suffix 3 Alugrey

3311 10 1 module

(1) Please see key, top left

3312 11 1 vertical module

(2) For flush mounting only

(3) Available in silver only

FUNCTION MODULES AND UNIVERSAL MODULE FRONT COVERS DIGITAL FUNCTION MODULES For 2 wire system

For 8 wire system

3425 10 Black and white infrared camera

3325 10 Black and white infrared camera

3425 50 Colour camera

ANALOGUE FUNCTION MODULES For analogue system

3325 50 Colour camera

3325 10 Black and white infrared camera

3325 50 Colour camera

3425 60 Audio/video camera 2 push buttons (1 or 2 columns)

3421 70 Speaker + 2 push buttons (1 column) 3423 50 Speaker + 4 push buttons (2 columns)

3426 30 Speaker + scrolling function/ screen

3421 60 Speaker + 2 push buttons (1 column) 3423 40 Speaker + 4 push buttons (2 columns)

3426 20 Speaker + scrolling function/ screen

3321 20 Speaker + 2 push buttons (1 column)

OR 3322 40 4 individual push buttons (1 column)

3424 80 8 individual push buttons (2 columns)

3324 80 8 individual push buttons (2 columns)

3422 00 Name plate with ribbon cable and name card

3322 00 Name plate with 2 connecting cables and â&#x20AC;&#x153;waitâ&#x20AC;? signal

3426 10 Numeric digital keypad

3426 00 Alphanumeric digital keypad

3424 61 Audio/video camera cover

3424 71 1 push button audio/video camera cover (1 column)

3424 81 2 push buttons audio/video camera cover (2 columns)

3321 01 Speaker unit cover

3321 11 Speaker unit + 1 push button cover (1 column)

3321 21 Speaker unit + 2 push buttons cover (1 column)

3323 21 Speaker unit + 2 push buttons (2 columns) cover

3324 61 6 push buttons (2 columns) cover

3324 81 8 push buttons (2 columns) cover

3323 41 Speaker unit + 4 push buttons (2 columns) cover

3326 61 Speaker + scrolling function cover

3422 40 4 individual push buttons (1 column)

3426 40 Extra keypad for scrolling module

3325 11 Camera cover

3323 40 Speaker + 4 push buttons (2 columns)

3422 40 4 individual push buttons (1 column)

3426 00 Alphanumeric digital keypad

UNIVERSAL MODULE FRONT COVERS(1)

3426 40 Extra keypad for scrolling module

3322 31 3 push buttons cover (1 column)

3322 01 Name plate

3326 01 Alphanumeric keypad cover

3426 10 Numeric digital keypad

3322 41 4 push buttons cover (1 column)

3326 71 Extra keypad cover

3326 51 Numeric digital keypad cover

BLANK MODULE(1)

3326 50 Code lock

3326 51 Code lock cover

3329 11 Blanking plate

3329 51 Blanking module complete

Bticino door entry systems Sfera monobloc entrance panels

MONOBLOC FRONT COVERS – for cameras, speakers and push button modules

(1)

3338 24 Stainless steel 3338 25 Polished brass 2 push buttons 3338 64 Stainless steel 3338 65 Polished brass 6 push buttons

3338 44 Stainless steel 3338 45 Polished brass 4 push buttons

3338 14 Stainless steel 3338 15 Polished brass 1 push button

3338 34 Stainless steel 3338 35 Polished brass 3 push buttons

Monobloc front covers – for speakers and push button modules (1)

3331 24 Stainless steel 3331 25 Polished brass 2 push buttons 3331 64 Stainless steel 3331 65 Polished brass 6 push buttons 3331 04 Stainless steel 3331 05 Polished brass 10 push buttons

3331 44 Stainless steel 3331 45 Polished brass 4 push buttons

3331 14 Stainless steel 3331 15 Polished brass 1 push button

3331 34 Stainless steel 3331 35 Polished brass 3 push buttons

3331 84 Stainless steel 3331 85 Polished brass 8 push buttons

Monobloc front covers – for push button expansion plates

Also available in polished brass

For larger installations, scrolling voice modules can replace speaker and push button modules

3332 84 Stainless steel 3332 85 Polished brass 8 push buttons 3332 04 Stainless steel 3332 05 Polished brass 12 push buttons

Monobloc front covers – for keypad systems

3339 34 Stainless steel 3339 35 Polished brass Video

3337 24 Stainless steel 3337 25 Polished brass Audio

Monobloc front covers – for code lock and other equipment

For quotations and technical support contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9022 (1) Can also be used with speaker + scrolling function module (Cat. Nos. 3426 20 and 3426 30)

3336 14 Stainless steel 3336 15 Polished brass

3330 14 Stainless steel 3330 15 Polished brass

BOXES AND CHASSIS

FUNCTION MODULES – for cameras, speakers and push buttons For 2 wire system

3311 20 2 modules

For 8 wire system

For analogue system

3425 10 Black and white infrared camera

3325 10 Black and white infrared camera

3425 50 Colour camera

3325 50 Colour camera

3421 70 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3421 60 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3321 20 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3422 40 4 individual push buttons

3311 30 3 modules

3426 30 Scrolling voice module for use with 3338 24/25 and 3331 34/35

3422 40 4 individual push buttons

3426 20 Scrolling voice module for use with 3338 24/25 and 3331 34/35

3322 40 4 individual push buttons

Function modules – for speakers and push buttons 3421 70 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3311 10 1 module

3422 40 4 individual push buttons

3421 60 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3426 30 Scrolling voice module for use with 3338 24/25 and 3331 34/35

3422 40 4 individual push buttons

3321 20 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3426 20 Scrolling voice module for use with 3338 24/25 and 3331 34/35

3322 40 4 individual push buttons

3311 20 2 modules 3422 40 4 individual push buttons

3311 30 3 modules

3422 40 4 individual push buttons

3322 40 4 individual push buttons

3422 40 4 individual push buttons

Function modules – for push buttons

3311 20 2 modules

3311 30 3 modules

Function modules – for cameras, speakers and keypad

3311 30 3 modules

3425 10 Black and white infrared camera

3325 10 Black and white infrared camera

3425 50 Colour camera

3325 50 Colour camera

3421 70 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3421 60 Speaker + 2 push buttons

3426 00 Alphanumeric digital keypad

3311 20 2 modules

Function modules – for code lock 3326 50 Code lock

3326 50 Code lock

3311 10 1 module

Bticino door entry systems

vandal resistant scrolling entrance panels

AUDIO SCROLLING PANELS

FUNCTION MODULES For 2 wire system

For 8 wire system

3426 30 Speaker + scrolling function/screen

3426 20 Speaker + scrolling function/screen

Keypad Included with Cat. No. 3337 15

3337 14

Keypad Included with Cat. No. 3337 15

3337 15

VIDEO SCROLLING PANELS

FUNCTION MODULES For 2 wire system

For 8 wire system

3425 10 or 3425 50 Camera module

3325 10 or 3325 50 Camera module

OR 3339 14

3339 15

3426 30 Speaker + scrolling function/screen

3426 20 Speaker + scrolling function/screen

Keypad Included with Cat. No. 3339 15

â&#x2013; Vandal resistant Example of video modularity

Camera module

3 1

Vandal resistant front cover (video) manufactured in 316L stainless steel

Call key Scroll key (up) Metal flush mounting box manufactured from galvanised sheet steel

Scroll key (down)

Proximity system cut-out

Chassis Scrolling voice module Polycarbonate display window 5 mm thick with anti-scratch coating

Bticino door enty systems

Customer focus CPD training

2 wire - Linea 2000 metal entrance panels

Legrand offers comprehensive training packages for all of its products, including its popular Bticino training.

3429 81 3429 91

Pack

3429 82 3429 92

Cat. Nos.

3429 71

3429 72

Linea 2000 metal

Colour video push button panels 3429 91 Zamak finish video push button panel with adjustable colour camera Swivel camera on 2 axis Blue LED name plate light 1 push button 3429 92 As above Cat. No. 3429 91 but 2 push button Black and white video push button panels 3429 81 Zamak finish video push button panel with adjustable black and white camera Swivel camera on 2 axis Blue LED name plate light 1 push button

3429 82 As above Cat. No. 3429 81 but 2 push button

3429 71 Zamak finish audio push button panel Blue LED name plate light 1 push button

3429 72 As above Cat. No. 3429 71 but 2 push button

Audio push button panels

GET AHEAD OF THE REST... Our training courses are totally free-of-charge and aimed at all levels of experience : • Introductory, intermediate and advanced courses • CPD training PLUS, for our Bticino and Arteor home systems... • 24 hour turnaround on quotations and specifications • Testing and trouble-shooting software • Test kits for system diagnosis

Bticino door entry systems

2 wire - hands free internal units and handsets

NEW

3493 20

Pack

1 1 1

5739 50

Cat. Nos.

3448 24

3441 92

Video hands free internal units

Axolute evolution Hands free surface mounting internal unit for use with 2 wire video installations 8” LCD colour screen with OSD (On Screen Display) menu Can be fully integrated with the BUS/SCS system (p. 18-21) NEW 3493 20 Axolute Nighter 3493 21 Axolute Whice Axolute station 3493 10 Hands free surface mounting internal unit for use with 2 wire video installations 5.6” LCD colour screen with OSD (On Screen Display) menu Can be fully integrated with the SCS/BUS system (p. 18-21) To be equipped with special plates below

3440 82

Pack

Axolute station cover plates 3492 10 Brushed aluminium cover plate 3492 11 Kristall glass cover plate 3492 12 Teak wood cover plate Arteor display Hands free flush mounting internal unit 2.5” LCD colour display with OSD (On Screen Display) menu Can be fully integrated with the SCS/BUS system (p. 18-21) To be equipped with special plates (p. 106, 108 and 111) To be installed in flush mounting box W Cat. No. 0893 79 or 0892 79 NE 5739 50 White 5739 51 Magnesium Polyx video internal unit 3441 92 Surface mounting video internal unit with 3.5” monitor Doorlock push button and 4 programmable push buttons (0-1-2-3) configurable for a choice of functions Handset has the following functions: - bell adjustment and exclusion - inductive loop to allow the use for people with impaired hearing

1 1 1

Swing colour video handset 3448 24 Swing video handset with 4” colour TFT monitor A choice of 16 types of pre-programmed ring tones Doorlock push button and 4 programmable push buttons (0-1-2-3) configurable for a choice of functions Handset has the following functions: - bell adjustment and exclusion - inductive loop to allow the use for people with impaired hearing - door lock status LED Swing black and white video handset 3448 04 As above Cat. No. 3448 24 but with 4” black and white monitor Sprint black and white video handset 3443 42 Sprint video handset with 4” black and white monitor Door lock push button, staircase light control and auto power ON button to monitor the entrance panels or the possible cameras Volume, brightness and contrast adjustments Call secrecy function

3447 04

Cat. Nos.

3442 02

Audio hands free internal units

Arteor audio internal unit Flush mounting audio internal unit Volume adjustment for communication and call tone, and with bell get-off indicator Allows intercom between several rooms Supplied complete with special flush mounting box NEW and cover plate 5740 11 White (supplied with white plate) 5743 11 Magnesium (supplied with mirror black plate) Polyx audio internal unit 3440 82 Surface mounting audio internal unit Doorlock push button and 4 programmable push buttons (0-1-2-3) configurable for a choice of functions Handset has the following functions: - bell adjustment and exclusion - inductive loop to allow the use for people with impaired hearing - door lock status LED

Audio handsets 1

Video handsets 1

3443 42

1 1

Swing audio handset 3447 04 Swing audio handset can be installed in 2 wire systems A choice of 16 types of pre-programmed ring tones Doorlock push button and 4 programmable push buttons (0-1-2-3) configurable for a choice of functions The bell volume can be adjusted and excluded Handset has the following functions: - bell adjustment and exclusion - inductive loop to allow the use for people with impaired hearing - door lock status LED Sprint audio handsets 3442 02 Sprint audio handset with door lock push button Call volume can be set to 3 levels 3442 12 Sprint audio handset with door lock push button and a push button for auxiliary functions Call volume can be set to 3 levels

Entrance panels

see p. 42-45

Bticino door entry systems 2 wire - Sfera function modules

NEW

3425 60

3421 70

3423 50

3422 40

3426 00

3426 10

3426 30

3426 40

3422 00

3326 50

3425 10

3425 50

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Sfera function modules

Speaker modules NEW 3425 60 Digital audio/video speaker module with 2 push buttons (1 column or 2 columns) including colour camera with LED lighting for night visibility The camera angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ±15° 3421 70 Digital speaker module with 2 call push buttons and an additional push button for the trade function The name plates are illuminated by 8 green LEDs

3423 50 As above Cat. No. 3421 70 but with 4 call push buttons (2 columns)

3469 91 Digital 2 wire universal speaker unit for use with vandal resistant bespoke entrance panels

Digital call speaker module with graphic display 3426 30 Digital alphanumeric call + speaker module to be used in 2 wire systems Can send the call to a handset by scrolling the residents’ names or codes on a display using the dedicated keys Combines the functions of digital speaker module and alphanumeric display in a single device The module can save up to 1000 residents’ names and surnames associating them to the apartment SCS address 500 names can be saved when the possibility of coupling a message with them is chosen If only the residents’ codes are saved, the capacity extends to 5000 codes

Pack

Additional alphanumeric keypad module 3426 40 Extra alphanumeric keypad to be used together with module Cat. No. 3426 30 It can call the resident directly (by typing the programmed code) and activate the “open door lock” function (by typing the secret code) It is supplied with multi-cable and connector for connection to the speaker module Name plate module 3422 00 Digital name plate module which can be used to display the street number or any other information Can be used to display a caption in entrance panels with numeric call module Cat. No. 3426 10

Sfera function modules (continued)

Push button modules 3422 40 Digital push button module with 4 call push buttons The connections to the system are made using the multi-cable supplied; also the name plates are illuminated by 12 green LEDs

3422 80 As above Cat. No. 3422 40 but with 8 call push buttons (2 columns)

3469 92 Expansion for Cat. No. 3469 91 : additional 8 push buttons

NOTE: Can be programmed using a PC with the TICALL software (can be downloaded free from the website www.bticino.co.uk) and the suitable interface Cat. No. 3359 1

Cat. Nos.

1 1

Alphanumeric digital call module 3426 00 Module which can send the call choosing the name of the handset in a list which is shown on a display The module can also activate the door lock by means of a secret code number The module is supplied with a multicable for the connection to the speaker module Numeric digital call module 3426 10 The numeric call module can make calls from the entrance panel to handsets by just keying in the number corresponding to the handset required In practice it works like making a telephone call on a normal telephone The correspondence between the numbers and the user names is found from a phone book by the side of the module and made up of name plate modules Cat. No. 3422 00 From 1 to 4 numbers may be keyed in to make the call, as programmed by the installer The module can also activate the electric door lock by means of a secret code number The module is supplied with a multicable for the connection to the speaker module Code lock module 3426 50 Code lock module for door lock activation Camera modules 3425 10 Black and white camera module for 2 wire video systems with IR lighting for night visibility In the installation phase the angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ± 20° and on the vertical axis at ± 15° 3425 50 Colour camera module for 2 wire video systems with LED lighting for night visibility In the installation phase the angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ± 20° and on the vertical axis at ± 15°

Bticino door entry systems 2 wire - system components

3462 00

3460 00

3468 41

Pack

1 1

3468 70

Cat. Nos.

3468 30

3494 10

Power supplies

3460 00 Power supply unit for 2 wire audio or video - 8 DIN rail modules 1 200 mA 3460 20 Compact power supply unit for 2 wire audio or video installations - 2 DIN rail modules 600 mA Suitable only to feed additional handsets or entrance panels 3460 30 Compact power supply unit with video adaptor for 2 wire installations - 2 DIN rail modules 600 mA

3468 50

3469 02

0492 02

3469 03

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Expansion interfaces

3468 50 Apartment interface for 2 wire installation Allows the connection of an independent video door entry system integrated with Arteor home systems applications in the apartment to the apartment block riser The use of the internal installation within the apartment does not occupy the main block riser - 4 DIN rail modules

3468 51 Installation expansion module Allows increase in distance between entrance panel and handset, increase in number of devices installed, creation of risers with independent entrance panels - 4 DIN rail modules

Relays 1

3462 00 Staircase light timer relay - 4 DIN rail modules

3462 30 Digital remote secure door lock relay - 2 DIN rail modules

3369 10 Additional bell

3462 50 Digital 2 wire relay - NC/NO contact (Can be added in entrance panel back box)

3468 33 Floor call input device for door bell

3462 60 Digital 2 wire system timer relay with electromagnetic locks management, temporised door opening and lock states signalling - 4 DIN rail modules

3469 02 Push button modules connection cable for entrance panel in several rows

3469 03 Connector for push button panels with more than 26 push buttons

0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 0492 3060 3060 0261

Bell accessories

Other accessories

Video accessories 1

3468 30 2 wire video adapter (to be used with power supply Cat. No. 3460 00 in 2 wire video installations)

5739 98 Audio/video node for mixing audio/video sources (max. 4 sources) - 6 DIN rail modules Note: to be used as an alternative to video adaptor Cat. No. 3468 30

Configurators 1 1 1

3468 41 Video floor distribution block - 4 outputs

3474 00 Remote camera interface Input module for external camera to 2 wire

3468 70 Video amplifier for systems made with non-twisted cables (100 m max.)

F442

Video TV interface

1 1 1 1 1

Interface with other systems

3461 50 8 wire / 2 wire interface - 6 DIN rail modules

3494 10 Analogue / 2 wire interface

3468 90 IP/ 2 wire interface - 10 DIN rail modules

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 18 10 64 65 45

Configurators No. 0 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 1 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 2 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 3 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 4 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 5 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 6 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 7 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 8 (pack of 10) Configurators No. 9 (pack of 10) Configurators SLA (pack of 10) Configurators GEN (pack of 10) Configurators kit - 10 internal units Configurators kit - 20 internal units Configurator site kit made up of: – 10 pcs for 0 to 9 – 2 blue extractable connectors with 8 terminals – 2 green extractable connectors with 2 terminals – 1 tweezers – 1 plastic screwdriver

Bus cable 1

0261 45

5739 99 2 conductor cable (200 m coil)

Bticino door entry systems

2 wire - system composition table colour video - Sfera modular entrance panels (Star Wiring)

Box + chassis

Surround plates

(Flush mounting)

Function modules and accessories

Video Power supply + floor video adapter distribution block

Modular front covers

Video handsets Swing

Polyx display

Arteor display White finish(1)

Arteor display Magnesium finish(1)

Axolute station(2)

3448 24

3441 92

5739 50

5739 51

3493 10

No. of calls

3311 10 3311 20 3311 30 3312 21 3312 21 3312 31 3425 60 3422 40 3469 02 3424 61 3424 71 3322 31 3322 41 3329 11

3460 00

3460 30

3468 41

1(3)

–

1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1

2(3)

–

1(5)

–

2 or 2 or 2 or 2 or 2

3(3)

–

3 or 3 or 3 or 3 or 3

4(3)

–

4 or 4 or 4 or 4 or 4

5(3)

–

5 or 5 or 5 or 5 or 5

6(3)

–

1(5)

–

6 or 6 or 6 or 6 or 6

7(3)

–

7 or 7 or 7 or 7 or 7

8(3)

–

8 or 8 or 8 or 8 or 8

9(3)

–

9 or 9 or 9 or 9 or 9

10(3)

–

1(5)

–

10 or 10 or 10 or 10 or 10

11(4)

–

11 or 11 or 11 or 11 or 11

12(4)

–

12 or 12 or 12 or 12 or 12

13(4)

–

13 or 13 or 13 or 13 or 13

14(4)

–

1(5)

14 or 14 or 14 or 14 or 14

15(4)

–

15 or 15 or 15 or 15 or 15

16(4)

–

16 or 16 or 16 or 16 or 16

17(4)

–

17 or 17 or 17 or 17 or 17

18(4)

–

1(5)

–

18 or 18 or 18 or 18 or 18

19(4)

–

19 or 19 or 19 or 19 or 19

20(4)

–

20 or 20 or 20 or 20 or 20

(1) Arteor display internal units require cover plates, see p. 106, 108 and 111 (2) Axolute station internal unit requires cover plates, see p. 48 (3) Please add configurator Cat. No. 3060 64 to the system composition (4) Please add configurator Cat. No. 3060 65 to the system composition (5) Uses 3 push button module with only 2 push buttons in use. For alternatives please contact technical support This table is indicative only, exact requirements may vary depending on project configuration. Further technical support is available by calling +44 (0) 870 608 9022

Bticino door entry systems

2 wire - system composition table black and white video - Sfera modular entrance panels (Star Wiring)

Box + chassis

Surround plates

(Flush mounting)

Function modules and accessories

Power supply + video adapter

Modular front covers

Video floor distribution block

Video handsets Swing

Sprint

3448 04

3443 42

No. of calls

3311 10

3311 20

3311 30

3312 21

3312 31

3425 60

3422 40

3469 02

3424 61

3424 71

3322 31

3322 41

3329 11

3460 00

3460 30

3468 41

1(1)

–

2(1)

–

1(3)

–

3(1)

–

4(1)

–

5(1)

–

6(1)

–

1(3)

–

7(1)

–

8(1)

–

9(1)

–

10(1)

–

1(3)

–

11(2)

–

12(2)

–

13(2)

–

14(2)

–

1(3)

15(2)

–

16(2)

–

17(2)

–

18(2)

–

1(3)

–

19(2)

–

20(2)

–

(1) Please add configurator Cat. No. 3060 64 to the system composition (2) Please add configurator Cat. No. 3060 65 to the system composition (3) Uses 3 push button module with only 2 push buttons in use. For alternatives please contact technical support This table is indicative only, exact requirements may vary depending on project configuration. Further technical support is available by calling +44 (0) 870 608 9022

Bticino door entry systems

2 wire - system composition table audio - Sfera modular entrance panels (Star Wiring)

Box + chassis

Speaker module and power supply

Surround plates(1)

(Flush mounting)

Push button module

Modular front covers

Swing

Audio handsets Polyx Arteor hands free Sprint hands free White Magnesium

No. of calls

3311 10

3311 20

3311 30

3312 11

1(1)

–

2(1)

–

3(1)

–

4(1)

–

5(1)

3312 21

3312 31

3421 70

3460 00

3422 40 3469 02

–

6(1)

–

7(1)

–

8(1)

–

9(1)

–

10(1)

3447 04

3442 02 3442 12

3321 01

3321 11

3321 21

3322 31

3322 41

3329 11

3440 82

5740 11

5744 11

–

1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1

–

2 or 2 or 2 or 2 or 2

–

3 or 3 or 3 or 3 or 3

–

4 or 4 or 4 or 4 or 4

–

5 or 5 or 5 or 5 or 5

–

6 or 6 or 6 or 6 or 6

–

7 or 7 or 7 or 7 or 7

–

8 or 8 or 8 or 8 or 8

–

9 or 9 or 9 or 9 or 9

–

10 or 10 or 10 or 10 or 10

11(2)

–

11 or 11 or 11 or 11 or 11

12(2)

–

12 or 12 or 12 or 12 or 12

13(2)

–

13 or 13 or 13 or 13 or 13

14(2)

–

14 or 14 or 14 or 14 or 14

15(2)

–

15 or 15 or 15 or 15 or 15

16(2)

–

16 or 16 or 16 or 16 or 16

17(2)

–

17 or 17 or 17 or 17 or 17

18(2)

–

18 or 18 or 18 or 18 or 18

19(2)

–

19 or 19 or 19 or 19 or 19

20(2)

–

20 or 20 or 20 or 20 or 20

(1) Please add configurator Cat. No. 3060 64 to the system composition (2) Please add configurator Cat. No. 3060 65 to the system composition This table is indicative only, exact requirements may vary depending on project configuration. Further technical support is available by calling +44 (0) 870 608 9022

IP - the future of door entry

Bticino door entry systems

NEW

IP system

IP is the very latest in door entry technology. Used together with Bticino’s 2 wire range, the results offer outstanding capabilities... • Up to 10,000 apartments • Up to 1,000 entrance panels 5740 39

Pack

FULLY INTEGRATED SOLUTIONS Using IP technology as a backbone, with standard 2 wire risers, it’s now easier than ever to meet the most complex demands for the largest residential developments.

5740 43

Cat. Nos.

IP interface

5740 39 For extended systems with IP backbone and 2 wire support - 10 DIN rail modules

5740 43 Virtual switchboard software for managing entryphone and video entryphone calls The software (for Windows operating systems) can be installed on any fixed or mobile PC and is used to receive, manage and transfer calls from inside and outside Offers home video control with cyclical CCTV vision, day and night functions and the ability to display the alarms present in the various apartments - Operating systems supported : Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 and Windows Vista - Software required : NET Framework 2.0 or later

Bticino door entry systems

8 wire - handsets and switchboards

8 wire - Sfera function modules

3423 40 3341 02

3341 22

3426 20

3422 00

Pack

3340 02

3342 02

Dimensions (p. 63-64)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

3426 40

3343 42

Video handsets

3341 22 Pivot colour video handset with speech secrecy and wall mounting bracket

3341 02 Pivot black and white video handset with speech secrecy and wall mounting bracket

3343 42 Sprint black and white video handset

Audio handsets 1

3340 02 Pivot audio handset with speech secrecy and wall mounting bracket

3342 02 Sprint audio handset

3371 02 Table-top base for Pivot audio

3371 22 Table-top base for Pivot video

3060 62 Socket outlet for table-top installation

3368 03 Cable with plug (2 m) for table-top installation

Accessories for Pivot handsets

Switchboards 1

3440 02 Audio alphanumeric digital switchboard unit

3344 02 Video black and white unit for central switchboard handset (Cat. No. 3440 02)

3351 22 Video colour unit for central switchboard handset (Cat. No. 3440 02)

3371 32 Table-top base for video switchboard

3060 62 Socket outlet for table-top installation

Entrance panels

see p. 42-45

3426 40

Cat. Nos.

3326 50

Sfera function modules

Speaker modules 3421 60 Digital speaker module with two call push buttons and an additional push button for trade function The name plates are lit up by 8 green LEDs 3423 40 As above Cat. No. 3421 60 but with 4 call push buttons (2 columns) Digital call speaker module with graphic display 3426 20 Digital alphanumeric call + speaker module Can send the call to a handset by scrolling the residents’ names or codes on a display using the dedicated keys Combines the functions of digital speaker module and alphanumeric display in a single device Can save up to 1000 residents’ names and surnames associating them to the apartment SCS address 500 names can be saved when the possibility of coupling a message with them is chosen If only the residents’ codes are saved, the capacity extends to 5000 codes NOTE: Can be programmed using a PC with the TICALL software (can be downloaded free from the website www.bticino.co.uk) and the suitable interface Cat. No. 3359 Additional alphanumeric keypad module 3426 40 To be used together with module Cat. No. 3426 20 It can call the resident directly (by typing the programmed code) and activate the “open door lock” function (by typing the secret code) It is supplied with multi-cable and connector for connection to the speaker module Name plate module 3422 00 Digital name plate module which can be used to display the street number or any other information Can be used to display a caption in entrance panels with numeric call module Cat. No. 3426 10 Push button modules 3422 40 Digital push button module with 4 call push buttons The connections to the system are made using the multi-cable supplied; also the name plates are illuminated by 12 green LEDs 3424 80 As above Cat. No. 3422 40 but with 8 call push buttons (2 columns) Alphanumeric digital call module 3426 00 Module which can send the call choosing the name of the audio handset in a list which is shown on a display The module can also activate the door lock by means of a secret code number The module is supplied with a multicable for the connection to the speaker module Camera modules 3325 10 Black and white camera module with IR lighting for night visibility In the installation phase the angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ± 20° and on the vertical axis at ± 15° 3325 50 Colour camera module with LED lighting for night visibility In the installation phase the angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ± 20° and on the vertical axis at ± 15°

Bticino door entry systems 8 wire - system components

3369 00

0492 02

3360 10

3362 00

3461 00

3461 40

Pack

1 1

Cat. Nos.

3369 10

Power supplies

3360 10 Digital system and analogue video power suppy unit - 10 DIN rail modules 3368 42 Transformer 230 V A/12 V AC 18 VA (for code lock module Cat. No. 3326 50) - 3 DIN rail modules

Relays 1 1 1

1 1 1

3362 00 Intercommunication relay - 6 DIN rail modules for audio and video 3462 00 Staircase light timer relay 230 V - 4 DIN rail modules 3462 30 Digital remote secure door lock relay - 2 DIN rail modules

Configurators

0492 00 Configurators No. 0 (pack of 10)

0492 01 Configurators No. 1 (pack of 10)

0492 02 Configurators No. 2 (pack of 10)

0492 03 Configurators No. 3 (pack of 10)

0492 04 Configurators No. 4 (pack of 10)

0492 05 Configurators No. 5 (pack of 10)

0492 06 Configurators No. 6 (pack of 10)

0492 07 Configurators No. 7 (pack of 10)

0492 08 Configurators No. 8 (pack of 10) 0492 09 Configurators No. 9 (pack of 10)

3060 64 Configurators kit for 10 internal units

3461 40 Audio riser distribution block - 6 DIN rail modules 3461 00 Video riser distribution block - 6 DIN rail modules 3461 80 Audio/video digital distribution block for several independent risers - 6 DIN rail modules 3461 20 Audio digital floor distribution block - 6 DIN rail modules 3461 90 Video digital floor distribution block - 6 DIN rail modules 3468 60 2 directional input and output device for video 8 wire switchboard - 6 DIN rail modules

3060 65 Configurators kit for 20 internal units

0261 45 Configurator site kit made up of: – 10 pcs for 0 to 9 – 2 blue extractable connectors with 8 terminals – 2 green extractable connectors with 2 terminals – 1 tweezers – 1 plastic screwdriver

3369 00 8 core digital cable - 100 m coil

3369 03 8 core digital cable - 500 m coil

3369 50 Wiring tester

3368 20 Video/services shunt for 5 internal intercom units - 6 DIN rail modules used with 3362 00 3469 60 Video selector for several digital entrance panels - 6 DIN rail modules

Interface with other systems 3461 50 8 wire / 2 wire interface - 6 DIN rail modules

3369 10 Additional bell

3469 02 Push button modules connection cable for entrance panel in several rows 3469 03 Connector for push button panels with more than 26 push buttons

Bell accessory

Other accessories

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Audio/video distribution blocks

Video accessories 1

0261 45

Cables

Wiring tester

Bticino door entry systems

analogue - handsets

analogue - Sfera function modules

3321 20 3341 02

3341 22

3326 50

3340 02

Pack

3342 02

3042 22

Cat. Nos.

Video handsets

3341 02 Pivot black and white video handset with speech secrecy and wall mounting bracket

3343 42 Sprint black and white video handset

Audio handsets 1

3340 02 Pivot audio handset with speech secrecy and wall mounting bracket

3042 22 Sprint audio handset with speech secrecy, call exclusion and LED 3342 02 Sprint audio handset

3371 02 Table-top base for Pivot audio

3371 22 Table-top base for Pivot video

3368 03 Cable for table mounting (2 m)

3325 10

3325 50

3060 62 8 pin socket for table mounting handsets

Cat. Nos.

Sfera function modules

Speaker modules 3321 20 Analogue speaker module with 2 call push buttons and an additional push button for trade function The name plates are lit up by a lamp fitted on a removable drawer The module is supplied with all the wires needed for the cabling

3423 40 As above Cat. No. 3321 20 but with 4 call push buttons

3369 20 Analogue universal speaker unit for use with bespoke entrance panels

Accessories for Pivot handsets

3322 40

3369 20

Pack

3341 22 Pivot colour video handset with speech secrecy and wall mounting bracket

3323 40

3343 42

Push button module 3322 40 Analogue push button module with 4 call push buttons The name plates are lit up by a lamp fitted on a removable drawer The module is supplied with all the wires needed for the cabling 3424 80 As above Cat. No. 3321 20 but with 4 call push buttons Code lock module 3326 50 Code lock module This module opens and closes 2 separate relays by keying in 2 code numbers Camera modules 3325 10 Black and white camera module with IR lighting for night visibility The camera module can be used in analogue system using accessory Cat. No. 3363 20 In the installation phase the angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ± 20° and on the vertical axis at ± 15° 3325 50 Colour camera module with lighting with white LED for night visibility The camera module can be used in analogue system using accessory Cat. No. 3363 20 In the installation phase the angle of the lens on the horizontal axis can be set at ± 20° and on the vertical axis at ± 15°

Entrance panels and cover plates see p. 42-45

Bticino door entry systems analogue - system components

3368 42

3362 00

3362 20

3363 10

Pack

3368 10

3360 10

3360 00

Cat. Nos.

3362 10

Power supplies

3360 00 Audio analogue power supply unit - 6 DIN rail modules

3360 10 Digital systems and analogue video power supply unit - 10 DIN rail modules

3368 42 Transformer 230 V - 12 V AC 18 VA (for code lock module Cat. No. 3326 50) - 3 DIN rail modules

3368 20

3494 10

3363 20

3369 10

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Video accessories

3368 10 Video distribution block for 60 mm box

3368 20 Distribution block for 5 internal intercom video units - 6 DIN rail modules used with Cat. No. 3362 00

3363 20 Camera timer

3373 20 Video signal converter for external camera

Interface with other systems Relays

3362 00 Intercommunication relay - 6 DIN rail modules for audio and video

3362 10 Audio/video changeover relay for entrance panels - 6 DIN rail modules

3362 20 Auxiliary relay - 3 DIN rail modules

3363 10 Door lock control relay

3494 10 Analogue/2 wire interface - 4 DIN rail modules

3369 10 Additional bell

0032 97 Replacement lamp

Bell accessory

Other accessory

Bticino door entry systems access control

8210 87

8216 30

Pack

Cat. Nos.

8216 31

Code lock keypad kit IP 67

Vandal resistant with blue back lit keys 2 relays Users : up to 100 Finish : polished cast aluminium Voltage : 12-48 V DC, 12-24 V AC Current : 80 mA Dimensions : 110 x 75 x 15 mm 8216 30 Code lock keypad (GALEO2R)

Pack

Sfera modular proximity kit

Kit comprises : - door controller - Sfera modular panel mounting reader - power supply unit - 10 proximity key fobs Reader uses LED and audible indication, exit button input and timed relay output 8210 86 Stand-alone 2 door controller kit

Proximity key fobs

8210 87 Grey proximity key fobs (pack of 10)

Small profile reader suitable for external use To be used with stand-alone reader Cat. No. 8216 31 or in conjunction with access control kit Cat. No. 8210 86 to replace Sfera modular reader or to control a second door Can be mounted in vandal resistant panels Cat. Nos. 3337 14/15 and 3339 14/15 (p. 46) Can be installed up to 50 metres from the controller Finish : High impact ABS Dimensions : 42 mm head, 25 mm body diameter Operating temperature : â&#x20AC;&#x201C;20 to +50Â° C 8210 83 Mushroom head reader

Additional mushroom head reader IP 67

Stand-alone reader IP 54 Self-contained proximity reader /controller Programmed via a master code, the unit has LED and audible indication, with exit button input and timed relay output Accepts a remote read head for higher security Users : up to 500 Finish : ABS Voltage : 12 V AC / DC Current : 80 mA Dimensions : 135 x 76 x 20 mm 8216 31 Stand-alone reader (Promi500)

Cat. Nos.

Sfera monobloc plates for mushroom head reader

1 1

Pre-drilled to accept mushroom head reader Cat. No. 8210 83 8210 84(1) Brass 8210 85(1) Stainless steel

Additional Sfera modular reader IP 54

Sfera modular panel mounting reader with LED and audible indication To be used in conjunction with access control kit Cat. No. 8210 86 to control a second door 8210 82 Sfera modular reader

For more information about Bticino door entry and access control solutions Contact us on +44 (0) 870 608 9022 (1) The kit can be used as a stand-alone proximity system or, alternatively, integrated into a Bticino audio/video entrance panel For full details of additional equipment and finishes, please contact technical support

(1) Use 3311 10 back box p. 42

Bticino door entry systems access control (continued)

Mounting plate

Electromagnet

Armature plate

0380 23

Safety cables

8216 32

8216 35

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Surface magnetic locks High quality, surface mount, electromagnetic lock with a holding force of 300 kg Finish : aluminium Voltage : 12–24 V DC Current : 630 mA / 315 mA Dimensions : 253 x 46 x 27 mm Operating tempeture : –20 to +50° C

1 1

Pack

8206 48 Mortice latch hammer 12 V DC

8206 50 Rim latch hammer 12 V DC

IP 40 - IK07 Green Surface mounting Dimensions : 90 x 90 x 57 mm Call by pressing the membrane (pressure 2.5 kg) with clear display of the call position Reset on front of device, with special key (supplied) Space reserved to stick a function using identification label Equipped with NO/NC contact 5 A-24 V /1 A-48 V 0380 23 Break glass unit for emergency exit

Break glass unit for emergency exit

Flush magnetic lock

Z and L bracket

For use with Cat. Nos. 8216 32/33 For universal mounting 8216 34 Z and L kit for 300 series (P 300)

Power supply unit

For magnetic locks DC power supply for powering up to 2·0 A at 12 V DC and 2·0 A at 24 V DC These units have charging circuits for standby batteries, and are supplied in metal cases with LED indication 8216 35 12 V DC, 2·0 A standard (PSU 122)

Latch hammer locks

8216 32 Surface magnetic lock 300 kg (FAS 300) 8210 79 Surface magnetic lock kit - 300 kg (including PSU, Z and L brackets and NC relay)

Mortice mount electromagnetic lock with a holding force of 300 kg Ideal for locking sliding doors and windows Finish : aluminium Voltage : 12–24 V DC Current : 630 mA at 12 V DC 313 mA at 24 V DC Dimensions : 229 x 38 x 27 mm Operating tempeture : –20 to +50° C 8216 33 Flush magnetic lock 300 kg (FES 300)

Cat. Nos.

Bticino door entry kits

2 wire - with surface mounting vandal resistant entrance panel

3689 11

3675 11

Bticino door entry kits

2 wire/analogue - with surface mounting entrance panel

3638 11 3638 11 packaging

3681 11

3676 11

Vandal resistant entrance panel manufactured in Zamak Conform to BS EN 60065, BS EN 50081-1 and BS EN 50082-1 IP 54 audio or video entrance panel Guaranteed co-ax free Pack

1 1

Cat. Nos.

Polyx Linea 2000 metal colour video kit

Kit comprises : Linea metal surface video entrance panel with vandal resistant body, colour camera, LED lighting and illuminated name plate(s) Polyx hands free colour video handset(s) Power supply Video adapter 3689 11 1 way colour video kit 3689 21 2 way colour video kit

3653 11

Conform to BS EN 60065, BS EN 50081-1 and BS EN 50082-1 IP 54 audio or video entrance panel All wires centralised at main handset Pack

1 1

1 1 1

1 1

1 1 1

Swing Linea 2000 metal audio kit

1 1

Kit comprises : Linea metal surface audio entrance panel with vandal resistant body and illuminated name plate(s) Swing audio handset(s) Power supply 3681 11 1 way audio kit 3681 21 2 way audio kit

Sprint Linea 2000 video kit (digital 2 wire)

Kit comprises : Linea series extra slim surface mounting video entrance panel with pressed aluminium body, black and white camera and illuminated name plate Sprint black and white video handset Power supply Video adapter 3653 11 1 way black and white video kit 3369 10 Additional bell

Kit comprises : Linea series extra slim surface mounting audio entrance panel with pressed aluminium body and illuminated name plate Sprint audio handset Power supply 3638 11 1 way audio kit 3369 10 Additional bell 3315 50 Additional handset (6 wire)

Sprint Linea 2000 video kit (analogue system)

Swing Linea 2000 metal video kit Kit comprises : Linea metal surface video entrance panel with vandal resistant body, black and white camera, infrared lighting and illuminated name plate(s) Swing black and white video handset(s) Power supply Video adapter 3676 11 1 way black and white video kit 3676 21 2 way black and white video kit

Cat. Nos.

Sprint Linea 2000 audio kit (analogue 2 wire)

Swing Linea 2000 metal colour video kit Kit comprises : Linea metal surface video entrance panel with vandal resistant body, colour camera, LED lighting and illuminated name plate(s) Swing colour video handset(s) Power supply Video adapter 3675 11 1 way colour video kit 3675 21 2 way colour video kit

3651 11

Kit comprises : Linea series extra slim surface mounting video entrance panel with pressed aluminium body, black and white camera and illuminated name plate Sprint black and white video handset Power supply 3651 11 1 way analogue black and white video kit 3360 10 Power supply unit - 10 DIN modules 3343 42 Additional Sprint black and white handset

Sprint Linea 2000 audio kit (analogue system)

Linea series extra slim surface mounting audio entrance panel with pressed aluminium body and illuminated name plate Sprint audio handset Power supply 3632 11 1 way analogue audio kit

Bticino door entry systems entrance panels

■ Flush mounting boxes with Sfera module supporting chassis C

■ Sfera monobloc A

A 117 117 117

B 123 214 306

Dimensions (mm)

Dimensions (mm) Cat. Nos. 3311 10 3311 20 3311 30

C 43 43 43

No. modules 1 2 3

A 140 140 140

B 142 233 325

■ Vandal resistant monobloc video push button panels C

■ Surround plates A

Dimensions (mm) Cat. Nos. 3312 11 3312 21 3312 31

A 140 140 140

B 142 233 325

Dimensions (mm) Cat. Nos. 3339 14 3339 15

A 150 150

B 284 401·5

C 4 4

■ Vandal resistant monobloc audio push button panels

■ Rainshields

Dimensions (mm) C 50 50 50 50 50 50

B 151 242 334 242 334 334

A 151 151 151 290 290 430

Dimensions (mm) Cat. Nos. 3337 14 3337 15

■ Surface mounting boxes and chassis for Sfera modular C

Vandal resistant entrance panels 106

Dimensions (mm)

Cat. Nos. 3313 11 3313 21 3313 31 3313 41 3313 61 3313 91

A 155 155 155 290 290 430

B 160 255

C 92 92

360 255 360

92 92 92

360

B 198 283

C 4 4

■ Linea kit entrance panels (vandal resistant or standard)

185

A 150 150

Standard entrance panels 31

176

Cat. Nos. 3314 11 3314 21 3314 31 3314 41 3314 61 3314 91

Bticino door entry systems

video hands free internal units and handsets

■ Axolute evolution video internal units

■ Swing video handsets

Dimensions (mm)

Cat. Nos. 3493 20/21

Cat. Nos. 3448 24/04

230

210

215

305

3 2 1 0

■ Arteor display video internal units

■ Pivot video handsets

Dimensions (mm)

Cat. Nos. 3341 22/02

Cat. Nos. 5739 50/51 33.2

210

68·5

210

151.5

■ Polyx video internal unit Dimensions (mm)

Cat. No. 3441 92 30

168

■ Sprint video handset Dimensions (mm)

Cat. No. 3443 42 61

210

151

180

Bticino door entry systems

audio hands free internal units and handsets

■ Arteor audio internal units

■ Swing audio handset

Dimensions (mm)

Cat. Nos. 5740 11 and 5743 11

Cat. No. 3447 04

40.2

3 2 1

215

113

■ Pivot audio handset

■ Polyx audio internal unit

Dimensions (mm)

Cat. No. 3340 02

Cat. No. 3440 82 124.5

68·5

210

128

■ Sprint audio handset Dimensions (mm)

Cat. Nos. 3442 02/12 101

216

Legrand door entry kits

NEW

1 way

3690 53

Legrand door entry kits multi-way

3690 63

3757 10

3690 03

3757 10 packaging

Technical information (p. 66)

Pack

1 1

Cat. Nos.

Video door entry kits

Technical information (p. 66)

Pack

Cost effective kits for basic door entry requirements

Composition : • Extra-slim 1 push button surface mounting entrance panel • Black and white video handset with 4” monitor and integrated power supply. Equipped with cable and BS 1363 standard plug

Composition : • Extra-slim surface mounting entrance panel • Handsets (electronic call tone) • Audio control interface • Door release not included in the kit

Features : 4 x 0.5 mm2 (up to 25 m) wires between handset and entrance panel + 2 wires for the door lock opening (not included) 3690 53 1 way video kit black and white 3690 63 1 way video kit black and white hands free

Composition : • Extra-slim 1 push button surface mounting entrance panel • Audio handset with transformer. Equipped with BS 1363 standard plug

Audio door entry kits IP 54

Cost effective kits for basic door entry requirements

Audio kit for : 3757 10 1 apartment

3757 20 2 apartments

3757 30 3 apartments

3757 40 4 apartments

3757 60 6 apartments

Additional handset with electronic call tone The system can accept up to 4 handsets in parallel on the same call button 3742 00 Audio handset

Door release 3749 00 12 V door release

Audio door entry kit

Cat. Nos.

Features : 2 x 0.5 mm2 (up to 50 m) wires between handset and entrance panel + 2 wires for the door lock opening (not included) 3690 03 1 way audio kit Additional handset 3690 08 Audio handset with transformer equipped with BS 1363 standard plug

Legrand door entry kits 1 way and multi-way

â&#x2013; Wiring diagrams - 1 way kits Cat. Nos. 3690 53/63

Cat. No. 3690 03

ON OFF

L- L+ R2 R1

R1 R2 R3 R4

L- L+ R4 R3 R2 R1

100-240 V (50/60Hz)

R1 R2

â&#x2013; Wiring diagram - multi-way kits Audio installation for 1 apartment Cat. No. 3757 10

230 V

Salsa chimes

0416 15

0416 50

0416 32

0416 46

0412 19

0420 25 Pack

Cat. Nos.

White

1 1

Salsa 2 note electromechanical chimes

Pack

0416 50 8 V (1) or 9 V alkaline battery (not supplied) Class III(2) 0416 52 230 V 50 / 60 Hz Class II with built-in transformer

White

Adagio Class III(2) 3 selectable melodies 1 three note melody using additional bell push (not supplied) Adjustable volume control Tone level : 70 - 75 - 80 dB at 1 m Dimensions : 177 x 104 x 45 mm

0417 43 8 V

(1)

Alti 1 melody Tone level : 80 dB at 1 m Range : up to 100 metres White Dimensions : 120 x 104 x 42 mm 0416 15 Battery operated (batteries not supplied)

Adagio 2 selectable melodies 1 three note melody using transmitter (not supplied) Adjustable volume control Range : up to 200 metres Tone level : 70 - 75 - 80 dB at 1 m White Dimensions : 177 x 104 x 45 mm 0416 32 Battery operated (batteries not supplied)

or 4 x 1·5 V alkaline batteries (not supplied)

Surface mounting bell push IP 30 - Class III(2) Horizontal or vertical installation Fixing screws not supplied Dimensions : 50 x 25 x 20 mm 5

Salsa wireless chime kits IP 20 - Class III(2) Radio frequency : 433·92 MHz Operated by push-button transmitter (supplied) Transmitter : 3 x 1·5 V alkaline batteries (not supplied) Receiver : 4 x 1·5 V alkaline batteries (not supplied)

Salsa electronic melodies chime

Cat. Nos.

Concerto Tone level : 80 dB at 1 m Dimensions : 177 x 104 x 45 mm

Bells with cover

0416 46 White

White

1 1

Surface mounting with levelling facility Tone level : 79 dB at 1 m Dimensions : 95 x 61 x 33 mm

±±

0412 19 8 V 50/60 Hz(1) - Class III(2) 0412 43 230 V 50/60 Hz - Class II with built-in transformer

Safety isolating transformer Conforms to BS 3535-1 and IS EN 60742 and IEC 61558-2-8 White

1 1

Surface mounting, double insulated Dimensions : 92 x 56 x 42 mm

± ±± ±

0420 25 230 V primary 8 / 12 V secondary at 1 A 0420 27 230 V primary 8 / 12 V secondary at 2 / 3 A

(1) Use with transformer Cat. No. 0420 25 (2) Very low safety voltage

For modular bell transformers

see p. 225 67

NEW P. 74 Monobloc mechanical switches and triple pole isolator

NEW P. 82 Lighting environment controller

ArteorTM

NEW P. 92 Detectors, RCBO and fuse carriers

P. 114 Function selection charts

Synergy速 68527a.eps

Wiring devices

P. 154 Metalclad wiring devices

Clipper and back boxes

P. 165 NEW Clipper large rocker switches

Plexo weatherproof

P. 169 IP 66 surface mounting weatherproof switches

Tenby earth clamps

P. 173 NEW Tenby Rapid Clamp Ultra earth clamps

速

Lighting

P. 176 NEW Lighting management

NEW IN 2010 Arteor

wiring devices (p. 74)

Specialist wiring devices solutions for Part M and MEIGaN (p. 151)

P. 75 NEW DP switches, cooker control units and shaver sockets

P. 76 NEW BS socket outlets and mechanical switches

P. 79 NEW Electronic switches

P. 80 NEW Push buttons and dimmers

P. 84 NEW Automatic switches, lighting control and visual indication

P. 86 NEW Ventilation, heating and roller blind control and curtain switches

P. 87 NEW Hotel equipment

P. 90 NEW Data, audio and video sockets

P. 93 NEW British and International standard socket outlets

P. 94 NEW Television, telephone, data sockets and adaptors

P. 97 NEW Support frames and back boxes

P. 98 Plates

P. 120 White wiring devices

P. 130 Modern wiring devices

P. 140 Traditional wiring devices

P. 151 NEW Part M, MEIGaN wiring devices and media plates

P. 158 Grid modules

P. 160 Decorative rockers and rocker markings

P. 162 Grid system for Synergy grid modules

P. 164 Grid system for Arteor modules

P. 166 Flush mounting steel back boxes

P. 166 Surface mounting metal back boxes

P. 167 Surface mounting moulded back boxes

P. 169 IP 66 surface mounting weatherproof sockets

P. 170 NEW IP 55 surface mounting weatherproof switches

P. 170 NEW IP 55 surface mounting weatherproof sockets

P. 170 NEW IP 55 surface and flush mounting modular mechanisms

P. 183 Safety lampholders and pendant sets

P. 184 Bathroom lighting

P. 185 Utility weatherproof bulkhead lighting

2 1

2 5

3 0

NEW

P. 173 Tenby Rapid Clamp earth clamps

P. 182 Ceiling switches

Tenby Rapid Clamp Ultra earth clamps (p. 173)

Lighting management switch sensors (p. 176)

611 10/11

Complete solutions from the world specialist With 19% of the global market, Legrand is the clear leader in wiring devices. And with the introduction of Arteor, there is now something for everyone... from standard switches and sockets, to fully integrated home systems using the very latest technology.

innovAtion for progress Every year Legrand devotes 4 to 5% of its sales to research and development. It has close to 1,850 people throughout the world inventing, designing, testing and validating new ideas. Wiring devices are a great example of this investment. In addition to the introduction of Arteor, every range in the portfolio has been updated... new Synergy products, a new Plexo IP 55 weatherproof range and a brand new range of Clipper large rocker switches.

Arteortm Arteor marries supreme style (in a choice of 17 different finishes and materials), with a vast selection of functions and integrated home systems. synergy速 Synergy offers modern and traditional variations with high quality components... together with countless features to make the installer's life easier. CLipper With its simplicity and ease of use, Clipper large rocker switches are ideal for both young and old... from education to care homes.

pLexo Whatever the weather, Plexo has the seal of approval. Its IP 55 and IP 66 solutions make it suitable for any residential or commercial application.

find out more

i i i i

Arteor wiring devices See p. 74 Synergy wiring devices See p. 120 Clipper wiring devices See p. 165 Plexo wiring devices See p. 169

Arteor flow of energies TM

Versatility makes Arteor the ideal choice for any project, anywhere in the world. Stunning finishes and desirable materials position the range at the forefront of design, with virtually limitless functionality making it the ultimate range for residential and commercial projects.

deSign for A globAl lifeSTyle The timeless design of Arteor features hi-tech characteristics that are easy to understand and operate. Minimalist and sober, its carefully crafted design is inspired by the most modern technological devices, such as flat screen TVs and digital photo frames, creating the impression that the product is floating on the wall.

A ChoiCe of roCker STyleS And finiSheS See p. 77 Square - White

White

Pearl Alu

Graphite

Edition 1

Formal

Casual

Mirror Red

Mirror Taupe

Mirror White

Mirror Black

Gold Brass

Stainless Steel

Wenge Style

Light Oak

Club

Galuchat

Square - Magnesium

leATher

SignATure

wood

bruShed MeTAl

Mirror

grAphiC

TATToo

See p. 102 - 111

Round - Magnesium

neuTrAl

A ChoiCe of 17 STunning finiSheS

Round - White

Woven Metal

To find out more about the Arteor range visit: www.legrand.co.uk to order your FREE copy of the latest brochure Micropush switches See p. 79

New generation dimmers See p. 13

NEW

ArteorTM

monobloc mechanical switches and triple pole isolator

5720 39

5725 45

5720 61

5731 74

5730 93

Plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied complete with incorporated support frames and rocker plates Rocker plates in white or magnesium, square or round versions Suitable for 25 mm 1 gang boxes To be equipped with plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Switches - square version

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Switches - round version

White Magnesium 10 AX - 250 V± 10 5720 39 5725 39 1 gang intermediate switch

White Magnesium 10 AX - 250 V± 10 5730 64 5731 64 1 gang intermediate switch

20 AX - 250 V± 10 5720 12 5725 12 2 way - 1 gang

20 AX - 250 V± 10 5730 29 5731 29 2 way - 1 gang

5720 45 5725 45

2 way - 2 gang

5730 74 5731 74

2 way - 2 gang

5720 61 5725 61

2 way - 3 gang

5730 93 5731 93

2 way - 3 gang

Triple pole isolator

White Magnesium 5 5720 58 5725 58 For fan Monobloc mechanism supplied 0 with incorporated support frame Available October 201 To be equipped with 2 module plate (p. 98 to 111) Suitable for 25 mm 1 gang box

TM NEW pour Arteor exemple : xxxxxxx

5725 80

5721 53

xxxxxxxx double pole switches, cooker control units

xxxxxxxx shaver sockets

5720 88

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium interiors To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Cat. Nos. Double

Pack

pole switches - 250 VA

Conform to EN 60669-1 : 2000 Captive terminal screws Installation in flush mounting box min. depth 48 mm White Magnesium 45 A - 250 VA 5 5720 80 5725 80 Double pole switch with red indicator, indicator supplied 2 gang Use BS plate 2 gang - 3 modules

5720 87 5725 87 Double pole switch with red indicator, indicator supplied 1 gang Use BS plate 1 gang - 2 modules

Pack

Cat. Nos. Shaver

sockets

Conform to BS EN 61558-2-5. IP 24 For use with European, British, American, Australian 2-pin plugs Screwless live and neutral terminals Double wound isolating transformer Automatic self-resetting overload feature Plug insertion operates micro-switch which energises transformer To be equipped with BS 2 gang - 3 module plates (p. 98 to 111) For flush mounting boxes, use BS 2 gang box depth 48 mm Power supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz White Magnesium 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 1 5721 53 5726 53 230 V / 120-230 V With earth connector

230V 120V

Connector control units

White

Magnesium

5722 34 5727 34 Double pole control switch 20 A 0 With cord outlet and earth terminal Available October 201

Cooker control unit - 250 VA

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 Use special plate (p. 102) White 5 5720 88 45 A double pole switch with indicator + 13 A double pole switched socket outlet with indicator

TM Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

NEWpour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx British standard monobloc socket outlets, cable outlets and blanking xxxxxxxx cover plates

5726 43

5721 49

5726 50

5751 31

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium interiors To be equipped with plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos. Single

pole socket outlets 13 A 250 VA

Shuttered for child safety ASTA licence Use special plates (p. 98 to 111) 13 A - 1 gang White Magnesium Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 10 5721 43 5726 43 2P+E - switched 10 5721 44 5726 44 2P+E - switched + LED

13 A - 2 gang Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 5 5721 45 5726 45 2P+E - switched 5 5721 46 5726 46 2P+E - switched + LED

Pack

Cat. Nos. Fused

Double pole fused 13 A (fuse supplied) Flex outlet knockout and cord grip Captive fuse carrier (padlockable) Captive terminal screws Use special plates (p. 98 to 111) White Magnesium Conform to BS 1363 : Part 4 5721 50 5726 50 Switched

5721 51 5726 51 Switched + LED

5721 57 5726 57

Double pole socket outlets - 250 VA

Shuttered for child safety Use special plates (p. 98 to 111) 5 A - 1 gang White Magnesium Conform to BS 546 10 5721 40 5726 40 2P+E - switched

13 A - 1 gang Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 ASTA licence 5721 47 5726 47 2P+E - switched

13 A - 2 gang Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 ASTA licence 5721 49 5726 49 2P+E - switched twin earth

White

5721 41 2P+E - switched for standard and clean earth applications Non standard pin configuration

Cable outlet

White Square version mechanisms 5 5723 21 45 A cable outlet - BS 1 gang Supplied with white cover plate For flush mounting back box min. depth 45 mm

Unswitched

0 Available October 201

connection units

British standard blanking cover plates

For 1 gang box 5 5751 30 White 5 5751 31 Pearl Alu 5 5751 32 Graphite For 2 gang box 5 5751 40 White 5 5751 41 Pearl Alu 5 5751 42 Graphite

NEWpour exemple : xxxxxxx

TM Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx switches - square version mechanical

5724 50

5724 50 back view

5725 36

xxxxxxxx

5725 11

5720 43

5725 44

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white, magnesium or red square rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos. Switches

10 AX - 250 VA

Single module mechanisms White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5720 05 5725 05 2 way switch

5720 08 5725 08

Intermediate switch

5720 06 5725 06 2 way switch with indicator To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

Pack

5724 50

20 AX - 250 VA

Single module mechanisms White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5720 10 5725 10 2 way switch 10 5

5720 11 5725 11 2 way switch with indicator To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

5720 13 5725 13

5720 14 5725 14 1 way double pole switch with indicator Red LED supplied

Red

Cat. Nos. Switches

1 way double pole switch

1 way switch red rocker plate Red

Two module mechanisms White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5720 35 5725 35 2 way switch

5720 38 5725 38

Intermediate switch

5720 36 5725 36

2 way switch with indicator To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

5720 37 5725 37 2 way switch with indicator and label holder To be equipped with LED (p. 85) 5720 40 5725 40 Double pole switch

10 5

5724 51

Double pole switch red rocker plate

Two module mechanisms White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5 5720 42 5725 42 2 way switch with indicator To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

5720 43 5725 43

5720 44 5725 44 2 x 2 way switch + 1 way switch 3 gang

5720 46 5725 46

1 way - double pole switch

5720 48 5725 48

2 way - double pole switch

5720 47 5725 47 1 way - double pole switch with indicator Red LED supplied 5720 49 5725 49 1 way - double pole switch with indicator and "WATER HEATER" marking Red LED supplied

1 way switch - 3 gang

40/45 A double pole switches, cooker units (p. 75)

NEWpour exemple : xxxxxxx

TM Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx switches - round version mechanical

5730 61

5731 24

5731 23

xxxxxxxx

5731 25

5731 26

5731 27

5731 28

5730 72

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos. Switches

10 AX - 250 VA

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Switches 20 AX - 250 VA (continued)

Two module mechanisms White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5730 61 5731 61 2 way switch

Two module mechanisms White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 5 5730 71 5731 71 2 way switch with indicator To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

10 5

5730 72 5731 72

10 5

5730 73 5731 73 2 x 2 way switch + 1 way switch 3 gang

5730 75 5731 75

5730 76 5731 76 1 way - double pole switch with indicator - Red LED supplied

5730 78 5731 78 1 way - double pole switch with indicator and "WATER HEATER" marking - Red LED supplied

5730 63 5731 63

Intermediate switch

Switches 20 AX - 250 VA

Single module mechanisms White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5730 23 5731 23 2 way switch - left module

5730 24 5731 24

2 way switch - middle module

5730 25 5731 25

2 way switch - right module

5730 26 5731 26 2 way switch with indicator left module To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

5730 27 5731 27

2 way switch with indicator middle module To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

5730 28 5731 28

2 way switch with indicator right module To be equipped with LED (p. 85)

5730 30 5731 30

Double pole switch - left module

5730 31 5731 31

Double pole switch - right module

1 way switch - 3 gang

1 way - double pole switch

NEW

ArteorTM

electronic switches - square version

5740 03

5740 01

NEW

ArteorTM

electronic switches - round version

5734 55

5743 00

5743 51

5736 55

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Loads selection chart (p. 83)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Micropush switches - 100/240 VA

2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Without neutral 1 5740 04 5740 54 2 way switch 400 W

White

With neutral With magnesium push control 1 5740 03 5740 53 2 way switch 1 000 W with LED locator To be mounted on 2 module support frame 1 5740 00 5740 50 2 way switch 2 x 1 000 W with LED locator To be mounted on 2 module support frame 1 5740 01 5740 51 2 way switch 3 x 1 000 W with LED locator To be mounted on 2 module support frame

White

Sensitive switches - 100/240 VA

White

Black

5743 02 5743 52 2 way switch 2 x 400 W with LED locator With magnesium circular push control Supplied with support frame With neutral With magnesium circular push control 1 5743 03 5743 53 2 way switch 1 000 W with LED locator To be mounted on 2 module support frame 1 5743 00 5743 50 2 way switch 2 x 1 000 W with LED locator To be mounted on 2 module support frame 1 5743 01 5743 51 2 way switch 3 x 1 000 W with LED locator To be mounted on 2 module support frame

Magnesium

5720 51 5734 55 For controlling light sources by simply passing the hand in front of the switch Up to 5 sensitive switches can be combined to control the same lighting circuit Supplied with LED indicator light 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Micropush switches - 100/240 VA

2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Without neutral 1 5743 04 5743 54 2 way switch 400 W

Black

5740 02 5740 52 2 way switch 2 x 400 W with LED locator With magnesium push control Supplied with support frame

Cat. Nos.

Pack

White

Sensitive switches - 100/240 VA

Magnesium

5725 51 5736 55 For controlling light sources by simply passing the hand in front of the switch Up to 5 sensitive switches can be combined to control the same lighting circuit Supplied with LED indicator light 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx push buttons - square version

5720 01

5725 02

5725 31

xxxxxxxx push buttons - round version

5730 00

5730 01

5730 02

5730 51

5731 80

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Push buttons 6 A - 250 VA

Single module mechanisms White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5 5720 01 5725 01 2 way push button

5720 02 5725 02 2 way push button with locator Equipped with blue LED

Two module mechanisms 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5 5720 31 5725 31 2 way push button

5720 56 5725 56 1 way push button with bell symbol

Cat. Nos.

Push buttons 6 A - 250 VA

Single module mechanisms White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5730 00 5731 00 1 way push button - left module

5730 01 5731 01

1 way push button - middle module

5730 02 5731 02

1 way push button - right module

Two module mechanisms 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 5 5730 51 5731 51 2 way push button

Pack

5730 80 5731 80 1 way push button with bell symbol

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx - square version dimmers

5722 11

xxxxxxxx - round version dimmers

5743 55

5740 08

5743 08

5743 59

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Loads selection chart (p. 83)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Dimmers 100/240 VA - 50/60 Hz

Resistive/inductive loads touch dimmers White Magnesium 5722 11(1) 5727 11(1) Without neutral, 2 wire - 600 W Push button dimmer 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 3 module support frame

White Black Leading/trailing edge dimmers 1 5740 07(1) 5740 57(1) 2 x 400 W Push button dimmer With magnesium push control 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Supplied with support frame

White

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Dimmers 100/240 VA - 50/60 Hz

White Magnesium Resistive/inductive loads touch dimmers 1 5743 05(1) 5743 55(1) Without neutral, 2 wire - 600 W Push button dimmer 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 3 module support frame Leading/trailing edge dimmers White Black 1 5743 07(1) 5743 57(1) 2 x 400 W Push button dimmer With magnesium circular push control 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Supplied with support frame

Magnesium

White

Magnesium

1 5740 06(1) 5740 56(1) 600 W Push button dimmer 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 3 module support frame

White Black Universal dimmers 1 5740 08 5740 58 With neutral, 3 wire - 300 W Can be used with compact fluorescent lamps Push button dimmer With magnesium push control 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 2 module support frame Dimmers 0-10 V 1 5722 10(1) 5727 10(1) For ballasts 0-10 V Push button dimmer With magnesium push control 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 2 module support frame

White Black Universal dimmers 1 5743 08 5743 58 With neutral, 3 wire - 300 W Can be used with compact fluorescent lamps Push button dimmer With magnesium circular push control 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 2 module support frame Dimmers 0-10 V 1 5743 09(1) 5743 59(1) For ballasts 0-10 V Push button dimmer With magnesium circular push control 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 2 module support frame

(1) 2 way dimmer option available using additional push button (see p. 80)

5743 06(1) 5743 56(1) 600 W Push button dimmer 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm To be mounted on 3 module support frame

(1) 2 way dimmer option available using additional push button (see p. 80)

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx lighting environment controller

ArteorTM

lighting environment controller

n Lighting environment controller A

Choice of scenes : (factory configuration) A : 100 % C : OFF B : 66 % D : 33 % Manual setting on each of 3 channels : light dimming / switching ON/OFF

Wiring principle With 0-10 V ballasts

5740 60

Loads selection chart (p. 83) Mechanism supplied complete with white or magnesium square cover plate, flush mounting box, support frame and plate 3 21 LN

Cat. Nos. Lighting

Pack

environment controller L

White

Magnesium

5740 10(1) 5740 60(2) Main controller 3 x 1 000 W Particularly suitable for controlling lighting environments in conference rooms, meeting rooms, restaurants, showrooms, etc. Possible applications : - control of 3 lighting circuits in one room - control of lighting environments by dimming polychromatic lamps (red / green / blue or warm white / cold white) Sources supported per circuit : - 1 000 W for incandescent and halogen 230 VA, - 1 000 VA for fluorescent tubes with 0-10 V ballast, - 1 000 VA for ELV halogen lamps with ferromagnetic or electronic transformer The cumulative load of the 3 circuits must not exceed 2 200 W DALI input ballast and 0-10 V ballasts can be controlled Controls on front face : - 6 push buttons for on/off / dimming control of each of the 3 lighting circuits - 3 sets of 5 LEDs displaying the current level of each circuit - 4 push buttons for memorising and controlling lighting environments

(1) Supplied with white plate (2) Supplied with mirror black plate

By controlling the RGB proportions, you can create scenes favouring warm or cold colours or scenes with dominant colours The possibilities and results are identical using LED (lights) piloted by 0-10 V ballast Possibility to mix channels with different types of lamps (example : 1 channel for 0-10 V ballast, 2 channels with incandescent lamp dimmer)

ArteorTM

loads selection chart

n Electronic switches, dimmers, lighting environment controller max. loads Universal Leading edge

Trailing edge

Cat. Nos. Incandescent lamp

Micropush switches

Sensitive switches

Dimmers

5740 04/54 5743 04/54 5740 03/53 5743 03/53 5740 00/50 5743 00/50 5740 01/51 5743 01/51 5740 02/52 5743 02/52 5720 51 5734 55 5725 51 5736 55 5740 06/56 5743 06/56 5722 11 5727 11 5743 05/55 5740 08/58 5743 08/58 5740 07/57 5743 07/57 5740 10/60

ELV halogen with ferromagnetic transformer

Halogen lamp

ELV halogen with electronic transformer

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

200 W

400 W

200 W

400 W

200 VA

400 VA

200 VA

400 VA

500 W

1 000 W

500 W

1 000 W

250 VA

500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

2x 500 W 3x 500 W 2x 200 W

2x 1 000 W 3x 1 000 W 2x 400 W

2x 500 W 3x 500 W 2x 200 W

2x 1 000 W 3x 1 000 W 2x 400 W

2x 250 VA 3x 250 VA 2x 200 VA

2x 500 VA 3x 500 VA 2x 400 VA

2x 250 VA 3x 250 VA 2x 200 VA

2x 500 VA 3x 500 VA 2x 400 VA

500 W

1 000 W

500 W

1 000 W

250 VA

500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

300 W

600 W

300 W

600 W

225 VA

450 VA

300 VA

600 VA

300 W

600 W

300 W

600 W

300 VA

600 VA

–

150 W

300 W

150 W

300 W

150 VA

300 VA

150 VA

300 VA

2x 200 W

2x 400 W

2x 200 W

2x 400 W

2x 200 VA

2x 400 VA

2x 200 VA

2x 400 VA

1 100 W

2 200 W

1 100 W

2 200 W

1 100 VA

2 200 VA

1 100 VA

2 200 VA

Universal

Cat. Nos. Fluorescent tube

Micropush switches

Sensitive switches Dimmers

5740 03/53 5743 03/53 5740 00/50 5743 00/50 5740 01/51 5743 01/51 5720 51 5734 55 5725 51 5736 55 5740 08/58 5743 08/58

Compact fluorescent lamp

LED

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

250 VA

500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

2 x 250 VA

2 x 500 VA

2 x 250 VA

2 x 500 VA

2 x 250 VA

2 x 500 VA

3 x 250 VA

3 x 500 VA

3 x 250 VA

3 x 500 VA

3 x 250 VA

3 x 500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

250 VA

500 VA

–

80 VA

160 VA

80 VA

160 VA

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

110 V

230 V

–

50 VA

100 VA

–

2 x 50 VA

2 x 100 VA

–

3 x 50 VA

3 x 100 VA

–

50 VA

100 VA

300 VA 40 mA

600 VA 40 mA

–

1 100 VA 50 mA

2 200 VA 50 mA

60 ballast

–

Cat. Nos. Ballasts 0-10 V

Micropush switches

Sensitive switches

Dimmers

5740 03/53 5743 03/53 5740 00/50 5743 00/50 5740 01/51 5743 01/51 5720 51 5734 55 5725 51 5736 55 5722 10 5727 10 5743 09/59 5740 10/60

Ballasts DALI

Reducer motor for shutters

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

Lighting: Lighting: put a stop to put a stop to energy waste energy waste

xxxxxxxx switches automatic

Up to 20% of a building’s electricity bill can be20% attributed to lighting. Legrand’s Up to of a building’s electricity bill new occupancy sensors can help cut can be attributed to lighting. Legrand’s this newcost... occupancy sensors can help cut this cost...

5720 53

5740 62

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98 to 101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98 to 111) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Automatic switches - 100/240 VA

IR detection Adjustable detection distance from 3 to 10 m Horizontal detection angle : 180° Adjustable luminosity threshold : 3 to 1 000 lux Time delay adjustable from 1 sec. to 16 mins. Cycle repeated as long as movement is detected Possible remote manual control with N/C push button Integrated self-protection against overloads and short-circuits Installation in box min. depth 40 mm recommended 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium With neutral, 3 wire - 1 000 W 5720 53 5740 61 Operates : - up to 1 000 W incandescent and halogen lamps - up to 500 VA ELV halogen lamps with ferromagnetic or electronic transformer, fluorescent tubes and compact fluorescent lamps Without neutral, 2 wire - 400 W 5720 52 5740 62 Operates : - up to 400 W incandescent and halogen lamps - up to 400 VA ELV halogen lamps with ferromagnetic or electronic transformer

energy saving energy saving

With a positive effect on the environment... and on the With a positive effect on the environment... and on theswitch wallet... these new occupancy sensors automatically wallet... these new sensors automatically switch off lighting when it’soccupancy not needed. off lighting when it’s not needed. • PIR • ULTRASONIC • DUAL TECHNOLOGY • • PIR • ULTRASONIC • DUAL TECHNOLOGY • Three different technologies are available, each offering Three different technologies are available, each offering simple installation and maintenance. simple installation and maintenance.

ii 84 84 84

For more information See p. 176-179 For more information See p. 176-179

For lighting management

see p. 176-177

NEW

ArteorTM

lighting control

NEW

ArteorTM

visual indication

5720 55

5727 26

5724 23

5724 52

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Interference suppression conforming to standard EN 55022 5720 55 5740 84 For timer control of a circuit with the following loads : - 1 000 W incandescent and halogen 230 VA - 2 300 W resistive (heating) - 400 VA fluorescent and ELV halogen Adjustable from 25 secs. to 15 mins. It is possible to install a number of timer switches in parallel on the same circuit 2 wire installation in box min. depth 40 mm With integrated LED 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White

Time delay switches

Cat. Nos.

5722 22

Magnesium

Single pole latching relays White

Pack

White

Illuminates automatically upon power failure Unclips from frame to become portable Can be permanently attached to frame LEDs indicating mains and charging status

Skirting lights

2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm For installation close to obstacles White Magnesium Standard With LED 230 V - 0.2 or 1 W 5722 21 5740 82 Square version

With motion detector 100-240 V With IR detection cell and LED When a person passes, the mechanism detects the presence and lights the obstacle The function is equipped with an audible signal that can be disengaged 5722 26 5727 26 Square version

Magnesium

5722 27 5727 27

10 A - 250 VA - 50/60 Hz With integrated push button Intensity 0.04 A 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Key switches White

Miniature emergency lighting unit

074725a

Magnesium o0740 04

Supplied with key 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 5722 32 5727 32 2 way

5722 33 5727 33

0 Available October 201

Illuminated lighting unit

Double pole White

5724 52

230 V - 1 W Supplied with 4 coloured labels 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

Overdoor lighting units White

10 10

5724 53 5722 23

10 10 10

5724 56 5724 55 5724 54

Supplied with diffusers and LED 2 modules : 22.5 x 45 mm Red diffuser White diffuser

Lamps LED 230 V for locator switch - blue LED 230 V for indicator switch - red LED 12 V for indicator switch - red

NEW

ArteorTM

ventilation and heating control

5722 18

NEW

ArteorTM

electric roller blind and curtain control

5722 03

5722 19

5727 20

5737 19

5722 02

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Fan controller

White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 1 5722 18 5727 18 Rotary speed controller for fan Operates 40 to 400 VA limit switch For progressive speed control of ceiling fan

Cat. Nos.

Electric roller blind control - 250 VA

White Magnesium Push buttons Double push button - 6 A For control via automatic box (N/O mechanism) 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5722 19 5727 19 Square version

Thermostats

2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Electronic room thermostat 1 5722 03 5727 03 Control dial with index and adjustable segments for min. and max. settings Adjustable range from 5 °C to 30 °C (+/- 0.5 °C) Power supply : 230 VA - 50/60 Hz One potential free changeover contact output Suitable for controlling heated ceilings and underfloor heating - LV use breaking capacity : 8 A - 250 VA - resistive inductive circuit 2 A - 250 VA - inductive circuit - ELV use breaking capacity : 12 to 48 VA - 12 to 24 V=, from 1 mA min. to 500 mA max. Thermostat for electric floor heating 1 5722 63 5727 63 With one potential free N/O contact and LED 16 A - 230 VA Adjustable range from 10 °C to 60 °C With probe

Pack

5732 19 5737 19

Round version

Switches Double switch - 10 A For direct control of a motor (mechanism with fixed positions) 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5722 20 5727 20 Square version

5732 20 5737 20

Round version

Curtain control

White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 5 5722 02 5727 02 Curtain switch centre off

5722 01 5727 01

Curtain switch centre retract

NEW

ArteorTM

hotel equipment – square version lighting, electric roller blind and curtain control

5732 84

5737 22

5733 82

NEW

ArteorTM

hotel equipment – round version lighting, electric roller blind and curtain control

5732 34

5737 85

5737 35

5732 95

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Lighting control with specific marking

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Lighting control with specific marking

White Magnesium Master controls 10 5732 84 5737 84 Master switch 2 way double pole 20 AX - 250 V± for general control : all ON / all OFF 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 86 5737 86 Master push button 2 way - 6 A - 250 V± for general control : all ON / all OFF 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Controls for bed lights 10 5732 94 5737 94 2 x 2 way switch 10 AX - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 96 5737 96 2 x 2 way push button 6 A - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm Controls for desk and entrance lights 10 5733 82 5738 82 2 x 2 way switch 10 AX - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5733 84 5738 84 2 x 2 way push button 6 A - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

White Magnesium Master controls 10 5732 85 5737 85 Master switch 2 way double pole 20 AX - 250 V± for general control : all ON / all OFF 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 87 5737 87 Master push button 2 way - 6 A - 250 V± for general control : all ON / all OFF 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Controls for bed lights 10 5732 95 5737 95 2 x 2 way switch 10 AX - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 97 5737 97 2 x 2 way push button 6 A - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm Controls for desk and entrance lights 10 5733 83 5738 83 2 x 2 way switch 10 AX - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5733 85 5738 85 2 x 2 way push button 6 A - 250 V± 2 x 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5732 22 5737 22 Double switch - 10 A For direct control of a motor (mechanism with fixed positions) Roller blinds marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 24 5737 24 Double push button - 6 A For control via automatic box (N/O mechanism) Roller blinds marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5732 23 5737 23 Double switch - 10 A For direct control of a motor (mechanism with fixed positions) Roller blinds marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 25 5737 25 Double push button - 6 A For control via automatic box (N/O mechanism) Roller blinds marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

TER MAS

TER

MAS

White

TER

MAS

Magnesium

Electric roller blind control with specific marking - 250 V±

TER MAS

Curtain control with specific marking - 250 V±

Magnesium

5732 34 5737 34 Double switch - 10 A For direct control of a motor (mechanism with fixed positions) Curtain marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 36 5737 36 Double push button - 6 A For control via automatic box (N/O mechanism) Curtain marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45mm

White

Magnesium

White

Electric roller blind control with specific marking - 250 V±

Curtain control with specific marking - 250 V±

Magnesium

5732 35 5737 35 Double switch - 10 A For direct control of a motor (mechanism with fixed positions) Curtain marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5732 37 5737 37 Double push button - 6 A For control via automatic box (N/O mechanism) Curtain marking 2 modules 22.5 x 45mm

NEW

ArteorTM

hotel equipment BUS and Radio scenario controllers

5745 87

NEW

ArteorTM

hotel equipment key fob switches, shaver sockets

5745 91

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) 5727 30

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Scenario controllers with specific marking

Radio controls 4-scenes micropush control Surface mounting, no wiring needed For BUS or radio installations Mechanisms equipped with white or black round cover plate and magnesium circular push control for 4 scenarios Supplied with support frames and batteries To be equipped with plates p. 98-111 White Black 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 5740 87 5745 87 "wake up / sleep / TV / relax" marking 5740 88 5745 88 "wake up / sleep / open curtains / close curtains" marking

5721 53

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Key fob switches

For energising a circuit by inserting a key fob Cat. Nos. 5722 59 and 5727 59 or a smart card (access card for a hotel room) Example of use : hotel room power supply only when guest is present Time-delay of approx. 30 secs. after card removal To be equipped with single pole latching relay Cat. Nos. 5722 27 and 5727 27 (p. 85) White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 1 5722 30 5727 30 Key fob switch 230 V

Touch plates for radio controls 4-scenes touch plate White Black British Standard fixing centres 1 5740 90 5745 90 "wake up / sleep / TV / relax" marking Key fobs Can replace standard rocker plates and plates on 4-scenes radio White Magnesium controllers Cat. Nos. 5740 87, 5745 87 10 5722 59 5727 59 Key fob 1 5740 93 5745 93 "wake up / sleep / open curtains / Enables use of key fob switches close curtains" marking in hotels with key locks Can replace standard rocker plate Supplied complete with a label holder and plates on 4-scenes radio for individual hotel identification controllers Cat. Nos. 5740 88, 5745 88 BUS controls Shaver sockets 1 5740 89 5745 89 4-scenes touch control for the activation of 4 scenarios : Conform to BS EN 61558-2-5. IP 24 "wake up / sleep / TV / relax" For use with European, British, American, 2 module mechanisms Australian 2-pin plugs For British Standard flush mounting Screwless live and neutral terminals boxes Double wound isolating transformer 1 5740 91 5745 91 6-scenes touch control for the Automatic self-resetting overload feature activation of 6 scenarios : Plug insertion operates micro-switch which "wake up / sleep / TV / relax / energises transformer open curtains / close curtains" To be equipped with BS 2 gang - 3 module 3 module mechanisms plates (p. 98 to 111) For British, Italian and American Standard For flush mounting boxes, use BS 2 gang flush mounting boxes box depth 48 mm, US type, Italian type boxes depth 48 mm Power supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Accessories White Magnesium 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 1 5721 53 5726 53 230 V / 120-230 V Sheet of stickers with symbols for different With earth connector scenarios for hotel rooms 10 5740 92 Dark colour 10 5745 92 White colour 230V 120V

Complete home automation solutions (see p. 12-

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

hotel equipment â&#x20AC;&#x201C; square version xxxxxxxx call indicators, illuminated signs, buzzers

5720 57

5725 54

hotel equipment â&#x20AC;&#x201C; round version xxxxxxxx call indicators, illuminated signs, buzzers

5725 67

5722 24

5725 74

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round rocker plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Hotel bedroom call indicators

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Hotel bedroom call indicators

Enables the resident to inform hotel staff of the room status Two settings are possible : - Do not disturb - Please clean the room 1 + 1 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Indicator 5 5720 57 5725 57 Indicator lamp and bell push Installed in the corridor, display calls Supplied with LEDs Internal control unit 5 5720 54 5725 54 Allows the user to select the desired setting Supplied with LEDs

Enables the resident to inform hotel staff of the room status Two settings are possible : - Do not disturb - Please clean the room 1 + 1 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Indicator 5 5720 67 5725 67 Indicator lamp and bell push Installed in the corridor, display calls Supplied with LEDs Internal control unit 5 5720 74 5725 74 Allows the user to select the desired setting Supplied with LEDs

Illuminated signs

Mechanisms integrating LEDs and a pivoting window that can take customised labels (printed using a simple text editor on transparent printing paper) 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Green or Red 5 5722 24 5727 24 Sign with 2-state LEDs with choice of green or red configurable on the mechanism 1W Blue 5 5722 25 5727 22 Sign with blue LED A choice of 2 power levels : 0.2 or 1 W

Mechanisms integrating LEDs and a pivoting window that can take customised labels (printed using a simple text editor on transparent printing paper) 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Magnesium Green or Red 5 5727 25 Sign with 2-state LEDs with choice of green or red configurable on the mechanism 1W Blue 5 5727 23 Sign with blue LED A choice of 2 power levels : 0.2 or 1 W

Buzzers

White Magnesium 10 5722 07 5722 47 230 V 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Buzzers

White Magnesium 10 5722 08 5722 48 230 V 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

NEW

TM Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx data, audio and video sockets â&#x20AC;&#x201C; square version

5727 75

5722 72

5727 73

5722 74

5722 79

5722 81

5744 01

5722 76

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Data sockets

White Magnesium RJ 45 tool-less system - Cat. 6 10 5723 14 5728 14 Rapid connection socket. No tool required UTP - 8 contacts 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm USB sockets 1 5722 75 5727 75 Used to bring connections closer to the user For connecting USB devices (scanner-printer, external hard disk) Connection via screw terminals cross-section 1 mmÂ˛ Recommended cable : USB A max. cable length 5 m 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

Audio and video sockets 2 x female RCA 1 5722 72 5727 72 For the stereo audio connection of any DVD drive, camera, video recorder, etc. type peripheral Recommended cable : 1 shielded audio pair 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 3 x female RCA 1 5722 73 5727 73 For the composite video and stereo audio connection of a DVD drive, camera, video recorder, video conference equipment etc. Recommended cable : 1 shielded audio pair + 1 x 3 mm mini-coaxial 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm YUV 1 5722 71 5727 71 For analog high definition connection of a DVD, PC monitor, plasma screen, video projector, graphic paintbox, etc. Recommended cable : 3 x 3 mm minicoaxial (max. cable length 25 m) or 3 x RG59 coaxial (max. cable length 50 m) 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm Female 3.5 mm jack For stereo audio connection from a portable source Recommended cable : 1 x 0.22 mm2 shielded audio pair 1 5722 74 5727 74 Connection on screw terminals 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Audio and video sockets (continued)

Female HD 15 For VGA, XGA or VESA connection of a PC monitor, plasma screen, video projector, graphic paintbox, etc. Recommended cable Cat. No. 0327 81 Max. cable length 25 m (beyond this a VGA White Magnesium amplifier is recommended) 5722 82 5727 82 Connection on screw terminals 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 5722 79 5727 79 Solder connection 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

HDMI 1 5722 81 5727 81 For digital high definition audio and video connection of a PC monitor, plasma screen, video projector, graphic paintbox, etc. Recommended cable Cat. No. 0327 80 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm S-Video socket (4-pin mini-DIN) 1 5744 01 5744 51 1 gang Provides the YC video link for any peripheral device such as a DVD drive, camera, video recorder, videoconferencing, etc 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm Female BNC 75 1 5722 76 5727 76 For the composite video connection of any DVD drive, camera, video recorder, etc. Recommended cable : RG59 coaxial Max. cable length : 10 m 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

NEW

ArteorTM

data, audio and video sockets â&#x20AC;&#x201C; round version

5732 74

5728 24

5737 73

5727 85

5745 01

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium round cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Data sockets

White Magnesium RJ 45 tool-less system - CAT 6 10 5723 24 5728 24 Rapid connection socket. No tool required UTP - 8 contacts 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm USB sockets 1 5732 74 5737 74 Used to bring connections closer to the user For connecting USB devices (scanner-printer, external hard disk) Connection via screw terminals cross-section 1 mmÂ˛ Recommended cable : USB A max. cable length 5 m 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Audio and video sockets (continued)

White Magnesium HDMI 1 5722 85 5727 85 For digital high definition audio and video connection of a PC monitor, plasma screen, video projector, graphic paintbox, etc. Recommended cable Cat. No. 0327 80 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm S-Video socket (4-pin mini-DIN) 1 5745 01 5745 51 1 gang Provides the YC video link for any peripheral device such as a DVD drive, camera, video recorder, videoconferencing, etc 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Audio and video sockets 2 x female RCA 1 5732 72 5737 72 For the stereo audio connection of any DVD drive, camera, video recorder, etc. type peripheral Recommended cable : 1 shielded audio pair 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 3 x female RCA 1 5732 73 5737 73 For the composite video and stereo audio connection of a DVD drive, camera, video recorder, video conference equipment etc. Recommended cable : 1 shielded audio pair + 1 x 3 mm mini-coaxial 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

More television, telephone, data, audio and video sockets see p. 94-95 91

TM NEW pour Arteor exemple : xxxxxxx

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx detectors

5740 15

5740 64

xxxxxxxx RCBO and fuse carrier unit

5740 36

5723 60

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Mechanisms supplied with square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

5740 15 5740 65 Indicates with a LED the presence of a conducting liquid The height at which the sensor is installed determines the level of flooding Consumption : . - 0 1 mA in stand-by mode - 25 mA in alarm mode 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 60

Single pole + neutral - 30 mA 16 A - 230 VA The RCBO is used to protect people (premises with a conductive floor, presence of water, etc...) against direct contact with live parts or leakages to earth With test button 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Fuse carrier unit

Cat. Nos.

White

Water leak detectors

Magnesium

White

Gas detectors

Indicates the presence of gas via a LED and audible alarm signal 85 dB at 1 m 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium LPG/Propane/Butane gas detectors 1 5740 14 5740 64 Consumption max. 2 W in alarm mode Methane gas detectors 1 5740 13 5740 63 Consumption max. 2 W in alarm mode

Accessories

To be used with detectors 2 wire connection 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium Transformers 1 5740 35 5740 85 230 V - 12 V

Actuators 1 5740 36 5740 86 For technical alarms

RCBO

White

Magnesium

5721 58 5726 58 For 13 A fuses 0 Available October 201

NEWpour exemple : xxxxxxx

TM Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxxunits - Bristish and International standard socket outlets xxxxxxxx modular

5721 18

5721 10

5721 04

5726 33

5721 17

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white, magnesium or red square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

British standard socket outlets

Shuttered for child safety Use 2 or 3 module plates and support frames (p. 98-111) 5A White Magnesium Conform to BS 546 10 5721 10 5726 10 2P+E 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 13 A Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 10 5721 11 5726 11 2P+E ASTA licence 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 5 5721 30 5726 30 2P+E switched ASTA licence 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Red

5724 67 2P+E switched - dedicated non-standard pin 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

15 A White Magnesium Conform to BS 546 5 5721 32 5726 32 2P+E switched 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

International standards socket outlets

Not suitable for domestic installations in the UK and Ireland White Magnesium German 16 A 10 5721 18 5726 18 2P+E Shuttered for child safety 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5721 19 5726 19 2P+E with cover 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

French 10/16 A 10 5720 21 5725 21 2P+E shuttered for child safety 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Cat. Nos.

International standards socket outlets (continued)

Not suitable for domestic installations in the UK and Ireland Euro-US type socket outlets 15 A - 127 V - 10 A - 250 V With shutters Special care should be taken when White Magnesium specifying and installing these sockets 10 5721 04 5726 04 2P 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5721 16 5726 16 2P+E 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5721 33 5726 33 2 x 2P+E 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

American 15 A - 127 V 10 5721 17 5726 17 2P+E 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Pack

South African 16 A Conform to SANS 164 Shuttered for child safety 5721 32 5726 32 2P+E switched 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

ELV socket outlets 10/16 A 10 5721 03 5726 03 2P+E shuttered for child safety Switzerland 10 A White Shuttered for child safety 10 5721 15 2P+E Type 13 - 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm China 10 A White Magnesium Shuttered for child safety 10 5721 13 5726 13 2P+E 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Multi-standard socket outlets

Not suitable for domestic installations in the UK and Ireland Special care should be taken when White Magnesium specifying and installing these sockets 10 5721 23 5726 23 2P+E shuttered 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx and telephone sockets television

5721 72

5726 72

xxxxxxxx data sockets and wiring splitter

5723 00

5723 06

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Television sockets

For aerial and satellite installation (with individual demodulator) DTT and HDTV compatible TV : male connector (Ø9.5 mm) attenuation ≤ 1.5 db R : female connector (Ø9.5 mm) attenuation ≤ 1.5 db SAT : "F" type connector attenuation ≤ 2 db Recommended coaxial cable : 17/19 VATC White Magnesium TV sockets 10 5721 63 5726 63 TV single shielded "F" type with screws 0-2400 MHz 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5721 71 5726 71 TV single shielded male Ø9.5 mm 0-2400 MHz 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm TV-R socket 10 5721 70 5726 70 TV-R shielded socket female-male Ø9.5 mm 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm TV-R-SAT socket 10 5721 72 5726 72 TV-R-SAT shielded socket 0-2400 MHz 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Television socket (Ø 9/9.5 female)

TV 0-860 MHz

White

5734 25 TV single Non-isolated

Telephone sockets

With IDC connection White Magnesium

5723 10(1) 5728 10(1) Single master 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 01(1) 5728 01(1) Single secondary 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

RJ 11 sockets

Equipped with modular jack connector with 1/4 turn terminal for fast connection White Magnesium (possible looping) 5723 00 5728 00 4 contacts 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5728 35

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111) Certified as conforming to standards ISO 11801 ed. 2.0, EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA 568 Contacts marked with 568 A and B dual colour code and numbers Connectors with self-stripping terminals Possibility of re-wiring in the event of error Multidirectional cable entry

Pack

Cat. Nos.

RJ 45 - tool-less system

Rapid connection sockets. No tool required 10 Giga Supports 10 G base-T applications up to 100 m in a channel conforming to ISO/IEC White Magnesium TIA TSB 155 and IEEE 802.3an 10 5723 06 5728 06 STP/FTP - 9 contacts, shielded folded metal 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm CAT 6 10 5723 23 5728 23 STP - 9 contacts, shielded folded metal 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 22 5728 22 FTP - 9 contacts 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 02 5728 02 UTP - 8 contacts 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 24 5728 24 UTP - 8 contacts 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Round version CAT 5e 10 5723 04 5728 04 FTP - 9 contacts 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 03 5728 03 UTP - 8 contacts 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

Rear pluggable RJ 45 sockets

Connection to boxes via RJ 45-RJ 45 dedicated cords Used to create CAT 6 and CAT 5e links in accordance with standards 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm White Magnesium CAT 6 10 5723 31 5728 31 UTP 10 5723 33 5728 33 FTP

(1) Not suitable for use in the ROI

5723 31

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101) Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

5728 02

Telephone/Ethernet wiring splitters

Provide increased security against theft and damage to double connectors Provide a rate of 10/100 Mbps Multidirectional cable entry Can be installed in all supports min. depth 35 mm Telephone and Ethernet applications marked on the protective cap White Magnesium 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 5723 35 5728 35 UTP double connector 8 contacts

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx for data sockets and USB sockets adaptors

5723 05

5728 38

5727 75

xxxxxxxx and loudspeaker sockets attenuator

5722 84

5732 74

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

5722 70

5722 83

5722 90

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Adaptors and mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium cover plate To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111) and connector (for adaptors)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium square cover plate To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Adaptors for data sockets

Equipped with transparent label holder White Magnesium Ortronics 10 5723 05 5728 05 Adaptor for single Clarity TRACKJACK connector Straight plug 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5723 34 5728 34 Adaptor for single Clarity TRACKJACK connector Inclined plug 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10 5723 18 5728 18 Adaptor for single Clarity Rear load connector Straight plug 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm Keystone 10 5723 37 5728 37 Adaptor for single connector 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Systimax 10 5723 38 5728 38 Adaptor for single connector 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

USB female sockets

Used to bring connections closer to the user For connecting USB devices (scannerprinter, external hard disk) Connection via screw terminals cross-section 1 mmÂ˛ White Magnesium Recommended cable : USB A 5722 75 5727 75 Square version 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm 5732 74 5737 74 Round version 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Cat. Nos.

White

Attenuator

Magnesium

5722 84 5727 84 100 V - 25 W Allow to adjust power to 25 W from a balanced 100 V loudspeaker line 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

3-pole XLR sockets

For the stereo connection of any peripheral, microphone, mixing console Recommended microphone cable : 1 x 0.22 mm2 shielded audio pair Recommended speaker cable : 1 x 1.5 mm2 audio pair (will take 2.5 mm2) Max. cable length : 50 m (beyond this an audio amplifier is recommended) White Magnesium 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 5722 83 5727 83 Neutrik female

5722 77 5727 77

5722 70 5727 70 4 mm2 terminals 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5722 80 5727 80 4 mm2 terminals 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

White

Loudspeaker sockets

Magnesium

Neutrik male

Home cinema loudspeaker sockets

Magnesium

5722 90 5727 90 2 connectors 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5722 91 5727 91 4 connectors 3 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxxmechanisms ancillary

5728 41

5731 86

5723 21

xxxxxxxxcover plates blanking

5751 31

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mechanisms supplied with white or magnesium cover plates To be equipped with support frames (p. 97) and plates (p. 98-111)

Square version plates 3 finishes : White, Pearl Alu and Graphite

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Blank modules

Pack

Cat. Nos.

White Magnesium Square version 10 5723 41 5728 41 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 42 5728 42

2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

Round version 5730 86 5731 86 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm 10

Cable outlets

White Square version mechanisms 10 5723 20 20 A cable outlet for junction 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 21 45 A cable outlet - BS 1 gang Supplied with white cover plate For flush mounting back box min. depth 45 mm

Cord outlets

White Square version mechanisms 10 5723 07 Cord outlet with Ă&#x2DC;8 mm entry 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm

5723 19 Cord outlet 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm

5 5 5

For 1 gang box

5751 30 5751 31 5751 32

British standard blanking cover plates White Pearl Alu Graphite

For 2 gang box

5751 40 5751 41 5751 42

White Pearl Alu Graphite

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx British standard support frames and supports

5760 03

xxxxxxxx surface mounting, flush mounting boxes and IP 44 plate

5760 01

5760 00

5723 90

5723 92

5760 16

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Support frames for BS type boxes 60.3 mm fixing centres

Screw mounting (screws supplied) Accept mechanisms horizontally or vertically For 1 gang box 10 5760 03 Square - for 1 or 2 modules

5760 01

Square - for 3 modules

5751 90

Pack

PRIL 20

BLE A Cat. Nos. Surface mounting boxes AVAILA

For British, German and French standards 10 5723 90 For 2 modules - 1 gang 38 mm depth

5723 92 For 4 horizontal modules 2 x 2 modules - 2 gang 48 mm depth (suitable for shaver socket)

5723 96 For 2 x 6 modules 38 mm depth

For 2 gang box 10 5760 02 Rectangular - for 3 modules

5760 00

Rectangular - for 2 x 2 modules

Panel mounting supports

For 1 to 3 mm thick panels 10 5760 15 For 1 module 22.5 x 45 mm Clips into a 28 x 53.5 mm aperture 10 5760 16 For 2 modules 22.5 x 45 mm Clips into a 58 x 53.5 mm aperture

Flush mounting galvanised steel back boxes

Depth 42 mm 1 6890 27 For 6 module plate assemblies Dimensions : 72 x 212 mm

6890 28 For 12 module plate assemblies Dimensions : 143 x 212 mm

0818 56 For 18 module plate assemblies (fitted with voltage separation barrier) Dimensions : 212 x 212 mm

8218 59 For 8 module plate assemblies Dimensions : 72 x 227 mm

Modular support

5760 13 For mounting 2 module mechanisms on symmetrical rail

IP 44 plate

For British and German standards 5 5751 90 For mounting in 1 gang box Support frame supplied 96 x 94 mm

NEW

ArteorTM

British standard 60.3 mm fixing centres - mounting boxes, support frames and plates

plates Number of modules per mechanism

Neutral Mounting boxes

Support frames

1 module

1 gang(1)

2 modules and 1.2" touch screen

Plates

Tattoo

Graphic

White

Pearl Alu

Graphite

Edition 1

Casual

Formal

5760 03

5752 00

5752 01

5752 02

5761 08

5761 01

5761 02

1 gang(1)

5760 03 5760 01(3)

5752 10

5752 11

5752 12

5761 28

5761 21

5761 22

3 modules - 1 gang

1 gang(1)

5760 01

5751 60

5751 61

5751 62

5761 88

5761 81

5761 82

3 modules and shaver sockets

2 gang(2)

5760 02

5750 70

5750 71

5750 72

5761 68

5761 61

5761 62

4 modules

2 gang(2)

5760 00

5750 80

5750 81

5750 82

5761 48

5761 41

5761 42

6 modules

(surface mounting)

Supplied with plate

5753 70

5753 71

5753 72

5763 78

5763 71

5763 72

Supplied with plate

5753 90

5753 91

5753 92

–

0818 56

Supplied with plate

5754 00

5754 01

5754 02

–

Square version

5723 93

6890 27

(flush mounting)

5723 96

2 x 6 modules

(surface mounting)

6890 28

(flush mounting)

3 x 6 modules

(flush mounting)

8 modules

(flush mounting)

8218 59

Supplied with plate

5767 00

5767 01

5767 02

5767 18

5767 11

5767 12

For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

1 gang(1)

Not required

5750 90

5750 91

5750 92

5762 18

5762 11

5762 12

For 13 A twin switched socket outlet - 2 gang

2 gang(2)

Not required

5751 00

5751 01

5751 02

5762 08

5762 01

5762 02

For 13 A fused connection unit switched

1 gang(1)

Not required

5751 20

5751 21

5751 22

5761 98

5761 91

5761 92

For cooker unit Cat. No. 5720 88

2 gang(2)

Not required

5751 50

–

Blanking cover plate British standard

1 gang(1)

5760 03 or 5760 01

5751 30

5751 31

5751 32

–

Blanking cover plate British standard

2 gang(2)

5760 02

5751 40

5751 41

5751 42

–

(1) Suitable for use with 1 gang back boxes. For Legrand options, see p. 97 (2) Suitable for use with 2 gang back boxes. For Legrand options, see p. 97 (3) Use 5760 01 support frame for 2 module mechanisms to be mounted on 3 module support frame, see p. 97

plates Mirror

Brushed metal

Wood

Leather

Signature

Mirror white

Mirror black

Mirror red

Mirror taupe

Stainless steel

Gold brass

Wenge style

Light oak

Club

Galuchat

Woven metal

5752 04

5752 03

5761 06

5761 05

5752 06

5761 00

5752 05

5761 09

5761 03

5761 04

5761 07

5752 14

5752 13

5761 26

5761 25

5752 16

5761 20

5752 15

5761 29

5761 23

5761 24

5761 27

5751 64

5751 63

5761 86

5761 85

5751 66

5761 80

5751 65

5761 89

5761 83

5761 84

5761 87

5750 74

5750 73

5761 66

5761 65

5750 76

5761 60

5750 75

5761 69

5761 63

5761 64

5761 67

5750 84

5750 83

5761 46

5761 45

5750 86

5761 40

5750 85

5761 49

5761 43

5761 44

5761 47

5753 74

5753 73

5763 76

5763 75

5753 76

5763 70

5753 75

5763 79

5763 73

5763 74

5763 77

–

5767 04

5767 03

5767 16

5767 15

5767 06

5767 10

5767 05

5767 19

5767 13

5767 14

5767 17

5750 94

5750 93

5762 16

5762 15

5750 96

5762 10

5750 95

5762 19

5762 13

5762 14

5762 17

5751 04

5751 03

5762 06

5762 05

5751 06

5762 00

5751 05

5762 09

5762 03

5762 04

5762 07

5751 24

5751 23

5761 96

5761 95

5751 26

5761 90

5751 25

5761 99

5761 93

5761 94

5761 97

–

NEW

ArteorTM

British standard 60.3 mm fixing centres - mounting boxes, support frames and plates

plates Number of modules per mechanism

Neutral Mounting boxes

Support frames

2 modules

1 gang(1)

3 modules

Plates

Tattoo

Graphic

White

Pearl Alu

Graphite

Edition 1

Casual

Formal

5760 03

5756 10

5756 11

5756 12

5761 18

5761 11

5761 12

2 gang(2)

5760 02

5755 40

5755 41

5755 42

5761 58

5761 51

5761 52

3 modules - 1 gang

1 gang(1)

5760 01

5755 60

5755 61

5755 62

5761 78

5761 71

5761 72

4 modules

2 gang(2)

5760 00

5755 50

5755 51

5755 52

5761 38

5761 31

5761 32

6 modules

(flush mounting)

6890 27

Supplied with plate

5767 40

5767 41

5767 42

5767 58

5767 51

5767 52

2 x 6 modules

(flush mounting)

6890 28

Supplied with plate

5756 90

5756 91

5756 92

–

8 modules

(flush mounting)

8218 59

Supplied with plate

5766 80

5766 81

5766 82

5766 98

5766 91

5766 92

round version

(1) Suitable for use with 1 gang back boxes. For Legrand options, see p. 97 (2) Suitable for use with 2 gang back boxes. For Legrand options, see p. 97

NEW

ArteorTM

special plates

plates

Mechanisms

Flush mounting boxes for dry partitions

Neutral Plates

Tattoo

Graphic

White

Pearl Alu

Graphite

Edition 1

Casual

Formal

–

0893 79

Video internal display unit 2·5" BUS alarm module 3·5" touch screen

(concrete walls)

10" multimedia touch screen

Not required

–

Supplied with box

–

Central unit for temperature control

100

(dry partitions)

0892 79

plates Mirror

Brushed metal

Wood

Leather

Signature

Mirror white

Mirror black

Mirror red

Mirror taupe

Stainless steel

Gold brass

Wenge style

Light oak

Club

Galuchat

Woven metal

5756 14

5756 13

5761 16

5761 15

5756 16

5761 10

5756 15

5761 19

5761 13

5761 14

5761 17

5755 44

5755 43

5761 56

5761 55

5755 46

5761 50

5755 45

5761 59

5761 53

5761 54

5761 57

5755 64

5755 63

5761 76

5761 75

5755 66

5761 70

5755 65

5761 79

5761 73

5761 74

5761 77

5755 54

5755 53

5761 36

5761 35

5755 56

5761 30

5755 55

5761 39

5761 33

5761 34

5761 37

5767 44

5767 43

5767 56

5767 55

5767 46

5767 50

5767 45

5767 59

5767 53

5767 54

5767 57

–

5766 84

5766 83

5766 95

5766 96

5766 86

5766 90

5766 85

5766 99

5766 93

5766 94

5766 97

plates Mirror

Brushed metal

Wood

Leather

Signature

Mirror white

Mirror black

Mirror red

Mirror taupe

Stainless steel

Gold brass

Wenge style

Light oak

Club

Galuchat

Woven metal

5764 84

5764 83

–

5764 86

5764 80

–

5764 87

5765 14

5765 13

–

5765 16

5765 10

–

5765 17

5765 24

5765 23

–

5765 26

5765 20

–

5765 37

101

TM NEW pour Arteor exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5752 00

5750 80

plates - round version

5750 90

5756 10

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

NEW

ArteorTM

Dimensions in mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Neutral

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

British standard White 10 5756 10 2 modules

92 x 92

5755 40

157 x 92

5755 60 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

157 x 92

3 modules

92 x 92

157 x 92

5752 10

5750 70

5751 60 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5755 50

5750 80

157 x 92

5767 40 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5753 70 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5756 90 2 x 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 178

5753 90 2 x 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 178

5766 80 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

2 modules

5755 60

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Neutral

British standard White 10 5752 00 1 module

5755 40

3 modules

4 modules

5754 00 3 x 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 246

5767 00 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5750 90 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet - 1 gang

92 x 92

5751 00 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet - 2 gang

157 x 92

5751 20 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

5751 50 Plate for cooker unit Cat. No. 5720 88

157 x 92

For blanking plates (see p. 96)

102

4 modules

For blanking plates (see p. 96)

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5752 11

5752 12

xxxxxxxx plates - round version

5751 62

5756 11

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Pearl Alu Graphite British standard 10 5752 01 5752 02 1 module

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Neutral

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

Pearl Alu Graphite British standard 10 5756 11 5756 12 2 modules

92 x 92

5755 41 5755 42 3 modules

157 x 92

5755 61 5755 62 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5755 51 5755 52 4 modules

157 x 92

5767 41 5767 42 6 modules Supplied with support frame

5756 91 5756 92 2 x 6 modules 237.5 x 178 Supplied with support frame

5752 11 5752 12

5750 71 5750 72 3 modules

157 x 92

5751 61 5751 62 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5750 81 5750 82 4 modules

157 x 92

5753 71 5753 72 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5753 91 5753 92 2 x 6 modules 237.5 x 178 Supplied with support frame

5754 01 5754 02 3 x 6 modules 237.5 x 246 Supplied with support frame

5767 01 5767 02 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame

5750 91 5750 92 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

157 x 92

5751 01 5751 02 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet 2 gang 5751 21 5751 22 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

5755 62

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Neutral

5756 11

92 x 92

237.5 x 92

5766 81 5766 82 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame 2

For blanking plates (see p. 96)

92 x 92

For blanking plates (see p. 96)

103

NEW

ArteorTM

plates - square version

5761 28

plates - round version

5761 48

5762 18

5761 18

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

5761 28

2 modules

5761 68

5761 88 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

3 modules

4 modules

5761 58

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Cat. Nos. Tattoo

Edition 1 British standard 5 5761 08 1 module

Pack

Cat. Nos. Tattoo

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

Edition 1 British standard 5 5761 18 2 modules

92 x 92

5761 58

157 x 92

5761 78 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 38

157 x 92

5767 58 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 98 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

Dimensions in mm

5761 48

5763 78 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5767 18 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5762 18 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet - 1 gang

92 x 92

5762 08 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet - 2 gang

157 x 92

5761 98 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

104

NEW

ArteorTM

157 x 92

3 modules

4 modules

92 x 92

NEW

ArteorTM

plates - square version

5761 21

plates - round version

5761 22

5761 81

5761 11

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

NEW

ArteorTM

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

Cat. Nos.

Graphic

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

5761 51 5761 52

157 x 92

5761 71 5761 72 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 31 5761 32

157 x 92

5767 51 5767 52 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 91 5766 92 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5761 21 5761 22

5761 61 5761 62

5761 81 5761 82 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 41 5761 42

157 x 92

5763 71 5763 72 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5767 11 5767 12 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5762 11 5762 12 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

5762 01 5762 02 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet - 2 gang

157 x 92

5761 91 5761 92 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

4 modules

Pack

British standard Casual Formal 1 5761 11 5761 12 2 modules

3 modules

5761 71

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Graphic

British standard Casual Formal 1 5761 01 5761 02 1 module

5761 12

3 modules

4 modules

92 x 92

157 x 92

105

NEW

ArteorTM

plates - square version

5752 03

plates - round version

5752 14

5750 93

5756 14

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Mirror

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

5752 14 5752 13

5750 74 5750 73

5751 64 5751 63 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

157 x 92

3 modules

5755 43

5755 63

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mirror

British standard white black 1 5752 04 5752 03 1 module

92 x 92

Pack

5750 84 5750 83 4 modules

5753 74 5753 73 6 modules Supplied with support frame

5767 04 5767 03 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame

5750 94 5750 93 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

5751 04 5751 03 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet 2 gang

157 x 92

5751 24 5751 23 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

237.5 x 92

Special plates 1 5764 84 5764 83 For video internal 127 x 127 display unit 2.5", BUS alarm module and 3.5" touch screen

5765 14 5765 13 For 10" multimedia touch screen

309 x 233

5765 24 5765 23 For central unit for temperature control

165 x 176

Cat. Nos.

Mirror

British standard white black 1 5756 14 5756 13 2 modules

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

5755 44 5755 43

5755 64 5755 63 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5755 54 5755 53 4 modules

157 x 92

5767 44 5767 43 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 84 5766 83 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

157 x 92

106

NEW

ArteorTM

3 modules

157 x 92

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5761 26

xxxxxxxx plates - round version

5761 25

5761 16

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Mirror

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Mirror

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

red taupe British standard 1 5761 16 5761 15 2 modules

92 x 92

5761 56 5761 55

5761 76 5761 75 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 36 5761 35 4 modules

157 x 92

5767 56 5767 55 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 95 5766 96 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5761 26 5761 25

5761 66 5761 65

5761 86 5761 85 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

157 x 92

3 modules

5761 75

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Mirror

red taupe British standard 1 5761 06 5761 05 1 module

5761 15

157 x 92

5761 46 5761 45 4 modules

5763 76 5763 75 6 modules Supplied with support frame

5767 16 5767 15 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame

5762 16 5762 15 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

5762 06 5762 05 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet 2 gang

157 x 92

5761 96 5761 95 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

237.5 x 92

3 modules

92 x 92

157 x 92

107

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5761 20

xxxxxxxx plates - round version

5752 16

5761 10

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

brass steel British standard 1 5761 00 5752 06 1 module

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

Cat. Nos.

Brushed metal

Gold Stainless

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

5761 50 5755 46

5761 70 5755 66 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 30 5755 56 4 modules

157 x 92

5767 50 5767 46 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 90 5766 86 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5761 20 5752 16

5761 60 5750 76

5761 80 5751 66 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

157 x 92

5761 40 5750 86 4 modules

5763 70 5753 76 6 modules Supplied with support frame

5767 10 5767 06 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame

5762 10 5750 96 For 5 A and 13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

5762 00 5751 06 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet 2 gang

157 x 92

5761 90 5751 26 For 13 A fused connection unit 1 gang

92 x 92

237.5 x 92

Special plates 1 5764 80 5764 86 For video internal 127 x 127 display unit 2.5", BUS alarm module and 3.5" touch screen

5765 10 5765 16 For 10" multimedia touch screen

309 x 233

5765 20 5765 26 For central unit for temperature control

165 x 176

108

Pack

brass steel British standard 1 5761 10 5756 16 2 modules

3 modules

5755 46

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Brushed metal

Gold Stainless

5761 70

3 modules

92 x 92

157 x 92

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5752 15

xxxxxxxx plates - round version

5761 29

5756 15

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Wenge

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Wood

Light

style oak British standard 1 5752 05 5761 09 1 module

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Wenge

Wood

Light

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

style oak British standard 1 5756 15 5761 19 2 modules

92 x 92

5755 45 5761 59

5755 65 5761 79 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5755 55 5761 39 4 modules

157 x 92

5767 45 5767 59 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 85 5766 99 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5752 15 5761 29

5750 75 5761 69

5751 65 5761 89 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

157 x 92

3 modules

5761 19

157 x 92

5750 85 5761 49 4 modules

5753 75 5763 79 6 modules Supplied with support frame

5767 05 5767 19 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame

5750 95 5762 19 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

5751 05 5762 09 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet 2 gang

157 x 92

5751 25 5761 99 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

237.5 x 92

3 modules

92 x 92

157 x 92

109

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5761 23

5761 24

xxxxxxxx plates - round version

5761 84

5761 13

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Club Galuchat British standard 1 5761 03 5761 04 1 module

2 modules

Dimensions in mm

Cat. Nos.

Leather

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

5761 53 5761 54

5761 73 5761 74 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 33 5761 34 4 modules

157 x 92

5767 53 5767 54 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 93 5766 94 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5761 23 5761 24

5761 63 5761 64

5761 83 5761 84 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

157 x 92

127 x 92

5761 43 5761 44 4 modules

5763 73 5763 74 6 modules Supplied with support frame

5767 13 5767 14 8 modules 252.5 x 92 Supplied with support frame

5762 13 5762 14 For 5 A and 13 A switched socket outlet 1 gang

92 x 92

5762 03 5762 04 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet 2 gang

157 x 92

5761 93 5761 94 For 13 A fused connection unit 1 gang

92 x 92

110

Pack

Club Galuchat British standard 1 5761 13 5761 14 2 modules

3 modules

5761 73

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Leather

5761 14

237.5 x 92

3 modules

92 x 92

127 x 92

TM NEW Arteor pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx plates - square version

5761 27

xxxxxxxx plates - round version

5761 87

5761 17

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Support frames and plates selection charts (p. 98-101)

Signature

Woven metal British standard 1 5761 07 1 module

2 modules

Signature

92 x 92

5761 57

157 x 92

5761 77 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 37

157 x 92

5767 57 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5766 97 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5761 27

5761 67

5761 87 3 modules 1 gang horizontal and vertical mounting

92 x 92

5761 47

157 x 92

5763 77 6 modules Supplied with support frame

237.5 x 92

5767 17 8 modules Supplied with support frame

252.5 x 92

5762 17 For 5 A/13 A switched socket outlet - 1 gang

92 x 92

5762 07 For 13 A twin switched socket outlet - 2 gang

157 x 92

5761 97 For 13 A fused connection unit switched

92 x 92

Special plates 1 5764 87 For video internal display unit 2.5", BUS alarm module and 3.5" touch screen

Cat. Nos.

92 x 92

4 modules

Pack

Woven metal British standard 1 5761 17 2 modules

Dimensions in mm

3 modules

5761 77

3 modules

4 modules

Dimensions in mm

92 x 92

157 x 92

127 x 127

5765 17 For 10" multimedia touch screen

309 x 233

5765 37 For central unit for temperature control

165 x 176

111

Synergy a close family 速

Accessories to match every conceivable decor and taste... not just in terms of colour, but also in terms of style.

Attention to detAil

modular

[mod-u-lar] adjective

Whatever the application, residential or commercial, Synergy offers a great blend of style and functionality, together with countless features designed to make the installer's life easier. Synergy's quality is reflected in everything from its components and design through to its ease of installation... including a complete range of compatible surface mounting boxes, compact mechanisms that maximise wiring space, large angled terminal entries with backed off screws and clear laser marking.

112

composed of standardised units for flexible arrangement

Hidden depths SY N E R GY 速 G R I D S O LU T I O N S

An iconic range with new additions that fit in perfectly

To find out more about the Synergy family visit: www.legrand.co.uk to order your FREE copies of the latest brochures

SY N E R GY W I R I N G D E V I C E S / P R O D U CT G U I D E 速

TAKE A CLOSER LOOK www.legrand.co.uk

white

Synergy was designed around two main style concepts, traditional and modern... each of which offers a selection of finishes to blend perfectly with warm and cool colour schemes.

MetAlclAd

StyleS And finiSheS to Suit Any ApplicAtion

Brushed steel

Polished steel

Satin brass

Silver

Nickel

Black nickel

ModeRn

tRAditionAl

See p. 120-157

Matt black

ModulAR GRid SolutionS The combination of standard Synergy grid or Synergy grid for Arteor modules offers the widest choice of options for any installation. See p. 158-164

SpeciAliSt SolutionS A new selection of traditional matt black plates... ideal to meet Part Mâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s contrast requirements on light coloured walls. Socket outlets designed specifically to meet the requirements of the Medical Electrical Installation Guidance Notes (MEIGaN).

113

Synergy ® function selection chart

FUNCTIONS

WHITE

MODERN Silver

Nickel

Switches 10 AX switch 1 x 1 way

7300 00

7310 00

7312 00

10 AX switch 1 x 2 way

7300 01

7310 01

7312 01

10 AX switch 1 x intermediate

7300 05

7310 05

7312 05

10 AX switch 2 x 2 way

7300 02

7310 02

7312 02

10 AX switch 3 x 2 way

7300 03

7310 03

7312 03

10 AX switch 4 x 2 way

7300 04

7310 04

7312 04

10 AX switch 6 x 2 way

7300 06

–

20 AX switch 1 x 1 way

7301 30

–

20 AX switch 1 x 2 way

7301 31

7311 31

7313 31

20 AX switch 2 x 2 way

7301 32

7311 32

7313 32

20 AX switch 3 x 2 way

7301 33

7311 33

7313 33

10 A 1 x 2 way push switch

7300 07

7310 07

7312 07

10 A 1 x 2 way push switch marked 'PRESS'

7300 11

–

10 A 1 x 2 way push switch marked with bell symbol

7301 07

–

10 AX switch - key 1 x 2 way

7300 08

–

10 A 3 pole isolator switch

7300 09

7310 09

7312 09

Dimmer 1 x 2 way - 400 W push on/off rotary

7300 48

–

Dimmer 1 x 2 way LV - 250 W push on/off rotary

7300 46

7310 46

7312 46

Dimmer 2 x 2 way LV - 250 W push on/off rotary

7300 47

7310 47

7312 47

Dimmer - electronic 1 x 2 way - 400 W push on/off rotary

7301 56

7311 56

7313 56

Dimmer - electronic 2 x 2 way LV - 400 W push on/off rotary

7301 57

7311 57

7313 57

Dimmer - electronic 4 x 2 way LV - 400 W push on/off rotary

7300 49

–

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang DP

7300 60

7310 60

7312 60

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang DP + deep plate

7301 60

–

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang DP with red rocker

7301 62

–

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang DP + indicator

7300 61

7310 61

7312 61

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang DP (clean earth)

7300 64

–

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang DP non-standard earth pin

7300 67

–

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang DP

7300 70

7310 70

7312 70

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang DP + deep plate

7301 70

–

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang DP with red rockers

7301 61

–

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang DP + indicators

7300 71

7310 71

7312 71

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang outboard DP (clean earth)

7300 74

–

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang DP non-standard earth pin

7300 77

–

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang SP

7300 66

–

Socket 13 A switched 1 gang SP + deep plate

7301 66

–

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang SP

7300 76

–

Socket 13 A switched 2 gang SP + deep plate

7301 76

–

Socket 13 A unswitched 1 gang

7300 65

7310 65

7312 65

Socket 13 A unswitched 2 gang

7300 75

7310 75

7312 75

Socket 13 A 2 gang single socket with key switch

8200 74

–

Dimmer units

Socket outlets

See catalogue pages for full product specifications

114

MODERN

TRADITIONAL Brushed stainless steel

METALCLAD

Matt black

Black nickel

7316 00

7314 00

7330 00

7332 00

7334 00

7338 00

7316 01

7314 01

7330 01

7332 01

7334 01

7338 01

7316 05

7314 05

7330 05

7332 05

7334 05

7338 05

7316 02

7314 02

7330 02

7332 02

7334 02

7338 02

7316 03

7314 03

7330 03

7332 03

7334 03

7338 03

7316 04

7314 04

7330 04

7332 04

7334 04

–

Polished stainless steel

Satin brass

–

7330 06

7332 06

7334 06

–

7331 30

7333 30

7335 30

–

7317 31

7315 31

7331 31

7333 31

7335 31

–

7317 32

7315 32

7331 32

7333 32

7335 32

–

7317 33

7315 33

7331 33

7333 33

7335 33

–

7316 07

7314 07

7330 07

7332 07

7334 07

–

7316 09

7314 09

7330 09

7332 09

7334 09

–

7390 46

7391 46

7330 46

7332 46

7334 46

–

7390 47

7391 47

7330 47

7332 47

7334 47

–

7316 46

7314 46

7331 56

7333 56

7335 56

–

7316 47

7314 47

7331 57

7333 57

7335 57

–

7316 60

7314 60

7330 60

7332 60

7334 60

7338 60

–

7316 61

7314 61

7330 61

7332 61

7334 61

7338 61

–

7316 70

7314 70

7330 70

7332 70

7334 70

7338 70

–

7316 71

7314 71

7330 71

7332 71

7334 71

7338 71

–

7330 74

7332 74

7334 74

–

7316 65

7314 65

7330 65

7332 65

7334 65

7338 65

7316 75

7314 75

7330 75

7332 75

7334 75

7338 75

–

8200 71

8200 72

–

8200 73

115

Synergy ® function selection chart

(continued)

FUNCTIONS

WHITE

MODERN Silver

Nickel

RCD sockets RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active

7300 97

7310 97

7312 97

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA passive

7300 98

7310 98

7312 98

Socket 15 A unswitched

7300 88

7310 88

7312 88

Socket 15 A switched

7300 89

7310 89

7312 89

Socket 5 A unswitched

7300 68

7310 68

7312 68

Socket 5 A switched

7300 69

7310 69

7312 69

Socket 2 A unswitched

7300 59

7310 59

7312 59

Socket 16 A German 1 gang

7300 87

–

7310 90

7312 90

Socket outlets

Shaver socket 240-115 V

7300 90

230V 120V

120V

230V

Fused connection units S 3 AMP

3 A FCU unswitched

7300 38

–

13 A FCU DP switched

7300 34

7310 34

7312 34

13 A FCU DP switched + indicator

7300 35

7310 35

7312 35 7312 36

13 A FCU DP switched + cord outlet

7300 36

7310 36

13 A FCU DP switched + cord outlet marked 'WATER HEATER'

7301 39

–

13 A FCU DP switched + cord outlet + indicator

7300 37

7310 37

7312 37

13 A FCU DP switched + deep plate + bottom cord outlet

7301 36

–

13 A FCU

7300 30

7310 30

7312 30

13 A FCU + power indicator

7300 31

7310 31

7312 31

13 A FCU + cord outlet

7300 32

7310 32

7312 32

13 A FCU + cord outlet + indicator

7300 33

7310 33

7312 33

7300 10

7310 10

7312 10

7301 10

–

7300 14

7310 14

7312 14

7301 14

–

7300 15

–

7301 15

–

7300 16

7310 16

7312 16

7301 16

–

7300 12

7310 12

7312 12

7301 12

–

7300 18

–

45 A DP switch 146 x 86

7300 20

–

45 A DP switch 146 x 86 + red rocker

7301 20

–

45 A DP switch 146 x 86 + indicator

7300 21

–

7310 21

7312 21

R WATE ER HEAT

Double pole switches 20 A 20 A DP switch

R WATE ER HEAT

20 A DP switch marked 'WATER HEATER' 20 A DP switch + cord outlet

R WATE ER HEAT

20 A DP switch + cord outlet marked 'WATER HEATER' 20 A DP switch + deep plate + bottom cord outlet R WATE ER HEAT

20 A DP switch + deep plate + bottom cord outlet marked 'WATER HEATER' 20 A DP switch + cord outlet + indicator R WATE ER HEAT

20 A DP switch + cord outlet + indicator marked 'WATER HEATER' 20 A DP switch + indicator 20 A DP switch + indicator marked 'WATER HEATER'

R WATE ER HEAT

RSINK WATE OFF ER HEAT

20 A sink/bath dual switch + indicator

BATH

Double pole switches 45 A

45 A DP switch 146 x 86 + red rocker + indicator 45 A DP switch 86 x 86

7300 22

–

45 A DP switch 86 x 86 + red rocker

7301 22

7310 22

7312 22

45 A DP switch 86 x 86 + indicator

7300 23

–

7310 23

7312 23

45 A DP switch 86 x 86 + red rocker + indicator

See catalogue pages for full product specifications

116

MODERN

TRADITIONAL

Matt black

Black nickel

7316 97

7314 97

7316 98

7314 98

7316 88 7316 89

Brushed stainless steel

METALCLAD

Polished stainless steel

Satin brass

7330 97

7332 97

7334 97

7338 97

7330 98

7332 98

7334 98

7338 98

7314 88

7330 88

7332 88

7334 88

7338 88

7314 89

7330 89

7332 89

7334 89

7338 89

7316 68

7314 68

7330 68

7332 68

7334 68

–

7316 69

7314 69

7330 69

7332 69

7334 69

–

7316 59

7314 59

7330 59

7332 59

7334 59

–

7316 90

7314 90

7330 90

7332 90

7334 90

–

7316 34

7314 34

7330 34

7332 34

7334 34

7338 34

7316 35

7314 35

7330 35

7332 35

7334 35

7338 35

7316 36

7314 36

7330 36

7332 36

7334 36

7338 36

–

7316 37

7314 37

7330 37

7332 37

7334 37

7338 37

–

7316 30

7314 30

7330 30

7332 30

7334 30

7338 30

7316 31

7314 31

7330 31

7332 31

7334 31

7338 31

7316 32

7314 32

7330 32

7332 32

7334 32

7338 32

7316 33

7314 33

7330 33

7332 33

7334 33

733833

7316 10

7314 10

7330 10

7332 10

7334 10

7338 10

–

7316 14

7314 14

7330 14

7332 14

7334 14

7338 14

–

7316 16

7314 16

7330 16

7332 16

7334 16

7338 16

–

7316 12

7314 12

7330 12

7332 12

7334 12

–

7330 20

7332 20

7334 20

7338 20

7338 12

–

7316 21

7314 21

7330 21

7332 21

7334 21

7338 21 –

–

7316 22

7314 22

7330 22

7332 22

7334 22

–

7316 23

7314 23

7330 23

7332 23

7334 23

–

117

Synergy ® function selection chart

FUNCTIONS

(continued)

WHITE

MODERN Silver

Nickel

Cooker control units Cooker unit DP switch with DP switched socket

7300 28

–

Cooker unit DP switch with DP switched socket + indicator

7300 29

7310 29

7312 29

Cable outlet 20 A terminal block

7300 19

7310 19

7312 19

Cable outlet 45 A terminal block

7300 26

7310 26

7312 26

Cable outlet 45 A no terminals

7300 27

–

Screened TV single male

7300 40

7310 40

7312 40

Screened TV single female

7301 40

–

Screened satellite

7300 41

7310 41

7312 41

Screened TV/FM

7300 42

7310 42

7312 42

Screened TV/FM/satellite

7300 43

7310 43

7312 43

Quad outlet TV/FM / 2 x Satellite/TV return/phone

7300 45

7310 45

7312 45

Telephone socket single master

7300 50

7310 50

7312 50

Telephone socket single secondary

7300 51

7310 51

7312 51

Telephone socket RJ11/12 single

7300 54

7310 54

7312 54

Data outlet RJ45 single - CAT 6 UTP

7300 56

7310 56

7312 56

Data outlet RJ45 double - CAT 6 UTP

7300 57

7310 57

7312 57

Blanking plate 1 gang

7300 95

7310 95

7312 95

Blanking plate 2 gang

7300 96

7310 96

7312 96

Outlet plate 1 gang

7300 52

7310 52

7312 52

Cord outlet accessory box

7300 53

–

Spacer frame 1 gang

7301 95

–

Spacer frame 2 gang

7301 96

–

Carrier plate 1 gang 1 Arteor module

7300 91

7310 91

7312 91

Carrier plate 1 gang 2 Arteor modules

7300 92

7310 92

7312 92

Carrier plate 2 gang 3 Arteor modules

7300 93

7310 93

7312 93

Carrier plate 2 gang 4 Arteor modules

7300 94

7310 94

7312 94

Cable outlets

TV, radio and satellite sockets

Telephone sockets

Data sockets

Accessories

Carrier plates

See catalogue pages for full product specifications

118

MODERN

TRADITIONAL

Matt black

Black nickel

–

7314 29

Brushed stainless steel

METALCLAD

Polished stainless steel

Satin brass

7330 28

7332 28

7334 28

–

7316 29

7330 29

7332 29

7334 29

–

7316 19

7314 19

7330 19

7332 19

7334 19

733819

7316 26

7314 26

7330 26

7332 26

–

7316 40

7314 40

7330 40

7332 40

7334 40

7338 40

–

7316 41

7314 41

7330 41

7332 41

7334 41

7338 41

7316 42

7314 42

7330 42

7332 42

7334 42

–

7316 43

7314 43

7330 43

7332 43

7334 43

–

7316 45

7314 45

7330 45

7332 45

7334 45

–

7316 50

7314 50

7330 50

7332 50

7334 50

7338 50

7316 51

7314 51

7330 51

7332 51

7334 51

7338 51

7316 54

7314 54

7330 54

7332 54

7334 54

–

7316 56

7314 56

7330 56

7332 56

7334 56

7338 56

7316 57

7314 57

7330 57

7332 57

7334 57

7338 57

7316 95

7314 95

7330 95

7332 95

7334 95

7338 95

7316 96

7314 96

7330 96

7332 96

7334 96

7338 96

7316 52

7314 52

7330 52

7332 52

7334 52

–

7316 91

7314 91

7330 91

7332 91

7334 91

7338 91

7316 92

7314 92

7330 92

7332 92

7334 92

7338 92

7316 93

7314 93

7330 93

7332 93

7334 93

7338 93

7316 94

7314 94

7330 94

7332 94

7334 94

7338 94

119

Synergy ® white

7300 00

7300 02

7300 07

7301 07

7301 33

7300 06

7300 08

7300 09

Front plates : white thermoset Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied with faceplate screw caps Surface mounting boxes (see p. 167) Pack

Cat. Nos.

10 10 10

7300 00 7300 01 7300 05

7300 02

7300 03

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

7300 07

730000.eps

2 gang – 2 way

7300 11

730000.eps

730002.eps

3 gang – 2 way

7301 07

730000.eps

7300 06

1 gang – 2 way push switch marked “PRESS”

1 gang – 2 way push switch with “BELL” symbol

Single pole key switch 10 AX - 250 V

4 gang – 2 way

730004.eps

1 gang – 2 way push switch

730107.eps

730003.eps

7300 04

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 5

Single pole push switches 10 A - 250 V

Conforms to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Key supplied Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

6 gang – 2 way

1 gang – 2 way

7300 08

0811 77 Spare key for above

730006.eps

Single pole plate switches 20 AX - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

730049.eps 7310xx.eps

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 10 10

7301 30 7301 31

7301 32

7301 33

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 730000.eps

730002.eps

730003.eps

120

Isolator switch 10 A - 250 V 3 pole Conforms to BS EN 60669-2-4

With integrated padlockable safety block in OFF position Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

2 gang – 2 way

3 gang – 2 way

7300 09

3 pole isolator switch

730049.eps 731009.eps

Synergy ®

white (continued)

7300 47

7300 46

7300 49

7300 60

7300 70

7301 62

7300 74

6745 32

Front plates : white thermoset Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied with faceplate screw caps Surface mounting boxes (p. 167) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Dimmer units - 230 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 and BS EN 55015 Rotary dimming and push on/off For use with 230 V AC Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 10

7300 60

7301 60

7301 62

7300 61

7300 64

7300 67

1 gang – switched

Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps and good quality GU10 halogen lamps 1

7300 48

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 60 W- 400 W push on/off rotary Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, GU10 halogen lamps and low voltage systems using appropriate transformer

730060.eps

1 gang – switched with deep plate(1)

1 gang – switched with red rocker

730049.eps

7300 46

7300 47

730162.eps

1 gang – switched with red LED power indicator

730063.eps

1 gang – switched for standard and clean earth applications

730060.eps

1 gang – switched non-standard earth pin for standard and clean earth applications

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary 730049.eps

2 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

730047.eps

Dimmer units - 230 V

± - electronic type

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 and BS EN 55015

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 730060.eps

7300 70

7301 70

7301 61

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7300 71

730070.eps

2 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7300 74

730073.eps

7300 77

730074.eps

Rotary dimming and push on/off For use with 230 V AC - 50-60 Hz Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, good quality wire-wound transformers for low voltage loads

2 gang – switched

730070.eps

730170.eps

2 gang – switched with deep plate(1)

2 gang – switched with red rocker

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1

7301 56

7301 57

730049.eps

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 730047.eps

7300 49

4 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

2 gang – switched with red LED power indicator 2 gang – switched outboard for standard and clean earth applications 2 gang – switched non-standard earth pin for standard and clean earth applications

730070.eps

13 A non-standard earth pin plug 730049eps

6745 32 2 P + E non-standard round earth pin (1) Plates nominally 14 mm deep to match the depth of bottom cord outlet fused connection units and 20 A DP connection units

121

Synergy ®

white (continued)

7300 66

7301 76

7300 89

7300 69

7300 65

7300 97

7300 59

7300 87

Front plates : white thermoset Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied with faceplate screw caps Surface mounting boxes (p. 167) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Single pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Conventional earth pin release shutter Single earth terminal Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 7300 66 1 gang – switched

7301 66

7300 76

7301 76

730060.eps

1 gang – switched with deep plate(1)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Socket outlets 15 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 10

7300 88

7300 89

2 gang – switched

1 gang – unswitched

730088.eps

1 gang – switched

730089.eps

Socket outlets 5 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 730076.eps

2 gang – switched with deep plate(1)

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Unswitched and key switched socket outlets 13 A - 250 V 730076.eps

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 7300 65 1 gang – unswitched

7300 75

8200 74

730065.eps

730075.eps

7300 68

7300 69

Conventional earth pin shutter release Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

2 gang single socket with DP key switch(2) 7300 59

7300 98

1 gang – unswitched

± 730059.eps

Socket outlet 10/16 A - 250 V

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 7300 87

1 gang – unswitched

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active trips on power failure 730087.eps

122

730004.eps

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA passive does NOT trip on power failure

730004.eps (1) Plates nominally 14 mm deep to match the depth of bottom cord outlet fused connection units and 20 A DP connection units (2) Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep

± German

Conforms to IEC 60884-1 : 2002

7300 97

Conforms to BS 546 : 1950

Conform to BS 7288 : 1990 and BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Conventional earth pin release shutter Maximum operating current 16 A Incorporate a “test and reset” button Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 1

1 gang – switched

730069.eps

10 820074.eps

730068.eps

Socket outlet 2 A - 250 V

2 gang – unswitched

RCD sockets 13 A - 250 V

1 gang – unswitched

Synergy ®

white (continued)

7300 90

7300 38

7300 34

7300 36

7300 30

7300 33

Front plates : white thermoset Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling(1) Supplied with faceplate screw caps Surface mounting boxes (p. 167) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Shaver socket

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conforms to BS EN 61558-2-5 : 1998 IP 24

7300 90 230V 120V

Supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Output : 230/120 V - 20 VA max.

966039.eps

Fused connection unit 3 A - 250 V

(1)

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 4 : 1995

For use with European, British, American and Australian 2 pin plugs Screwless live and neutral terminals Double wound isolating transformer Automatic self-resetting overload feature Plug insertion operates microswitch which energises transformer Flush mounting back box : min. 47 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm 1

Fused connection units 13 A - 250 V

Fused 13 A (fuse supplied) Fuse drawer retained by quarter turn catch, drawer padlockable in open position for safety To obtain flush to wall external cord connection on standard depth Cat. Nos. use cord outlet accessory box Cat. No. 7300 53 (see p. 126) Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 10

7300 34

Switched, DP

7300 35

730034.eps

7300 36

730035.eps

7301 39

730036.eps

7300 37

730036.eps

7301 36

730037.eps

7300 30

7300 31

730030.eps

7300 32

730031.eps

7300 33

730032.eps

Switched, DP with red LED power indicator Switched, DP with cord outlet

Conforms to BS 1363 - Part 4 : 1995 Fused 3 A (fuse supplied) Fuse drawer retained by quarter turn catch, drawer padlockable in open position for safety Use cord outlet accessory box Cat. No. 7300 53 for flush to wall external cord connection, (see p. 126) Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

WATER HEATER

S 3 AMP

7300 38

Unswitched marked “3 AMPS” with cord outlet 730034.eps

Switched, DP with cord outlet marked “WATER HEATER” Switched, DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator Switched, DP - deep plate with bottom cord outlet(2) Unswitched

730036.eps

Unswitched with red LED power indicator Unswitched with cord outlet Unswitched with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

730033.eps

Engraving available

see p. 128-129 (1) Except Cat. No. 7300 90

(1) Range of engraving available on most products, see table on p. 128-129 (2) For 13 A switched sockets with matching depth faceplate, see p. 122

123

Synergy ®

white (continued)

7300 10

7301 10

7300 18

7300 19

7300 23

Front plates : white thermoset Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied with faceplate screw caps Surface mounting boxes (p. 167) Pack

Cat. Nos.

7300 29

7301 20

Double pole switches 20 A - 250 V

(1)

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Use cord outlet accessory box Cat. No. 7300 53 for flush to wall external cord connection, (see p. 126) Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 10

7300 10

7301 10

7300 14

Double pole switches 45 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

7300 20

7301 20

7300 21

45 A DP

20 A DP 730020.eps ER

WAT 730010.eps HEATER

730110.eps

20 A DP marked “WATER HEATER”

45 A DP with red rocker marked “COOKER”

20 A DP with cord outlet 730120.eps

7301 14

730116.eps

7300 15

730116.eps

7301 15

7300 16

7301 16

7300 12

7301 12

WATER HEATER

20 A DP with cord outlet marked “WATER HEATER”

45 A DP + red LED power indicator

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 730021.eps

7300 18

WATER 730116.eps TER HEA

730116.eps

WAT 730116.eps HEATER

730116.eps

WAT 730012.eps HEATER

SIN OFF 730112.eps

BATH

20 A DP - deep plate with bottom cord outlet(2)

7300 22

20 A DP - deep plate with bottom cord outlet marked “WATER HEATER”(2)

7301 22

730022.eps

45 A DP with red rocker marked “COOKER”

20 A DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7300 23

730022.eps

45 A DP + red LED power indicator

20 A DP with cord outlet marked “WATER HEATER” + red LED power indicator

Cooker control units 45 A - 250 V 730023.eps

± ±

20 A DP marked “WATER HEATER” + red LED power indicator

7300 28

20 A sink/bath dual switch + red LED power indicator

7300 29

730049.eps 731018.eps

5 5

7300 26 7300 27

45 A – with terminal block 45 A – no terminals 730027.eps

124

DP with DP switched socket + red LED power indicator

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995 2 piece design for safety Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

20 A – with terminal block and outlet gland (1) Range of engraving available on most products, see table on p. 128-129 730019.eps For 13 A switched sockets with matching depth faceplate, see p. 122 (2)

730029.eps

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 7300 19

DP with DP switched socket

Cable outlets 45 A - 250 V

Conforms to BS 5733 : 1995

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 45 A - 250 V double pole switch with 13 A - 250 V double pole switched socket outlet Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

20 A DP + red LED power indicator

Cable outlet 20 A - 250 V

45 A DP

Synergy ®

white (continued)

7300 40

7300 42

7300 50

7300 43

7300 45

7300 56

7300 57

Front plates : white thermoset Supplied with faceplate screw caps Surface mounting boxes (p. 167) Pack

Cat. Nos.

TV, radio and satellite sockets

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 10

7300 40

7301 40

7300 41

7300 42

7300 43

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated Screened TV – single, female Non-isolated

Telephone sockets Shuttered Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7300 50(1)

7300 51(1)

730051.eps

Single secondary

7300 54

730051.eps

Single RJ11/12

Single master

730040.eps

Screened satellite – single, ‘F’ type

730041.eps

Screened TV + FM Isolated

730051.eps 730042.eps

Data sockets

Screened TV + FM + satellite, ‘F’ type

CAT 6 compliant UTP Rapid cable connection Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 730043.eps

7300 45(1)

Quad outlet, TV, radio + 2 satellite + TV return with secondary telephone outlet 1

7300 56

7300 57

RJ45 – single

730054.eps

RJ45 – double

730057.eps

(1) Not suitable for use in the ROI

125

Synergy ®

white (continued)

7300 95

7300 96

7354 91

7300 92

7301 58

picto loupe-65765j.eps

7301 91

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Grid selection charts (p. 162-164) Grid modules (p. 158-159) Arteor modules (p. 77-95)

Accessories Blanking plates

7300 95

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm

7301 94

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Carrier plates for Arteor modules (square) No additional yoke required

7300 96

730095.eps

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm

LED packs Relevant Synergy functions are designed to accept the LED packs for fitting at time of installation or retrospectively by a qualified person Compatible with fluorescent loads 730096.eps

7301 58 730058.eps

7300 58 730058.eps

7301 52

Electronic LED locator pack – green diodes : max. current 0·2 mA provides illumination to locate function such as switches in low light Electronic LED power indicator pack – red diodes : nominal current 2 mA provides indication of ‘power on’ condition in such functions as sockets and control switches Terminal to connect diode packs to additional external cable

7300 91

7300 92

7300 93

7300 94

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 Arteor module 730091.eps

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 Arteor modules

730092.eps

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 Arteor modules

730094.eps

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 Arteor modules

730094.eps

1 and 2 gang front plates for grid modules For yokes, see below 10

7301 91

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 small aperture module

7301 92

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 small aperture modules

7301 93

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 small aperture modules

7301 94

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 small aperture modules

Outlet plate - VDI/low voltage 10

7300 52

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm with cable clamp and outlet gland Accessory frames 730095.eps

7300 53

7301 95

7301 96

1 gang - 86 x 86 x 11 mm with bottom cord outlet For flush to wall external cord connection suitable for use with 13 A and 20 A control switches and other relevant 86 x 86 mm functions Integral cord grip

7301 53

7354 90

1 gang 1 module

7354 91

1 gang 2 modules

7354 92

1 gang - 86 x 86 x 7 mm spacer frame

2 gang - 86 x 146 x 7 mm spacer frame

Spare screw cap covers 10

1 and 2 gang yokes for grid modules

2 gang 3/4 modules

Pack of 50 caps to cover mounting screws

For complete range of grid front plates and modules see p. 77-95 and 158-164 126

Synergy ® white

■ LED power and locator indicators Power indicator Cat. No. 7300 58 (red) and locator indicator Cat. No. 7301 58 (green) These LED packs can be fitted as an option to a range of Synergy White functions including : • 10 A switches 1 gang • 5 A, 13 A and 15 A socket outlets • 13 A connection units 58 pole control 7301 7301 58 switches 58 7301 58 7300 58 7300 58 • 20 A and 45 A 7301 double The LED packs are wired in alternative ways for different functionality. Factory fitted LEDs can be re-configured on site A screwless terminal Cat. No. 7301 52 is available where the use of a neutral is required The terminal has provision for 2 x 2·5 mm2 solid cables and one spade connector as fitted to the LED pack L

Switch 10 A 7301 52

1 52 7301

Locator

7301 58

N7301 58 7301 58

7301 52

Indicator

7301 58

■ Sample wiring schemes

7300 58

N7300 58

L 1

7301 52 1

7301 52 N

7301 52

7301 52 N

Socket 13 A unswitched

Socket 13 A switched Locator

7301 58

Indicator

7301 58

7300 58

Locator

7300 58

7301 58

N 7301 58

L 7301 58

N 7300 58

L 7300 58

■ Cable outlet options : 13 A connection units and 20 A double pole control switches These devices are available in three cable outlet variants : • Without provision forLN an external cable outlet (i.e.L for internal N N L LN cabling) • With a cable outlet in the front plate supplied with an integral screw type cable clamp and outlet cover plug • With a bottom cord outlet on a deep plate

13 A fused connection unit no external cable outlet mm

86 730034.eps

730036.eps

86 mm 14

13 A fused connection unit with front cable outlet

13 A fused connection unit with deep plate and bottom cable outlet

730136.eps

Additionally the use of cord outlet accessory box Cat. No. 7300 53, enables a flush-to-wall cable outlet option The outlet box dimensions are nominally 86 x 86 mm and 14 mm deep The outlet box is supplied with the necessary longer installation screws and has an integral automatic cable restraint

127

Synergy 速 white

LEGRAND SYNERGY STANDARD ENGRAVING 20 A DP SWITCHES Engraving

Front cable outlet

Front cable outlet with indicator

Bottom cable outlet

Without cable outlet

Without cable outlet with indicator

AIR CONDITIONER

7300 14AC

7300 16AC

7300 15AC

7300 10AC

7300 12AC

APPLIANCE

7300 14AP

7300 16AP

7300 15AP

7300 10AP

7300 12AP

BELL

7300 14BL

7300 16BL

7300 15BL

7300 10BL

7300 12BL

Bell symbol

7300 14BY

7300 16BY

7300 15BY

7300 10BY

7300 12BY

CENTRAL HEATING

7300 14CG

7300 16CG

7300 15CG

7300 10CG

7300 12CG

COOKER HOOD

7300 14CH

7300 16CH

7300 15CH

7300 10CH

7300 12CH

DISHWASHER

7300 14DW

7300 16DW

7300 15DW

7300 10DW

7300 12DW

EXTRACTOR

7300 14EX

7300 16EX

7300 15EX

7300 10EX

7300 12EX

EXTRACTOR HOOD

7300 14EH

7300 16EH

7300 15EH

7300 10EH

7300 12EH

FAN

7300 14FN

7300 16FN

7300 15FN

7300 10FN

7300 12FN

Fan symbol

7300 14FY

7300 16FY

7300 15FY

7300 10FY

7300 12FY

FREEZER

7300 14FZ

7300 16FZ

7300 15FZ

7300 10FZ

7300 12FZ

FRIDGE

7300 14FR

7300 16FR

7300 15FR

7300 10FR

7300 12FR

FRIDGE FREEZER

7300 14FF

7300 16FF

7300 15FF

7300 10FF

7300 12FF

HEATER

7300 14HR

7300 16HR

7300 15HR

7300 10HR

7300 12HR

HOB

7300 14HB

7300 16HB

7300 15HB

7300 10HB

7300 12HB

MICROWAVE

7300 14MW

7300 16MW

7300 15MW

7300 10MW

7300 12MW

ON / OFF

7300 14OO

7300 16OO

7300 15OO

7300 10OO

7300 12OO

OVEN

7300 14OV

7300 16OV

7300 15OV

7300 10OV

7300 12OV

TOWEL RAIL

7300 14TR

7300 16TR

7300 15TR

7300 10TR

7300 12TR

TUMBLE DRYER

7300 14TD

7300 16TD

7300 15TD

7300 10TD

7300 12TD

WASHER DRYER

7300 14WD

7300 16WD

7300 15WD

7300 10WD

7300 12WD

WASHING MACHINE

7300 14WM

7300 16WM

7300 15WM

7300 10WM

7300 12WM

WATER HEATER

7300 14WH

7300 16WH

7300 15WH

7300 10WH

7300 12WH

Full box quantities only - Pack quantity 10 Engraved markings differ slightly from pad printed markings appearing elsewhere in the catalogue For lead times of above engravings, please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

128

LEGRAND SYNERGY STANDARD ENGRAVING 13 A FUSED CONNECTION UNITS Switched with front cable outlet

Switched with front cable outlet and indicator

Switched with bottom cable outlet

Switched without cable outlet

Switched without cable outlet with indicator

Unswitched with front cable outlet

Unswitched with front cable outlet with indicator

Unswitched without cable outlet

Unswitched without cable outlet with indicator

7300 36AC

7300 37AC

7301 36AC

7300 34AC

7300 35AC

7300 32AC

7300 33AC

7300 30AC

7300 31AC

7300 36AP

7300 37AP

7301 36AP

7300 36BL

7300 37BL

7301 36BL

7300 34AP

7300 35AP

7300 32AP

7300 33AP

7300 30AP

7300 31AP

7300 34BL

7300 35BL

7300 32BL

7300 33BL

7300 30BL

7300 31BL

7300 36BY

7300 37BY

7300 36CG

7300 37CG

7301 36BY

7300 34BY

7300 35BY

7300 32BY

7300 33BY

7300 30BY

7300 31BY

7301 36CG

7300 34CG

7300 35CG

7300 32CG

7300 33CG

7300 30CG

7300 31CG

7300 36CH

7300 37CH

7301 36CH

7300 34CH

7300 35CH

7300 32CH

7300 36DW

7300 37DW

7301 36DW

7300 34DW

7300 35DW

7300 32DW

7300 33CH

7300 30CH

7300 31CH

7300 33DW

7300 30DW

7300 31DW

7300 36EX

7300 37EX

7301 36EX

7300 34EX

7300 35EX

7300 32EX

7300 36EH

7300 37EH

7301 36EH

7300 34EH

7300 35EH

7300 32EH

7300 33EX

7300 30EX

7300 31EX

7300 33EH

7300 30EH

7300 31EH

7300 36FN

7300 37FN

7301 36FN

7300 34FN

7300 35FN

7300 32FN

7300 33FN

7300 30FN

7300 31FN

7300 36FY

7300 37FY

7301 36FY

7300 34FY

7300 35FY

7300 32FY

7300 33FY

7300 30FY

7300 31FY

7300 36FZ

7300 37FZ

7301 36FZ

7300 34FZ

7300 35FZ

7300 32FZ

7300 33FZ

7300 30FZ

7300 31FZ

7300 36FR

7300 37FR

7301 36FR

7300 34FR

7300 35FR

7300 32FR

7300 33FR

7300 30FR

7300 31FR

7300 36FF

7300 37FF

7301 36FF

7300 34FF

7300 35FF

7300 32FF

7300 33FF

7300 30FF

7300 31FF

7300 36HR

7300 37HR

7301 36HR

7300 34HR

7300 35HR

7300 32HR

7300 33HR

7300 30HR

7300 31HR

7300 36HB

7300 37HB

7301 36HB

7300 34HB

7300 35HB

7300 32HB

7300 33HB

7300 30HB

7300 31HB

7300 36MW

7300 37MW

7301 36MW

7300 34MW

7300 35MW

7300 32MW

7300 33MW

7300 30MW

7300 31MW

7300 36OO

7300 37OO

7301 36OO

7300 34OO

7300 35OO

7300 32OO

7300 33OO

7300 30OO

7300 31OO

7300 36OV

7300 37OV

7301 36OV

7300 34OV

7300 35OV

7300 32OV

7300 33OV

7300 30OV

7300 31OV

7300 36TR

7300 37TR

7301 36TR

7300 34TR

7300 35TR

7300 32TR

7300 33TR

7300 30TR

7300 31TR

7300 36TD

7300 37TD

7301 36TD

7300 34TD

7300 35TD

7300 32TD

7300 33TD

7300 30TD

7300 31TD

7300 36WD

7300 37WD

7301 36WD

7300 34WD

7300 35WD

7300 32WD

7300 33WD

7300 30WD

7300 31WD

7300 36WM

7300 37WM

7301 36WM

7300 34WM

7300 35WM

7300 32WM

7300 33WM

7300 30WM

7300 31WM

7300 36WH

7300 37WH

7301 36WH

7300 34WH

7300 35WH

7300 32WH

7300 33WH

7300 30WH

7300 31WH

129

Synergy ® modern

7310 00

7312 02

7316 00

7314 02

7310 03

7312 07

7316 03

7314 07

Front plates : clip on die cast plate with high quality satin finish; anthracite Front plates : clip on die cast plate with high quality finish; anthracite interiors; matching decorative rockers (except where indicated) interiors; matching decorative rockers (except where indicated) Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

Cat. Nos.

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Silver

Nickel

1 1 1

7310 00 7312 00 7310 01 7312 01 7310 05 7312 05

7310 02 7312 02

7310 03 7312 03

731002.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

1 1 1

7316 00 7314 00 7316 01 7314 01 7316 05 7314 05

2 gang – 2 way

7316 02 7314 02

3 gang – 2 way

7316 03 7314 03

Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 149 mm 7310 04 7312 04

4 gang – 2 way

Nickel

7311 31 7313 31

7311 32 7313 32

7311 33 7313 33

Nickel

731002.eps

2 gang – 2 way

3 gang – 2 way

7316 04 7314 04

4 gang – 2 way

731004.eps

Single pole plate switches 20 AX - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731000.eps

731002.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

1 gang – 2 way

7317 31 7315 31

2 gang – 2 way

7317 32 7315 32

3 gang – 2 way

7317 33 7315 33

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm 1 gang – 2 way

731000.eps

731002.eps

731003.eps

2 gang – 2 way

3 gang – 2 way

Single pole push switches 10 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

7310 07 7312 07

1 gang – 2 way push switch

731000.eps

130

731000.eps

Single pole plate switches 20 AX - 250 V

731003.eps

Silver

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

731003.eps

Silver

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 149 mm

731003.eps

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731000.eps

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Matt black

Black nickel

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

7316 07 7314 07

1 gang – 2 way push switch

731000.eps

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 46

7312 47

7316 46

7314 47

7310 09

7312 09

7316 09

7314 09

Cat. Nos.

Silver

Nickel

7310 46 7312 46

7310 47 7312 47

Dimmer units - 230 V

7311 56 7313 56

7311 57 7313 57

Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, GU10 halogen lamps and low voltage systems using appropriate transformer

731049.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

7390 46 7391 46

2 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

7390 47 7391 47

± - electronic

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary 731049.eps

2 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

731047.eps

Dimmer units - 230 V type

± - electronic

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, good quality wire-wound transformers for low voltage loads

731049.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

1 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7316 46 7314 46

2 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7316 47 7314 47

731047.eps

Nickel

Dimmer units - 230 V

Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, GU10 halogen lamps and low voltage systems using appropriate transformer

Isolator switches 10 A - 250 V 3 pole

Silver

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731047.eps

Nickel

Pack

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Dimmer units - 230 V type

Silver

1 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary 731049.eps

2 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

731047.eps

Isolator switches 10 A - 250 V 3 pole

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-4

White rocker with integrated padlockable safety block in OFF position Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

7310 09 7312 09

3 pole isolator switch

731009.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

7316 09 7314 09

3 pole isolator switch

731009.eps

131

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 60

7312 61

7316 60

7314 61

7310 70

7312 71

7316 70

7314 71

Cat. Nos.

Silver

Nickel

7310 60 7312 60

7310 61 7312 61

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731060.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

1 gang – switched

7316 60 7314 60

1 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

7316 61 7314 61

7310 71 7312 71

731070.eps

731073.eps

132

1 gang – switched

731060.eps

1 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 149 mm

731063.eps

7310 70 7312 70

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 149 mm 1

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

731063.eps

2 gang – switched

7316 70 7314 70

2 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

7316 71 7314 71

2 gang – switched

731070.eps

731073.eps

2 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 65

7312 88

7316 65

7314 88

7310 89

7312 59

7316 89

7314 59

Cat. Nos.

Silver

Nickel

7310 65 7312 65

7310 75 7312 75

Unswitched socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 1 gang – unswitched

731065.eps

2 gang – unswitched

731075.eps

RCD sockets 13 A - 250 V

Pack

Matt black

7316 65 7314 65

7316 75 7314 75

733097.eps

Socket outlets 15 A - 250 V

Silver

Nickel

7310 88 7312 88

7310 89 7312 89

Silver

Nickel

731059.eps

733097.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

7316 88 7314 88

1 gang – switched

7316 89 7314 89

1 gang – unswitched

2 gang – unswitched

Socket outlets 15 A - 250 V

1 gang – unswitched

731088.eps

1 gang – switched

731089.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Socket outlets 2 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

7310 59 7312 59

731065.eps

733097.eps

731089.eps

1 gang – unswitched

Conform to BS 7288 : 1990 and BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Stainless steel plate with fixing screws Conventional earth pin release shutter Maximum operating current 16 A Incorporate a “test and reset” button Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm Matt black Black nickel Active : Electrical latching trips on power failure 7316 97 7314 97 RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active Passive : Mechanical latching does NOT trip on power failure RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA 7316 98 7314 98 passive

1 gang – unswitched

Socket outlets 2 A - 250 V

731075.eps

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731088.eps

Unswitched socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

RCD sockets 13 A - 250 V

733097.eps

Black nickel

Conform to BS 7288 : 1990 and BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Stainless steel plate with fixing screws Conventional earth pin release shutter Maximum operating current 16 A Incorporate a “test and reset” button Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm Nickel Silver Active : Electrical latching trips on power failure 7310 97 7312 97 RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active Passive : Mechanical latching does NOT trip on power failure RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA 7310 98 7312 98 passive

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

7316 59 7314 59

1 gang – unswitched

731059.eps

133

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 68

7316 68

7312 90

7310 69

7314 90

7316 69

Cat. Nos.

Silver

Nickel

7310 68 7312 68

7310 69 7312 69

Silver

Nickel

Socket outlets 5 A - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Socket outlets 5 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 546 : 1950

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731068.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

1 gang – unswitched

7316 68 7314 68

1 gang – switched

7316 69 7314 69

1 gang – unswitched

731068.eps

1 gang – switched

731069.eps

Shaver sockets

Conform to BS EN 61558-2-5 : 1998 IP 24

7310 90 7312 90

Supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Output : 230/120 V - 20 VA max.

Matt black

Black nickel

7316 90 7314 90

Supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Output : 230/120 V - 20 VA max.

230V 120V

731090.eps

134

230V 120V

731090.eps

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 35

7312 32

7316 37

7314 34

7310 10

7312 12

7316 14

7314 12

Cat. Nos.

Silver

Nickel

Fused connection units 13 A - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Fused connection units 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 4 : 1995

Fuse drawer retained by quarter turn catch, drawer padlockable in open position for safety Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Matt black

Black nickel

7310 34 7312 34

Switched, DP

7316 34 7314 34

Switched, DP

7310 35 7312 35

Switched, DP + red LED power indicator

7316 35 7314 35

Switched, DP + red LED power indicator

7310 36 7312 36

Switched, DP with cord outlet

7316 36 7314 36

Switched, DP with cord outlet

7310 37 7312 37

Switched, DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7316 37 7314 37

Switched, DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7310 30 7312 30

Unswitched

7316 30 7314 30

Unswitched

7310 31 7312 31

Unswitched + red LED power indicator

7316 31 7314 31

Unswitched + red LED power indicator

7310 32 7312 32

Unswitched with cord outlet

7316 32 7314 32

Unswitched with cord outlet

7310 33 7312 33

Unswitched with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7316 33 7314 33

Unswitched with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

Double pole switches 20 A - 250 V

Silver

Nickel

Double pole switches 20 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Matt black

Black nickel

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

7310 10 7312 10

20 A DP

7316 10 7314 10

20 A DP

7310 14 7312 14

20 A DP with cord outlet

7316 14 7314 14

20 A DP with cord outlet

7310 16 7312 16

20 A DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7316 16 7314 16

20 A DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7310 12 7312 12

20 A DP + red LED power indicator

7316 12 7314 12

20 A DP + red LED power indicator

135

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 23

7312 22

7316 23

7310 29

7314 22

7314 29

Cat. Nos.

Silver

Nickel

Cable outlets 20 A - 250 V

Pack

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7310 19 7312 19

20 A – with terminal block and outlet gland 730019.eps

Silver

Nickel

7310 22 7312 22

7310 23 7312 23

Matt black

Double pole switches 45 A - 250 V

Black nickel

Matt black

Black nickel

45 A DP

7316 22 7314 22

45 A DP with red power indicator

7316 23 7314 23

45 A DP with red power indicator Stainless steel plate with fixing screws 731021.eps

Cooker control units 45 A - 250 V

Silver

Nickel

Cable outlets 45 A - 250 V

Silver

Nickel

730027.eps

136

45 A DP

731022.eps

7316 21 7314 21

45 A DP with red power indicator

45 A DP with red power indicator Stainless steel plate with fixing screws 731021.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

45 A DP switch + 13 A DP switched socket outlet

Cable outlets 45 A - 250 V

Matt black

Black nickel

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 47 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 149 mm

7316 29 7314 29

45 A – with terminal block

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 1995 Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Cooker control units 45 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995 2 piece design for safety Stainless steel plate with fixing screws Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7310 26 7312 26

731023.eps

45 A DP switch + 13 A DP switched socket outlet

20 A – with terminal block and outlet gland

Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 47 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 149 mm

7310 29 7312 29

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

730019.eps

731023.eps

7310 21 7312 21

Double pole switches 45 A - 250 V

Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm 1

Cable outlets 20 A - 250 V

7316 19 7314 19

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 1995 Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731022.eps

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995 2 piece design for safety Stainless steel plate with fixing screws Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 45 A – with terminal block

7316 26 7314 26

730027.eps

Synergy ®

modern (continued)

7310 42

7312 43

7316 42

7314 43

7310 50

7312 56

7316 50

7314 56

Front plates : clip on die cast plate with high quality satin finish; anthracite interiors Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

TV, radio and satellite sockets

Cat. Nos.

Front plates : clip on die cast plate with high quality finish; anthracite interiors Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

TV, radio and satellite sockets

Cat. Nos.

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm Silver

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Nickel

Matt black

7310 40 7312 40

7310 41 7312 41

7310 42 7312 42

7310 43 7312 43

Black nickel

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated

7316 40 7314 40

731040.eps

Screened satellite – single, ‘F’ type

7316 41 7314 41

731040.eps

Screened satellite – single, ‘F’ type

731041.eps

Screened TV + FM Isolated

7316 42 7314 42

731041.eps

Screened TV + FM Isolated

Screened TV + FM + satellite, ‘F’ type

7316 43 7314 43

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 1

(1)

7310 45 7312 45

Silver

Quad outlet, TV, radio + 2 satellite + TV return with secondary telephone outlet(2)

7310 50(1) 7312 50(1)

7310 51(1) 7312 51(1)

(1)

7316 45 7314 45

Nickel

7310 56 7312 56

7310 57 7312 57

Quad outlet, TV, radio + 2 satellite + TV return with secondary telephone outlet(2)

Telephone sockets

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm Matt black

731051.eps

Black nickel

Single master

7316 50(1) 7314 50(1)

Single secondary

7316 51(1) 7314 51(1)

731051.eps

Silver

Screened TV + FM + satellite, ‘F’ type Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

Nickel

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated

Single master

731051.eps

Single secondary

731051.eps

Data sockets

CAT 6 compliant UTP Rapid cable connection

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm

731051.eps

Matt black

Black nickel

RJ45 – single

7316 56 7314 56

RJ45 – double

7316 57 7314 57

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 89 x 89 mm RJ45 – single

731051.eps

RJ45 – double

731057.eps

(1) Not suitable for use in the ROI (2) Stainless steel plate with fixing screws

137

Synergy 速

modern (continued)

7310 95

7312 96

7316 95

7314 96

7310 92

7312 93

7316 92

7314 93

Front plates : clip on die cast plate with high quality satin finish; anthracite interiors Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

Cat. Nos.

Accessories

Front plates : clip on die cast plate with high quality finish; anthracite interiors Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

Cat. Nos.

Blanking plates Silver

Blanking plates

Nickel

7310 95 7312 95

7310 96 7312 96

Matt black

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 731095.eps

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm

Black nickel

7316 95 7314 95

7316 96 7314 96

Outlet plates - VDI/low voltage 7310 52 7312 52

Silver

Nickel

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm with cable clamp and outlet gland

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 731095.eps

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm

Outlet plates - VDI/low voltage

731096.eps

Accessories

731096.eps

7316 52 7314 52

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm with cable clamp and outlet gland

731052.eps

Carrier plates for Arteor modules (square)

No additional yoke required

No additional yoke required Matt black

7310 91 7312 91

7310 92 7312 92

7310 93 7312 93

731092.eps

7310 94 7312 94

731093.eps

731091.eps

731094.eps

Black nickel

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 1 Arteor module

7316 91 7314 91

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 2 Arteor modules

7316 92 7314 92

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 3 Arteor modules

7316 93 7314 93

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 4 Arteor modules

7316 94 7314 94

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 1 Arteor module 731091.eps

731092.eps

731093.eps

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 2 Arteor modules 2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 3 Arteor modules 2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 4 Arteor modules

731094.eps

For home network functions

see p. 34-35

138

Synergy 速

modern (continued)

7311 91

7317 91

7313 93

picto loupe-65765j.eps

7313 94

7311 92

Cat. Nos.

7315 94

7317 92

Grid selection charts (p. 162-164) Grid modules (p. 158-159) Arteor modules (p. 77-95) Pack

7315 93

Grid selection charts (p. 162-164) Grid modules (p. 158-159) Arteor modules (p. 77-95)

1 and 2 gang front plates for grid modules

Pack

Cat. Nos.

For yokes, see below Silver

1 and 2 gang front plates for grid modules For yokes, see below

Nickel

Matt black

Black nickel

7311 91 7313 91

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 1 small aperture module

7317 91 7315 91

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 1 small aperture module

7311 92 7313 92

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 2 small aperture modules

7317 92 7315 92

1 gang - 89 x 89 mm 2 small aperture modules

7311 93 7313 93

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 3 small aperture modules

7317 93 7315 93

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 3 small aperture modules

7311 94 7313 94

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 4 small aperture modules

7317 94 7315 94

2 gang - 89 x 149 mm 4 small aperture modules

1 and 2 gang yokes for grid modules 10

7354 81

7354 82

1 gang 1/2 modules 2 gang 3/4 modules

1 and 2 gang yokes for grid modules 10

7354 81

7354 82

1 gang 1/2 modules 2 gang 3/4 modules

For complete range of grid front plates and modules see p. 77-95 and 158-164 139

Synergy ® traditional

7330 00

7332 02

7334 00

7334 07

7330 06

7332 07

7334 02

7334 06

Brushed stainless steel front plates : brushed stainless steel with clear epoxy satin lacquer coating Polished stainless steel front plates : electroplated stainless steel plate with trivalent chrome for mirror finish Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 or 86 x 146 mm

1 1 1

7330 00 7332 00 7330 01 7332 01 7330 05 7332 05

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

1 1 1

7334 00 7334 01 7334 05

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

7330 02 7332 02

2 gang – 2 way

7334 02

2 gang – 2 way

7330 03 7332 03

3 gang – 2 way

7334 03

3 gang – 2 way

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

7330 04 7332 04

4 gang – 2 way

7334 04

4 gang – 2 way

7330 06 7332 06

6 gang – 2 way

7334 06

6 gang – 2 way

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Single pole plate switches 20 AX - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 or 86 x 146 mm

7331 31 7333 31

1 gang – 2 way

7335 31

1 gang – 2 way

7331 32 7333 32

2 gang – 2 way

7335 32

2 gang – 2 way

7331 33 7333 33

3 gang – 2 way

7335 33

3 gang – 2 way

Stainless steel

Brushed

140

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Polished

7330 07 7332 07

Single pole push switches 10 A - 250 V

Single pole push switch 10 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Conforms to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1 gang – 2 way push switch

Satin brass

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7334 07

1 gang – 2 way push switch

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7330 46

7332 47

7334 46

7334 47

7330 09

7332 09

7335 57

7334 09

Cat. Nos.

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Dimmer units - 230 V

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 and BS EN 55015 Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, GU10 halogen lamps and low voltage systems using appropriate transformer

Cat. Nos.

Satin brass

Dimmer units - 230 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 and BS EN 55015 Rotary dimming and push on/off Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, GU10 halogen lamps and low voltage systems using appropriate transformer

7330 46 7332 46

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

7334 46

1 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

7330 47 7332 47

2 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

7334 47

2 gang – 2 way 50 Hz 40 W- 250 W push on/off rotary

Dimmer units - 230 V type

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

± - electronic

Dimmer units - 230 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 and BS EN 55015 Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, good quality wire-wound transformers for low voltage loads

Satin brass

± - electronic type

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 : 2000 and BS EN 55015 Not suitable for fluorescent load Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Dimmers for use with tungsten filament lamps, good quality wire-wound transformers for low voltage loads

7331 56 7333 56

1 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7335 56

1 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7331 57 7333 57

2 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

7335 57

2 gang – 2 way 50-60 Hz 40 W- 400 W push on/off rotary

Isolator switches 10 A - 250 V 3 pole Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

7330 09 7332 09

Isolator switch 10 A - 250 V 3 pole

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-4 With integrated padlockable safety block in OFF position Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 3 pole isolator switch

Satin brass

7334 09

Conforms to BS EN 60669-2-4 With integrated padlockable safety block in OFF position Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 3 pole isolator switch

141

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7330 70

7332 61

7334 60

7334 61

7330 71

7332 74

7334 70

7334 75

Cat. Nos.

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

7330 60 7332 60

1 gang – switched

7334 60

1 gang – switched

7330 61 7332 61

1 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

7334 61

1 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

7330 70 7332 70

2 gang – switched

7334 70

2 gang – switched

7330 71 7332 71

2 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

7334 71

2 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

7330 74 7332 74

2 gang – switched outboard for standard and clean earth applications

7334 74

2 gang – switched outboard for standard and clean earth applications

Unswitched socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 1 gang : 86 x 86 mm 2 gang : 86 x 146 mm

Stainless steel

Brushed

142

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Polished

7330 65 7332 65

7330 75 7332 75

1 gang – unswitched

2 gang – unswitched

Satin brass

7334 65

7334 75

1 gang – unswitched

2 gang – unswitched

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7330 97

7332 97

7334 97

7330 89

7332 59

7334 89

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

7330 98 7332 98

Stainless steel

Polished

Satin brass

7334 97

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active – trips on power failure

7334 98

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA passive – does NOT trip on power failure

Socket outlets 15 A - 250 V

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active – trips on power failure RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA passive – does NOT trip on power failure

Satin brass

7334 88

1 gang – unswitched

7334 89

1 gang – switched

Conform to BS 546 : 1950

1 gang – unswitched

7330 89 7332 89

1 gang – switched

Socket outlet 2 A - 250 V

Socket outlets 2 A - 250 V

7330 59 7332 59

Conforms to BS 546 : 1950 Satin brass

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7330 88 7332 88

Polished

Conform to BS 546 : 1950

Stainless steel

RCD sockets 13 A - 250 V

2 gang single socket with DP key switch

Socket outlets 15 A - 250 V

Brushed

Cat. Nos.

Polished

7330 97 7332 97

Brushed

Pack

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

RCD sockets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - part 2 : 1995

820074.eps

Brushed

7334 59

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Key switched socket 13 A - 250 V

8200 71 8200 72

Stainless steel

7334 88

7334 59

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1 gang – unswitched

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1 gang – unswitched

143

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7334 68

7330 68

7330 90

7330 69

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Socket outlets 5 A - 250 V

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Socket outlets 5 A - 250 V Conform to BS 546 : 1950

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

7330 68 7332 68

1 gang – unswitched

7334 68

1 gang – unswitched

7330 69 7332 69

1 gang – switched

7334 69

1 gang – switched

Brushed

Polished

Conform to BS 546 : 1950

Stainless steel

Shaver sockets

Shaver socket

Conform to BS EN 61558-2-5 : 1998 IP 24 For use with European, British, American and Australian 2 pin plugs Screwless live and neutral terminals Double wound isolating transformer Automatic self-resetting overload feature Plug insertion operates microswitch which energises transformer Flush mounting back box : min. 47 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm

Conforms to BS EN 61558-2-5 : 1998 IP 24 For use with European, British, American and Australian 2 pin plugs Screwless live and neutral terminals Double wound isolating transformer Automatic self-resetting overload feature Plug insertion operates microswitch which energises transformer Flush mounting back box : min. 47 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm

7330 90 7332 90 230V 120V

144

7334 90

7334 69

Supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Output : 230/120 V - 20 VA max.

Satin brass

7334 90 230V 120V

Supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Output : 230/120 V - 20 VA max.

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7330 37

7332 36

7334 34

7334 37

7330 12

7332 10

7334 30

7334 12

Cat. Nos.

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Fused connection units 13 A - 250 V

Pack

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 4 : 1995 Fuse drawer retained by quarter turn catch, drawer padlockable in open position for safety Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Fused connection units 13 A - 250 V

Satin brass

7330 34 7332 34

Switched, DP

7334 34

Switched, DP

7330 35 7332 35

Switched, DP with red LED power indicator

7334 35

Switched, DP with red LED power indicator

7330 36 7332 36

Switched, DP with cord outlet

7334 36

Switched, DP with cord outlet

7330 37 7332 37

Switched, DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7334 37

Switched, DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7330 30 7332 30

Unswitched

7334 30

Unswitched

7330 31 7332 31

Unswitched with red LED power indicator

7334 31

Unswitched with red LED power indicator

7330 32 7332 32

Unswitched with cord outlet

7334 32

Unswitched with cord outlet

7330 33 7332 33

Unswitched with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7334 33

Unswitched with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

Double pole switches 20 A - 250 V Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Cat. Nos.

Double pole switches 20 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7330 10 7332 10

20 A DP

7334 10

20 A DP

7330 14 7332 14

20 A DP with cord outlet

7334 14

20 A DP with cord outlet

7330 16 7332 16

20 A DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7334 16

20 A DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7330 12 7332 12

20 A DP with red LED power indicator

7334 12

20 A DP with red LED power indicator

145

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7330 22

7332 22

7334 23

7330 23

7332 29

7334 29

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

7330 19 7332 19

Cable outlets 20 A - 250 V

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Brushed

1 1

Polished

7330 20 7332 20 7330 21 7332 21

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995 Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 20 A – with terminal block and outlet gland

Satin brass

7334 19

7330 22 7332 22 7330 23 7332 23

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm 45 A DP 45 A DP with red LED power indicator

Brushed

Polished

Satin brass

1 1

7334 20 7334 21

7334 22 7334 23

20 A – with terminal block and outlet gland

45 A DP 45 A DP with red LED power indicator

± ±

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 45 A - 250 V DP switch with 13 A - 250 V DP switched socket outlet Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

± ±

Satin brass

7330 28 7332 28

DP with DP switched socket

7334 28

DP with DP switched socket

7330 29 7332 29

DP with DP switched socket + red LED power indicators

7334 29

DP with DP switched socket + red LED power indicators

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

7330 26 7332 26

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 146 x 86 mm

Cooker control units 45 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 45 A - 250 V DP switch with 13 A - 250 V DP switched socket outlet Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

Cable outlets 45 A - 250 V

146

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

45 A DP 45 A DP with red LED power indicator

Cooker control units 45 A - 250 V Stainless steel

Double pole switches 45 A - 250 V

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1 1

Cable outlet 20 A - 250 V Conforms to BS 5733 : 1995

Double pole switches 45 A - 250 V Stainless steel

7334 20

Cable outlet 45 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 5733 : 1995

Conforms to BS 5733 : 1995

2 piece design for safety Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

45 A – with terminal block

Satin brass

7334 26

45 A – with terminal block

Synergy ®

traditional (continued)

7330 43

7332 42

7334 42

7334 43

7330 50

7332 57

7334 50

7334 57

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

Brushed

TV, radio and satellite sockets

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

TV, radio and satellite sockets Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Polished

Satin brass

7330 40 7332 40

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated

7334 40

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated

7330 41 7332 41

Screened satellite – single, ‘F’ type

7334 41

Screened satellite – single, ‘F’ type

7330 42 7332 42

Screened TV + FM Isolated

7334 42

Screened TV + FM Isolated

7330 43 7332 43

Screened TV + FM + satellite, ‘F’ type

7334 43

Screened TV + FM + satellite, ‘F’ type

7330 45(1) 7332 45(1)

7334 45(1)

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Quad outlet, TV, radio + 2 satellite + TV return with secondary telephone outlet(2)

Telephone sockets

Quad outlet, TV, radio + 2 satellite + TV return with secondary telephone outlet(2)

Telephone sockets

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7330 50(1) 7332 50(1)

Single master

7334 50(1)

Single master

7330 51(1) 7332 51(1)

Single secondary

7334 51(1)

Single secondary

Stainless steel

Brushed

Polished

Data sockets

CAT 6 compliant UTP Rapid cable connection

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Satin brass

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

7330 56 7332 56

RJ45 – single

7334 56

RJ45 – single

7330 57 7332 57

RJ45 – double

7334 57

RJ45 – double

(1) Not suitable for use in the ROI (2) Stainless steel plate with fixing screws

147

Synergy 速

traditional (continued)

7330 95

7332 96

7334 95

7334 52

7330 91

7332 94

7334 92

7334 93

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

Brushed

Accessories

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

7330 95 7332 95

7330 96 7332 96

Satin brass

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 gang - 86 x 146 mm

7334 95

7334 96

Outlet plates - VDI/low voltage 1

7330 52 7332 52

Stainless steel

Brushed

148

Polished

Accessories Blanking plates

Polished

Cat. Nos.

Blanking plates

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm with cable clamp and outlet gland

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm

Outlet plate - VDI/low voltage 1

7334 52

Carrier plates for Arteor modules (square)

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm with cable clamp and outlet gland

Carrier plates for Arteor modules (square)

No additional yoke required

Satin brass

No additional yoke required

7330 91 7332 91

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 Arteor module

7334 91

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 Arteor module

7330 92 7332 92

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 Arteor modules

7334 92

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 Arteor modules

7330 93 7332 93

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 Arteor modules

7334 93

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 Arteor modules

7330 94 7332 94

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 Arteor modules

7334 94

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 Arteor modules

Synergy 速

traditional (continued)

7331 91

7333 93

7354 90

7354 91

picto loupe-65765j.eps

7335 91

7354 92

picto loupe-65765j.eps

Grid selection charts (p. 162-164) Grid modules (p. 158-159) Arteor modules (p. 77-95)

Cat. Nos. Stainless steel

7335 93

1 and 2 gang front plates for grid modules

Satin brass front plates : electroplated stainless steel electrophoretic applied brass lacquer Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling

Pack

Cat. Nos.

For yokes, see below

For yokes, see below Brushed

1 and 2 gang plates for grid modules

Satin brass

Polished

7331 91 7333 91

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 small aperture module

7335 91

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 small aperture module

7331 92 7333 92

1 gang 2 small aperture modules

7335 92

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 small aperture modules

7331 93 7333 93

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 small aperture modules

7335 93

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 small aperture modules

7331 94 7333 94

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 small aperture modules

7335 94

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 small aperture modules

1 and 2 gang yokes for grid modules

7354 90

1 gang 1 module

7354 90

1 gang 1 module

7354 91

1 gang 2 modules

7354 91

1 gang 2 modules

7354 92

2 gang 3/4 modules

For complete range of grid front plates and modules see p. 77-95 and 158-164

149

Part M access to and use of buildings A wide range of options to help specifiers and contractors comply with Part M of the building regulations... without compromising on style.

Contrast frame

Clipper large rocker switches

ExtEndEd rAngE of PArt M solutions... Legrand has extended itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Synergy range with a new selection of traditional matt black plates... ideal to meet Part Mâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s contrast requirements on light coloured walls. In addition, there is a new contrast frame that allows Synergy White to be used with DLP Contour perimeter trunking, plus a completely new Clipper range of wiring devices with large rockers.

150

To find out more about how to comply with the regulations, visit: www.legrand.co.uk to order your FREE copy of our Part M guide.

NEW

Synergy ® Part M

8203 48

8203 51

8203 46

Matt black coated stainless steel front plates White interiors and rockers Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

Cat. Nos.

Black/White

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

Flush mounting back box : min. 16 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

1 1

8203 48 8203 50

1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

8203 49

2 gang – 2 way

Black/White

8203 45

1 gang – switched

Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

Single pole large rocker switches 10 AX - 250 V

8203 46

2 gang – switched outboard for standard and clean earth applications

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Black/White

Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm

1 1

8203 51 8203 63

1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

8203 52

2 gang – 2 way

Cooker control unit 45 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 4177 : 1992 45 A - 250 V DP switch with 13 A - 250 V DP switched socket outlet Red rocker Flush mounting back box : min. 48 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 146 mm

± ±

Black/White

8203 67

DP with DP switched socket

Other devices available on request Fused connection unit 13 A - 250 V

For grid solutions, including matt black front plates and white modules, see p. 158-164 Black/White

8203 47

TV, radio and satellite sockets Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Black/White

8203 64

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated

8203 65

Screened TV + FM + satellite, ‘F’ type

Telephone socket Black/White

8203 66(1)

Flush mounting back box : min. 35 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Single secondary

(1) Not suitable for use in the ROI

151

MEIGaN socket outlets

NEW

Synergy ®

MEIGaN sockets

A range of sockets designed specifically to meet the requirements of the Medical Electrical Installation Guidance Notes. 8204 50

8204 53

For use in healthcare establishments Engraved in white lettering ‘MEDICAL EQUIPMENT ONLY’ Blue coated stainless steel front plates White interiors and rockers Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Pack

Cat. Nos.

Blue/White

8204 50

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Flush mounting back box : min. 25 mm deep Nominal plate dimensions : 1 gang : 86 x 86 mm 2 gang : 86 x 146 mm 1 gang – switched

AL MEDIC ONLY MENT

EQUIP

8204 51

UIPME

AL EQ

MEDIC

NT ON

2 gang – switched

Unswitched socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Blue/White

Healthcare organisations have clear guidelines regarding electrical installations within their establishments. To meet these exacting requirements, Legrand offers a selection of corresponding blue socket outlets with white engraved lettering indicating MEDICAL EQUIPMENT ONLY. Manufactured from high quality stainless steel for strength and durability, the following configurations are available : • 1 gang - switched or unswitched (clean earth) • 2 gang - switched or unswitched (clean earth) 152

8204 52

8204 53

AL MEDIC ONLY MENT

EQUIP

UIPME

AL EQ

MEDIC

NT ON

2 gang – unswitched

NEW

Synergy ® media plates

Synergy media plates ®

The complete multimedia solution for residential and commercial applications.

8201 43

Pack

8201 45

Cat. Nos.

Synergy media plates (monobloc) Comprising 2 x independent satellite feeds, 1 x terrestrial TV socket suitable for analogue and digital signals, 1 x video return, 1 x secondary telephone point, 2 x Synergy 2 gang switched DP 13 A sockets To be used with back box Cat. No. 8204 58 below Dimensions : 206 x 267 mm Material : stainless steel

8201 42 White (metal)

8201 43 Brushed stainless steel

8201 44 Polished stainless steel

8201 45 Modern Nickel

8201 46 Modern Silver

8201 47 Modern Black Nickel

8201 48 Modern Matt Black

Back box Dimensions : 194 x 254 x 35 mm With phase barrier Material : grey epoxy coated steel 1

8204 58 35 mm deep box

Synergy’s new media plates enable you to create neat, compact installations for today’s digital entertainment requirements. Available in every Synergy finish, the plates consist of : • 2 independent satellite feeds • 1 terrestrial TV socket (digital / analogue) • 1 secondary telephone socket • 2 x 2 gang switched DP 13A socket outlets

153 153

Synergy ® metalclad

7338 00

7338 02

7338 70

7338 65

7338 03

7338 61

7338 71

7338 89

Finish : grey epoxy coated steel Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied complete with close fit surface mounting back box Pack

Cat. Nos.

Single pole plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Pack

7338 75

2 gang – unswitched

8200 73

2 gang single socket with DP key switch

Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm 7338 00 7338 01 7338 05

1 gang – 1 way 1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – intermediate

7338 02

2 gang – 2 way

7338 03

3 gang – 2 way

Double pole socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

820073.eps

RCD sockets 13 A - 250 V

Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm

Conform to BS 7288 : 1990 and BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

7338 60

1 gang – switched

7338 61

1 gang – switched + red LED power indicator Nominal dimensions : 86 x 146 x 43 mm

7338 70

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995

Unswitched and key switched socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 2 : 1995 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism 2 earth terminals Nominal plate dimensions : 1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 7338 65 1 gang – unswitched

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 5 5 5

Cat. Nos.

Conventional earth pin release shutter Maximum operating current 16 A Incorporate a “test and reset” button Nominal dimensions : 86 x 146 x 43 mm 1

7338 97

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA active – trips on power failure

7338 98

RCD unit 2 gang DP 30 mA passive – does NOT trip on power failure

2 gang – switched

Socket outlets 15 A - 250 V 5

154

7338 71

2 gang – switched + red LED power indicator

Conform to BS 546 : 1950 Patented 3 pin safety shutter mechanism Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm 5

7338 88

1 gang – unswitched

7338 89

1 gang – switched

Synergy ®

metalclad (continued)

7338 34

7338 37

7338 12

7338 31

7338 32

7338 19

Finish : grey epoxy coated steel Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied complete with close fit surface mounting back box Pack

Cat. Nos.

7338 34

7338 35

7338 36

7338 37

Fused connection units 13 A - 250 V

Pack

7338 21

Cat. Nos.

Double pole switches 20 A - 250 V

Conform to BS 1363 - Part 4 : 1995

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000

Fused 13 A (fuse supplied) Fuse drawer retained by quarter turn catch, drawer padlockable in open position for safety Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm

Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm

7338 10

20 A DP

7338 14

20 A DP with cord outlet

7338 16

20 A DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

7338 12

20 A DP + red LED power indicator

Switched, DP

Switched, DP with red LED power indicator Switched, DP with cord outlet Switched, DP with cord outlet + red LED power indicator

Cable outlet 20 A - 250 V

Conforms to BS 5733 : 1995 5

7338 30

Unswitched

7338 31

Unswitched with red LED power indicator

7338 32

Unswitched with cord outlet

Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm 5

7338 33

7338 19

20 A – with terminal block and outlet gland

Double pole switches 45 A - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 : 2000 Red rocker Nominal dimensions : 146 x 86 x 43 mm

Unswitched with cord outlet + red LED power indicator 5

7338 20

45 A DP

7338 21

45 A DP + red LED power indicator

155

Synergy ®

metalclad (continued)

7338 41

7338 40

7338 50

7338 56

7338 57

7338 95

7338 96

Finish : grey epoxy coated steel Terminal screws captive and backed off ready for cabling Supplied complete with close fit surface mounting back box Pack

Cat. Nos.

TV, radio and satellite sockets

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm 5

7338 40

Screened TV – single, male Non-isolated

7338 41

Screened satellite – single, ‘F’ type

Data sockets CAT 6 compliant Rapid cable connection Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm

7338 56

RJ45 – single

7338 57

RJ45 – double

Telephone sockets Nominal dimensions : 86 x 86 x 43 mm 5

(1)

7338 50

Single master

7338 51(1)

Single secondary

(1) Not suitable for use in the ROI

156

Blanking plates 5

7338 95

7338 96

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm

Synergy 速

metalclad (continued)

7338 92

7339 94 7364 00

picto loupe-65765j.eps

7354 90

7354 92

Grid selection charts (p. 162-164) Grid modules (p. 158-159) Arteor modules (p. 77-95) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Carrier plates for Arteor modules (square)

7364 01

Pack

Cat. Nos.

No additional yoke required 5

7338 91

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 Arteor module

7338 92

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 Arteor modules

Surface mounting metal boxes Suitable for use with Synergy metalclad, traditional and Synergy grid system metal plates Conform to BS 5733 where applicable Material : grey epoxy coated steel Depth 37 mm

30 5

7338 93

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 Arteor modules

7338 94

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 Arteor modules

20 20

1 and 2 gang plates for grid modules

Dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1 gang With knockouts 7364 20 1 gang Without knockouts 7364 00

Dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 2 gang With knockouts 7364 21 2 gang Without knockouts 7364 01

For yokes, see below 1

7339 91

7339 92

7339 93

7339 94

1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 1 small aperture module 1 gang - 86 x 86 mm 2 small aperture modules

Dimensions : 146 x 146 mm 1

7364 18

6/8 module grid With knockouts

7364 22

6/8 module grid Without knockouts

2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 3 small aperture modules 2 gang - 86 x 146 mm 4 small aperture modules

1 and 2 gang yokes for grid modules 10

7354 90

1 gang 1 module

7354 91

1 gang 2 modules

7354 92

Dimensions : 207 x 146 mm 1

7364 28

9/12 module grid With knockouts

7364 32

9/12 module grid Without knockouts

2 gang 3/4 modules

For complete range of grid front plates and modules see p. 77-95 and 158-164 157

Synergy complete choice and flexibility ®

Synergy ® grid modules

With standard and modular grid devices to choose from, the possibilities are endless... 7354 00

7354 11

7355 01

7355 17

Modules mount from front into grid yokes Individually removable without disturbing grid Pack

Cat. Nos.

Single pole switch modules 10 AX - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 White

Anthracite

7354 00 7355 00

1 way switch

7354 01 7355 01

1 way switch + red LED power indicator

7354 03 7355 03

2 way switch

7354 07 7355 07

Intermediate

Single pole switch modules 20 AX - 250 V

White

Anthracite

Conform to BS EN 60669-1

7354 10 7355 10

1 way switch

7354 11 7355 11

1 way switch + red LED power indicator

10 10 10 10

7354 12 7354 13 7354 14 7354 14AR

10 10

7354 15 7355 15 7354 18 7355 18

itch 2 way centre off (1) 2 way retractive centre off (1) 2 way retractive centre off marked with up + down arrows (1) 2 way push switch (1) Intermediate

7355 12 7355 13 7355 14 7355 14AR

Single pole push switch modules 10 A - 250 V

White

Anthracite

7354 05 7355 05

7354 05PE 7355 05PE

7354 06 7355 06

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 2 way push switch

SYNERGY GRID ®

Available in sizes from 1 to 24 gang and with options of standard or bespoke rocker engraving.

2 way push switch marked “PRESS TO EXIT” 2 way push switch marked “BELL”

BELL

Single pole key switch modules 20 AX - 250 V

SYNERGY AND ARTEOR™ ®

Modular solution allowing Synergy installations to benefit from the vast selection of Arteor functions.

PRESS TO EXIT

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 Key supplied 7354 16 7355 16 2 way key switch 7354 17 7355 17 2 way key switch retractive centre off (1) 7354 19 7355 19 Intermediate White

10 10 10

Anthracite

(1) 20 A rated only

158

Synergy ®

grid modules (continued)

7355 48

7354 21

7350 30

7351 62

7352 56

7355 41

7355 35

7352 65

Modules mount from front into grid yokes Individually removable without disturbing grid Pack

Cat. Nos.

Double pole switch modules 20 AX - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 White

Anthracite

White

7354 20 7355 20

Switch

7354 21 7355 21

Switch + red LED power indicator

10 10

7354 22 7355 22 7354 25 7355 25

Push to make (1) Push to break(1)

7354 47 7355 47

White

10 10

Anthracite

7354 23 7355 23 7354 23ET 7355 23ET 7354 24 7355 24

0811 77

Anthracite

7350 30 7351 30

White

Anthracite

Key switch + red LED power indicator

White

10 10

Anthracite

7350 60 7351 60 7350 62 7351 62

Spare key for Synergy key switch functions

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 Dimmer for use with tungsten filament lamps, good quality wire-wound transformers and compatible electronic transformers for low voltage loads(2) 40 - 300 W Not suitable for fluorescent loads

Anthracite

7354 48 7355 48

Conform to BS 5733 Indicator - red LEDs Indicator - green LEDs

Ancillary modules

Dimmer unit modules dimmable HF ballast fluorescent 100 - 240 V 50/60 Hz White

Conform to BS 5733 Fuse module fitted with BS 1362 13 A fuse

Indicator modules - 250 V

Key switch Key switch marked “EMERGENCY LIGHT TEST”

White

Anthracite

1 1

7354 50 7355 50 7354 51 7355 51

Telephone socket - single master Telephone socket - single secondary

7352 56 7353 56

RJ 45 data outlet CAT 6 compliant Rapid cable connection UTP 8 contact

7354 40 7355 40

Screened TV - single Non-isolated

7354 41 7355 41

Screened satellite

7352 65 7353 65

Hi-fi outlet

7354 35 7355 35

Cable outlet

7354 36 7355 36

Blank module

7354 46 7355 46

Multiple way soft start time delay switch Push operated delay pre-set for 3, 10 or 30 minutes 40 - 400 W Not suitable for fluorescent loads

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 Key supplied

Dimmer unit modules 100 - 240 V 50/60 Hz 1

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-3

Spare key 5

Fuse carrier modules 13 A - 250 V White

Double pole key switch modules 20 AX - 250 V

Anthracite

Time delay switch 100 - 240 V 50/60 Hz

Conform to BS EN 60669-2-1 1 way dimmer for dimmable HF ballast fluorescent 0-10 V 400 W

For decorative rockers and complete range of grid front plates and yokes (1) 20 A rated only (2) Can be used in conjunction with compatible electronic transformers for low voltage loads. It will be necessary to test that the dimmer mechanism is compatible with the electronic transformer identified for installation

see p. 160 and 162-163

159

® pour exemple XXXXXXxxxxxx Synergy grid system

xxxxxxxx rockers and rocker markings decorative

DECORATIVE ROCKERS TO MATCH SYNERGY MODERN DECORATIVE ROCKERS

FUNCTIONS

MODERN SILVER

MODERN NICKEL

MODERN MATT BLACK

MODERN BLACK NICKEL

–

Pack

10 AX switch 1 x 1 way

7355 00MS

7355 00MN

–

10 AX switch 1 x 2 way

7355 03MS

7355 03MN

–

10 AX switch 1 x intermediate

7355 07MS

7355 07MN

–

10 A push switch 1 x 2 way

7355 05MS

7355 05MN

–

20 AX SP switch 1 way

7355 10MS

7355 10MN

–

20 AX SP switch 2 way

7355 12MS

7355 12MN

7399 04

7397 04

20 AX SP switch 2 way centre off

7355 13MS

7355 13MN

7399 05

7397 05

20 AX SP switch 2 way retractive centre off

7355 14MS

7355 14MN

7399 06

7397 06

20 AX SP push switch 2 way

7355 15MS

7355 15MN

7399 07

7397 07

20 AX SP intermediate switch

7355 18MS

7355 18MN

7399 08

7397 08

20 AX DP switch

7355 20MS

7355 20MN

7399 09

7397 09

20 AX DP push to make switch

7355 22MS

7355 22MN

7399 10

7397 10

20 AX DP push to break switch

7355 25MS

7355 25MN

7357 25

7358 25

GRID MODULES WITH STANDARD APPLIANCE MARKINGS MODULES

ROCKER MARKINGS

20 AX DP SWITCH

20 AX DP SWITCH + RED LED POWER INDICATOR

White

Anthracite

White

Anthracite

Pack

BOILER

7354 20BL

7355 20BL

7354 21BL

7355 21BL

COOKER HOOD

7354 20CH

7355 20CH

7354 21CH

7355 21CH

DISH WASHER

7354 20DW

7355 20DW

7354 21DW

7355 21DW

EXTRACTOR

7354 20EX

7355 20EX

7354 21EX

7355 21EX

EXTRACTOR FAN

7354 20EF

7355 20EF

7354 21EF

7355 21EF

EXTRACTOR HOOD

7354 20EH

7355 20EH

7354 21EH

7355 21EH

FAN

7354 20FN

7355 20FN

7354 21FN

7355 21FN

FREEZER

7354 20FZ

7355 20FZ

7354 21FZ

7355 21FZ

FRIDGE

7354 20FR

7355 20FR

7354 21FR

7355 21FR

FRIDGE FREEZER

7354 20FF

7355 20FF

7354 21FF

7355 21FF

HEATER

7354 20HR

7355 20HR

7354 21HR

7355 21HR

HOB

7354 20HB

7355 20HB

7354 21HB

7355 21HB

HOOD

7354 20HD

7355 20HD

7354 21HD

7355 21HD

LIGHTS

7354 20LG

7355 20LG

7354 21LG

7355 21LG

MICROWAVE

7354 20MW

7355 20MW

7354 21MW

7355 21MW

OVEN

7354 20OV

7355 20OV

7354 21OV

7355 21OV

PLINTH HEATER

7354 20PH

7355 20PH

7354 21PH

7355 21PH

TOWEL RAIL

7354 20TR

7355 20TR

7354 21TR

7355 21TR

TUMBLE DRYER

7354 20TD

7355 20TD

7354 21TD

7355 21TD

WASHING MACHINE

7354 20WM

7355 20WM

7354 21WM

7355 21WM

WASTE DISPOSAL

7354 20WD

7355 20WD

7354 21WD

7355 21WD

WATER HEATER

7354 20WH

7355 20WH

7354 21WH

7355 21WH

160

Synergy ® grid system for Synergy modules

■ Flush mounting installation examples 2 modules

7354 00 x 2 0891 13 35 mm depth

7354 91

7301 92

8 modules

7354 00 x 8 0818 52 43 mm depth

7354 92 x 2

7301 83

18 modules

7354 00 x 18 7354 93 x 3

7301 86

0818 54 56 mm depth

■ Surface mounting Surface mounting of Synergy grid modules using components illustrated above 1 or 2 modules Box dimensions

3 or 4 modules

6 or 8 modules

9 or 12 modules

207 x 146 x 37

86 x 86 x 37

86 x 146 x 37

146 x 146 x 37

Surface box (no knockouts)

7364 00

7364 01

7364 18

7364 28

Surface box (with knockouts)

7364 20

7364 21

7364 22

7364 32

■ Clip-on plates (1-4 modules) Grids required for clip-on plates differ from grids for screw-attached faceplates Grids required for Modern are Cat. Nos. 7354 81 (1 or 2 modules) and 7354 82 (3 or 4 modules)

161

® pour exemple XXXXXXxxxxxx Synergy grid system

xxxxxxxx

ARCHITRAVES

FRONT PLATES WITH SMALL APERTURES

GRID MODULES FRONT PLATES

1 gang

2 gang

1 module

2 modules

Pack

Dimensions (mm)

Pack

86 x 36

1 gang

2 gang

1 module

Pack

146 x 36

2 modules

Pack

86 x 86

3 modules

Pack

86 x 86

4 modules

Pack

86 x 146

White

7301 80

7301 81

7301 91

7301 92

7301 93

7301 94

Traditional brushed stainless steel

7331 80

7331 81

7331 91

7331 92

7331 93

7331 94

Traditional polished stainless steel

7333 80

7333 81

7333 91

7333 92

7333 93

7333 94

Traditional satin brass

7335 80

7335 81

7335 91

7335 92

7335 93

7335 94

Traditional polished brass

7337 80

7337 81

7337 91

7337 92

7337 93

7337 94

–

7339 91

7339 92

7339 93

7339 94

Metalclad

–

(1)

89 x 89

Dimensions (mm)

(1)

89 x 89

89 x 149(1)

89 x 149

Modern silver

–

7311 91

7311 92

7311 93

7311 94

Modern nickel

–

7313 91

7313 92

7313 93

7313 94

Modern matt black

–

7317 91

7317 92

7317 93

7317 94

–

7315 91

7315 92

7315 93

Modern black nickel

–

GRID YOKES

For white, traditional and metalclad

For modern

7354 95

–

7315 94

7354 96

7354 90

7354 91

7354 92

–

7354 81

7354 82

BACK BOXES

Dimensions (mm) Flush

82 x 28 x 26 10

Flush with phase barriers Dimensions (mm) Surface white for white only

7364 40

142 x 28 x 26 10

– 86 x 36 x 30 10

7364 05

7364 41

35 mm depth 100

– 146 x 36 x 30 5

7364 04

Dimensions (mm)

0891 13

35 mm depth 100

– 86 x 86 x 47 10

7364 07

86 x 86 x 37

0891 13

35 mm depth 40

–

7364 07

35 mm depth 40

–

86 x 86 x 47 10

0891 14

–

86 x 146 x 47 5

86 x 86 x 37

7364 11

0891 14

86 x 146 x 47 5

86 x 146 x 37

7364 11 86 x 146 x 37

Surface steel with knockouts

–

7364 00

7364 01

Surface steel without knockouts

–

7364 20

7364 21

Front plate material White : 1 to 8 modules - thermoset; 9 to 24 modules - stainless steel Traditional : All modules - stainless steel Metalclad : 1 to 4 modules - mild steel; 6 to 24 modules - stainless steel Modern : 1 to 4 modules - die cast alloy; 6 to 8 modules - stainless steel

162

(1) Screw free clip-on front plate

FRONT PLATES WITH SMALL APERTURES 2 x 2 gang 6 modules

Pack

3 x 2 gang 8 modules

Pack

146 x 146

9 modules

Pack

146 x146

12 modules

Pack

207 x 146

3 x 3 gang

4 x 3 gang

18 modules

24 modules

Pack

207 x 146

Pack

267 x 206

7301 82

7301 83

7301 84

7301 85

7301 86

7301 87

7331 82

7331 83

7331 84

7331 85

7331 86

7331 87

7333 82

7333 83

7333 84

7333 85

7333 86

7333 87

7335 82

7335 83

7335 84

7335 85

7335 86

7335 87

7337 82

7337 83

7337 84

7337 85

7337 86

7337 87

7339 82

7339 83

7339 84

7339 85

7339 86

7339 87

146 x 146

207 x 146

267 x 206

7311 82

7311 83

7311 84

7311 85

7311 86

7311 87

7313 82

7313 83

7313 84

7313 85

7313 86

7313 87

7317 82

7317 83

7317 84

7317 85

7317 86

7317 87

7315 82

7315 83

7315 84

7315 85

7315 86

7315 87 4x

7354 92

7354 93

7354 92

7354 93

(2)

137 x 137 x43 1

0818 52

137 x 137 x43 1

–

198 x 137 x 43

254 x 194 x 56

0818 52

0818 53

0818 54

0818 55

–

0818 57

0818 58

0818 59

–

146 x 146 x 37

198 x 137 x 43

(2)

–

146 x 146 x 37

–

207 x 146 x 37

–

207 x 146 x 37

7364 18

7364 28

–

7364 22

7364 32

–

(2) Phase barrier variant shown

163

® pour exemple XXXXXXxxxxxx Synergy grid system

xxxxxxxx Arteor modules for

FRONT PLATES FOR ARTEOR MODULES GRID MODULES 1 gang

1 gang

FRONT PLATES

2 gang

2 x 2 gang

Clip-in carrier plate - no yoke required

Pack

Dimensions (mm)

1 module

Pack

86 x 86

2 modules

Pack

86 x 86

3 modules

3 x 3 gang

Yoke required

4 modules

Pack

86 x 146

Pack

86 x 146

8 modules

Pack

146 x 146

18 modules

267 x 206

White

7300 91

7300 92

7300 93

7300 94

7301 88

7301 90

Traditional brushed stainless steel

7330 91

7330 92

7330 93

7330 94

7331 88

7331 90

Traditional polished stainless steel

7332 91

7332 92

7332 93

7332 94

7333 88

7333 90

Traditional satin brass

7334 91

7334 92

7334 93

7334 94

7335 88

7335 90

–

7337 88

7337 90

7338 91(1)

7338 92(1)

7338 93(1)

7338 94(1)

7339 88

7339 90

Traditional polished brass

–

Metalclad

–

(2)

Dimensions (mm)

–

(2)

89 x 89

(2)

89 x 149

146 x 146

267 x 206

Modern silver

7310 91

7310 92

7310 93

7310 94

7311 88

7311 90

Modern nickel

7312 91

7312 92

7312 93

7312 94

7313 88

7313 90

Modern matt black

7316 91

7316 92

7316 93

7316 94

7317 88

7317 90

Modern black nickel

7314 91

7314 92

7314 93

7314 94

7315 88

7315 90

–

2 x 7354 92

3 x 7354 93

GRID YOKES for 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 gang front plates Grid yoke

–

Arteor module carrier

–

2 x 7354 84

= Grid yoke complete with Arteor module carrier

–

2 x 7354 74

3 x 7354 86

3 x 7354 76

BACK BOXES (3)

Dimensions (mm) Flush

35 mm depth 100

Flush with phase barriers

35 mm depth 100

0891 13

–

Dimensions (mm) Surface white for white only

0891 13

–

86 x 86 x 47 10

7364 07

86 x 86 x 47 10

7364 07

86 x 86 x 37

Dimensions (mm) Surface steel with knockouts

7364 00

Surface steel without knockouts

7364 20

Front plate material White : 1 to 4 modules - thermoset; 8-18 modules - stainless steel Traditional : All modules - stainless steel Metalclad : 1 to 4 modules - mild steel; 8 to 18 modules - stainless steel Modern : 1 to 4 modules - die cast alloy; 8 to 18 modules - stainless steel

164

35 mm depth 40

0891 14

35 mm depth 40

– 86 x 146 x 47 5

7364 11

86 x 146 x 37

0891 14

137 x 137 x 43 1

–

254 x 194 x 56

0818 52

0818 54

–

0818 58

86 x 146 x 47 5

–

7364 11

146 x 146 x 37

–

146 x 146 x 37

7364 01

7364 18

–

7364 21

7364 22

–

(1) Supplied with back box (2) Screw free clip-on front plate (3) Phase barrier variant shown

Clipper large rocker switches

NEW

Clipper large rocker Simplicity and an understated appearance with no visible screws.

2810 01

2810 03

2810 05

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 Front plates: polycarbonate Dimensions: 86.5 x 86.5 x 10.5 mm

Single pole large rocker plate switches 10 AX - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

10 4

2810 01 2810 08

1 gang – 2 way 1 gang – 2 way intermediate

2810 03

2 gang – 2 way

2810 05

3 gang – 2 way

Single pole large rocker push switch 10 AX - 250 V

2810 41

1 gang – 2 way push switch

Accessories 1

2819 08

Silver surround frame

1200

Neon surround frame

A NEW LOOK FOR A CLASSIC ROCKER... Marrying smooth curves with a slim profile, Legrand’s new Clipper range of large rocker switches works in perfect harmony with its Synergy wiring devices.

165

flush mounting steel back boxes

0891 10

0891 13

0891 11

Pack

200

surface mounting metal boxes for Synergy速 metalclad, traditional and grid

7364 00

7364 01

Cat. Nos.

0891 09

Switch and socket flush mounting back boxes

Pack

Only suitable for use with Synergy metalclad, traditional and Synergy grid system metal plates Conform to BS 5733 where applicable Material : grey epoxy coated steel

Depth 16 mm

Depth 37 mm

1 gang with 1 fixed lug, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal

30 30

0891 10

0891 11

Surface mounting metal boxes

Conform to BS 4662 Material : galvanised steel Top, side and back knockout entries according to type of box

Depth 25 mm 100

Cat. Nos.

1 gang with 3 fixed lugs, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal 2 gang with 1 fixed lug, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal

20 20

Dimensions : 86 x 86 mm 1 gang With knockouts 7364 20 1 gang Without knockouts 7364 00

Dimensions : 86 x 146 mm 2 gang With knockouts 7364 21 2 gang Without knockouts 7364 01

Dimensions : 146 x 146 mm Depth 35 mm 100

0891 13

0891 14

1 gang with 3 fixed lugs, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal

7364 18

6/8 module grid With knockouts

7364 22

6/8 module grid Without knockouts

2 gang with 1 fixed lug, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal Dimensions : 207 x 146 mm

0891 40

Dual box with 2 earth terminals Accepts 2 single gang accessories

Depth 48 mm 50

0891 17

0891 18

166

1 gang with 3 fixed lugs, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal 2 gang with 1 fixed lug, 1 adjustable lug and 1 earth terminal

7364 28

9/12 module grid With knockouts

7364 32

9/12 module grid Without knockouts

surface mounting moulded boxes for Synergy® white

Surface mounting metal back boxes When flush mounting isn’t an option, Synergy can still offer a decorative touch...

7364 07

7364 06

7364 11

Pack

7364 13

Cat. Nos.

Surface mounting moulded boxes - thermoset Conform to BS 5733 Material : white thermoset Mini trunking knockouts located around periphery of boxes Dimensions : 1 gang - 87 x 87 mm 2 gang - 87 x 147 mm

7364 03

1 gang - depth 16 mm With earth terminal

7364 06

1 gang - depth 35 mm

7364 07

1 gang - depth 47 mm

7364 08

2 gang - depth 16 mm

7364 10

2 gang - depth 35 mm

7364 11

7364 13

2 gang - depth 47 mm

2 x 1 gang - depth 35 mm

Surface mounting moulded boxes - PVC

SYNERGY BACK BOXES

Conform to BS 5733 Material : PVC

Synergy enables you to combine its metalclad back boxes with its traditional selection of wiring devices to provide surface mounting options with a decorative touch.

Dimensions : 1 gang - 87 x 87 mm 2 gang - 87 x 147 mm 10

7313

7314

1 gang - depth 35 mm 2 gang - depth 35 mm

This perfect partnership gives you durability with even more style... and a perfect flush profile between accessory and back box thanks to metalclad’s unique clam-type fit.. All in all, much more than just a pretty face.

167

Plexo IP 55 and IP 66... safety in numbers Whatever the weather, Plexo offers maintained and non-maintained IP 55 and IP 66 solutions to meet the specific needs of any environment.

IP55

Modular options for surface mounting

... and flush mounting

Silicon groove and flexible cable entry

Socket design accepts moulded plugs

TWo ranges, one common goal... Perfect protection, wherever you need it. Together, Plexoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s IP 55 and IP 66 ranges provide a complete weatherproof solution with modular housings that accommodate Arteor modular devices.

XX 168

IP66

Plexo

IP 66 weatherproof wiring devices

5721 11

6846 29

6846 19

6846 03

IP 66 - IK 08 Grey RAL 7016 / TO 29 Polypropylene/ABS housing Temperature rating : –20 to +40 °C (+50 °C for short periods) Provision for 20 mm dia. conduit entries (side and rear) Stainless steel captive terminal screws supplied in backed-off position Pack

Cat. Nos.

Switches and push button - 250 V

Pack

Cat. Nos.

684603-57553o.eps 20 A switches Grey

6846 03

6846 04

684554-57554o.eps 1 gang

Grey

6846 45

Adaptors for Legrand modules 684636-57605o.eps

2 gang – 2 way SP

Fitted with rear gasket with groove to deposit silicone No additional yoke required

6 A push button 6846 11

Grey

1 gang – 2 way SP with “PRESS”

13 A - 250 V

± socket outlets

6846 36

2 module adaptor with semi-transparent lid

6846 38

3 module adaptor with semi-transparent lid

British Standard 13 A socket

Grey

6846 19

o074140 Shuttered

for child safety Legrand modular unit(1) 13 A - BS 1363 : Part 2

1 gang unswitched 10

5721 11

2 gang switched

6846 29

684638-57606o.eps

Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 Fitted with rear gasket with groove to deposit silicone 1

1 gang DP switched

– 2 way SP

684612-57559o.eps

± fused spur unit

Conforms to BS 1363 : Part 4 Fitted with rear gasket with groove to deposit silicone

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 Fitted with rear gasket with groove to deposit silicone 1

13 A - 250 V

684645-57604o.eps

2P+

T ASTA approved

963.ep s

684619-73750o.eps

ISO M20 cable gland 25

0980 03

Cable gland IP 68

(1) For full details and range of Arteor modules, see p. 77-95

169

NEW

Plexo

IP 55 weatherproof wiring devices

0697 11

NEW

Plexo

IP 55 modular mechanisms

0695 34

0695 47

0697 10

IP 55 - IK 07 Grey RAL 7035 / 7016 Polycarbonate/polypropylene housing Temp. rating : –20 to +40 °C (+50 °C for short periods) Supplied with direct piercing gland Installation with surface mounting boxes or flush mounting frames Pack

0697 39

IP 55 - IK 07 Grey RAL 7035 / 7016 Polycarbonate mechanisms/ABS frames polypropylene housing Temp. rating : –20 to +40 °C (+50 °C for short periods) Supplied with direct piercing gland Pack

Cat. Nos.

Switches 10 A - 250 V

Cat. Nos.

0697 11

Emergency stop functions 3 A - 230 V

1 gang – 2 way SP Grey/Yellow

0697 15

2 gang – 2 way SP

0697 10

1 gang – 2 way SP + lens(1)

0697 17

1 gang – 1 way DP

0697 16

1 gang – SP intermediate

Push button - 250 V

0695 47

Emergency stop button 1 N/C contact 1 pole

0695 48

Emergency stop with key for reset N/O + N/C contact Key RONIS No. 455 supplied Key removable in 0 position

0695 49

Emergency stop - stay put 1/4 turn release N/O + N/C contact Key removable in 0 position

Key operated switches 3 A - 250 V Grey

0697 20

2 way push button

Socket outlets 13 A - 250 V

Supplied with "emergency stop" label in 8 languages Yellow cover plate, red button

Supplied with RONIS key No. 455 Key removable in all positions

0695 34

2 positions marked "0 – I" 2 N/O contacts

0695 35

2 positions marked "I - 0 - II" 2 N/O contacts

Supplied with screwless terminals Supplied with lamp 10

Captive terminal screws supplied in backed off position 0695 04 Electronic - IP55 2 wire connection Supplied with lamp Temporization : 25 s to 15 min. Max. loads : - 1 000 W incandescent and halogen 230 V - 400 W halogen 130 V - 400 VA ELV halogen lamps - 400 VA fluorescent lamps - 2 300 W resistive (heating)

Supplied with screwless terminals Conform to BS EN 60669-1 10

Illuminating time lag switch - 250 V

Captive terminal screws supplied in backed off position IP 55 - IK 07 to BS EN 60529 Conform to BS 1363 : Part 2 10

0697 32

0697 50

0697 39

1 gang – 13 A socket 2P + E screw terminals 2 gang – 10 A switch and 13 A socket

2 gang – two 13 A sockets 2P + E screw terminals (1) Use lamps Cat. Nos. 0694 97/98

170

For surface mounting boxes and flush mounting support frames see p. 171

NEW

Plexo

IP 55 modular mechanisms (continued)

0695 91

0696 51

0695 17

0696 71

0695 80

0898 40

IP 55 - IK 07 Grey RAL 7035 / 7016 Polycarbonate/polypropylene housing Temp. rating : –20 to +40 °C (+50 °C for short periods) Supplied with 1 flat + 1 stepped gland Captive terminal screws supplied in backed-off position Installation with surface mounting boxes or flush mounting frames Pack

Cat. Nos.

0695 83

Pilot light

Pack

Accepts E10 lamps - 5 W max. Supplied with lamp Cat. No. 0898 40 Supplied without diffusers (see below)

Grey

Diffusers for pilot light 10 10 10 10

0695 0695 0695 0695

88 89 90 91

Colourless Green Orange Red

Light sensitive switches - 230 V

Cat. Nos.

0696 51

0696 71

0696 81

Light sensitive switch 1 function IP 55 - IP 07 Can be used to switch a lighting 0695 17 circuit “ON” and “OFF” based on light conditions (nightfall, daybreak) Supplied in one piece, including photo electric cell Maximum load : - 1 400 W incandescent and halogen lamps 230 V - 400 VA fluorescent tubes Luminosity threshold : 0.5 to 1500 lux

Socket outlet 13 A - 250 V 0695 85

2 gang - 1 entry

1 gang For Plexo modular mechanisms

Accessories To receive Legrand modules (max. 2 modules) 10

0695 80

10 10

0694 98 0694 97

Adaptor with smoked polycarbonate flap

Lamps

Panel mounting 1 gang – 13 A socket 2P + E screw terminals

1 gang - 1 entry

Modular back box IP 55 - IK 05

230 V - 1 mA orange 230 V - 0.5 mA green 089836-6393o.eps

E10

Equipped with removable membrane glands Direct entry of cables (No need to be cut)

Flush mounting support frame

Photo-electric cell IP 55 For use with modular light sensitive 0695 18 switches Cat. Nos. 0037 21/23/25 (p.237)

Surface mounting box with membrane glands

0898 40

E10 for pilot light 230 V - 5 W

171

Earth clamps now have a new twist Tenby® Rapid Clamps, the UK market leader, have been protecting people for over forty years. The latest addition to the range, Tenby Rapid Clamp Ultra, now offers the same trusted reliability in a fraction of the time.

FAST, RELIABLE CONNECTIONS For commercial and residential applications in both new and existing installations, Tenby Rapid Clamp Ultra creates earthing connections with a simple new fixing method that makes fitting them in hard to reach areas easier than ever.

172

The unique ‘twist’ fixing method is up to 5 times faster when compared with traditional clamps. So for mains incomer pipes, boiler replacement, special locations or supplementary bonding in pre-17th Edition installations, earthing just got a whole lot easier!

Tenby® Rapid Clamp Ultra

NEW

Tenby® Rapid Clamp

earth clamps

EC14

0343 85 EC15/2 0343 86

0343 87

Conform to BS 951 : 2009 Available in three sizes Suitable for dry, non corrosive atmospheres and corrosive or humid conditions Resistance of incandescent wire 960° C Resistivity of 0.4 mΩ Colour : grey Polyamide Safe, intuitive 1/4 turn mounting ensuring an excellent, lasting equipotential link Pack

Cat. Nos.

EC16/3

Conform to BS 951 : 2009 Available in three types : Red (EC14) for dry, non corrosive atmospheres Blue (EC15) for corrosive or humid conditions Green (EC16) for corrosive or humid conditions, large earth conductors 3 standard band lengths to suit pipe diameters of 12-32 mm, 32-50 mm or 50-75 mm

Earthing clamps for all conditions

Pack

Terminal size : A – D (2·5 – 10 mm2 ) Maximum earth conductor 1 x 10 mm2 Pipe diameter

20 10 10

0343 85 0343 86 0343 87

Connection cross-section

Ø min. (mm)

Ø max. (mm)

min. (mm2)

max. (mm2)

12 18 28

16 22 32

2.5 2.5 2.5

16 16 16

20 20 20

Cat. Nos.

Earthing clamps for dry conditions

Terminal size : A – D (2·5 – 10 mm2 ) Maximum earth conductor 1 x 10 mm2 EC14 For pipe diameter 12 – 32 mm EC14/2 For pipe diameter 32 – 50 mm EC14/3 For pipe diameter 50 – 75 mm

Earthing clamps for all conditions Terminal size : A – D (2·5 – 10 mm2 ) Maximum earth conductor 1 x 10 mm2 20 20 20

20 20 20

EC15 For pipe diameter 12 – 32 mm EC15/2 For pipe diameter 32 – 50 mm EC15/3 For pipe diameter 50 – 75 mm Terminal size : A – E (2·5 – 16 mm2 ) Maximum earth conductor 2 x 16 mm2 EC16 For pipe diameter 12 – 32 mm EC16/2 For pipe diameter 32 – 50 mm EC16/3 For pipe diameter 50 – 75 mm

173

Putting a stop to energy waste Energy efficiency has never been more significant than in today's commercial environments... from offices and warehouses, to healthcare and education.

SHED SOME LIGHT... JUST WHERE YOU NEED IT Typically, up to 20% of a buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s electricity bill can be attributed to lighting. Lights are often left on when not required and people usually turn on all the lights in a room or building when they are only occupying a small part of it. Legrand's presence and absence detection saves energy by automatically switching off lighting when itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s not needed... providing a positive effect on both the environment and the wallet, whilst leaving users in complete control.

energy saving

174

PIR

Ultrasonic

45 m2

For small areas without obstacles

150 m2

For large areas with obstacles

Dual technology

Programming

90 m2

Ultimate detection for areas with obstacles

Remote configurators allow sensors to be quickly and easily reprogrammed at the touch of a button, without the need to ever remove them from the ceiling.

Different rooms are suited to different types of sensor, depending on the type of movement, frequency of usage and the need to detect movement around obstacles. This example shows a typical layout for a 400 m2 office, integrating each of the 3 technology options to provide the most effective solution for each environment.

To find out more about Legrand lighting management solutions visit: www.legrand.co.uk

) *! $

. /&

8 ( 8% 7 ( $5%6 5(% 7 %<5; . 9 : 2 ; < 0

to order your FREE copy of the latest brochure

175

lighting management switch sensors

Cat. Nos.

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

Mounting type

ON-OFF

Absence / presence detection

presence

Optional control

Technology

PIR

Supply voltage Operating temp (°C) IP rating

Max. installation height (m) Lux level

DIMENSIONS

ADJUSTMENT

FUNCTIONALITY

Time delay (mins) Audible alerts Walkthrough mode Daylight setting

0488 01

0488 02

0488 05

0488 06

0488 07

false ceiling false ceiling false ceiling false ceiling false ceiling - flush - flush - flush - flush - flush ON-OFF

presence/ absense P/B OR IR remote PIR

ON-OFF

presence/ absense P/B OR IR remote PIR

ON-OFF

presence/ absense P/B OR IR remote US

ON-OFF

presence/ absense P/B OR IR remote PIR/US

ON-OFF

presence/ absense P/B OR IR remote PIR

0488 08

0697 40 0697 80

0488 11

0488 10

wall - surface

presence/ absense

presence

presence/ absense

PIR

ON-OFF

P/B OR IR remote PIR

ON-OFF

P/B OR IR remote PIR

100/240 V 50/60 Hz

100/240V 50/60 Hz

100/240 V 50/60 Hz

IP 20

IP 55

IP 41

IP 55

-5 to + 45

45 m2/ Ø8m

150 m2/ Ø 14 m

90 m2/ Ø 11 m

45 m2/ Ø8m

180 m2/ Ø 15 m

1 to 1 275

yes

0 to 60 no no

0 to 60 yes yes

0 to 60

yes

0 to 60 yes yes

0 to 60 no no

12 secs to 60 mins no no

0 to 60 yes yes

tempo min lux max

15 minutes 500 lux

tempo min lux max

15 minutes 300 lux

Thumbwheel

yes

tempo min lux max

Commissioning tool

0882 35 0882 30

114·5

150

159·1

162·2

114·2

174·6

258

266·6

205

auto terminals

auto connection

fast terminals

auto terminals

fast connection

auto terminals

55·6

62·27

55·6

73·2

115·86

165·83

Factory settings

Weight (g) Type of connection Depth (mm) Halogen lamp

Without auxiliary With auxiliary 240 V 110 V

ELV halogen with 240 V ferromagnetic or electronic 110 V transformer

MAXIMUM LOADS

false ceiling - flush

Operating mode

Coverage L x I, diameter

Fluorescent tube

240 V

Fluorescent tube

110 V

Fluorescent lamp 240 V with ferromagnetic or electronic 110 V transformer 240 V

LED 110 V 240 V Compact fluorescent lamp with 1-10 ballast 110 V 240 V

Contactors 110 V

176

0488 03

52·3

yes

58·97

yes

58·97

52·3

72·2

yes

2 000 W

2 500 W

2 000 W

1 800 VA

70 x (2 x 36 W)

1 000 VA

1 000 W 900 VA

1 250 W 900 VA

1 000 W 900 VA

5x (2 x 36 W)

500 VA

1 000 VA 500 W

500 W

1 000 W 900 VA

5x (2 x 36 W) 500 VA 500 W

250 W

500 W

I maxi ≤ 2 A

500 W

I maxi ≤ 2 A I maxi ≤ 2 A I maxi ≤ 2 A

500 W

I maxi ≤ 2 A I maxi ≤ 2 A

1 000 W 900 VA

5x (2 x 36 W) 500 VA 500 W

250 W

500 W

250 W

1 000 W 900 VA

5x (2 x 36 W)

500 VA

500 W

1 000 VA 500 W

250 W

500 W

I maxi ≤ 2 A I maxi ≤ 2 A I maxi ≤ 2 A I maxi ≤ 2 A

lighting management switch sensors

0488 08 Rear view Fast connection

0488 08

0697 80

0488 06

0882 35

0882 30

Selection chart (p. 176) Technical characteristics (p. 178-179) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Ceiling mounted sensors

Pack

Can be mounted directly in false ceiling with spring return clip (supplied) or in 50 mm back box PIR sensors - Detection area 45 m²

1 1 1 1

Ø8m ptimum distance between 2 sensors : 6 m O Consumption 0.4 W in standby mode All loads 10 A - 240 V 0488 03 PIR ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence detection mode, automatic terminals Not compatible with Cat. Nos. 0882 35 or 0882 30 (1) 0488 01 PIR ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, optional push button or IR remote control, automatic terminals 0488 02(1) PIR ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, optional push button or IR remote control, fast connection 0488 07(1) PIR ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, optional push button or IR remote control, factory setting 15 min / 500 lux, automatic terminals 0488 08(1) PIR ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, optional push button or IR remote control, factory setting 15 min / 500 lux, fast connection Dual technology sensor - Detection area 90 m²

0488 06(1)

0488 05(1)

Ø 11 m ptimum distance between 2 sensors : 10 m O Consumption 0.8 W in standby mode All loads 10 A - 240 V Dual technology ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, optional push button or IR remote control, factory setting 15 min / 500 lux, automatic terminals Ultrasonic sensor - Detection area 150 m² Ø 14 m ptimum distance between 2 sensors : 12 m O Consumption 0.8 W in standby mode All loads 10 A - 240 V Ultrasonic ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, optional push button or IR remote control, factory setting 15 min / 500 lux, automatic terminals

Wall mounted sensor Supplied with mounting bracket PIR sensor - Detection area 45 m²

Ø8m Optimum distance between 2 sensors : 6 m Consumption 0.4 W in standby mode All loads 8.5 A - 240 V 0488 11 PIR wall mounted switch sensor 170°, presence detection mode, automatic terminals Not compatible with Cat. Nos. 0882 35 or 0882 30

1 1

Cat. Nos.

Outdoor ceiling / wall mounted sensors

Can be surface mounted on the ceiling or wall using angled bracket (supplied) PIR sensors - Detection area 45 m² Ø 8 m - IP 55 - IK 04 Optimum distance between 2 sensors : 6 m All loads 8.5 A - 240 V PIR ceiling / wall mounted switch sensor 360°, presence detection mode, automatic terminals Not compatible with Cat. Nos. 0882 35 or 0882 30 0697 40 PIR sensor - grey 0697 80 PIR sensor - white

Outdoor wall mounted sensor PIR sensor - Detection area 180 m²

0488 10(1)

Ø 15 m - IP 55 Consumption 0.4 W in standby mode All loads 8.5 A - 240 V PIR outdoor switch sensor 270°, presence / absence detection mode Optional push button or IR remote control, factory setting 15 min / 500 lux, automatic terminals

Commissioning tools

Used to remotely commission and modify sensor settings without having to remove them from the ceiling For use with the following sensors : Cat. Nos. 0488 01/02/05/ 06/07/08/10/14 Standard commissioning tool 0882 35 Allow the following settings : Time delay : 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 mins Lux level : 20, 100, 300, 500, 1 000 lux Presence / absence detection modes PIR and Ultrasonic sensitivity Test mode Advanced commissioning tool with LCD screen 0882 30 Enables precise commissioning of sensors : Time delay : from 1 s to 60 mins Lux level : from 1 to 1 275 lux Presence / absence detection modes PIR and Ultrasonic sensitivity Advanced functions : calibration, alarms, choice of mode detection (initial detection, maintain detection, retrigger), daylight functions 2 way communication - download and save settings from one sensor and reapply to another sensor Test mode

(1) C an be used with commissioning tools Cat. Nos. 0882 35 and 0882 30

177

pour exemple : xxxxxxx lighting management switch sensors xxxxxxxx Radio/ZigBee sensors and remote controls

lighting management switch sensors technical information

n Features Absence/presence detection mode selection Most Legrand sensors can be conﬁgured for presence (by default) or absence detection mode Presence detection mode means that lights are automatically turned on or off according to occupancy Absence detection mode means that lights are manually turned on and automatically turned off This mode offers extra energy savings Daylight setting The light level feature holds lighting OFF when natural light levels rise above a pre-set level This setting is adjustable and can be overridden This function is enabled by default 0488 14 Pack

Cat. Nos.

0882 32

Radio switch sensors - 230 VA

Recommended installation height : 2.5 m Dual technology sensor - Detection area 90 m² 0488 35 Ø 11 m Dual technology ceiling mounted switch sensor 360°, presence / absence detection mode, automatic terminals Can be mounted directly in false ceiling with spring return clip (supplied) or in 50 mm back box Optimum distance between 2 sensors : 10 m PIR technology sensor - Detection area 180 m² 0488 14(1) Ø 16 m PIR wall mounted switch sensor 270°, IP 55 Double PIR lens for optimal detection over long distances (up to 15 m) Optimum distance between 2 sensors : 6 m

Walk-through Mode For extra energy savings, walk-through mode switches lights off three minutes after an area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the ﬁrst 20 seconds This function is activated by default When enabled, this function works in the following manner : when a person enters the room, the lights go ON If the person leaves the room within 20 seconds, the sensor will turn the lights OFF 3 minutes after the initial detection If the person stays in the room longer than 20 seconds, the set time delay of the sensor applies

n Mounting options Ceiling mounting

Radio switch sensor - battery operated

Requires 2 alcaline AAA batteries 1.5 V type (supplied) Recommended installation height : 2.5 m PIR technology sensor - Detection area 180 m² 0488 31 Ø 16 m PIR wall mounted switch sensor 270°, IP 55 Double PIR lens for optimal detection over long distances (up to 15 m) Optimum distance between 2 sensors : 6 m

Remote controls Control 4 scenarios, 1 per push button 1 1

0882 31 IR remote control Requires alcaline 9 V - 6F22 battery (not supplied) Supplied with wall mounted holder 0882 32 IR/RF remote control Requires 2 alcaline AAA batteries 1.5 V type (supplied)

All sensors have built-in bracket systems that enable ceiling mounting Most sensors are suitable for standard back boxes (50 mm depth) This is important for applications where the ceiling is unavailable for sensor installation Only one Cat. No. for two ways of mounting Wall mounting

Wall mounted sensors have a mounting base For easy and quick mounting the base has to be ﬁxed against the wall, the wires connected to the automatic wiring block Then the sensor part is ﬁtted onto the base

ZigBee : Certified product - Manufacturer Specific Profile

178

(1) Can be used with commissioning tools Cat. Nos. 0882 35 and 0882 30, see p. 177

ZigBee : Certified product - Manufacturer Specific Profile

pour exemple : xxxxxxx lighting management switch sensors xxxxxxxx information (continued) technical

n Connection type To light source 2 000 W / 1 000 VA

230 V

Optional additional sensors

Optional push button

Automatic terminals with optional push button (Cat. Nos. 0488 01/03/05/06/07/10/11/14/31/35)

Fast connection (Cat. Nos. 0488 02/08)

n Detection area 45 m² False ceiling mounting

n Detection area 45 m² Ceiling / wall mounting

Cat. Nos. 0488 01/02/03/07/08

Cat. Nos. 0697 40/80

Detection area

2.5 m

15°

12 m

45°

15° 15°

2.4 m

Installation

45° 0° / 90°

15° 15°

0° / 90°

n Radio installation example using Cat. No. 0488 14

230 V Source

Source 230 V Cat. No. 0488 14

Wireless Radio/Zigbee controller Cat. Nos. 5738 34/35

Use Radio/ZigBee sensors with Arteor Radio/ZigBee controller (p. 12) to achieve higher energy savings in absence detection mode Ideal for refurbishment projects

179

Lighting make the bright choice Legrand offers a wide selection of lighting accessories for residential and commercial applications... including a choice of energy-saving options.

For the very latest in lighting management and control visit:

$ 5 % 6 5 ( % 7 8 ( 8% 7 ( . 9 : 2 ; < 0 % < 5 ;

180

www.legrand.co.uk to order your FREE copies of the latest brochures

CeiLing switChes Pull cords from 6 to 50 A with mains and extra low voltage options

CeiLing aCCessories Energy-saving and safety lampholders and pendant sets

shaver Lights Including standard and energy-saving units with anti-glare diffusers and concealed shaver sockets

buLkhead Lighting IP 44 and IP 55 utility bulkhead lights for internal and external use

other Legrand systems and ranges

i i i

Lighting management See p. 176 Arteor wiring devices See p. 74 Synergy wiring devices See p. 114

181

ceiling switches

0611 10

0611 26 + 8204 60 7545

Pack

10 10 10

10 10

Cat. Nos.

Ceiling switches

Cat. Nos.

Ceiling switch 50 A DP - 250 V

Conform to BS EN 60669-1 Clearly embossed terminal markings Thermoplastic material resulting in increased mechanical strength Quick snap on cover mouldings with easily detachable cord for installation/security

Conforms to BS 3676 Positive ON/OFF flag indicator Red neon indicator Suitable for ceiling or wall mounting For flush mounting, use box Cat. No. 0891 17 (see p. 166)

Dimensions : 80 mm diameter Fixing centres : 50·8 mm

Dimensions : 86 x 86 mm Fixing centres : 60·3 mm

Mains voltage – white 0611 10 6 A – 250 V SP one way with 1·5 m white cord

± 0611 11 6 A – 250 V± SP two way with 1·5 m white cord 0611 30 16 A – 250 V± DP one way with 1·5 m white cord Extra low voltage (cord not supplied) 0611 25 Pull to make/pull to break (non-latching)(1) 0611 26 Pull to make/pull to break with 28 V indicator and orange lens (non-latching)(1)

(1) Outside the scope of BS EN 60669-1

182

Pack

7768

10 10

7545 7768

50 A DP ceiling switch Surface box for Cat. No. 7545 - depth 47 mm

Accessories 10 10 250

0611 49 White replacement cord 1·5 m 8204 60 Orange cord 2·3 m and orange acorn 8204 69 White adaptor

ceiling accessories

safety lampholders and pendant sets

0600 81 0600 85 0600 86

8204 90

6603 07 Pack

Cat. Nos.

White

Energy-saving pendant set Conforms to EN 61000-3-2, EN 50082-1, EN 55015, EN 60929, EN 61547, EN 60928 and BS 67 Supply voltage 230 - 240 V Mains frequency 50 Hz To be used with 13/18 W 4 pin plug-in lamps only Dimming is not possible Ceiling rose has angled terminal block with clear polycarbonate shroud 8 in-line terminals with captive screws and earth terminal

0600 90 Pack

White

10 10

Safety lampholders

Safety batten lampholders T2 rated to BS 7895 Incorporate previous safety lampholders, plus : Angled terminal block with clear polycarbonate shroud Heat resistant tails to IEC 60227

0600 85 B22 lampholder – straight/short skirt 8 in-line terminals with captive screws plus earth 0600 86 B22 lampholder – straight/H.O. skirt 8 in-line terminals with captive screws plus earth

Safety pendant sets

6603 07 3 inch drop – energy-saving 13/18 W pendant set Lamp not supplied

T2 rated to BS 7895 Heat resistant glass fibre reinforced PET(1) one-piece lampholder body Safety lampholders feature automatic isolation of brass plungers following lamp removal Plungers cannot be made live again unless White lamp is in place 0600 81 B22 lampholder – short skirt

Cat. Nos.

10 10 10

T2 rated to BS 7895 Combination of ceiling rose (p. 121) and previous safety lampholder with length of two core 0·75 mm2 PVC circular flexible cable, plus : Angled terminal block with clear polycarbonate shroud 8 in-line terminals with captive screws and White Heat resistant tails to IEC 60227 0600 89 6 inch drop – short skirt lampholder 0600 90 6 inch drop – H.O. skirt lampholder 0600 94 9 inch drop – short skirt lampholder

Safety lampholder + tails 20

White T2 rated to BS 7895 8204 90 Safety lampholder + 6 inch tails

(1) PET – Polyethylene Terephthalate

183

bathroom lighting

bathroom lighting zoning

■ Understanding the regulations To conform with IEE regulations, BS 7671 : 2008, all installations should use an IPX4 rated product in zone 2 of a standard bathroom or a room containing a shower

OUTSIDE ZONE

6915 08

WINDOW ACCESS

3.00m

6915 06

fro

6915 09 Pack

Cat. Nos.

Energy-saving shaver light IP 44 Conforms to BS EN 60598 Electronic ballast (IEC EN 61347) offers a further 25-30% energy saving over standard control gear Light source : 4 pin energy saving 18/24 W 2G lamp Projected 50% longer life span with immediate startup, silent operation and flicker-free illumination Automatic switch off at end of the lamp’s life Shuttered 2 pin shaver socket for use with European, British and American 2 pin plugs Double wound 20 VA isolating transformer Plexo grommet Suitable for Zone 2 bathroom installation Screwless terminal cabling supplied with 24W 2G 11

6915 09 Energy-saving shaver light Polycarbonate base with opal polycarbonate diffuser

Conforms to BS EN 60598 Diffuser removal disconnects power supply to lamp Pull cord switch 2P shuttered socket 230 V - 20 VA isolating transformer Single voltage output 230 V Class II double isolated CE and marked Suitable for Zone 2 bathroom installation

Typical bathroom showing BS 7671 : 2008 zones and dimensions

Zone 0

Zone 2

87 mm

94 mm 451 mm

■ Shaver light and mirror light IP 24 - IK 08

Matches shaver light above (Cat. No. 6915 06) Conforms to BS EN 60598 Diffuser removal disconnects power supply to lamp Pull cord switch Class II double isolated CE and marked Suitable for Zone 2 bathroom installation

60 mm

6915 08 Mirror light supplied with 60 W - 230 V 284 mm double ended striplight S15 cap Ø 25 Polypropylene base with polycarbonate opal diffuser 82 mm

184

Zone 1

6915 06 Shaver light supplied with 60 W - 230 V 284 mm double ended striplight S15 cap Ø 25 Polypropylene base with polycarbonate opal diffuser

Mirror light IP 24 - IK 04

2.40m

■ Energy-saving shaver light IP 44

Shaver light IP 24 - IK 04

0.60m

470 mm

2.25m

0. 6m

OUTSIDE ZONE

utility weatherproof bulkhead lighting

utility weatherproof bulkhead lighting ■ Weatherproof round bulkhead lights 40

227

107 3

IP 44 Conforms to IS EN 60598-1 B22 lampholder Class II (double insulated) White base Multi-purpose low profile bulkhead suitable for indoor or outdoor application Twist and lock closing Lamp not supplied

■ Plexo weatherproof bulkhead lights

100 W incandescent 1/5

0604 50 With glass diffuser

1/5

0604 58 With polycarbonate diffuser

Ø 50 min.

Ø 70 max.

126

Weatherproof round bulkhead lights

205

Cat. Nos.

110

6604 18

219

Pack

6604 17

0604 50

113

72 140

All dimensions in mm (nominal)

Plexo weatherproof bulkhead lights IP 55 - IK 08 B22 lampholder Hinged polycarbonate diffuser Top/bottom reversible opening Lamp not supplied 75 W incandescent 5

1/5

6604 17 With clear diffuser

6604 18 With red diffuser

185

P. 190 Insulated surface mounting selection chart

68527a.eps

P. 192 Insulated custom build

P. 190 Metal surface mounting selection chart

Consumer units 68527a.eps

68528a.eps

68527a.eps

Home circuit protection

Irish consumer units

Supply units IP 55

P. 197 Dimensions

P. 190 Metal flush mounting selection chart

P. 193 Accessories

P. 195 Irish consumer units, protection and modular devices

P. 198 Garage/outbuilding supply units

NEW IN 2010 High integrity dual RCD split load

Insulated consumer unit (p. 192)

186

Dual RCD split load

Insulated consumer unit (p. 192)

P. 192 Insulated high integrity dual RCD split load

P. 192 Insulated dual RCD split load

P. 192 Insulated split load

P. 192 Insulated with incomer

P. 193 Metal dual RCD split load

P. 193 Metal split load

P. 193 Metal with incomer

P. 193 Metal custom build

P. 193 Metal dual RCD split load flush mounting

P. 193 Metal custom build flush mounting

P. 194 MCBs, RCDs and RCBOs

P. 194 Isolating switches and contactors

P. 196 Dimensions

68528a.eps

m004225bP. 198

Dimensions

68528a.eps

P. 194 Transformers

P. 198 Electric shower supply units

Single module RCBO (p. 194)

187

Greater protection simplifying the 17th Edition Legrand's latest selection of consumer units comply perfectly with the 17th Edition... including our range of new dual RCD split load units with 10 or 16 outgoing ways.

With an array of design innovations and practical features making them easy to install, Legrandâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s insulated and metal consumer units save valuable time and money during installation... allowing you to reflect on the generous wiring space and the all-round extra protection. COMBINING ELEGANCE WITH EFFICIENCY Designed to match todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s modern decor, the units offer a streamlined appearance allied with magnolia cases, allowing them to blend perfectly into their surroundings. A range of new semi-flush solutions and lockable brackets are also available to meet changing market requirements.

188

DUAL RCD SPLIT LOAD WITH DEDICATED MAIN SWITCH WAYS Select MCBs and RCBOs to complete installation DUAL RCD SPLIT LOAD Select MCBs to complete installation

SPLIT LOAD Select MCBs and RCBOs to complete installation

MAIN SWITCH INCOMER Select RCBOs to complete installation

RCD INCOMER Select MCBs to complete installation

FIND OUT MORE IRISH CONSUMER UNITS The Legrand wiring devices catalogue now contains a selection of consumer units and protection devices designed specifically for the Irish market.

i i i

Insulated consumer units See p. 192 Metal consumer units See p. 193 Irish consumer units See p. 195

189

consumer units insulated and metal

Insulated consumer units Conform to BS EN 60439-3. RAL 9001. Magnolia colour. Smoked transparent door opens downwards Supplied with neutral and earth terminals completely assembled. Supplied with 5 module spare blank plate Factory fitted link leads for both neutral and live connections. Configurable outgoing ways Self-extinguishing at 750 °C. UL 94 V2 material for improved flame retardancy. Robust thermoplastic construction. 4 fixing holes

Total outgoing ways Dimensions (p. 196) 2

High integrity dual RCD split load with 2 unprotected ways 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6075 74

–

6075 76

–

Dual RCD split load 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6075 54

–

6075 56

–

Split load 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6075 32

–

6075 35 6075 36

–

Split load dual tariff 2 x 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6075 46

–

Main switch incomer 63 A main switch

6075 10

–

Main switch incomer 100 A main switch

–

6075 11

–

6075 12

–

6075 14

–

6075 16

–

RCD incomer 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6075 21

–

6075 22

–

Custom build

–

6075 00

–

6075 01

–

6075 02

–

6075 04

–

6075 06

6075 33 6075 34

Metal consumer units Conform to BS EN 60439-3. RAL 9001. Magnolia colour. Smoked transparent door opens downwards Supplied with neutral and earth terminals completely assembled. Supplied with 5 module spare blank plate Factory fitted link leads for both neutral and live connections. Configurable outgoing ways Pre-galvanised steel for strength and rigidity. Epoxy/polyester powder coated base and lid

Dimensions (p. 197-198)

Total outgoing ways 6

Dual RCD split load 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6065 54 6065 64(1)

–

6065 56

–

Split load 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD

–

6065 32

–

6065 34

–

6065 36

–

Main switch incomer 100 A main switch

6065 11

–

6065 12

–

6065 14

–

6065 16

–

RCD incomer 80 A 30 mA RCD

6065 21

–

6065 22

–

6065 01

–

6065 04 6065 42(1)

–

6065 06

Custom build (1) Flush mounting

190

–

6065 02 6065 42(1)

protection devices MCBs and RCBOs

DX-E residential MCBs - 6 kA

DX-E residential MCBs - 6 kA Breaking capacity : 6 kA to BS EN 60898-1

Single pole - 230/400 V

RCBOs (combined MCB/RCD)

Single pole and neutral - 240 V

RCBOs (combined MCB/RCD) Breaking capacity : 10 kA to BS EN 61009-1 RCD type AC conform to BS EN 61009-1 Terminal capacity : rigid conductor 35 mm2 flexible conductor 25 mm2

0032 70

6064 25

Nominal rating (In)

Number of 17.5 mm modules

B curve

C curve

Number of 17.5 mm modules

B curve

C curve

0032 66

0033 82

6064 16

6064 22

10 A

0032 68

0033 84

6064 17

6064 23

16 A

0032 70

0033 86

6064 18

6064 24

20 A

0032 71

0033 87

6064 19

6064 25

25 A

0032 72

0033 88

–

32 A

0032 73

0033 89

6064 20

6064 26

40 A

0032 74

0033 90

6064 21

6064 27

50 A

0032 75

0033 91

6064 28

6064 29

63 A

0032 76

0033 92

–

30 mA

191

insulated consumer units surface mounting

6075 74

6075 54

6075 10

6075 21

Dimensions (p. 196) Conform to BS EN 60439-3. RAL 9001 - magnolia colour Self-extinguishing at 750 째C - UL 94 V2 material for improved flame retardancy Robust, rigid thermoplastic construction with 4 fixing holes. Smoked transparent door opens downwards Supplied with neutral and earth terminals completely assembled Supplied with 5 module spare blank plate (except 4 module unit) MCBs to be ordered separately, (see p. 194) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Insulated high integrity dual RCD split load with 2 unprotected ways - surface mounting

16 module unit (8 + 2 ways available) 6075 74 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

22 module unit (13 + 3 ways available) 6075 76 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

Insulated dual RCD split load - surface mounting 1

16 module unit (10 ways available) 6075 54 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

22 module unit (16 ways available) 6075 56 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

Insulated split load - surface mounting Factory fitted link leads for both neutral and live connections Configurable outgoing ways 1

12 module unit 6075 32 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (8 ways available)

14 module unit 6075 33 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (10 ways available)

16 module unit 6075 34 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (12 ways available)

20 module unit 6075 35 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (16 ways available)

22 module unit 6075 36 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (18 ways available)

Semi flush solutions available on request

For DX-E residential MCBs and single module RCBOs see p. 194 192

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Insulated split load dual tariff surface mounting Factory fitted link leads for both neutral and live connections Offers cost effective energy management through independent control of each tariff Flexible configurable outgoing ways

22 module unit 6075 46 With 2 x 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (16 ways available)

Insulated with incomer - surface mounting 1

4 module unit 6075 10 With 63 A main switch (2 ways available)

1 1

8 module unit 6075 11 With 100 A main switch (6 ways available) 6075 21 With 80 A 30 mA RCD (6 ways available)

1 1

12 module unit 6075 12 With 100 A main switch (10 ways available) 6075 22 With 80 A 30 mA RCD (10 ways available)

16 module unit 6075 14 With 100 A main switch (14 ways available)

22 module unit 6075 16 With 100 A main switch (20 ways available)

Insulated custom build - surface mounting

1 1 1 1 1

6075 6075 6075 6075 6075

00 01 02 04 06

Allow several configurations when using kits and incomers (isolating switches, RCDs, RCBOs) For kits, (see p. 193) For incomers and outgoing devices, (see p. 194) 4 modules available 8 modules available 12 modules available 16 modules available 22 modules available

Lockable consumer unit bracket available on request

For lockable consumer unit bracket and semi flush solutions see p. 194

metal consumer units and accessories surface and flush mounting

6065 21

6065 54

6065 06

Dimensions (p. 197-198) Conform to BS EN 60439-3. RAL 9001 - magnolia colour Pre-galvanised steel for strength and rigidity Smoked transparent door opens downwards Supplied with neutral and earth terminals completely assembled Supplied with 5 module spare blank plate MCBs to be ordered separately, (see p. 194) Pack

1 1

Cat. Nos.

Metal dual RCD split load - surface mounting

16 module unit (10 ways available) 6065 54 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD 22 module unit (16 ways available) 6065 56 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Metal dual RCD split load - flush mounting

16 module unit (10 ways available) 6065 64 With 100 A main switch and 2 x 80 A 30 mA RCD

Metal custom build - flush mounting Epoxy/polyester powder coated lid

Metal split load - surface mounting

Epoxy/polyester powder coated base and lid Stand-off feet complete with keyhole fixing Factory fitted link leads for both neutral and live connections Configurable outgoing ways 12 module unit 6065 32 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (8 ways available) 16 module unit 6065 34 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (12 ways available) 22 module unit 6065 36 With 100 A main switch and 80 A 30 mA RCD (18 ways available)

1 1

Accessories 1

Incomer or dual tariff kit 6075 19 Comprises : 1 flexible neutral (blue) lead 1 rigid neutral link

Split load kit 6075 39 Comprises : 1 flexible live (brown) lead 1 flexible neutral (blue) lead 2 rigid neutral links

Metal with incomer - surface mounting

1 1

6065 11 6065 21

1 1

6065 12 6065 22

6065 14

6065 16

Epoxy/polyester powder coated base and lid Stand-off feet complete with keyhole fixing 8 module unit With 100 A main switch (6 ways available) With 80 A 30 mA RCD (6 ways available) 12 module unit With 100 A main switch (10 ways available) With 80 A 30 mA RCD (10 ways available) 16 module unit With 100 A main switch (14 ways available) 22 module unit With 100 A main switch (20 ways available)

Metal custom build - surface mounting

1 1 1 1

6065 6065 6065 6065

01 02 04 06

Epoxy/polyester powder coated base and lid Stand-off feet complete with keyhole fixing Allow several configurations when using kits and incomers (isolating switches, RCDs, RCBOs) For kits, (see opposite) For incomers and outgoing devices, (see p. 194) 8 modules available 12 modules available 16 modules available 22 modules available

6065 42 12 modules available 6065 44 16 modules available

Split load dual tariff kit (for insulated units only) 6075 49 Comprises : 1 flexible live (brown) lead 2 flexible neutral (blue) leads 2 rigid neutral links 1 neutral terminal

Spare blank plate 6075 89 5 modules - magnolia colour

Spare busbar 6075 99 21 prongs

10 5

Spacing elements 0044 40 0·5 module 0044 41 1 module

1/3 ?

0044 41

Locking device for MCBs and RCDs 0044 42 Locking attachment for Ø 4 mm and Ø 6 mm padlocks Padlock for MCBs and RCDs 0044 43 Padlock Ø 4 m Spare terminal block 8204 07 13 hole

Finishing accessories 10 10/100

White blanking plate RAL 9010 0016 64 18 module, separable by single or half modules Self-adhesive label holder 0049 96 Width : 16 mm Width available for marking : 12 mm Length 530 mm (24 modules) 0049 96

193

consumer units

protection and control devices

0032 70

DX-E residential MCBs - 6 kA

Cat. Nos.

Pack

0089 12

0077 31

6064 16

Pack

0043 36 Cat. Nos.

Breaking capacity : 6 kA to BS EN 60898-1 Single pole - 230/400 V B curve 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

0032 0032 0032 0032 0032 0032 0032 0032 0032

66 68 70 71 72 73 74 75 76

C curve

0033 0033 0033 0033 0033 0033 0033 0033 0033

82 84 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

Nominal rating (In)

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Number of 17·5 mm modules

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Type AC

Breaking capacity : 6 kA to BS EN 60898-1 Single pole - 230/400 V 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1

1 10 10 1 1 1 1 1

0061 0061 0061 0061 0061 0061 0061 0061

56 58 60 61 63 64 65 66

C curve

0063 0063 0063 0063 0063 0063 0063 0063

72 74 76 77 79 80 81 82

Nominal rating (In)

6 10 16 20 32 40 50 63

A A A A A A A A

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

6064 6064 6064 6064 6064 6064 6064

16 17 18 19 20 21 28

6064 6064 6064 6064 6064 6064 6064

22 23 24 25 26 27 29

Nominal rating (In)

30 mA

6 10 16 20 32 40 50

A A A A A A A

1 1 1 1 1 1

194

0077 0077 0077 0077 0077 0077

31 32 33 34 36 37

0077 0077 0077 0077 0077 0077

38 39 40 41 43 44

Nominal rating (In)

30 mA

6 10 16 20 32 40

A A A A A A

5 5

09 10 11 12 10

25 A 40 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 100 mA 0089 15 25 A 0089 16 40 A 0089 17 63 A 0089 18 80 A 100 mA discriminating 6027 11 100 A

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2

± coil

Conforms to EN 61095 Double pole (L + N) 250 V 230 V coil circuit

Number of 17·5 mm modules

0043 31 63 A double pole 0043 36 100 A double pole

Contactor with 230 V

2 2 2 2 2 2

0089 0089 0089 0089 6027

Number of 17·5 mm modules

I max.

Type of contact

Number of 17·5 mm modules

2 N/O

230 V

0040 49 20 A

Transformers Bell transformers with label holder 230 V Conform to BS EN 61558-2-8 Secondary

Breaking capacity : 10 kA to BS EN 61009-1 RCD type AC conform to BS EN 61009-1 Terminal capacity : rigid conductor 35 mm2 flexible conductor 25 mm2 Single pole and neutral - 230/400 V C curve

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Conform to BS EN 60947-3, IEC 60669-1 Usage : AC 22 according to IEC 60947-3 Red handle Double break contacts, padlockable 50 mm2 capacity shielded terminals

RCBOs (combined MCB/RCD) Dual module

B curve

Nominal rating (In)

Isolating switches

Breaking capacity : 10 kA to BS EN 61009-1 RCD type AC conform to BS EN 61009-1 Terminal capacity : rigid conductor 35 mm2 flexible conductor 25 mm2 Single pole and neutral - 240 V C curve

1 1 1 1

Number of 17·5 mm modules

RCBOs (combined MCB/RCD) Single module

B curve

DX residual current devices (RCDs)

30 mA 1 1 1 1 1

DX multi-purpose MCBs - 6 kA

B curve

0042 20

Conform to BS EN 61008-1 Terminal capacity : rigid conductor 35 mm2 flexible conductor 25 mm2 Double pole 230 V

A A A A A A A A A

0040 49

1 1

±±

0042 20 8V 0042 25 8/12 V

Rating

Power

Number of 17·5 mm modules

0·5 A 1/0·66 A

4 VA 8 VA

2 2

Irish consumer units

protection devices and modular devices

6010 60

0013 31

picto loupe-65765j.eps

6010 61

0013 42

0041 07

0086 30

0041 13

Voltage surge protection technical information (p. 199) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Insulated consumer units

Pack

IEC 60439 – IP30 – IK05 – Class 2 230 V 50Hz operating voltage Surface mounting Supplied completely assembled with neutral and earth terminals Insulated reversible back plate and door Colour : white RAL 9010 Supplied complete with a set of pre-printed labels in English and Irish for use with MCBs and RCDs Supplied with blanking plates

Double pole 230 V Type AC

1 1

235 x 250 x 120 360 x 250 x 120 485 x 250 x 120

0086 29 0086 30

1 1

Transparent doors 0013 41 For 1 row unit 0013 42 For 2 row unit

DX-E residential MCBs - 6 kA Short circuit capacity : 6 000 A (IS EN 60898-1) Type B – 6 kA Single pole (1 protected pole) 230/400 V 68 71 73 74

2 2

B curve

0077 0077 0077 0077 0077

Nominal rating (In)

78 80 81 83 84

10 16 20 32 40

Number of 17·5 mm modules

A A A A A

2 2 2 2 2

Number of 17·5mm modules

Associated protection

Joining accessories Consisting of spacers and an arched cable gland for joining 2 units together 0013 92 Vertical (across whole width)

B curve

30 mA sensitivity 40 A 63 A

For neutral earthing : TT, TN, IT, Uc = 440 V Type 1 : Iimp = 10 kA (impulse discharge cap. 10/350 µs wave) Type 2 : In = 20 kA; Up = 2 kV (protection level) Imax = 70 kA (impulse discharge cap. 8/20 µs)

Clip-on blanking plates, white RAL 703S 0016 60 5 modules separable by module or half module 0016 62 13 modules separable by module or half module

0032 0032 0032 0032

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Voltage surge protector

20 20

1 1 1 1

DX RCBOs - 10 kA

Accessories White doors 0013 31 For 1 row unit 0013 32 For 2 row unit

Nominal rating (In)

Conform to BS EN 61009-1 Breaking capacity : 10 kA to BS EN 61009-1 Type B MCB and 30 mA RCD protection 1 1 1 1 1

Dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth

6010 60 1 row unit 6010 61 2 row unit 6010 62 3 row unit

Residual current devices (RCDs) Type AC Conform to IS EN 61008-1

Each consumer unit is fitted with : • 63 A Neozed fuse unit complete with fuse • 2 x 10 A type B MCBs • 32 A type B MCB • 63 A 30 mA RCD • 4 x 20 A type B MCBs 1 1 1

Cat. Nos.

Nominal rating (In)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

10 20 32 40

1 1 1 1

A A A A

(1) Min. protection for Icc max : 10 kA

0068 64

Bells and buzzer 50 Hz AC Connection by screw terminals, with label holder Bells - IP 30-1

10 10

0041 01 0041 07

0041 13

Voltage (V )

Power (VA)

Consum. (mA)

P (1) (dB)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

8/12 230

4/5 6

360/420 27

80/84 83

1 1

Buzzer - IP 30-1 230 6

Bell transformers

Conform to IEC / EN 61558-2-8 Transformers protected against overloads and short circuits Possibility for supply busbars to run through (Cat. Nos. 0042 20/25)

Specials available on request

Please note : The products shown on this page represent the most commonly used items in the range. Additional versions, including surface and flush boards, are also available on request.

0039 20 Single pole

Depth 60 mm

1 1

Secondary

Rating

230 V / 8 V 8V 0·5 A 230 V / 12 V - 8 V 0042 25 12/8 V 0·66/1 A 0042 20

± ±

Power

Number of 17·5 mm modules

4 VA

8 VA

Spare terminals available (p. 294) Modular timers (p. 230)

195

insulated consumer units surface mounting

■ Insulated - surface mounting dimensions (mm) A

■ 12 module unit Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm)

110

2 cut-outs 50 x 50

2 cut-outs 40 x 50

40 20

View from above

6 cut-outs 20 x 25

2 cut-outs 20 x 18.5

22 cut-outs 25 x 20

View from sides

A (mm)

B (mm)

140

225

212

225

298

225

14/16

370

225

20/22

478

225

Modules

2 cut-outs 20 x 25

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm) 1 cut-out 50 x 50

268

195

■ 4 module unit View from above

225 180

2 cut-outs 20 x 25

1 cut-out 40 x 50

2 cut-outs 20 x 18.5

View from below

■ 14/16 module unit

4 cut-outs 20 x 25

View from above

2 cut-outs 40 x 50

40 20

4 cut-outs View from 25 x 25 sides

2 cut-outs 50 x 50

40 20

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm)

30 cut-outs 25 x 20

10 cut-outs 20 x 25

View from sides

2 cut-outs 20 x 25

225 180

114

225

2 cut-outs 20 x 25

340 4 cut-outs 20 x 25

8 cut-outs 20 x 25

View from below View from below

■ 8 module unit Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm) 2 cut-outs 40 x 50

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm)

8 cut-outs 25 x 25

View from sides

2 cut-outs 50 x 50

2 cut-outs 40 x 50

View from above

50 6 cut-outs 20 x 25

■ 20/22 module unit

40 20

2 cut-outs 50 x 50

40 20

View from above

2 cut-outs 20 x 22

12 cut-outs 20 x 25

225 180 162

448

6 cut-outs 20 x 25

2 cut-outs 20 x 22

View from below

196

View from sides

2 cut-outs 20 x 25

114

225

2 cut-outs 20 x 25

42 cut-outs 25 x 20

View from below

10 cut-outs 20 x 25

metal consumer units surface mounting

■ 16 module unit

■ Metal - surface mounting dimensions (mm) A

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm)

113

4 cut-outs Ø 20

View from above

250

120

A (mm)

B (mm)

219

235

305

235

377

235

485

235

2 obround cut-outs 100 x 50

200

Modules

■ 8 module unit 175

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm) 4 cut-outs Ø 32 View from below

View from above

4 cut-outs Ø 25

4 cut-outs Ø 32

100

■ 22 module unit 1 obround cut-out 100 x 50 80

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm) 4 cut-outs Ø 25 View from above

Ø9

Ø5

350 120 View from below 2 obround cut-outs 100 x 50 80

1 cut-out Ø 25

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm)

■ 12 module unit 4 cut-outs Ø 32 View from above

275

View from below 175 8 cut-outs Ø 20

4 cut-outs Ø 32

1 obround cut-out 100 x 50

100

View from below

2 cut-outs Ø 20

2 cut-outs Ø 25

197

metal consumer units

supply units

flush mounting

IP 55

■ Metal - flush mounting dimensions (mm) A

230

113 min.

6059 19

97 min. 132 max.

50 Modules

A (mm)

B (mm)

330

260

402

260

200 min. 234 max.

6059 12

IP 55 Box and cover in moulded material Transparent, hinged, clip in to place cover Lockable with keylock Cat. No. 0017 66 Pack

■ 12 module unit

Cat. Nos.

Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm) 1

2 cut-outs Ø 20

Garage/outbuilding supply units

6059 18 16 40 6059 19 32 40

View from above

A A A A

and 6 A Type C MCB with 30 mA DP RCD incomer and 6 A Type C MCB with 30 mA DP RCD incomer

Electric shower supply units View from sides

300

1 1

6059 12 40 A 30 mA DP RCBO 6059 13 50 A 30 mA DP RCBO

1 1

0017 66 Lock and key 0017 69 Wall brackets (set of 4)

2 cut-outs Ø 20

190

Accessories 84

1 obround cut-out 100 x 50

■ Dimensions Cat. Nos. 6059 12/13/18/19 142

4 cut-outs Ø 32

120

4 cut-outs Ø 25

180

View from below

270

■ 16 module unit Back box fixing centres and cable entries (mm) 115 6 cut-outs Ø 20 View from above

372

View from sides

260 120

2 cut-outs Ø 20

2 obround cut-outs 100 x 50

340 View from below

4 cut-outs Ø 25

198

4 cut-outs Ø 32

voltage surge protectors

■ Protection against lightning effects

■ Types of lightning strikes

Lightning directly or indirectly generates the following effects : • thermal (blow-outs, fire) • electrodynamic (loosening of terminals) • rise in earth voltage (risk of electrocution) • overvoltages of several thousand volts and destructive induced currents (damage to electrical and electronic equipment, interruption of operation) Protection against the effects of lightning is based essentially on : • catching and discharging the current to earth • the use of voltage surge protectors • the passive protection of the installation Passive protection designates the part of the protection provided by the structure and the configuration of the installation itself (neutral earthing system, area, level of equipotentiality, etc.)

Direct strike

■ Voltage surge protectors and regulation Voltage surge protectors allow : • protection of sensitive devices against direct and indirect effects of lightning • limitation of harmful consequences to people or livestock • continuity of work 1 - Product standards EN 61643-11 and IEC 61643-1 Defines voltage surge protectors of two levels (types) : Type of wave Main characteristics

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

10/350 µs

8/20 µs

1·2/50 µs - 8/20 µs

In, Iimp

In, Imax

Uoc

2 - Installation standards : IEC 60364 (or equivalent electric national standards) The use of VSPs is recommended in new or renovated buildings in the following cases : • buildings equipped with lightning conductors : type 1 VSPs with Iimp ≥ 12·5 kA The use of VSPs is also strongly recommended in mountain areas, close to bodies of water or tall structures (buildings, trees, etc.), in the cases of line end installations or installations located less than 50 m from buildings equipped with lightning conductors. When VSPs are present on the power circuit, it is strongly advised to install a VSP on the communication circuits (telephone or data lines…)

Overvoltages on power supply lines

Overvoltages due to strikes in direct proximity of building

199

PRODUITS ET SYSTÈMES POUR INSTALLATIONS ÉLECTRIQUES P. 204 Selection chart

DLP Contour PVC-U trunking 68527a.eps

Contractor floor box

P. 210 Universal 195 x 65 2 compartment

P. 213 Contractor floor box

Cable management perimeter systems NEW IN 2010 New 2 metre lengths (p. 211-212)

200

Contrast frames (p. 213)

P. 206 Dado 195 x 50 3 compartment

P. 207 Skirting 150 x 50 2 compartment

P. 208 Skirting 195 x 50 3 compartment

P. 209 Universal 150 x 50 2 compartment

P. 211 Universal 105 x 50 1 compartment

P. 212 Universal 195 x 50 2 compartment

P. 213 Trunking accessories

P. 214 Technical information

P. 215 Dimensions

68528a.eps

Rapid fixing methods (p. 213)

201

DLP Contour the flexible choice An updated range of PVC-U perimeter trunking offering fast, easy installation and a high quality finish for all commercial new build and renovation projects. Sleek enough to go unnoticed, stylish enough to be on show, DLP Contour brings buildings to life.

Modern buildings such as offices, schools and hotels require convenient, flexible access to ever-changing power and data needs. DLP Contour perimeter trunking ensures electrical equipment and communication networks are available just where you want them. And as part of our aim to increasingly adopt targets that reduce the environmental impact of our products, this new range is manufactured from lead-free(1) PVC-U.

(1)Less than 0.1% lead content in weight

202

PACKED WITH FEATURES

Spit Pulsa 700E end caps

Available in three profiles... dado, skirting and universal... in three metre lengths with new two metre universal lengths also available for easy transportation and handling on smaller jobs.

A choice of innovative fixing methods and new accessories to aid with the latest regulations compliance.

Naturally supports cables

Adjustable corners

Clip-in / out back boxes

Unique flexible lid

VDI accessory for data cables

To find out more about DLP Contour, visit : www.legrand.co.uk/dlp and order your FREE copy of the latest brochure

Synergy White wiring devices are the perfect partner for DLP Contour.... and to aid with Part M compliance, our new contrast frames, as shown above, are ideal.

203

DLP Contour trunking selection chart profiles and accessories

DLP CONTOUR 3 M FITTINGS

TRUNKING Number of compartments

UNIVERSAL

SKIRTING

DADO

Section (mm)

Page No.

Lid width (mm)

Trunking

Couplers

End caps

195 x 50

p. 206

2 x 42 curved + 1 x 85

6204 55

6208 48

6207 13

150 x 50

p. 207

1 x 42 curved + 1 x 85

6204 58

6208 46

6207 14

195 x 50

p. 208

1 x 42 curved + 1 x 85 + 1 x 40

6204 54

6208 47

6207 10

150 x 50

p. 209

1 x 40 + 1 x 85

6204 44

6208 39

0107 03

195 x 65

p. 210

2 x 85

6204 47

6208 45

0107 07

E 2 METR S H T G N E L

DLP CONTOUR 2 M

FITTINGS

UNIVERSAL

TRUNKING 105 x 50

p. 211

1 x 85

0104 64

6208 38

0107 02

195 x 50

p. 212

2 x 85

0104 70

6208 43

0107 11

FIXINGS

MOULDED BACK BOXES(1)

Accessory

Cat. Nos.

DLP Spit gun end cap

0106 95

DLP rapid wall plug

0308 97

Depth

Gang

Cat. Nos.

1 gang

6208 16

2 gang

6208 17

1 gang

6208 26

2 gang

6208 27

25 mm deep

35 mm deep DLP wall plug

0308 99

(1) Steel back boxes are available for all trunking ranges, see p. 213

204

FITTINGS Internal angles

External angles

Flat angles up

Flat angles down

Flat tees

Cable retainer

VDI accessories

Bridge for Tee

6206 10

6206 30

6206 67

6207 59

0106 82

–

6207 60

6206 18

6206 29

6206 43

6206 44

See below

0106 82

–

6207 60

6206 18

6206 29

6206 65

6206 66

See below

0106 82

–

6207 60

0106 06

0106 35

0107 89

See below

0106 82

See below

6207 60

0106 07

0106 36

0107 93

6207 49

0106 82

See below

6207 60

FITTINGS 0106 02

0106 22

0107 85

0107 36

0106 82

See below

6207 60

0106 06

0106 35

0107 92

0107 36

0106 82

See below

6207 60

VDI ACCESSORIES (FOR DATA CABLING)

Vertical branch

Horizontal trunking

FLAT TEES

150 x 50

6207 54

150 x 50

6207 56

195 x 50

Accessory

Cat. Nos.

For internal angle

0107 80

For external angle

0107 81

For flat bend

0107 82

For flat tee

0107 83

195 x 50

6207 57

150 x 50

6207 45

6207 46

205

DLP Contour trunking - dado 195 x 50 3 compartment

Internal angle Cat. No. 6206 10 External angle Cat. No. 6206 30 Flat tee Cat. No. 6207 59

Flat angle Cat. No. 6206 67

Coupler Cat. No. 6208 48

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Trunking Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 3 metres Lid width : 2 x 42 curved + 1 x 85 mm

6204 55 Trunking assembly 195 x 50 mm Body, lids and dividers included, 3 m lengths

195

Cat. Nos.

8x3m

6205 22

Spare flat lid – 85 mm

2x3m

6205 09

Spare curved lid – 42 mm

2x3m

52.5

Accessories

Coupler 5

6208 48

Consists of body coupler and lid joint strip

Fittings 6207 13

End cap Supplied singly – for use as a right or left end cap

6206 10

Internal angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

6206 30

External angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

6206 67

6207 59

6207 60

Lids

Pack

Clip-in steel divider insert Provides extra screening. Supplied complete with earth couplers and screws Clips into PVC-U divider

8218 37

8218 38 50 mm internal angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

8218 39 50 mm external angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

Flat angle

Flat tee

Bridge for flat tee Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213

206

DLP Contour trunking - skirting 150 x 50 2 compartment

Internal angle Cat. No. 6206 18 External angle Cat. No. 6206 29 Flat angle up Cat. No. 6206 43

Flat tee universal 85 left-hand Cat. No. 6207 56 Coupler Cat. No. 6208 46

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Trunking

Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 3 metres Lid width : 1 x 42 curved + 1 x 85 mm 150 6204 58 Trunking assembly 150 x 50 mm Body, lids and divider included, 3 m lengths 52.5 97.5 Coupler

Lids

Pack

Cat. Nos.

8x3m

6205 22

Spare flat lid – 85 mm

2x3m

6205 09

Spare curved lid – 42 mm

2x3m

Cat. Nos.

6208 46

Consists of body coupler and lid joint strip

Accessories Clip-in steel divider insert Provides extra screening. Supplied complete with earth couplers and screws Clips into PVC-U divider

8218 37

8218 38 50 mm internal angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

8218 39 50 mm external angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

Fittings 5

End cap Pack of 2 containing a left and 6207 14 a right hand cap

Internal angle 6206 18 Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

6206 29

6206 43

Flat angle up

6206 44

Flat angle down

6207 54

Flat tee universal right hand Up with a 150 x 50 mm universal branch, with 85 mm compartment on right hand side

6207 56

Flat tee universal left hand Up with a 150 x 50 mm universal branch, with 85 mm compartment on left hand side

6207 60

External angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers Flat angles

Flat Tees

Bridge for flat tee Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213

207

DLP Contour trunking - skirting 195 x 50 3 compartment

Internal angle Cat. No. 6206 18 External angle Cat. No. 6206 29

Flat angle up Cat. No. 6206 65

Flat tee dado Cat. No. 6207 57

Coupler Cat. No. 6208 47

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Trunking Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 3 metres Lid width : 1 x 42 curved + 1 x 85 + 1 x 40 mm

6204 54 Trunking assembly 195 x 50 mm Body, lids and dividers included, 3 m lengths Coupler 6208 47

195

52.5

8x3m

6205 22

Spare flat lid – 40 mm Spare flat lid – 85 mm

2x3m

6205 09

Spare curved lid – 42 mm

52.5

Consists of body coupler and lid joint strip

Fittings 5

Cat. Nos.

2x3m

Lids

Pack

Accessories 8218 37

8218 38 50 mm internal angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

8218 39 50 mm external angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

End cap 6207 10 Pack of 2 containing a left and a right hand cap

6206 18

Internal angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

6206 29

External angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

Clip-in steel divider insert Provides extra screening. Supplied complete with earth couplers and screws Clips into PVC-U divider

Flat angles 1

6206 65

Flat angle up

6206 66

Flat angle down

Flat Tees 1

6207 57

Flat tee to dado Up with a 3 compartment 195 x 50 dado branch

Bridge for flat tee 6207 60 Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213

208

DLP Contour trunking - universal 150 x 50 2 compartment

Internal angle Cat. No. 0106 06 External angle Cat. No. 0106 35

Flat tee universal 85 left-hand Cat. No. 6207 46

Flat angle up Cat. No. 0107 89

Coupler Cat. No. 6208 39

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205)

2x3m

Cat. Nos.

Trunking

Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 3 metres 150 Lid width : 1 x 40 + 1 x 85 mm 6204 44 Trunking assembly 150 x 50 mm Body, lids and divider included, 52.5 97.5 3 m lengths Coupler

Pack

Cat. Nos.

12 x 3 m 8x3m

6205 20 6205 22

6208 39

0105 82

Spare clip-in PVC-U divider Enables internal segregation of cables within the trunking

8218 37

Clip-in steel divider insert Provides extra screening. Supplied complete with earth couplers and screws Clips into PVC-U divider

8218 38 50 mm internal angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

8218 39 50 mm external angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

Fittings 0107 03

End cap Supplied singly – for use as a right or left end cap

0106 06

Internal angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

0106 35

External angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and dividers

0107 89

Flat Tees 6207 45 Flat tee universal 85 right hand Up with a 150 x 50 mm universal branch, with 85 mm compartment on right hand side

6207 46

6207 60

Flat angles Flat angle up

Flat tee universal 85 left hand Up with a 150 x 50 mm universal branch, with 85 mm compartment on left hand side Bridge for flat tee Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

Spare flat lid – 40 mm Spare flat lid – 85 mm

12 x 2 m

Consists of body coupler and lid joint strip

Lids

Accessories

Pack

Accessories for data cabling (VDI) To be used on internal, external, flat angles and flat tees Respect bend radius for cables according to the EIA/TIA standards 5

0107 80

Accessory for internal angle

0107 81

Accessory for external angle

0107 82

Accessory for flat angle

0107 83

Accessory for flat tee

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213

209

DLP Contour trunking - universal 195 x 65 2 compartment

Internal angle Cat. No. 0106 07 External angle Cat. No. 0106 36 Coupler Cat. No. 6208 45

Flat tee Cat. No. 6207 49

Flat angle Cat. No. 0107 93

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Trunking Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 3 metres 195 Lid width : 2 x 85 mm

6204 47 Trunking assembly 195 x 65 mm Body, lids and divider included, 97.5 3 m lengths Coupler 6208 45 Consists of body coupler and lid joint strip

Cat. Nos.

8x3m

6205 22

Lid Spare flat lid – 85 mm

Accessories

2x3m

Pack

97.5

24 x 2 m

0105 83

8218 40

Fittings

Spare clip-in PVC-U divider Enables internal segregation of cables within the large compartment Clip-in steel divider insert Provides extra screening. Supplied complete with earth couplers and screws Clips into PVC-U divider

0107 07

End cap Supplied singly – for use as a right or left end cap

8218 41 65 mm internal angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

Internal angle 0106 07 Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and divider

8218 42 65 mm external angle insert Provides extra screening For use with clip-in steel divider

0106 36

Accessories for data cabling (VDI)

External angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and divider

To be used on internal, external, flat angles and flat tees Respect bend radius for cables according to the EIA/TIA standards

Flat angle 2

0107 93

6207 49

Bridge for flat tee 6207 60 Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

Flat tee

0107 80

Accessory for internal angle

0107 81

Accessory for external angle

0107 82

Accessory for flat angle

0107 83

Accessory for flat tee

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213 210

E 2 METR S H T G N LE

DLP Contour trunking - universal 105 x 50 1 compartment

External angle Cat. No. 0106 22 Internal angle Cat. No. 0106 02 End cap Cat. No. 0107 02

Flat tee Cat. No. 0107 36

Flat angle Cat. No. 0107 85

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Trunking

8x2m

0104 64 Trunking assembly 105 x 50 mm Body and lid included, 2 m lengths Coupler

6208 38

Cat. Nos.

10 x 2 m

0105 22

Lid Spare flat lid – 85 mm

Accessories

Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 2 metres 105 Lid width : 1 x 85 mm

Pack

12 x 2 m

0105 82

Consists of body coupler and lid joint strips

Spare clip-in PVC-U divider Enables internal segregation of cables within the trunking

Accessories for data cabling (VDI) Fittings 20

End cap Supplied singly – for use as a right 0107 02 or left end cap

Internal angle 0106 02 Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts

External angle 0106 22 Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts

To be used on internal, external, flat angles and flat tees Respect bend radius for cables according to the EIA/TIA standards 5

0107 80

Accessory for internal angle

0107 81

Accessory for external angle

0107 82

Accessory for flat angle

0107 83

Accessory for flat tee

Flat angle Variable 90° ± 2·5°

0107 85

0107 36

6207 60

Bridge for flat tee Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

0107 63

50 mm angled tee Allows a tee junction in corner position Use with internal angle Cat. No. 0106 02

Flat tee

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213

211

E 2 METR S H T G N LE

DLP Contour trunking - universal 195 x 50 2 compartment

Internal angle Cat. No. 0106 06 External angle Cat. No. 0106 35 Flat tee Cat. No. 0107 36

Flat angle Cat. No. 0107 92

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Trunking Material : high impact self-extinguishing PVC-U Colour : white RAL 9003 Length : 2 metres Lid width : 2 x 85 mm

Pack

Cat. Nos.

10 x 2 m

0105 22

Lid Spare flat lid – 85 mm

195

0104 70 Trunking assembly 195 x 50 mm Body, lids and divider included, 2 m lengths

Accessories 50

4x2m

97.5

12 x 2 m

0105 82

Coupler 5

6208 43

Consists of body coupler and lid joint strip

Accessories for data cabling (VDI) To be used on internal, external, flat angles and flat tees Respect bend radius for cables according to the EIA/TIA standards

Fittings 5

0107 11

End cap Supplied singly – for use as a right or left end cap

0106 06

Internal angle Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and divider

External angle 0106 35 Variable 90° ± 5° Consists of top and bottom parts and divider

0107 92

0107 36

6207 60

0107 63

Spare clip-in PVC-U divider Enables internal segregation of cables within the trunking

0107 80

Accessory for internal angle

0107 81

Accessory for external angle

0107 82

Accessory for flat angle

0107 83

Accessory for flat tee

Flat angle

Flat tee

Bridge for flat tee Allows complete separation of cables within the tee if cables need to cross over

50 mm angled tee Allows a tee junction in corner position Use with internal angle Cat. No. 0106 06

For common accessories, including back boxes, fixings and contrast frames to aid Part M compliance see p. 213

212

contractor floor box

DLP Contour trunking accessories

8218 47 Contrast frame

CB 1 0308 97

0106 95

Dimensions and technical information (p. 214-215) Selection chart (p. 204-205) Pack

Cat. Nos.

0106 82

Dimensions (p. 215)

Accessories

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Cable retainer To be used on 40, 42 and 85 mm wide compartments 1 cable retainer for each compartment

Ready to accept standard BS two gang wiring devices. Additional mounting plates not required Recommended hole cut-out size : 297 x 210 mm (A4)

Back boxes

Will fit floor tile thickness range of 10 to 50 mm 10 mm lid recess

Moulded back boxes 5 5

6208 16 6208 26

1 gang – 25 mm deep 1 gang – 35 mm deep

5 5

6208 17 6208 27

2 gang – 25 mm deep 2 gang – 35 mm deep

6208 29

Back box cable grip

Standard depth : 85 mm Universal 20/25 mm knockouts to each compartment .

Steel back boxes Ensures that enough space is available for cabling all types of data sockets Plain box : holes are knock-outs 1

8218 43

50 mm 1 gang steel back box

8218 45

50 mm 2 gang steel back box

8218 44

50 mm 1 gang steel back box - vertical

Contractor floor box Supplied empty

Manufactured from pre-galvanised steel to BS EN 10142 and grey Nylon 6 1

CB 1

3 compartment contractor floor box

Contrast frames Aid Part M compliance when using Synergy White wiring devices 10 10

8218 46 1 gang contrast frame 8218 47 2 gang contrast frame

Fixing accessories for bodies

100

200

100

For fixing all DLP Contour profiles Wall plugs 0308 99 For immediate fixing to plasterboard No screws or nails required DLP rapid wall plug 0308 97 For 10 mm min. plasterboard walls at least 20 mm away from the concrete surface For fixing DLP Contour trunking in a single operation Used with a special tool for drill (Ø 8 mm), supplied in each pack of 200 wall plugs Tensile resistance: 25 kg Spit gun end cap 0106 95 For rapid fixing of trunking with the Spit Pulsa 700E (use 20 mm Spit nails) For fixing to concrete, steel and other substrates

213

DLP Contour trunking technical information

■ PVC-U White RAL 9003 : technical data

Thermal Properties

Physical Properties

Unit of measure

Typical value

g/cm3 %

1·5+/–0·02 0·05

Unit of measure

Typical value

N/mm2 KJ/m2

36+/–4 8

Density Water absorption Mechanical

Vicat softening point Operating temperatures Coefficient of linear expansion

Unit of measure

Typical value

°C °C °K–1

81+/–2 –5°C to +60°C <6 x 10–5

Unit of measure

Typical value

50+/–5

–

PASS

°C

960

Flammability

Properties

Tensile strength Charpy notched impact strength

Properties

Oxygen index Premixed test flame – 1kW (application 60s/extinction 30s)

Electrical

Glow wire test

Properties

Unit of measure

Typical value

Ohm cm kV/mm

>1 x 1015 30

Surface resistivity Dielectric strength Chemical resistance

Mineral acids, alkalines and detergents : excellent Alcohols : good, but liable to attack from solvents such as keytones, aromatics and hydrocarbons Material DLP Contour is manufactured from lead-free(1) PVC-U

■ Standards Conforms to BS EN 50085-2-1 6·2 According to resistance impact for installation and application 6·3 According to minimum temperatures for storage and transport 6·3 According to minimum temperatures for installation and application 6·3 According to maximum temperatures for application 6·4 According to resistance to flame propagation 6·5 According to electrical continuity characteristic 6·6 According to electrical insulating characteristics 6·7 According to degree of protection provided by enclosure 6·9 According to system access cover retention 6·101 According to position when surface mounted

6·102 Functions obtained Assigned tension Protection against mechanical shock

■ Back boxes (2 )

mm 1 8 0

(2 )

mm 1 2 0

6208 16/6208 26

6208 17/6208 27

Fixing centres : 60·3 mm

Fixing centres : 120·6 mm

■ Around pillar installation When fitting trunking around a pillar it is best to allow sufficient space between internal and external angles to ensure that the flexible lid stays firmly in place

120 mm

20 mm

■ Data cabling compliancy Providing that the installation is carried out correctly and data cables are installed to TIA/EIA-568-B standards, the range of DLP trunking is compliant with current data cabling requirements, including CAT 6 cabling. The 35 mm deep back boxes will accept most manufacturers’ data sockets (1) Less than 0.1% lead content in weight (2) Includes removable cable separators (2 x 7 mm)

214

2·0 J -25°C -5°C +60°C Non-flame propagating Without continuity Electrically insulating IP 40 With a tool Surface mounted on wall Surface mounted on ceiling Surface mounted on wall and supported by the floor Type 3 for installation trunking Type 2 for distribution trunking 500 V IK 07

■ Cable capacity 195 x 50

150 x 50

195 x 50

105 x 50

150 x 50

195 x 50

195 x 65

0104 70

6204 47

b d a

c b

6204 55

6204 58

0104 64

6204 54

6204 44

SKIRTING

DADO

UNIVERSAL

Cable factor

Full capacity (mm2) Empty compartment

With 25 mm back box

With 35 mm back box

3 900 1 690 4 190 1 690 2 050 4 300 3 940 1 920 5 310

2 130 – 2 420 – – 2 530 2 170 – 3 540

1 510 – 1 800 – – 1 910 1 550 – 2 920

a b c d e f g h i

Type of conductor

Data cables

CAT CAT CAT CAT

Size

5e UTP 5e STP 6 UTP 6 STP

Ø Ø Ø Ø

5·5 6·0 6·5 7·0

Cable factor

mm* mm* mm* mm*

30·2 36·0 42·2 49·0

*typical values, check with manufacturer

For each size of cable multiply the number to be installed by its own factor. Add together the results for all cable sizes. The resulting sum should be equal or less than the trunking capacity. It is recommended that each compartment should not be filled over 45% of its full capacity

Cable capacities are shown in the tables below (number of cables at 45% full) Empty compartment

a b c d e f g h i

Compartment with 25 mm back box

Compartment with 35 mm back box

CAT 5e UTP

CAT 5e STP

CAT 6 UTP

CAT 6 STP

CAT 5e UTP

CAT 5e STP

CAT 6 UTP

CAT 6 STP

CAT 5e UTP

CAT 5e STP

CAT 6 UTP

CAT 6 STP

58 25 62 25 30 64 58 28 79

48 21 52 21 25 53 49 24 66

41 18 44 18 21 45 42 20 56

35 15 38 15 18 39 36 17 48

31 – 36 – – 37 32 – 52

26 – 30 – – 31 27 – 44

22 – 25 – – 26 23 – 37

19 – 22 – – 23 19 – 32

22 – 26 – – 28 23 – 43

18 – 22 – – 23 19 – 36

16 – 19 – – 20 16 – 31

13 – 16 – – 17 14 – 26

■ Contractor floor box All dimensions (mm) are nominal 302

50 83

225

232 33

131

215

P. 218 Isolating switches

Isolation, protection and signalling

P. 221 DX MCB and RCD auxiliaries

P. 225 Push buttons, control switches and indicators

Time switches and light control switches

Isolation, protection, control and signalling

216

P. 230 AlphaRex digital for rail 4

P. 218 Vistop 160 A isolating switches

P. 219 DX RCDs

P. 220 DX-H and DX-D MCBs

P. 221 DX RCBOs

P. 222 Changeover switches

P. 222 Fuse carriers

P. 223 DX technical information and curves

P. 224 Discrimination/ selectivity tables

P. 225 Transformers, buzzers, bells and sirens

P. 226 Power contactors

P. 227 Determining the contactor rating

P. 228 Modular DIN rail equipment dimensions

P. 233 MicroRex digital for rail 4

P. 234 MicroRex analogue for rail 4

P. 235 AstroRex light control time switches

P. 237 Light control switches digital for rail 4

217

isolating switches

Vistop 160 A

visible load break isolating switches

0225 53 0043 22

0043 55

0043 36

0227 98

0227 32

Dimensions (p. 228) Conform to IEC 60669-1 Breaking capacity AC 22 A according to BS EN 60947-3 Double break contacts Pack

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Cat. Nos

Front handle

Isolating switches Nominal rating (A)

Number of 17·5 mm s004302 modules

10 10 10 10 10 5

0043 01 0043 02 0043 05 0043 07 0043 10 0043 14

Single pole - 230/400 V 16 20 32 40 63 100

10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 2

0043 21 0043 22 0043 25 0043 27 0043 30 0043 31 0043 34 0043 36 0043 38

Double pole - 400 V 16 20 32 40 63 63 100 100 125

10 10

Double pole with indicator - 250 V Supplied with lamp 0043 23 20 1 0043 26 32 1

1 1

Side handle

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

(mm)

0227 32

0043 42 0043 45 0043 47 0043 50 0043 54 0043 55 0043 58

5 5 2 2 2 2 2

0043 62 0043 65 0043 67 0043 70 0043 74 0043 75 0043 78

Four pole - 400 V 20 32 40 63 100 100 125

1 1

0227 04 0227 07

(1)

2 2 3 3 3 3 3

1/3

N/O + N/C contact For incorporation in one-piece enclosure Main contact Door distance Additional N/C + N/O (mm) auxiliary contact for 2 N/C + 2 N/O mounting lug 2·58

For creating 3 or 4 pole assemblies for simultaneous breaking of 2 pole auxiliary power supply (PLC, remote control), 16 A maximum Mounts on the left side of Vistop 160 A

(1)

2 2 4 4 4 4 4

0227 22

Connection

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Cage terminals

1·5

Sealable terminal shields 1

0227 98

Set of 2 separate, sealable terminal shields Clip on upstream and/or downstream of Vistop 160 A

0044 42 Locking attachment for Ø 4 mm and Ø 6 mm padlocks 0044 43 Padlocks Ø 4 mm

0044 44 Sealable screw cover (4 separate poles)

0044 47 Insulating shield

Screw cover Insulating shield

(1) Cat. Nos. 0043 31/36/55/75 have red handles

218

35 to 470

Auxiliary isolating switch 2 pole 16 A - 400 V

Accessories 2

160 A

Auxiliary switches for on-off signalling IP 2x - 5 A - 250 V

s004342

5 5 3 3 3 3 3

7·5 9

Kit comprising : connecting rods, bracket, self-adhesive drilling template, mounting accessories (including a seal for maintaining the IP protection of the enclosure up to IP 55) and locking mechanism preventing the door being opened when the circuit is closed rail For Vistop fixing on or using screws Door distance

Triple pole - 400 V 20 32 40 63 100 100 125 s004362

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Door interlock external kit for front handle

(1) s004322

s004323

160 A

0225 51 0225 54 3 pole 0225 53 0225 56 4 pole

1 1 1 1 1 1

Vistop isolating switch with black handle

For changeover switches and fuse carriers see p. 221-222

DXTM RCDs

dxtypeac

residual current devices - types AC and A

dxtypea dxtypes

picto loupe-65765j.eps

0089 18

0089 12

0090 13

Dimensions (p. 228) Conform to BS EN 61008-1 • AC type

- Standard applications

dxtypesAC type RCDs detect AC residual currents

In the majority of cases (standard applications), they are used for AC current detection at 50/60 Hz • A type • S type

- Specific applications : dedicated lines - Discriminating

In addition to the characteristics of AC type RCDs, A type RCDs also detect DC residual currents They are used whenever fault currents are not sinusoidal They are particularly suitable for specific applications (dedicated lines) or circuits that may produce DC fault currents, eg variable speed drives with frequency inverters, etc. Pack

Cat. Nos.

Type AC

Type A

Double pole - 230 V Nominal rating (A)

10 mA 0089 06 0090 53 16

1 1 1 1 1

0089 09 0089 10 0089 11 0089 12 6027 10

30 mA 25 40 63 80 100

2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1

0089 15 0089 16 0089 17 0089 18

100 mA 25 40 63 80

2 2 2 2

6027 11

100 mA discriminating 2 100

1 1 1 1

0089 27 0089 28 0089 29 0089 30

0089 35 0090 82

0090 56 0090 57 0090 58 0090 59

0090 74 0090 75 0090 76 0090 77

Pack

Number of 17·5 mm modules

300 mA 25 40 63 80

2 2 2 2

300 mA discriminating 2 63

Test voltage RCD

RCD

Min.

135 V (10/30/300 mA)

195 V (30 mA) 230 V (100 mA) 215 V (300 mA) 295 V (500 mA)

Max.

250 V

440 V

Cat. Nos.

Four pole - 400 V Nominal rating (A)

± neutral on right

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Type AC

Type A

1 1 1 1

0089 93 0089 94 0089 95 0089 96

0091 40 0091 41 0091 42 0091 43

30 mA 25 40 63 80

4 4 4 4

1 1 1 1 1

0089 99 0090 00 0090 01 0090 02

0091 46 0091 47 0091 48 0091 49 0091 50

100 mA 25 40 63 80 100

4 4 4 4 4

1 1 1 1 1

0090 11 0090 12 0090 13 0090 14

0091 58 0091 59 0091 60 0091 61 0091 62

300 mA 25 40 63 80 100

4 4 4 4 4

1 1 1 1

0090 23 0090 24 0091 71 0090 25 0091 72 0090 26 0091 73

500 mA 25 40 63 80

4 4 4 4

1 1

0090 18 0091 65 0090 19 0091 66

300 mA discriminating 40 4 63 4

Four pole - 400 V Type AC

Nominal rating (A)

± neutral on left

Number of 17·5 mm modules

0086 96

30 mA 80

0087 14

300 mA 80

219

DX-H MCBs - 10 kA

DX-D MCBs - 10 kA

thermal-magnetic MCBs up to 125 A type B and C curves

thermal-magnetic MCBs up to 125 A type D curve

picto loupe-65765j.eps

0068 60

0069 20

Technical information (p. 222 to 224) Dimensions (p. 228)

1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 5 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

220

Cat. Nos. B curve

C curve

0066 91 0066 92 0066 93 0066 95 0066 97

0068 52 0068 53 0068 54 0068 56 0068 58

0067 00 0068 60 0068 61 0068 62 0068 63 0068 64 0068 65 0067 06 0068 66 0063 83 0067 01 0067 02 0067 03 0067 04

B curve

C curve

0067 52 0067 53 0067 54 0067 56 0067 58

0069 12 0069 13 0069 14 0069 16 0069 18

0067 60 0069 20 0069 21 0069 22 0069 23 0069 24 0069 25 0067 66 0069 26 0064 75 0064 76 0064 77 0067 61 0067 62 0067 63 0067 64

B curve

C curve

0067 72 0067 73 0067 74 0067 76 0067 78 0067 80 0067 81 0067 82 0067 83 0067 84 0067 85 0067 86

0069 32 0069 33 0069 34 0069 36 0069 38 0069 40 0069 41 0069 42 0069 43 0069 44 0069 45 0069 46 0064 95 0064 96 0064 97

B curve

C curve

0068 32 0068 33 0068 34 0068 36 0068 38 0068 40 0068 41 0068 42 0068 43 0068 44 0068 45 0068 46

0069 92 0069 93 0069 94 0069 96 0069 98 0070 00 0070 01 0070 02 0070 03 0070 04 0070 05 0070 06 0065 70 0065 71 0065 72

Single pole 230/400 V Nominal rating (A)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

1 2 3 6 10 10 16 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1·5(1)

Double pole 400 V 1 2 3 6 10 10 16 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

1 2 3 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Four pole 400 V

Breaking capacity : 6 kA to BS EN 60898-1 up to 63 A - 400 V 10 kA to BS EN 60898-1 80 A to 125 A 15 kA to BS EN 60947-2 up to 32 A - 400 V 10 kA to BS EN 60947-2 40 A to 125 A - 400 V Magnetic adjusted between 10 and 14 In

±±

Pack

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4·5(1) 4·5(1) 4·5(1)

(2)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6(1) 6(1) 6(1)

(1) These MCBs are for standalone use only, not with distribution boards (2) Suitable for type B flexible boards only

Cat. Nos.

Single pole 230/400 V

D curve

Nominal rating (A)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0065 75 0065 76 0065 77 0065 78 0065 79 0065 81 0065 83 0065 84 0065 85 0065 86 0065 87 0065 88 0065 89

1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0066 25 0066 26 0066 27 0066 28 0066 29 0066 31 0066 33 0066 34 0066 35 0066 36 0066 37 0066 38 0066 39 0066 40 0066 41 0066 42

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0066 45 0066 46 0066 47 0066 48 0066 49 0066 51 0066 53 0066 54 0066 55 0066 56 0066 57 0066 58 0066 59 0066 60 0066 61 0066 62

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0066 65 0066 66 0066 67 0066 68 0066 69 0066 71 0066 73 0066 74 0066 75 0066 76 0066 77 0066 78 0066 79 0066 80 0066 81 0066 82

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3(1) 3(1) 3(1)

Triple pole 400 V

1 2 3 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

0066 71

Technical information (p. 222 to 224) Dimensions (p. 228)

Breaking capacity : 10 kA to BS EN 60898-1 12·5 kA up to 25 kA to BS EN 60947-2 - 400 V Pack

0066 56

0066 33

0070 00

D curve

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Double pole 400 V 1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Four pole 400 V

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3(1) 3(1) 3(1)

Triple pole 400 V

1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Number of 17·5 mm modules

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4·5(1) 4·5(1) 4·5(1)

(2)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6(1) 6(1) 6(1)

(1) These MCBs are for standalone use only, not with distribution boards (2) Suitable for type B flexible boards only

DXTM RCBOs - 10 kA and auxiliaries

dxtypeac

up to 63 A - type AC type B and C curves

0079 19

0078 86

0073 50

0079 80

0073 54

picto loupe-65765j.eps

6064 12

Dimensions (p. 228) Conform to BS EN 61009-1 Breaking capacity : 10 kA to BS EN 61009-1 10 kA to BS EN 60947-2 (except for single pole + neutral - 6 kA) Pack

1 1 1 1 1 1

Cat. Nos.

Single pole + neutral - 230 V

Type AC

Nominal rating (A)

C curve

30 mA 10 16 20 25 32 45

6064 10 6064 11 6064 12 6064 13 6064 14 6064 15

B curve

0078 79

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

C curve

0078 81 0078 83 0078 84 0078 86 0078 87 0078 88 0077 83 0078 89 0077 84 0078 90 0077 77 0077 78 0077 80 0077 81

0078 94 0078 95 0078 97 0078 98 0078 99 0079 00 0079 01

C curve

1 1 1

0077 45 0077 46 0077 47

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0079 11 0079 19 0079 20 0079 21 0079 22 0079 29 0079 30 0079 31

Pack

Cat. Nos. Type AC C curve

1 1 1 1 1 1

(3), (4)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0079 62 0079 64 0079 65 0079 66 0079 67 0080 13 0080 14 0080 15

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0079 75 0079 77 0079 78 0079 79 0079 80 0080 31 0080 32 0080 33

Neutral on right Nominal rating (A)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

10 mA 16 30 mA 3 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 300 mA 6 10 16 20 25 32 40

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Nominal rating (A)

10 mA 10 16 20 30 mA 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Nominal rating (A)

30 mA 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 300 mA 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

(4)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Breaking capacity IEC 60947-2 (kA) 400 V 230 V

4 4 4 4 4 7 7 7

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10 10 25 25 25

4 4 4 4 4 7 7 7

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10 10 25 25 25

Clip on the left hand side of the MCB (maximum 3) Allow insertion of the supply busbar at the top Auxiliaries common to DX and DX-H MCBs and DX residual current devices

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Four pole - 400 V

Auxiliaries for MCBs and residual current devices

Double pole - 230/400 V Type AC

(1), (2)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Single pole + neutral - 230 V Type AC

(4)

Breaking capacity IEC 60947-2 (kA) 230 V 400 V

4 4 4

10 10 10

25 25 25

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

(1) Single pole with solid unswitched neutral (2) Suitable for type B standard or flexible boards and type A boards (3) Single pole with switched neutral (4) Suitable for type B flexible boards only

0073 50

0073 51

0073 53

0073 54

Signalling auxiliaries Auxiliary changeover switch, 6 A - 250 V Indicates the position of the contacts Fault signalling changeover switch, 6 A - 250 V Indicates tripping of the MCB at a fault Auxiliary changeover switch, 6 A - 250 V which can be modified to a fault signalling switch Auxiliary changeover switch, 6 A - 250 V + fault signalling switch, can be modified to 2 auxiliary changeover switches

Number of 17·5 mm modules

0·5

(4) Suitable for type B flexible boards only

221

changeover switches and fuse carriers

DX-E, DX, DX-H, DX-D MCBs

■ Technical information

• Maximum voltage : 240 V - 415 V ± 10 % • Maximum voltage : 80 V per pole • Insulation voltage : 500 V • Dielectric : 2 500 V

= ± ±

Power dissipated in W per pole at In In A

0043 82

0043 83

Type B

2·1

2·1 2·4 2·5

1·1 1·1

1·5 1·7 2·4 3·1

4·5

5·5

80 100 125

Type C

2·1

2·1 2·4 2·5

1·1 1·1

1·5 1·7 2·4 3·1

4·5

5·5 8·8 7·8 15·6

Type D

2·1

2·1 2·4 2·5

1·1 1·1

1·5 1·7 2·4 3·1

4·5

5·5 8·8 7·8 15·6

–

■ Mechanical characteristics

0216 01

Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operations 10 000 on load switching operations at In x cos ϕ 0·9 Dimensions (p. 228) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Changeover switches

Connection cross-sections (in mm2)

Conform to IEC 60669-1 Breaking capacity AC22 A according to BS EN 60947-3

Applied connection torque

Nominal rating (A)

Two way - 250 V 0043 82 20

Double two way - 400 V 0043 83 20

0043 85

No. of 17·5 mm modules

In at 30 °C

Two way with centre point - 250 V 20

SP 58 carriers for HRC type aM and gG fuses 22 x 58 Conform to IEC 60269-2 and IS EN 60269-2 Bureau Veritas approved For HRC cylindrical fuses IP2x - IP2xC under front plate Height under front plate : 44 mm Fix to DIN rail EN 60715 or with screws

Connection

3 1

0216 01 Single pole 0216 04 Triple pole

In ≥80 A 50 mm2 flexible cable 70 mm2 stranded cable

2·5 Nm

3 Nm

Derating according to ambient temperature (In A) Ambient temperature 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C

In ≤63 A 25 mm2 flexible cables 35 mm2 stranded cables

0 °C

10 °C

50 °C

60 °C

1 2

1·1 2·2

1·07 2·1

1·03 2·06

1 2

0·97 1·94

0·93 1·86

0·90 1·80

3 4 6

3·3 4·4 6·6

3·2 4·2 6·4

3·1 4·1 6·2

3 4 6

2·9 3·9 5·8

2·8 3·8 5·5

2·6 3·6 5·4

10·7

10·3

9·7

9·3

9·0

16 20

18 22·4

17·3 21·6

16·6 20·8

16 20

15·4 19·2

14·7 18·4

14·1 17·6

25 32

28·3 36·2

27·2 34·9

26 33·3

25 32

24 30·7

22·7 29·1

21·7 27·8

40 50

46 57·5

44 55

42 52·5

40 50

38 47·5

36 45

34 42·5

63 80

73·1 91

69·9 88

66·1 84

63 80

59·8 76

56·1 72

52·9 69

100

114

110

105

100

125

142

137

131

125

119

113

108

No. of 17·5 mm modules 2

1 x 50 mm

2 6

■ Technical information Derating according to the number of adjacent MCBs Number of adjacent MCBs Coefficient

from 1 to 3

from 4 to 6

from 7 to 9

over 10

0·8

0·7

0·6

■ MCB supplementary data (6 kA and 10 kA) Terminal depth : 14 mm Terminals protected to IP 20 Maximum terminal torque : 3 Nm (recommended : 2·5 Nm) Enclosure material : polyester self-extinguishing at 960 °C Average weight per pole : 0·160 kg Supply : can be supplied from the top or bottom Padlockable in either ON or OFF position Operation with DC voltage supply : up to a maximum of 80 V DC per pole – for voltages above 80 V DC use multipole devices wired IN SERIES (e.g. two pole 160 V maximum)

Positive contact position indication in accordance with BS 7671 : 2008 IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition

222

DX-E, DX, DX-H, DX-D MCBs tripping and operating curves

■ Operating curves

In 63 A

10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A

10 4

In >63 A

t in seconds

10000

DX, DX-H type B from 1 A to 63 A 1A

uo07360a DX-E,

uo07360

■ MCB tripping curves

rating in A

4 2

1000

10 3

In >32 A 100

In 32 A

2 10 2

2 10

4 2

0·1

4 2 0·1

0·01

4 2

0·001 x In

I in Amp.

10000

600 800 1000

400

200

60 80 100

200

100

6 8 10

0·6 0·8 1

4 5

0·4

0·2

0·1

0·01

Standard BS EN 60898 defines type B magnetic curve between 3 and 5 In

0·1

Standard BS EN 60898 defines type C magnetic curve between 5 and 10 In

0·1

10000

600 800 1000

400

200

60 80 100

6 8 10

0·6 0·8 1

0·4

0·01

0·2

0·01 0·1

I in Amp.

10000

10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 125 A

600 800 1000

400

200

10 2

60 80 100

10 2

6 8 10

10 3

I in Amp.

rating in A

10 4

0·6 0·8 1

rating in A

DX-D type D from 1 A to 125 A

0·4

10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 125 A

10 4

■uo07360c Operating curves

t in seconds

DX-E, DX, DX-H type C from 1 A to 63 A and DX-H from 1 to 125 A

0·2

■uo07360b Operating curves

Standard BS EN 60898 defines type D magnetic curve between 10 and 20 In

223

discrimination/selectivity tables - average values of selectivity limits (A) MCBs/MCBs

MCBs upstream DX-E, DX, DX-H C curve

MCBs downstream

DX-E, DX, DX-H B curve

10 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100A 125A 10 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 125A 10 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 1 to 4 A

120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

120

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800

120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

120

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

300

375

472

480

600

750

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

375

472

480

600

750

600

756

800 1200 1500

472

480

600

750

756

800 1200 1500

480

600

750

800 1200 1500

600

750

1200 1500

750

1500

10 A 16 A

DX-E, DX, DX-H C curve

DX-D D curve

20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A

100

128

160

200

252

100

128

160

200

252

100

128

160

200

252

160

200

252

200

252 252

125 A 120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

120

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800

120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

120

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

300

375

472

480

600

750

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

375

472

480

600

750

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

472

480

600

750

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

480

600

750

600

756

800 1200 1500

50 A

600

750

756

800 1200 1500

63 A

600

750

1 to 4 A

6A 10 A 16 A 20 A

DX-D D curve

25 A 32 A 40 A

100

128

160

200

252

100

128

160

200

252

160

200

252 252

800 1200 1500

80 A

1200 1500

100 A

1500

125 A 1 to 6 A 10 A

DX-E, DX, DX-H B curve

16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A

120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

120

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

150

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

187

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

240

300

375

472

480

600

750

300

375

472

480

600

750

375

472

480

600

750

472

480

600

750

480

600

750

50 A 63 A

120

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

192

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

240

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

300

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

384

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

480

600

756

800 1200 1500

600

756

800 1200 1500

756

800 1200 1500

100

128

160

200

252

100

128

160

200

252

100

128

160

200

252

100

128

160

200

252

128

160

200

252

160

200

252

200

252 252

800 1200 1500 T : total selectivity up to MCB breaking capacity according to IEC 60947-2

Upstream fuse gG type 32 A 40 A

50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 125 A 160 A

0路5 to 6 A

1 600

1 900

2 500

4 000

4 600

11 000

25 000

1 600

1 900

2 500

4 000

4 600

11 000

25 000

10 A

1 600

2 200

3 200

3 600

7 000

11 000

20 000

16 A

1 400

1 800

2 600

3 000

5 600

8 000

15 000

20 A

1 200

1 500

2 200

2 500

4 600

6 300

10 000

25 A

1 300

2 000

2 200

4 100

5 500

8 000

32 A

1 200

1 700

1 900

3 500

4 500

7 000

40 A

1 700

3 000

4 000

5 000

50 A

1 600

MCBs downstream

DX-E, DX, DX-H B and C curves

2 600

3 500

4 500

63 A

2 400

3 300

4 500

80 A

3 000

100 A 125 A

224

6 000

8 000

4 000

5 000 4 000

push buttons, control switches and indicators spe .

transformers, buzzers, bells and sirens industrial and alarm use

j60

374ce

Switch 0413 49

0044 68

0414 19

Push fle button c4 -73 06 j.e Push buttons transformed ps into switches

0044 88

0031 43

0042 20

0042 51 0415 33 with bracket

Dimensions (p. 228)

Dimensions (p. 228) Transformers protected against overloads and short-circuits In the event of an overload, switch off the power supply and allow the transformer to cool down before switching on again Wall or rail mounted

Conform to IEC 60669-1 Breaking capacity AC 12 A according to IEC 60947-5-1 Supplied in push button position Can be converted to control switches Accepts insertion of supply busbars

Pack Pack

Cat. Nos.

0044 53 1 N/O

0044 54 1 N/C

1 1

004458-6620s.eps

0044 55 2 N/O

0044 58 1 N/O + 1 N/C

004463-6621s.eps

Dual function + indicator 10

0044 64 1 N/C + red indicator

0044 68 1 N/O (green) + 1 N/C (red)

Power

Number of 17·5 mm modules

± ±±

8V 8/12 V 24/12 V

0·5 A 1/0·66 A 1/1·5 A

4 VA 8 VA 24/18 VA

2 2 4

e Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-6 standard

230 V / 12 or 24 V (per 2 x 12 V coupling for Cat. Nos. 0042 53/54) Depth 68 mm

004468-6623s.eps

Rating

Secondary

Safety transformers

(1)

Indicators - 250 V

0042 20 0042 25 0042 37

004464-6622s.eps

0044 63 1 N/O + green indicator(1)

Depth 60 mm

004455-6619s.eps

Bell transformers with label holders - 230 V Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-8 standard Transformers protected against overloads and short-circuits. Possibility for supply busbars to run through (Cat. Nos. 0042 20/25)

Number of 17·5 mm 004454-6618s.eps modules

Single function 10

Cat. Nos.

Push buttons and control switches 004453-6617s.eps 20 A - 250 V

1 1 1 1

0042 51 0042 52 0042 53 0042 54

No-load Voltage % Efficiency P loss drop % (VA) (W) Cos ϕ = 1 Cos ϕ = 1

Ucc (%)

I (A) primary loaded

Number of 17·5 mm modules

16 25 40 63

27·5 23·3 14·4 13·6

0·099 0·142 0·22 0·33

4 4 5 5

2·5 2·5 4 4

34·6 29 17·9 15·7

60 66 68 75

Buzzers(2)

Supplied with replaceable diffuser and lamp E10 - 230 V Allow supply busbar to be inserted

50 Hz AC. Connection by screw terminals, equipped with label holder

004483-6624s.eps

Single Green Red Orange Blue Colourless Double Green + red

10 10 10 10 10

0044 83 0044 84 0044 85 0044 86 0044 87

0044 88

Three phase voltage indicator Supplied with 230/400 V non-replacement lamps 0031 43 3 colourless neon lamps

004488-6625s.eps

1 1 1 1 1

5 10

0041 11 0041 13

Consum. (mA)

P (3) (dB)

Number of 17·5 mm modules

24 230

4 4

180 21

73 73

1 1

Grey RAL 7037. Double insulated Steel gong with polyester coating. Polycarbonate base Max. continuous rating : 200 hours AC voltage tolerance +10% –15% IP 40 - IK 08 Ø 100 mm gong – depth 83 mm

0·5 Grey

0044 32 0044 33 0044 36 0044 37

Power (VA)

AC current – 50/60 Hz

10 10 10 10

Voltage (V )

Accessories

0413 49

Replacement lamps E10 - 1·2 W 8/12 V incandescent 24 V incandescent 230 V neon 230 V fluo for blue and green diffusers

1 1

0414 16 0414 19

Voltage

230 V

Power (VA)

Consumption (mA)

Weight (kg)

Acoustic output at 1 m (dB)

0·8

IP 44 - IK 10 Ø 150 mm gong – depth 97 mm 24 V 9 360 1 98 230 V 13 50 1 90

Electro-mechanical sirens Glass filled polyamide 6/6 Surface or semi-flush mounting Overall dimensions : Length 103 mm, dia. 72·5 mm IP 30 - IK 05 DC current Black

1 (1) Supplied with 230 V

± E10 lamps

0415 33

= 24 V

Voltage

Power (W)

Consump. (mA)

Weight (kg)

Max. continuous rating (hr)

Acoustic output at 1 m (dB)

516

0·2

200

100

(2) Caution : remove lamps from illuminated push buttons when used with Cat. No. 0041 11 (3) Acoustic power at 1 m

225

power contactors

0040 33

0040 49

picto loupe-65765j.eps

0040 85

A location on the device enables a supply busbar to run through (except 40 and 63 A)

0040 78

0040 53

Dimensions (p. 228) Conform to EN 61095 Power contactors have a handle covered with a blanking plate Stop or start override without automatic return is possible (use tool) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Power contactors with 24 V 004033-559s.eps

Double pole (L + N) - 250 V 24 V coil

± coil

0040 33 16 A

0040 41 20 A

003851-6594s.eps 24V

24V

0040 38 16 A

0040 49 20 A

0040 50 20 A

0040 68 40 A

0040 75 63 A

003865-6595s.eps 230V

004050-561s.eps

230V

230V 003865-6595s.eps

Triple pole - 400 V 230 V coil

Number of 17·5 mm modules

N/C + N/O

0040 69 40 A

2 N/O

0040 77 63 A

± coil

003867-6596s.eps 230V

3 N/O

230V

3 N/O

4 N/O

4 N/C

2 N/O + 2 N/C

003871-6597s.eps 230V

003871-6597s.eps

1 Number of 17·5 mm modules

N/C + N/O

2 N/C

Number of 17·5 mm modules

Four pole - 400 V 230 V coil

Type of contact

2 N/O

Type of contact

I max.

± coil

I max.

Power contactors with 230 V

Type of contact

Power contactors with 230 V Double pole 004038-560s.eps (L + N) - 250 V 230 V coil

Cat. Nos.

003867-6596s.eps

I max.

Pack

0040 53

20 A

0040 54

20 A

0040 55

20 A

004054-562s.eps

230V

004055-563s.eps 230V

2 N/O

0040 70

40 A

003871-6597s.eps 230V

4 N/O

0040 78

63 A

230V

4 N/O

230V

Auxiliary device for contactors Auxiliary changeover switch Fitted on left hand side of contactor Used to signal the position status of the contacts on the product to which it is connected I max.

Voltage

250 V

Changeover switch

Number of 17·5 mm modules

N/C + N/O

0·5

0040 85

0044 40 Spacing unit 0·5 module To be placed between 2 mechanisms to aid cooling

Accessory

226

determining the contactor rating

■ Choice of contactor rating

■ Motors (Ac.7b)

For a lifetime of 10 years with 200 days of annual use

Maximum power in Kw

■ Heating (AC.7a)

Single phase 230 V motor with capacitor

Maximum power in kW according to the number of operations per day 20 A

40 A

63 A

3·5 3 2·5 1·5 1

4·5 3·5 3 2 1

9 7·5 6 4 2·5

14 12 9·5 6 4·5

10 9 7 3 2

13 11 9 4 3

26 22 17 8 6

41 35 26 13 9

Operations per day 16 A 230 V/single phase network ≤ 50 75 100 250 500 400 V/3 phase network ≤ 50 75 100 250 500

16 A 20 A 40 A 63 A

24 V 1 module 12 VA 3 VA

Inrush Holding

1 module 12 VA 3 VA

75 W 27 30 72 96

100 W 21 23 52 71

150 W 13 15 36 48

63 A 4 12

230 V 2 modules 3 modules 35 VA 45 VA 3 VA 7 VA

To protect contactors against short-circuits (according to IEC 61095, conditional short-circuit Iq = 3 kA), it is advisable to use : Contactor rating (A) 16/20 40 63

MCB or use Gg or aM rating (A) ≤ 20 ≤ 40 ≤ 63

Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the interior temperature is > 40 °C Rated current of contactor

60 W 32 37 87 115

2·5 7·5

■ Control consumption

Maximum number of lamps, tubes, according to their unit power requirement (W) for 230 V single phase • Incandescent and halogen lamps 40 W 40 47 118 156

40 A

20 A 1·1 3·3

Other load types please contact us

■ Lighting

Unit power (W)

3 phase 400 V motor

16 A 0·9 2·7

200 W 300 W 500 W 1 000 W 11 8 4 2 12 8 5 2 26 18 11 7 35 25 15 8

le = 16 A le = 20 A le = 40 A le = 63 A

40 °C 16 A 20 A 40 A 63 A

50 °C 14 A 18 A 36 A 57 A

60 °C 12 A 16 A 32 A 50 A

70 °C 10 A 14 A 29 A 46 A

Insert a spacer module (Cat. No. 0044 40) every 2 contactors • Halogen lamps with 12 V ferromagnetic transformer Unit power (W) 16 A 20 A 40 A 63 A

20 W 16 19 45 64

50 W 11 12 29 42

75 W 9 10 25 34

100 W 7 8 20 28

Frequency 50/60 Hz Rated impulses with stand voltage (Uimp) : 4 kV Mechanical endurance in operation cycles : 10 6

150 W 4 5 15 19

■ Temperature operation between (1 module) – 5 and +40 °C (2/3 modules) – 25 and +40 °C storage between (1 module) – 25 and +70 °C (2/3 modules) – 40 and +70 °C

• Fluorescent tubes with starter Unit power (W) 16 A Single 20 A non compensated 40 A 63 A 16 A Single 20 A parallel compensated 40 A 63 A 16 A Double 20 A serial compensated 40 A 63 A

Unit power (W) 4 x 18 W

15 W 24 28 75 105 16 18 40 60 – – – –

18 W

16 A 16

20 A

24 28 75 105 16 18 40 60 32 38 85 120

20 W 24 28 75 105 16 18 40 60 32 38 85 120

36 W 22 26 65 93 16 18 40 60 18 21 45 65

40 W 22 26 65 93 16 18 40 60 18 21 45 65

40 A 48

63 A 67

100 A –

58 W 15 17 40 58 11 13 30 43 11 13 29 40

65 W 15 17 40 58 11 13 30 43 11 13 29 40

115 W 140 W 8 8 10 10 22 22 33 33 6 6 6 6 14 14 20 20 7 7 9 9 18 18 24 24

■ Connection (mm2) Type of wire Stranded Flexible Flexible with single ferrule Flexible with double ferrule

Rated current ≤ 25 A Rated current 40 and 63 A 1 x 25 or 2 x 10 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 25 or 2 x 10 1 x 16 1x4 2 x 2·5 2 x 16

227

modular DIN rail equipment dimensions

G D B

A(1) and C E

C F

Dimension (mm)

Dimension (mm) Description

Description

1-pole 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole +N DX-E MCBs

17·7

–

76 88·5

DX, DX-H, DX-D up to 63 A

17·7

–

35·6

53·4

71·2

DX-D, DX-H from 80 to 125 A

26·7

–

53·4

80·1 106·8

RCBOs

–

35·6

71·2

4-pole RCBOs with 4 modules

–

– –

124·6 71·2

Programmable time switches Cat. Nos.

A(1)

0037 00

17·8

0037 30/40

17·8

37·5

0037 52

0047 61

0047 63

0047 64

0047 67

0047 70

107.7

RCDs 2-pole

–

35·6

–

0047 71

4-pole

71·5

–

71·2

44 77·5 94

6047 72

6047 74

6047 77

Auxiliary contacts Cat. Nos. 0073 50/51/53

8·7

Auxiliary contact Cat. No. 0073 54

Fuse carriers

17·7

35·6

53·4

Isolating switches 20 - 32 A

17·7

–

17·7

63 - 100 - 125 A

17·7

–

35·6

Changeover switches Cat. Nos. 0043 82/85

Cat. No. 0043 83

17·7

Light sensitive switch Cat. No. 0037 21

71·2

Contactors 40 and 63 A - 2 modules

35·6

Contactors 40 and 63 A - 3 modules

53·4

35·6

53·4

Auxiliaries for contactors 20 A

53·4

71·2

94 Transformers

Cat. Nos. 0042 20/25

35·8

17·7

Cat. Nos. 0042 51/52

71·5

35·6

Cat. Nos. 0042 53/54

Push buttons/push button switches with indicators

17·7

Contactors ≤ 20 A

44 67·5 94

Buzzers

17·5

Timer Cat. No. 0047 02

17·8

–

17·8

35·6

(1) Maximum projection

228

AlphaRex time switches move with the times... Units can be set up using simple on-screen instructions or, alternatively, using the data key which can be programmed on your PC using its very own USB adaptor.

feAtUReS inClUde : • Set up, save, edit and manage your settings using the advanced PC programming software and USB adaptor • 24/7 display shows stored programmes at a glance • Clear back lit display and on-screen instructions for easy identification of status • 4 function keys for simple programming if not using data key • Exceptional accuracy of +/- 0.2 seconds per day

229

AlphaRex time switches digital for rail

picto loupe-65765j.eps

0047 61

0047 72

0047 73

0047 70

0047 81

Technical information (p. 231-232) Conform to EN 60730-1 and EN 60730-2-7 LCD digital display and text based programming for easier use Mount on DIN rail EN 60715

Pack

Cat. Nos.

AlphaRex

Pack

Accuracy : ± 0·2 second per day Programmable for 1 minute minimum at 1 minute steps either as 24 hour or 7 day using preset groups of days : Mon-Sun, Mon-Fri, Sat-Sun or individual days Programmable either directly on the time switch or via a PC with the Legrand software and data key Data keys can also be used to transfer programmes from one unit to another or used to store data and provide a security back up 1 programme consists of 1 ON and 1 OFF time and the allocation of any day of the week or a combination of days, plus the selected channel on the two channel version Additional features : Built in hour counter up to 65535 hours with reset Back lit display and buttons for easy working during set up Lithium high temperature battery provides a 6 year working reserve EEPROM memory keeps your programme stored indefinitely Optional automatic summer/winter time change Manual override (permanent ON or OFF until manual reset) Automatic override, changes contact position until next automatic ON time (ON becomes OFF; OFF becomes ON, till next programmed ON) Sealable transparent cover with or without data key inserted Holiday and random security programmes D21 version includes a PULSE function providing up to 84 starts from 1 second to 59 mins 59 secs duration

1 1

AlphaRex D21 24 hour or 7 day, 56 programmes, 1 channel 1 x 250 V 50 Hz, 16 A voltage free c/o contact 0047 61 230 V 50/60 Hz supply voltage 0047 63 24 V 50/60 Hz or DC supply voltage

1 1

AlphaRex D22 24 hour or 7 day, 2 x 28 programmes, 2 channels 2 x 250 V 50 Hz, 16 A voltage free c/o contacts 0047 71 230 V 50/60 Hz supply voltage 6047 72 24 V 50/60 Hz or DC supply voltage

USB adaptor with software 0047 73 Enables programmes to be written or read on a PC then transferred using the data key (Cat. No. 0047 72 above) to the time switch System requirements : Windows® (1)95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP and Vista, 40 MB free disk space Data key box 0057 91 1 module width - mounts on DIN rail to store data keys (1) Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation

230

AlphaRex DY64 Working reserve : 5 years Accuracy : ±0·2 seconds per day Programmable for 1 second min., either direct or via a PC using the data key and USB adaptor with software (see below) Block programming in preset groups of days or individual days Includes optional Astro function, sunrise - sunset with offset for lighting control A programme consists of an ON/OFF time and their assignment to certain days 84 programmes per channel possible : • 28 weekly/astronomical programmes • 28 yearly programmes • 28 exceptional programmes Additional features : Backlit display and buttons Programmes are stored in an EEPROM Programmes are shown as a weekly matrix on the display Optional automatic summer/winter time change (daylight saving) Manual override (ON/OFF/AUTO) for each channel on the front face Manual switching Sealing cover (lead seal not supplied), with or without the data key inserted Calculation of sunrise and sunset by Astro function, using programming date, time and local co-ordinates does not require an external light sensor The Astro switching times can be adjusted asymmetrically for up to 120 minutes One channel includes an input control enabling remote activation irrespective of the programme setting Option to create a cyclical repetitive programme on channel 1 AlphaRex DY64 – 6 modules 336 programmes total, 4 channels 16 A – 230 V 4 SPDT voltage free contacts, supplied with DY64 data key and software version 3.0

Accessories Data key 0047 72 Enables programmes to be stored and/or transferred from one time switch to another When used with the USB adaptor (Cat. No. 0047 73 below) the data key can be programmed via a PC

Cat. Nos.

± 50/60 Hz supply voltage

0047 70 120/230 V

Accessories 1

Data key 0047 81 Enables programmes to be stored and/or transferred from one time switch to another When used with the USB adaptor (Cat. No. 0047 73 below) the data key can be programmed via a PC USB adaptor with software 0047 73 Enables programmes to be written or read on a PC then transferred using the data key (Cat. No. 0047 81 above) to the time switch System requirements : Windows® (1)95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP and Vista, 40 MB free disk space Data key box 0057 91 1 module width - mounts on DIN rail to store data keys (1) Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation

AlphaRex time switches digital for rail

■ Programming

■ Technical information

Just 4 buttons put you in control Simple, easy to set up and easy to use…

Type Cat. No.

AlphaRex D21 0047 61/0047 63

24 hour or 7 day

Programme With pre-installed English text that can be changed to German, French, Spanish or Italian Central European time and date have been factory set with European summer/winter time change installed

No. of channels

No. of ON-OFF actions per day/week Pulse start times

2 x 28

84 1 second min. to 59 minutes 59 seconds max.

Nil N/A

Pulse duration

Switching capacity : cos ϕ = 1 incandescent lamp cos ϕ = 0·6 To set UK time : press MENU button select SET confirm OK; select TIME/DATE confirm OK; amend hour to UK hour confirm OK; confirm remainder OK

Now set your ON/OFF times… Press the MENU button, select PROGRAM from the menu Select the function you need i.e. NEW, EDIT, CHECK or DELETE

AlphaRex D22 0047 71/6047 72

16 A 8A 10 A 1 changeover switch

Contact Terminal capacity IP rating Min. prog. time Switching step Accuracy Working reserve(1) Programme memory Manual switching No. of 17·5 mm modules Operating temp. Storage temp. Weight

2 changeover switches

1·5 mm - 4 mm single/1·5 mm - 2·5 mm stranded IP 20 1 minute 1 minute ± 0·2 second per day 6 years Unlimited (EEPROM) Override and permanent 2 –20 °C . . . +55 °C –20 °C . . . +60 °C 130 g 136 g

(1) For time and date only

A programme consists of an ON and OFF time and the assigned day(s)

■ Dimensions (mm)

Example : Select NEW confirm OK; Select block or individual days confirm OK; Set ON time Hours and Mins. confirm OK; Set OFF time Hours and Mins. confirm OK; Press the MENU button to return to normal operation

You can move forwards or backwards with the –+ buttons Either programme directly on the time switch or via your PC Using the data key you can transfer the programme to another time switch of the same model More features than ever before : • holiday programme • hour counter with reset • pulse function • random function • contrast control • more ON/OFF controls

■ Wiring diagrams AlphaRex D21

AlphaRex D22

231

AlphaRex time switches digital for rail

4 (continued)

■ Programming

■ Technical data

Annual, weekly, DY64 time switch digital for rail - 4 channel

Type Cat. No.

The AlphaRex DY64 time switch provides for annual, weekly and exceptional programming :

AlphaRex DY64 0047 70

No. of channels

Weekly programme menu : Used to automatically switch on-off simple circuits, such as lighting or boilers. A weekly programme consists of an ON time and an OFF time and the associated switching days. • MON to SUN : The days are preset, just enter the ON and OFF times. This is used where the same programme is repeated on each day. • INDIVIDUAL : Enter both the ON and OFF time plus the switching day(s). This is used where the same programme is only repeated on certain days of the week or different programmes are required on various days.

Switching capacity : cos ϕ = 1 incandescent lamp cos ϕ = 0·6

16 A 8A 10 A

IP rating

IP 20

Shortest switching time

1 second

Accuracy

±0·2 seconds per day or frequency

Switch output

4 SPDT 3 x 4 x 28 (336)

Annual programme menu :

Programmes

This permits the input of annual programmes or additional programmes to those above, which are executed during a specific period of time. The annual and weekly programmes on the same channel are integrated together as described. Time periods are set by entering the start date and the end date.

Control input with delay time

• Select EVERY YEAR if the programme is to be repeated during the same period each year. E.g. Christmas, national holidays, birthdays. • Select ONCE if the programme is to be executed only during a single period. E.g. vacation periods, where the start date and end date differ each year

Operating temperature

0 min - 23 hr 59 min

Working reserve

5 years

Switching increment

1 second

No. of 17·5 mm modules

6 –20 °C . . . +55 °C

■ Dimensions (mm)

Exceptional programme menu :

Using the exceptional programme : • The EVERY YEAR option should be selected if the exceptional programme is to be activated for the same period and time every year. • The ONCE option is used for programmes that only require a single period and where the start and end dates differ each year e.g. vacation periods. • The MON to SUN option runs from 00:00 hours on the start date to 24:00 hours on the end date. During this period the output of the related channel only switches the exceptional programme setting. • The INDIVIDUAL option runs from 00:00 hours on the start date to 24:00 hours on the end date. During this period the output of the related channel switches only as defined in the set exceptional programme. • The PROG ON option enables the user to make the output channel permanently ON during the start (ON) and end (OFF) times entered. • The PROG OFF option enables the user to make the output channel permanently OFF during the start (ON) and end (OFF) times entered.

047 70 M

120V/230V 50/60Hz R6a -20T

2 ON AUTO OFF

ON AUTO OFF

The above preset programmes are replaced by any exceptional programme for as long as the exceptional programme is active. However, other exceptional programmes will be executed while an exceptional programme is active. The various exceptional programmes are integrated together.

4 ON AUTO OFF

ON AUTO OFF

120V/230V~50/60Hz

N SCh1

107.7

■ Wiring diagram

Cycle function for channel 1 The standard function on channel 1 can be changed into a cycle function to provide on and off cyclically. Setting the PERIOD and the SWITCH ON times activates this option 15:00:00

Channel 1 relay

15:10:00 0:10:00 PERIOD

Programme channel 1, or control signal “S”

15:20:00

SWITCH ON

0:04:00

2 ON AUTO OFF

ON AUTO OFF

15:32:00 3

SWITCH ON

120V/230V 50/60Hz R6a -20T

15:30:00 0:10:00 PERIOD

0:10:00 PERIOD

047 70 M

4 ON AUTO OFF

ON AUTO OFF

120V/230V~50/60Hz

232

N SCh1

MicroRexTM time switches digital for rail

MicroRexTM time switches

digital for rail

■ Technical information Type Cat. No.

Conform to EN 60730-1 and EN 60730-2-7 Supply voltage : 230 V 50/60 Hz LCD digital display Mount on DIN rail EN 60715

Pack

Cat. Nos.

MicroRex D Plus Working reserve : 6 years Accuracy : ±1 second per day Programmable for 1 minute min. at 1 minute steps either as 24 hour/7 day using pre-set groups of days One programme consists of 1 “ON” and 1 “OFF” time and the allocation of any day of the week or a combination of days. Plus the selected channel Example : Prog. 1 On 07.00hrs Prog. 2 On 16.00hrs Prog. 3 On 10.00hrs

Off 08.15hrs Mon-Fri Off 20.15hrs Mon-Fri Off 16.15hrs Sat-Sun

Ch1 Ch2 Ch1

Additional features : EEPROM memory stores programme indefinitely Optional automatic summer/winter time change Manual override (ON or OFF) Automatic advance (changes contact position until next automatic ON time) 1

MicroRex D21 Plus 6047 74 24 hour or 7 day, 28 programme, 1 channel 1 x 16 A voltage free c/o contact

MicroRex D22 Plus 6047 77 24 hour or 7 day, 2 x 14 programme, 2 channel 2 x 16 A voltage free c/o contacts

MicroRex D22 Plus 6047 77

MicroRex D11 0037 00

24 hour or 7 day 1 2 28

7 day 1

2 x 14

16 A 5A 8A

16 A 4A 10 A 1 c/o 2 c/o 1 c/o 1·5 - 4 mm single/1·5 - 2·5 mm stranded IP 20 1 minute 1 minute ±1 second per day ±2·5 sec/d 6 years >100 hrs EEPROM – Override and permanent 2

–20 °C . . . +55 °C –20 °C . . . +60 °C 130 g

–10 °C. . .+55 °C – 100 g

(1) For time and date only

■ Dimensions (mm) and wiring diagrams MicroRex D21/D22 Plus 36

Wiring diagram

0037 00

Programme No. of channels No. of ON-OFF actions per day/ week Switching cap : cos ϕ = 1 incandescent lamp cos ϕ = 0·6 Contact Terminal capacity IP rating Min. prog. time Switching step Accuracy Working reserve(1) Prog. memory Manual switching No. of 17·5 mm modules Operating temp. Storage temp. Weight

6047 74

MicroRex D21 Plus 6047 74

MicroRex D 66

Working reserve : 100 hours Accuracy : ±2·5 seconds per day

Wiring diagram

M ~

MicroRex D11 – 1 module 0037 00 8 programmes, 1 channel 1 x 16 A – 250 V voltage free c/o contacts with 8 “ON-OFF” per day or per week

17.536

max. 90

1/30

MicroRex D11

Additional features : Manual advance/override (ON-OFF) Automatic override (ON-OFF) for holidays, weekends or bank holidays up to 99 days successively Automatic summer/winter setting

max. 86

7 day programme Programmable for 1 minute min. at 1 minute steps

003674

233

MicroRexTM time switches analogue for rail

MicroRexTM time switches

analogue for rail

■ MicroRex – 1 module MicroRex T11 QT11 0037 30 0037 40

Type Cat. No.

± +10% –15%

Supply voltage

230 V

Frequency

0037 30

0037 52

0037 40

0497 54

Conform to EN 60730-1 and EN 60730-2-7 Supply voltage : 230 V +10% –15% Accuracy : ±5 minutes per day(1) Voltage free contacts with ON-OFF-AUTOMATIC 3 position switch Mount on DIN rail EN 60715

Pack

Cat. Nos.

MicroRex – 1 module 24 hour programme Programmable for 15 minutes minimum at 15 minute intervals

1 1/10

MicroRex T11 0037 30 Without working reserve – 50 Hz MicroRex QT11 0037 40 With 100 hr working reserve – 50/60 Hz

50 Hz

50/60 Hz

Switching capacity : cos ϕ = 1 incandescent lamp cos ϕ = 0·6

16 A 4A 10 A

Contact

On/off

Working reserve

None

Min. switching time Interval

100 hours 15 minutes 15 minutes

Operating temp.

–10 °C. . .+55 °C

003730

C 003730

■ Wiring diagram

■ Dimensions (mm) 66 17.5

M ~

1/10

MicroRex T31 0037 52 Without working reserve – 50 Hz

1/10

MicroRex QT31 0037 53 With 100 hr working reserve – 50/60 Hz

24 hour programme Programmable for 30 minutes minimum at 15 minute intervals

max. 86

MicroRex – 3 modules

■ MicroRex – 3 modules 7 day programme Programmable for 4 hours minimum at 2 hourly intervals 1/10

MicroRex QW31 0037 55 With 100 hr working reserve – 50/60 Hz

Type Cat. No. Supply voltage

MaxiRex for surface mounting

Frequency

Conform to EN 60730-1 and EN 60730-2-7 Supply voltage : 230 V ±10% 3 position changeover switch With manual override

Switching capacity : cos ϕ = 1 incandescent lamp cos ϕ = 0·6

With 72 x 72 mm display to EN 60715 Part C 24 hour programme Programmable for 30 minutes minimum at 10 minute intervals Accuracy : ±5 minutes per day 1/30 1/30

MaxiRex T 0497 50 Without working reserve – 50 Hz MaxiRex QT 0497 54 With 100 hr working reserve – 50/60 Hz 2 x 24 hour programme

1/30

MaxiRex TT 0497 55 With 100 hr working reserve – 50/60 Hz

MicroRex QT31 0037 53

T31 0037 52

230 V 50 Hz

QW31 0037 55

± +10% –15% 50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

16 A 4A 10 A

Contact

Changeover switch

Working reserve Min. switching time Interval Operating temp.

100 hours

None

30 minutes

4 hours

15 minutes

2 hours

–10 °C. . .+55 °C

003752

C 003752

■ Dimensions (mm)

■ Wiring diagram 66

M ~

(1) Switching accuracy stated, clock accuracy is ±2·5 s/d for ‘Q’ range others subject to frequency

234

max. 90

AstroRex light control time switches digital for rail

■ Technical information Type Cat. No.

AstroRex D21 0047 64

24 hour or 7 day

Programme No. of channels

0047 73

Technical information (p. 235-236) Conform to IEC/EN 60730-1 and IEC/EN 60730-2-7 LCD digital display and text based programming for easier use Mount on DIN rail EN 60715

Pack

Cat. Nos.

AstroRex Accuracy : ± 0·2 second per day Programmable for 1 minute minimum at 1 minute steps by day(s) or week blocks, either directly or via a PC with Legrand software and data key Programmable either directly on the time switch or via a PC with the Legrand software and data key For switching lights or other equipment in accordance with sunrise/sunset ± 120 mins without the need of an external light detector Accepts additional switch programmes for energy saving 1 programme consists of 1 ON and 1 OFF time and the allocation of any day of the week or a combination of days, plus the selected channel on the two channel version Additional features : Back lit display 6 year working reserve for date and time EEPROM memory keeps your programme stored indefinitely Optional automatic summer/winter time change Holiday programme, 1 hour text function Built-in hours counter, pin coded input Manual switching possible Sealable transparent covers

AstroRex D21 7 day, 1 channel 1 changeover 16 A voltage free contact 250 V 50 Hz 1 x 28 programmes with control input, delay-time 0 min - 23h 59 min 0047 64 230 V 50/60 Hz supply voltage

AstroRex D22 7 day, 2 channels 2 changeover 16 A voltage free contacts 250 V 50 Hz 2 x 14 programmes 0047 67 230 V 50/60 Hz supply voltage

± ± ±

16 A 8A 10 A

IP rating Min. programme time Switching step Accuracy Working reserve(2) Control input with delay-time Programme memory No. of 17·5 mm modules Operating temperature

1 SPDT

2 SPDT

IP 20 1 minute 1 minute ± 0·2 second per day 6 years 0 min - 23h 59min – Unlimited (EEPROM) 2 –20 °C . . . +55 °C

(1) Each programme comprises a switch-on and switch-off time and the associated on and off days or day blocks (2) For time and date only

■ Simple to use 4 button control Menu selection, back in menu Actuated > 1 second = operating display Confirm selection or adopt parameters Select menu items or set parameters, also selection of channel in 2-channel time switch (channel 1 - channel 2)

■ Dimensions (mm) 36

0047 72

2 2 x 14

0047 64

1 28

Programmes(1) Switching capacity : • ohmic 230 V cos = 1 • incandescent 0·6 lamp 230 V • inductive 230 V cos = 0·6 Voltage free contact(s)

picto loupe-65765j.eps

AstroRex D22 0047 67

Accessories 1

Data key 0047 72 Enables programmes to be stored and/or transferred from one time switch to another When used with the USB adaptor (Cat. No. 0047 73 below) the data key can be programmed via a PC

■ Wiring diagrams AstroRex D21

AstroRex D22

USB adaptor with software 0047 73 Enables programmes to be written or read on a PC then transferred using the data key (Cat. No. 0047 72 above) to the time switch System requirements : Windows® (1)95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP and Vista, 40 MB free disc space Note : AlphaSoft version 2.1 will programme both AstroRex and AlphaRex time switches Contact our technical team if you have a previous version (1) Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation

235

AstroRex light control time switches digital for rail

4 (continued)

■ Basic set up

■ Special features The AstroRex will guide the user through the set up and programming in English – this can be changed to another language via the “MENU” button. Every step is shown on the backlit display. Illuminated buttons make operation easy in poor visibility.

Not only will AstroRex provide the opposite basic settings but it is also packed with other useful functions. You can… change the relay settings, input holiday schedules, count the hours and reset the hour counter, set a security PIN code, make a 1 hour test, change the contrast and on the one channel version programme a delay time from an input.

Time, date, summer/winter time changes are preset at the factory to reduce the installation time. These can be easily amended using “MENU + SET”.

Relay settings These can be changed via “MENU” and “FUNCTIONS”. The default is “AUTO” (it switches as programmed). Other options are ”CONST ON”, “CONST OFF”, and “EXTRA”. When “EXTRA” is selected, the switch contact position is reversed until the next switch command.

Sunrise and sunset are preset for the area of SOEST in Germany. These settings are easily changed to the required location by selecting “MENU”, “SET” and “ASTRO” to either the option “POSITION” or “COORDINATES”. “POSITION” = The town and country closest to the location can be selected. “COORDINATES” = The actual coordinates for the location can be set, using the information found in the time zone map provided with the product. The useful option of “OFFSET” enables the switching to be set back or brought forward by up to 120 minutes in relation to sunrise or sunset.

t 0h 1 0

max. ± 120min

24h

Holidays The start and end times of holidays are entered in the holiday programme and activated by the command “ACTIVE” and deactivated with the command “PASSIVE” If the holiday programme is active then the time switch will not execute any of the normal programmed settings but remains either “CONST ON” or “CONST OFF” as selected and set during the holiday period, after which it returns to the normal programmed settings. 1 hour test The function “1H-TEST” can be used to simulate switching. When activated the switch outputs are switched for one hour, after which it returns to the normal programmed settings. PIN code Input and programming can be disabled and reactivated using a four digit “PIN code” The inhibit can be cancelled using another means should the code be lost. Hour counter The hour counter displays the relay total on time, in hours, since the last reset (max. 65,535 hours). Contrast Enables the display contrast to be adjusted to suit the conditions.

Delay-Time (D21 only) Example : If an offset of +30 minutes is entered the time switches 30 A controlled input terminal with a delay time from 0 min to 23hrs 50min is minutes after sunrise and 30 minutes after sunset. provided. The delay time begins as soon as the voltage at the control If an offset of -30 minutes is entered the time switches 30 minutes before input drops. sunrise and 30 minutes before sunset. Data key All these settings can easily be made directly into the time switch using The menu “KEY”- “READ”- “WRITE”, is automatically activated when the four button control. The Legrand “AlphaSoft” software and data power is connected and the key is inserted. It can be used to store a transfer key provide an easy and comfortable method of programming programme from the time switch or copy the same programme to the time switches without site constraints. See p. 235 another like time switch or used with the AlphaSoft software via a PC to Data Key Cat. No. 0047 72 and USB adaptor with software Cat. No. 0047 73. provide a comfortable and easy set up of the Alpha Rex light control switch. Data already saved on the key is overwritten by new data being Complete reset possible - see instructions for information. input using the “READ” command. The time switch can be programmed without mains voltage and the data key programmed to accept the data by selecting the “KEY” function from the “MENU”. This does not work automatically when the data key is inserted and must be selected manually. PC programming Using the Legrand AlphaSoft software the time switch can be easily and comfortably programmed in your office and the data transferred to the data key, which can in turn be used to programme the time switch in the workshop or on site or kept as a back up. System requirements : Windows® (1)95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP and Vista, 40 MB free disk space

(1) Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation

236

light control switches digital for rail

light control switches

C 003721

digital for rail

55 36

■ Technical information 2

max. 90

Type Cat. Nos.

IP rating

Plexo 55 0695 18

0 °C . . . +50 °C

–20 °C . . . +60 °C

Operating temp.

Microlux D 0037 21

IP 20

IP 55 003721

■ Microlux D 4

0037 21

0047 02

0047 04

Dimensions (mm) 36

Cat. Nos.

Light sensitive switch MicroluxTM D

Supply voltage : 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz Working reserve : 100 hours Accuracy of time switch : 2·5 seconds per day Mount on DIN rail EN 60715

max. 90

7 day programme Programming possibilities : 8 different “ON” and 8 different “OFF” to be allocated per day or per week Minimum switching time : 1 minute Light sensitivity adjustable from 5 to 2 000 Lux Additional features : Summer/winter button for time changes Manual advance/override Max. distance between photo cell and switch : 50 m Supplied with IP 55 - IK 07 photocell (Cat. No. 0916 87) 1/10

s003721 3 4

8 5

Connection of programmable light sensitive switch 230 V N L

Photo-electric cell (supplied with unit)

Microlux D 0037 21 10 A – 250 V cos ϕ = 1 1 changeover contact with 60 sec delay (1)

M ~

Pack

Wiring diagram

50 m max. 7

6 3

Time-lag switch

For staircase lighting. Switches a lighting circuit on and off from remote switch for a specific time 0047 02 Power supply : 230 V - 50/60 Hz Output : 16 A - 250 V - cos ϕ = 1 2 000 W incandescent 2 000 W halogen - 230 V 1 000 VA fluo-series compensated 120 VA fluo-parallel compensated 14 µF Adjustable from 30 s to 12 min. 3 wire or 4 wire connection

± ±

Multi-function time-lag switch 10

Lighting control without separate sensors? No problem for AstroRex time switch, see p. 235

■ Time-lag switch Allows : • unlimited numbers of unlit push-buttons • 50 lit push-buttons max. (neon R = 1 mA max.) Constant lighting possible q004702d 3-wire connection

0047 04 Resettable. 230 V - 50/60 Hz Timing adjustable from 0·5 sec to 12 min Operation with 3 or 4 wires automatically recognised by the time-lag switch - Inputs for separate control 8-230 V (presence detection, lighting control by door phone etc.) - Switch-off warning function, display of time-lag end - Long duration function (1 hour) and manual switch-off Output 16 A - 250 V - µ cos ϕ = 1 2 000 W incandescent/halogen 1 000 VA fluo - parallel compensated ≤ 100 µF 200 W halogen lamp + electronic transformer - Specially suited to energy saving lamps1 000 W CFL

N L q004702d

4-wire connection

(1) Supplied with photo-electric cell housed in Plexo weatherproof box - IP 55

237

Atlantic steel

Atlantic stainless steel

Marina GRP

Equipment and locking accessories

Enclosure air conditioning

Industrial plastic boxes

Enclosures and equipment NEW IN 2010 Resistance heaters IP 20 (p. 255)

238

Nylbloc

P. 240 Selection chart

P. 251 Mounting plates

P. 255 Ventilation fan kits

P. 258 Selection chart

P. 263 Nylbloc terminal strips

P. 242 Wall mounting steel enclosures IP 55 and IP 66 - IK 10 P. 246 Wall mounting stainless enclosures IP 66 - IK 10

035507-66269m.eps

P. 248 Wall mounting GRP enclosures IP 66 - IK 10

035201-66259m.eps

P. 251 Internal doors and insulated modular chassis

035261-66260m.eps

P. 243 Wall mounting steel enclosures with glass window IP 55 - IK 10

P. 243 Equipment and accessories

P. 246 Wall mounting stainless enclosures with glass window IP 66 - IK 10

P. 247 Dimensions

035507-66269m.eps

P. 248 Wall mounting GRP enclosures with glass window IP 66 - IK 10

035223-68006m.eps

P. 252 Equipment and accessories

035261-66260m.eps

P. 244 Dimensions

68528a.eps

035507-66269m.eps

68528a.eps

P. 249 Dimensions

P. 250 Free standing GRP enclosures IP 66 - IK 10

P. 253 Dimensions

P. 254 Locking accessories 036804-66274m.eps

P. 255 NEW Ventilation and heating

P. 256 Operating principles and dimensions 035013-42518m.eps

P. 259 PS range with membrane glands IP 55 - IK 07

034802-66276m.eps

68528a.eps

P. 260 PS and PP ranges with smooth sides IP 55 - IK 07

68528a.eps

036805-66275m.eps

035013-42518m.eps

P. 260 PC range with smooth sides IP 66 - IK 08

P. 262 PVC range with smooth sides IP 55 - IK 07/08

035507-66269m.eps

239

pour Atlantic exemple and Marina : xxxxxxx enclosures and equipment xxxxxxxx

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

ATLANTIC ENCLOSURES STEEL IP 66 (1 door) or IP 55 (2 door) - IK 10 GREY RAL 7035 GREY RAL 7035 with 6 EW IP 6 window

(nominal) D

MARINA ENCLOSURES

STAINLESS STEEL IP 66 - IK 10 Stainless 304 L Stainless 304 L with window

POLYESTER (GRP) IP 66 - IK 10 GREY RAL 7035 GREY RAL 7035 with window

Shape

H (mm)

W (mm)

D (mm)

400

300

160

0355 09(1)

–

0352 00 Supplied with plain plate

–

0362 50

–

300

200

160

0355 00(1) Supplied with plain plate

400

300

200

0355 02

0354 92

0352 01

0352 21

0362 51

0362 71

500

400

200

0355 03

0354 93

0352 02

0352 22

0362 52

0362 72

600

400

200

0355 04

–

0352 03

0352 23

–

500

400

250

0355 07

–

600

400

250

0355 08

0354 94

0352 05

0352 25

0362 55

0362 75

700

500

250

0355 12

0354 95

0352 06

0352 26

0362 56

0362 76

800

600

250

0355 14

–

1000

600

250

0355 17

–

1000

800

250

0355 18

–

700

500

300

0355 22

–

800

600

300

0355 23

0354 96

0352 11

0352 31

0362 61

0362 81

1000

600

300

0355 26

–

1000

800

300

0355 27

0354 97

0352 13

0352 33

0362 63

0362 83

1200

800

300

0355 92

–

0352 14

–

0362 64

0362 84

1200

1000

300

0355 93(2)

–

1400

1000

300

0355 95(2)

–

800

600

400

0355 28

–

1000

800

400

0355 29

–

1200

800

400

0355 96

–

1400

800

400

0355 98

–

0352 15

–

300

160

0355 05(1)

–

300

200

0355 30

–

400

200

0355 31

–

500

250

0355 32

–

600

250

0355 10

–

800

250

0355 15

–

600

300

0355 20

–

800

300

0355 24

–

1000

300

0355 91(2)

–

1200

300

0355 94(2)

–

600

400

0355 36

–

1200

400

0355 97(2)

–

300

400

200

0355 01

–

400

600

250

0355 06

–

800

1000

250

0355 33(2)

–

600

800

300

0355 21(2)

–

600

1000

300

0355 37(2)

–

800

1000

300

0355 34(2)

–

1000

1200

300

0355 90(2)

–

(1) Without gland plate (2) 2 doors (3) Requires Cat. No. 0363 69 when mounting in Atlantic steel (A) For Atlantic (M) For Marina (4) The same plate is used for both vertical and horizontal enclosures

240

pour exemple : xxxxxxx xxxxxxxx

EQUIPMENT Plain plates pre-galv. steel

Lina 12·5 perforated plates

Lina 25 perforated plates

Lina 25 sectioned uprights

Lina 25 crosspieces

Modular chassis

ASSOCIATED PRODUCTS Internal doors

Roofs

Plinths

Document pocket (p. 252)

0367 80

–

0363 59(3)

–

0361 02

0363 60(3)

–

0363 61(3)

–

0363 60(3)

–

0360 04

0360 12

0361 51

0360 49(M) 0360 50(A)

0360 00(A) 0360 01(M)

0360 07(A)

0361 50(A)

0360 52

0360 04

0360 12

0361 51

0367 80

0361 01

0360 55

0360 09

0360 15

0361 52

0367 81

0360 56

0360 22

0360 16

0361 53

0367 81

0360 55

0360 09

0360 15

0361 52

0367 81

–

0363 59(3)

–

0360 52

– –

–

61(3)

0360 56

0360 22

0360 16

0361 53

0367 81

0361 03

0363

0360 58

0360 31

0360 18

0361 54

0367 82

0361 05

0363 62

0360 59

0360 33

0360 19

0361 55

0367 83

–

0363 63(3)

–

0360 54

0360 40

0360 23

0361 56

0367 83

–

0360 61

0360 42

0360 21

0361 56

0367 84

–

0363 64(3)

–

0360 58

0360 31

0360 18

0361 54

0367 82

–

0363 62(3)

–

(3)

0360 59

0360 33

0360 19

0361 55

0367 83

0361 06

0363 63

0360 54

0360 40

0360 23

0361 56

0367 83

–

0362 93(M)

0362 94(M) –

(3)

0360 61

0360 42

0360 21

0361 56

0367 84

0361 09

0363 64

0360 64

0360 46

0360 87

0361 58

0367 84

–

0363 65

(3)

0362 95(M) 0362 95(M)

Locks (p. 254)

– –

– 0363 00(A) 0362 91(M) 0363 00 0363 01(A) 0362 92(M) 0363 01(A) 0362 92(M)

0360 65

0360 47

0360 88

0361 58

0367 85

–

0363 02

0360 68

0360 79

0360 98

0361 59

0367 85

–

0363 02

0360 59

0360 33

0360 19

0361 55

0367 83

–

0363 63(3)

–

0363 40

0360 61

0360 42

0360 21

0361 56

0367 84

–

0363 64(3)

–

0363 41

0360 64

0360 46

0360 87

0361 58

0367 84

–

0363 65(3)

–

0363 41

0360 67

0360 75

0360 90

0361 59

0367 84

–

0363 41

0360 69

0360 02

0360 91

0361 50

0367 80

–

0360 69

0360 02

0360 91

0361 50

0367 80

–

0360 70

0360 05

0360 92

0361 51

0367 81

–

0360 71

0360 14

0360 93

0361 52

0367 82

–

0360 57

0360 24

0360 17

0361 53

0367 83

–

0360 60

0360 34

0360 20

0361 55

0367 84

–

0360 57

0360 24

0360 17

0361 53

0367 83

–

0363 00

0360 60

0360 34

0360 20

0361 55

0367 84

–

0363 01

0360 63

0360 43

0360 25

0361 56

0367 85

–

0363 02

0360 66

0360 48

0360 89

0361 58

0367 86

–

0363 03

0360 57

0360 24

0360 17

0361 53

0367 83

–

0363 40

0360 66

0360 48

0360 89

0361 58

0367 86

–

0363 43

0360 52(4)

0360 04

0360 11

0361 50

0367 81

–

0360 56(4)

0360 22

0360 13

0361 51

0367 83

–

0360 61(4)

0360 42

0360 94

0361 55

0367 85

–

0360 59(4)

0360 33

0360 06

0361 53

0367 84

–

0363 01

0360 54(4)

0360 40

0360 08

0361 53

0367 85

–

0363 02

0360 61(4)

0360 42

0360 94

0361 55

0367 85

–

0363 02

0360 65(4)

0360 47

0360 10

0361 56

0367 86

–

0363 03

Marina free standing polyester (GRP) IP 66 - IK 10 grey RAL 7035 (p. 250)

Ventilation kit (p. 255)

Heaters and thermostat (p. 255)

Chassis kits (p. 251)

241

35 RAL 70

VE R ITA S

Legrand’s range of industrial enclosures has been designed to the highest specification, providing panel builders and users with much more than just a box.

IP 55 and IP 66 - IK 10 - Nema 4x - Nema 12

BUR

Enclosures for your environment

Atlantic steel wall mounting enclosures

1828

35 RAL 70

0355 00

35 RAL 70

0355 23

0355 07

Technical information and dimensions (p. 244-245) Equipment (p. 252) IP 55 according to IEC 60529 for 2 door enclosures and IP 66 according to IEC 60529 for 1 door enclosures, IK 10 according to IEC 62262 UL listed (1 door Nema 4x, 2 door Nema 12) CSA, Bureau Veritas, TUV, GÖST EMC attenuation 20 dB 60 µ thick textured polyester coating provides excellent resistance to corrosion and chemical agents Automatic positioning of equipment on to active corners with M8 fixings (see technical p. 245) Reversible door and single lock with 2 x 2433 A keys irrespective of size 300 mm high enclosures have key closure (no handle) One, two or three closing points depending on size Enclosures of 500 mm high and above have door uprights Polyurethane door seal and gutter to shed water Gland plate (except Cat. No. 0355 00/05/09) Provision to fix optional runners and brackets for depth adjustment in enclosures from 600 x 600 mm Pack

Cat. Nos.

Enclosures grey RAL 7035 Nominal external dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth (1)

GRP Marina GRP enclosures... ideal for saline atmospheres or other environments where metal would degrade.

PLaSTic Available with transparent or plain covers and with hinges or cover fixings, Plexo boxes can accept IP 2X terminals, DIN rail and mounting plates.

STEEL Atlantic steel enclosures are suitable for non-corrosive commercial and industrial environments.

STainLESS STEEL Atlantic 304L grade stainless steel enclosures are ideally suited to the food industry.

242

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0355 05(4) 0355 09(4) 0355 00(5) 0355 30 0355 01 0355 02 0355 31 0355 03 0355 04 0355 06 0355 07 0355 32 0355 08 0355 10 0355 12 0355 14 0355 15 0355 33 0355 17 0355 18

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0355 20 0355 21 0355 37 0355 22 0355 23 0355 24 0355 34 0355 26 0355 27 0355 91 0355 90 0355 92 0355 93 0355 94 0355 95 0355 36 0355 28 0355 29 0355 96 0355 97 0355 98

Weight (kg)

Number of doors

300 x 300 x 160(3) 4·1 1 400 x 300 x 160 6·3 1 300 x 200 x 160(2) 4·2 1 300 x 300 x 200(3) 4·2 1 300 x 400 x 200(3) 6·5 1 400 x 300 x 200 6·5 1 400 x 400 x 200 7·7 1 500 x 400 x 200 9·7 1 10·7 1 600 x 400 x 200 400 x 600 x 250 11·7 1 500 x 400 x 250 10·7 1 500 x 500 x 250 11·5 1 600 x 400 x 250 12 1 600 x 600 x 250 16·3 1 700 x 500 x 250 16·5 1 800 x 600 x 250 18·8 1 800 x 800 x 250 21·6 1 27 2 800 x 1 000 x 250 1 000 x 600 x 250 24 1 1 000 x 800 x 250 36·4 1 The following enclosures can be mounted on to 200 mm high plinths (see p. 243) 600 x 600 x 300 21·1 1 600 x 800 x 300 28·8 2 600 x 1 000 x 300 33·3 2 700 x 500 x 300 23 1 800 x 600 x 300 28·8 1 800 x 800 x 300 34·2 1 32 2 800 x 1 000 x 300 1 000 x 600 x 300 33·3 1 1 000 x 800 x 300 42 1 1 000 x 1 000 x 300 53 2 62·2 2 1 000 x 1 200 x 300 1 200 x 800 x 300 49·6 1 1 200 x 1 000 x 300 62·2 2 1 200 x 1 200 x 300 70 2 1 400 x 1 000 x 300 71 2 28 1 600 x 600 x 400 31 1 800 x 600 x 400 1 000 x 800 x 400 45 1 1 200 x 800 x 400 57 1 1 200 x 1 200 x 400 77 2 1 400 x 800 x 400 64 1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Depth excluding lock Supplied with plain plate and key closure (no handle) Key closure (no handle) With no opening With no opening. Supplied with plain plates

Atlantic steel wall mounting enclosures IP 55 - IK 10 - Nema 4x - Nema 12 (continued)

Atlantic steel wall mounting enclosures equipment and accessories

35 RAL 70

35 RAL 70 0364 01

0355 23 + plinth 0363 00

0354 93

Technical information and dimensions (p. 244-245) Equipment (p. 252) Pack

Cat. Nos.

0364 04

Enclosures grey RAL 7035 with tempered glass window Tinted tempered glass window Single lock with 2 x 2433 A keys External dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth

1 1 1 1 1 1

0354 92 400 x 300 x 200 0354 93 500 x 400 x 200 0354 94 600 x 400 x 250 0354 95 700 x 500 x 250 0354 96 800 x 600 x 300 0354 97 1 000 x 800 x 300

Window dimensions (mm) Height x Width

Weight (kg)

300 x 128 400 x 228 500 x 228 600 x 328 700 x 428 850 x 628

6 8 10 15 25 36

Plinths anthracite grey RAL 7021

Pack

Height 200 mm For enclosures depth 300 mm For enclosures Width x Depth (mm)

1 1 1 1

0363 00 0363 01 0363 02 0363 03

For enclosures Width x Depth (mm)

1 1

0363 41 0363 43

800 x 400 1 200 x 400

Cat. Nos.

Set of 4 wall mounting brackets

0364 01 Mazak brackets with cover - 300 kg max. load Vertical or horizontal fixing except if fitted with canopy (horizontal fixing only) 0364 04 Steel brackets - 100 kg max. load Vertical or horizontal fixing Anti-corrosion treated steel

Weight (kg)

600 x 300 6 800 x 300 6·7 1 000 x 300 7·4 1 200 x 300 10·1 For enclosures depth 400 mm

0347 95

0367 44

Set of 4 runners and brackets with fixings for depth adjustment 1 1

0367 43 For enclosures of depth 250 mm (from 600 x 600 mm) 0367 44 For enclosures of depth 300 mm

Weight (kg)

Earth braids

10·2 13·6

Provide earth continuity between door and enclosure body Cross-section (mm2)

Roofs available on request 20 20

0347 95 0347 96

6 16

Length between fixing centres (mm)

200 200

Holes Ø (mm)

8·5 8·5

243

Atlantic steel wall mounting enclosures IP 55 - IK 10

■ Technical information

■ Dimensions

RAL 7035 polyester coated steel with corrosion resistant metal hinges and closure parts, suitable for general industrial environments except in areas having excessive corrosion

Usable door surface area and lock positions/guides 1 door 2 doors

150

Front aperture

View from above - enclosure fixing E

O P L P L

Enclosures Height Width (mm) (mm)

Cat. Nos. 0355 00 0355 05/30 0355 01 0355 02/09 0355 31 0355 06 0355 03/07 0355 32 0355 04/08 0355 10/20/36 0355 21 0355 37 0355 12/22 0355 14/23/28 0355 15/24 0355 33/34 0355 17/26 0355 18/27/29 0355 91 0355 90 0355 92/96 0355 93 0355 94/97 0355 98 0355 95

■ Plinths

Q O

Properties of the polyester coating • Polyester coating process : - iron phosphatisation provides good adherence - neutralisation of above - chromium passivated for corrosion resistance, neutralisation - application of a pure polyester coating by electrostatic dusting • Coating thickness : 80 µm (microns) • Mechanical characteristics : obtained on steel test bars 8/10 and 10/10 : - adhesion (chequer pattern and sellotape) - EN ISO 2409 : Class 0 to 1 - Persoz hardness - EN ISO 1522 : 320 seconds - bending on cylindrical mandrel - EN ISO 1519 : 6 mm - cracks - Ericksen embossing - EN ISO 1520 : 8 mm - resistance to shock - EN ISO 6272-1 : 1 kg - 50 cm • Resistance to environmental conditions : - saline mist - (BS) NSS Laboratory to ISO 9227 and Kq Laboratory to EN 60068-2-11 : 1 000 hours - sulphur dioxide SO2 : 500 hours - heat : 100 °C for 168 hours - very good lustre retention 150 °C for 3 hours - very good lustre retention - cold : –40 °C

200 300 400 300 400 600 400 500 400 600 800 1 000 500 600 800 1 000 600 800 1 000 1 200 800 1 000 1 200 800 1 000

300 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 600 600 600 600 700 800 800 800 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 400 1 400

Usable door area Height Width

Lock position

Upright sections

O (mm)

P (mm)

Q (mm)

L (mm)

251 251 251 351 351 325 425 425 525 525 525 525 625 725 725 725 925 925 925 925 1 125 1 125 1 125 1 325 1 325

148 248 348 248 348 500 300 400 300 500 300 x 2 400 x 2 400 500 700 400 x 2 500 700 400 x 2 500 x 2 700 400 x 2 500 x 2 700 400 x 2

(1)

(3)

(1)

(3)

(1)

(3)

(1)

(3)

(1)

(3)

(1)

530 330 430 330 530 330 430 430 530 730 430 530 730 430 530 730 430 530 730 430

(1) (1)

350(2) 350(2) (1) (1)

400(2) 500(2) 500(2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)

(1) Central lock (2) Top or bottom lock (3) Without upright sections A

30.6

Gland plates M

View from below - floor fixing H C

Metal thickness

≤ 600mm H = 1·3mm

O 13

30.6

Door 131

700mm H = 1·5mm

≥ 800mm H = 1.8mm

Sides

all 1·3mm

Back

≤ 600x400mm = 0.8mm ≥ 600x600mm = 1·3mm

115

169

Cat. Nos. 0363 00 0363 01 0363 02 0363 03 0363 41 0363 43

244

Dimensions (mm)

600 x 300 600 800 x 300 800 1 000 x 300 1 000 1 200 x 300 1 200 800 x 400 800 1 200 x 400 1 200

280 280 280 280 380 380

200 200 200 200 200 200

150 150 150 150 250 250

574 469 150 774 469 150 974 369 x 2 150 1 174 469 x 2 150 774 469 250 1 174 469 x 2 250

542 742 942 1 142 742 1 142

271 371 471 571 371 571

287 387 487 587 387 587

Width (mm)

Enclosures Depth (mm)

External depth without lock C (mm)

200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600 600 600 800 800 800 1 000 1 000 1 200 1 200

160 150 200 200 250 250 300 250 300 400 250 300 400 250 300 300 400

170 160 210 210 260 260 310 260 310 410 260 310 410 260 310 310 410

Usable space for glands N (mm) M (mm) – – 169 269 269 369 369 469 469 469 469 469 469 369 369 469 469

– – 115 115 115 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150

No. of gland plates – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

â&#x2013; Dimensions (continued) Active corner

Wall bracket fixing positions Cat. No. 0364 01 S

Provides quick and easy fixing Transfers equipment weight to wall fixings

12.4

37.5 8.5

27.5 V

Can be fixed directly to wall without brackets using Ă&#x2DC; 9 mm holes

8.5

64 Cat. No. 0364 04

Fixing method for runners and depth adjustment brackets (p. 243) 10

17 51

Vertical Fixing Horizontal Fixing Overall dimensions Enclosures wall brackets centres wall brackets centres 0364 01 0364 04 Height Width (mm) (mm) R (mm) S*(mm) E (mm) T*(mm) U (mm) F (mm) V (mm) Y (mm) V (mm) Y (mm) 200 300 400 300 400 600 400 500 400 600 800 1 000 500 600 800 1 000 600 800 1 000 1 200 800 1 000 1 200 800 1 000

375 375 375 475 475 475 575 575 675 675 675 675 775 875 875 875 1 075 1 075 1 075 1 075 1 275 1 275 1 275 1 475 1 275

150 250 350 250 350 550 350 450 350 550 750 950 450 550 750 950 550 750 950 1 150 750 950 1 150 750 1 150

225 225 225 325 325 325 425 425 525 525 525 525 625 725 725 725 925 925 925 925 1 125 1 125 1 125 1 325 1 325

250 250 250 350 350 350 450 450 550 550 550 550 650 750 750 750 950 950 950 950 1 150 1 150 1 150 1 350 1 350

275 375 475 375 475 675 475 575 475 675 875 1 075 575 675 875 1 075 675 875 1 075 1 275 875 1 075 1 275 875 1 075

169 269 369 269 369 569 369 469 369 569 769 969 469 569 769 969 569 769 969 1 169 769 969 1 169 769 969

430 430 430 530 530 530 630 630 730 730 730 730 830 930 930 930 1 130 1 130 1 130 1 130 1 330 1 330 1 330 1 530 1 530

330 430 530 430 530 730 530 630 530 730 930 1 130 630 730 930 1 130 730 930 1 130 1 330 930 1 130 1 330 930 1 130

402 402 402 502 502 502 602 602 702 702 702 702 802 902 902 902 1 102 1 102 1 102 1 102 1 302 1 302 1 302 1 502 1 502

302 402 502 402 502 702 502 602 502 702 902 1 102 602 702 902 1 102 702 902 1 102 1 302 1 102 1 302 1 302 902 1 102

Adjustment of equipment Without runners

300 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 600 600 600 600 700 800 800 800 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 400 1 400

Enclosure Depth (mm) 160 200 250 300 400

With runners fitted (optional)

Without runners W (mm)

X (mm)

140 180 230 280 380

125 165 215 265 365

With runners Enclosure Depth Runner W (mm) (mm) Cat. Nos. min. max. 160 200 250 0367 43 93 213 300 0367 44 93 263 400 0367 45 93 363

X (mm) min. max. 78 198 78 248 78 348

* Same for Cat. No. 0364 01 and 0364 04

Important Legrand steel enclosures are supplied with a polyester finish. The finish will provide good protection against corrosion under normal conditions. If the enclosures are to be installed in wet or corrosive conditions we recommend that a regular programme of inspection and maintenance is carried out. If service conditions are adverse we recommend that the enclosures are given extra surface protection at the time of installation. Legrand will be pleased to advise on appropriate extra protective means to be taken. For general external use and in particularly severe corrosive conditions we recommend the use of our Marina range of glass-fibre reinforced polyester enclosures. IP 55 does not necessarily mean that the steel enclosure can be used outdoors. Please consult the relevant standard.

245

Atlantic stainless steel wall mounting enclosures

IP 66 - IK 10 - Nema 4x

■ Technical information Stainless steel enclosures provide a solution in harsh, aggressive environments such as chemical plants or offshore 304 L in %

BUR

ITA S

1828

For use in : • areas requiring a high level of hygiene : - food processing plants - dairies - industrial/commercial kitchens • corrosive conditions : - chemical plants - pharmaceutical industry - petroleum industry - paper industry Rounded door, protective flange, reversible enclosure Automatic positioning of equipment on to active corners with M8 fixings Provision to fix optional runners and brackets for depth adjustment in enclosures from 600 x 400 x 250 mm Cat. Nos.

304 L

0352 00(2) 0352 01 0352 02 0352 03 0352 05 0352 06 0352 11 0352 13 0352 14 0352 15

304 L : Provides good resistance to : - nitric acid at concentrations of 52 % at all temperatures (or 98 % when cold) - cold dilute organic acids - alkaline solutions (unless hot or above 50 %) - saline solutions other than chlorides, sulphides and sulphates - fresh water and natural atmosphere with low carbon content - food products (except mustard and white wine) Physical properties Specific weight - density : Coefficient of expansion : Specific heat : Electrical resistivity : Thermal conductivity :

8 16 µ / m °C 500 J / kg °C 0·75 µΩ mm2 15 W / m °C

The only way of guaranteeing excellent resistance to intercrystalline corrosion is the low carbon content (0·03 %) of 304 L stainless steel

304 L

External dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth

Weight (kg)

France

AFNOR NFEN

300 x 200 x 160 400 x 300 x 200 500 x 400 x 200 600 x 400 x 200 600 x 400 x 250 700 x 500 x 250 800 x 600 x 300 1 000 x 800 x 300 1 200 x 800 x 300 1 400 x 800 x 400

4 5·8 8·3 10·8 12 15 22 38 45 66

Germany USA

DIN AISI

Z3 CN 18-10 X 2 CNI 19-11 X 2 CNI 19-11 (W.Nr 1-4 306) 304 L

304 L grade enclosures are fitted with Mazak double bar locks, epoxy coated

Tinted tempered glass window 304 L

External dimension (mm) Height x Width x Depth

Window dimensions (mm) Height x Width

Weight (kg)

0352 21 0352 22 0352 23 0352 25 0352 26 0352 31 0352 33

400 x 300 x 200 500 x 400 x 200 600 x 400 x 200 600 x 400 x 250 700 x 500 x 250 800 x 600 x 300 1 000 x 800 x 300

300 x 128 400 x 228 500 x 228 500 x 228 600 x 328 700 x 428 850 x 628

7·5 8·5 9·6 12 15 25 38

Set of 4 wall mounting brackets Supplied with screws 304 L 0364 06 Stainless steel (300 kg max. load)

(1) Cat. Nos. 0352 00/01 are fitted with 1 lock, all others are fitted with 2 locks (2) Supplied with plain plate

246

304 L 1 000 hrs 1 000 hrs

Different country names

Stainless steel enclosures(1)

Stainless steel enclosures with tempered glass window

9 to 11

Stainless steel properties

IP 66 according to IEC 60529, IK 10 according to IEC 62262, EN 50102 UL listed (Nema 4x) CSA, Bureau Veritas, GÖST, LRS. LCIE N° 380 584 A B Stainless steel 304 L : Standard offer

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Nickel

Brushed satin finish Polygrain 180 - Ra 0·25 to 0·35 µm - Rt 2·5 to 4 µm

0352 11

0352 21

Technical information and dimensions (p. 246-247) Equipment (p. 252)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

18 to 19

To salt spray (SS) To sulphur dioxide (SO2)

0352 01

Pack

< 0·03

Chromium

Corrosion resistance

Carbon

Atlantic stainless steel wall mounting enclosures IP 66 - IK 10

■ Dimensions

Position of equipment without runners

Cat. Nos. 0352 00 0352 01 0352 02 0352 03 0352 05 0352 06 0352 11 0352 13 0352 14 0352 15

Usable door surface area

Lock positions

Height

Width

Depth

A (mm)

B (mm)

(mm)

O (mm)

P (mm)

Q (mm)

301·6 401·6 501·6 601·6 601·6 702·4 802·4 1 003·6 1 203·6 1 400·6

199·6 299·6 399·6 399·6 399·6 500 600 800·6 800·6 800·6

161·5 201·5 201·5 201·5 251·5 251·5 301·5 301·5 301·5 401·5

250 350 450 550 550 650 750 950 1 150 1 350

150 250 350 350 350 450 550 750 750 750

– – 250 380 380 400 400 600 700 700

Enclosure Depth (mm)

W (mm)

X (mm)

160 200 250 300 400

140 180 230 280 380

125 165 215 265 365

Without runners

Adjustment of equipment with runners (optional)(1) W X

Fixing positions S Cat. No. 0364 06 25

8.5

(1) Mild steel with anticorrosive treatment

F 23.5 46

Enclosure Depth (mm)

Runners Cat. Nos.

160 200 250 300 400

– – 0367 43 0367 44 0367 45

With runners (see p. 243) W (mm) X (mm) Min. Max. Min. Max. – – 93 93 93

– – 213 263 363

– – 78 78 78

– – 198 248 348

U Y

Cat. Nos.

0352 00 0352 01/21 0352 02/22 0352 03/23 0352 05/25 0352 06/26 0352 11/31 0352 13/33 0352 14 0352 15

For mounting plates, see p. 252

Vertical wall brackets

Horizontal wall brackets

Active corner

Dimensions

R (mm)

S (mm)

T (mm)

U (mm)

V (mm)

Y (mm)

E (mm)

F (mm)

350 450 550 650 650 750 850 1 050 1 250 1 450

150 250 350 350 350 450 550 750 750 750

250 350 450 550 550 650 750 950 1 150

250 350 450 450 450 550 650 850 850

392 492 592 692 692 792 892 1 092 1 292

292 392 492 492 492 592 692 892 892

225 325 425 525 525 625 725 925 1 125

169 269 369 369 369 469 569 769 769

1 350

850

1 492

892

1 325

769

Provides quick and easy fixing Transfers equipment weight to wall fixings M8

Fixing method for runners and depth adjustment brackets (p. 243) 10

247

Marina wall mounting enclosures polyester IP 66 - IK 10

0364 09

35 RAL 70

35 RAL 70 0362 44

0362 63 + plinth 0362 92 + roof 0362 95

Enclosure Cat. No. 0362 61 fitted with : 0364 09 brackets, 0363 63 internal door, 0368 26 key barrels, 0362 44 coupling kit and 0362 42 depth adjustment kit

0362 55 + wall brackets 0364 09

0362 42

Technical information and dimensions (p. 246-247) IP 66 according to IEC EN 60529. IK 10 according to IEC EN 62262 (EN 50102). UL/CSA approval applied for. Class II(1) Glass fibre reinforced polyester (GRP) enclosures. Self extinguishing at 960 °C according to IEC EN 60695-2-11. Designed for corrosive environments Reversible door, 180° opening (except Cat. No. 0362 50). Double bar lock(s), captive stainless steel hinge pins Mounting plate/equipment can be fixed directly to the rear of the enclosure Accepts partial plate from 500 x 400 x 200 mm and/or rails (except Cat. No. 0362 50) Optional depth adjustment kit Cat. No. 0362 42 available for enclosures 400 mm high and above Pack

Cat. Nos.

Wall mounting grey RAL 7035 Ext. dimensions (mm) HxWxD

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0362 50 300 x 220 x 160 0362 51 400 x 300 x 206 0362 52 500 x 400 x 206 0362 55 610 x 400 x 257 0362 56 720 x 510 x 250 0362 61 820 x 610 x 300 0362 63 1 020 x 810 x 300 0362 64 1 220 x 810 x 300

300 x 200 x 160 400 x 300 x 200 500 x 400 x 200 600 x 400 x 250 700 x 500 x 250 800 x 600 x 300 1 000 x 800 x 300 1 200 x 800 x 300

Wall mounting grey RAL 7035 with tinted tempered glass window 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Corresponding Atlantic (mm) HxWxD

Ext. dimensions (mm) HxWxD

Window (mm) HxW

0362 71 400 x 300 x 206 0362 72 500 x 400 x 206 0362 75 610 x 400 x 257 0362 76 720 x 510 x 250 0362 81 820 x 610 x 300 0362 83 1 020 x 810 x 300 0362 84 1 220 x 810 x 300

235 x 145 335 X 245 463 x 245 570 x 272 672 x 372 770 x 495 970 x 495

Accessories Set of 4 polyester wall mounting brackets, supplied complete with bolts and brass insert bushes For enclosures H (mm)

Max. load. (kg)

300 400 to 1 200

100 150

1 1

0364 08 0364 09

0362 40 Metal inserts for M8 rear fixing For enclosure height ≥ 400 mm (anchor into blind holes provided in enclosure rear)

0362 42 Depth adjust kit for enclosures ≥ 200 mm 4 fixings complete with screws

0362 44 Coupling kit (horizontal or vertical) for enclosure heights ≥ 500 mm Kit ensures maintained IP 66 rating. Multiple kits can be used to join multiple enclosures (For wall mounting, wall brackets Cat. No. 0364 09 must be ordered separately)

Internal doors (see p. 251)

Plinths grey RAL 7035 Height 170 mm Front and rear access plates Plinths can be stacked for extra height (2 max.) For enclosures W x D (mm)

1 1

0362 91 0362 92

600 x 300 800 x 300

Roofs grey RAL 7035 IK 10 For enclosures W x D (mm)

1 1 1

0362 93 0362 94 0362 95

500 x 250 600 x 300 800 x 300

Anti-graffiti versions available to special order Contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

(1)Permits the final assembly to have Class II insulation according to EN 60439-1

248

Marina wall mounting enclosures polyester - IP 66 - IK 10

■ Wall mounting brackets

■ Dimensions and weights, usable areas

Cat. No. 0364 09

26 C

30.5 16 25

Cat. No. 0364 08

Ø 18

I 27.5

13.2

8.5

H E

■ Fixing positions Y A

D F B

F B

100 75

100 B

Usable dimensions (mm) A(1)

B(1)

I max.

0362 50 250 0362 51/71 300 0362 52/72 400 0362 33/55/75 500 0362 34/56/76 600 0362 35/61/81 700 0362 36/63/83 900 0362 37/64/84 1 100

150 180 280 280 340 440 600 600

105 130 130 180 170 220 220 220

195 250 350 350 400 500 700 700

250 260 360 460 560 660 860 1 060

115 150 150 180 170 230 230 230

194 260 360 360 460 560 760 960

280 350 450 560 662 762 962 1 162

130 178 178 225 211 261 261 261

200 300 400 400 500 580 700

(1) Except for enclosures with glass windows B

■ Equipment fixing

225 325 325 425 525 725 725

102·5 87·5 95 100 100 100 100

228·5 228·5 328·5 428·5 528·5 728·5 728·5

E 358 458 558 664 764 964 1164

F 259 359 358 468 568 768 768

G 220 325 425 525 600 700 900 1100

H R S V T 150 330 190 359 270 120 470 241 525 341 220 570 341 625 441 220 680 341 735 551 200 789 441 844 641 300 887 548 942 758 500 1087 748 1142 958 500 1287 748 1342 1158

U 250 370 470 470 579 677 877 877

Y 279 425 525 525 634 732 932 932

■ Plinths and roofs L 170

125 225 325 425 525 725 925

163 225 325 325 425 525 725 725

0362 50(1) 0362 51/71 0362 52/72 0362 33/55/75 0362 34/56/76 0362 35/61/81 0362 36/63/83 0362 37/64/84

With horizontal brackets (mm)

D C

263 325 425 525 625 725 925 1125

0362 50 0362 51/71 0362 52/72 0362 33/55/75 0362 34/56/76 0362 35/61/81 0362 36/63/83 0362 37/64/84

Cat. Nos.

With vertical brackets (mm)

(1) Use Cat. No. 0364 08 wall brackets. Others use Cat. No. 0364 09 wall brackets

A B C D E F (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

Cat. Nos.

Direct Direct fixing fixing outside through mounting rear of plate area enclosure (mm) (mm)

Cat. Nos.

Ø 14

P 60

150

265

Cat. Nos.

0362 50 0362 51/71 0362 52/72 0362 33/55/75 0362 34/56/76 0362 35/61/81 0362 36/63/83 0362 37/64/84

Full mounting plate (mm) A max A min (with. Cat. No. 0362 42) 135 170 170 220 220 270 270 270

70 70 70 70 70 70 70

Chassis with rail (mm) B max B min (with Cat. No. 0362 42)

■ Adjustment of equipment (kit required)

155 155 205 205 255 255 255

55 55 55 55 55 55 55

B Weight A Width Plinth Cat. Nos. (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) A

0362 91 0362 92

590 790

480 680

344 544

4·8 5·4

Roof Width D Weight Cat. Nos. (mm) (mm) (kg) 0362 93 0362 94 0362 95

510 612 812

310 360 360

1 1·3 1·7

■ Coupling kit for wall mounting enclosures Cat. No. 0362 44 (Brackets Cat. No. 0364 09 not included)

Usable space 80 x 287·5

249

Marina free standing enclosures polyester IP 66 - IK 10

polyester - IP 66 - IK 10

■ Dimensions and weights, usable areas

35 RAL 70

Marina free standing enclosures

53 D

280

500

Fixing centres of mounting bosses 550 mm

th. 4

0362 85

0362 86 + plinth 0362 96 + roof 0362 97

Technical information and dimensions (opposite)

th. 4 50

IP 66 according to IEC EN 60529. IK 10 according to IEC EN 62262 (EN 50102) UL/CSA approval applied for. Class II(1) Glass fibre reinforced polyester (GRP) enclosures Self extinguishing at 960 °C according to IEC EN 60695-2-11 Designed for corrosive environments. Stainless steel hinges and hinge pins Reversible door equipped with equipment mounting bosses. Supplied with two part gland plate and fixing kit for plain plate or sectioned uprights Three point locking handle with European lock and 2433 A key(2) Depth adjustment of equipment

° 180 D B

Dimensions H x W x D (mm)

Weight (kg)

1 460 x 800 x 463(1) 1 660 x 800 x 463(1) 1 860 x 800 x 463(1)

49 53 57

Cat. Nos. 0362 85 0362 86 0362 87

Usable area (mm) A B C D 1 230 530 1 300 700 1 430 530 1 500 700 1 630 530 1 700 700

(1) 487 with handle Pack

Cat. Nos.

Enclosures grey RAL 7035 External dimensions (mm) HxWxD

1 1 1

0362 85 0362 86 0362 87

Corresponding metal enclosure (mm) HxWxD

1 460 x 800 x 463 1 660 x 800 x 463 1 860 x 800 x 463

■ Equipment fixing

1 400 x 800 x 400 1 600 x 800 x 400 1 800 x 800 x 400

Cat. Nos.

C A

25 mm centres

Sectional(1) uprights

D 630 630 630

Total plate (mm) A max A min 379 109 Partial plate (mm)

Sectional uprights are required to fix partial plates in the 1 600 and 1 800 mm enclosures – order separately

Roof grey RAL 7035 1

Mounting plate

A B C 0362 85 1 225 675 1 250 0362 86 1 425 675 1 450 0362 87 1 625 675 1 650 (1) For mounting partial plates

Plinth grey RAL 7035 Height 170 mm. Front and rear access plates Stackable for extra height (2 max) 0362 96 For enclosures W x D 800 x 400 mm

■ Equipment adjustment

B D

0362 97 For enclosures W x D 800 x 400 mm

A max A min 357 88 Chassis rail (mm)

A max A min 351 82

Equipment

For enclosures H x W (mm)

1 1 1

0349 59 0349 50 0344 18

■ Mounting plates

Cat. No. 0362 97

Plain plate

Net weight (kg)

692 675

27 30·5 34

1 400 x 800 1 600 x 800 1 800 x 800

■ Roof 95.5

Plain plates Galvanised steel. Premarked at 100 mm intervals Permissible load : 200 kg/m2

521 60

Sectioned uprights

2 or 1 crosspieces B

Weight : 2·5 kg Width : 794 mm A

For mounting Lina 25 Zinc plated steel

For enclosures H (mm) W (mm)

0344 91

1 400

1 481

■ Plinth Cat. No. 0362 96

Accessories 170

790

B 1 225 1 425 1 625

Weight : 7 kg

(1) Permits the final assembly to have Class II insulation according to EN 60439-1 (2) Other key codes - please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

250

100

A 1 292 1 492 1 692

380

1 400 1 600 1 800

Ø14

250

680 544

Plain

0362 46 Lifting rings M14. Set of 4 for maximum load of 500kg/m2 Supplied with blanking piece 0362 48 Coupling kit to horizontally join enclosures

equipment for wall mounting enclosures 35 RAL 70

0360 55

0360 18

0360 22 with rail

35 RAL 70

0363 60 internal door with Atlantic steel enclosure 0355 03 + kit 0363 69

0361 03 mounted in enclosure 0354 94

Technical information and dimensions (p. 253) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Pack

Mounting plates Plain and Lina 12·5 perforated Pre-galvanised steel Plain : 2 mm thick up to 400 x 400 3 mm thick from 400 x 600 Lina 12·5 : 2 mm thick Ø 6·5 mm for rivets Cat. No. 0366 44 Ø 3·3 mm for equipment screws Cat. No. 0347 45 (see p. 252)

Plain

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Lina 12·5

0360 49(1) 0360 01(1) 0360 69 0360 02 0360 52(2) 0360 04(3) 0360 52(2) 0360 04(3) 0360 70 0360 05 0360 56(2) 0360 22(3) 0360 55 0360 09 0360 71 0360 14 0360 56(2) 0360 22(3) 0360 57 0360 24 0360 59(2) 0360 33(3) 0360 54(2) 0360 40 0360 58 0360 31 0360 59(2) 0360 33(3) 0360 60 0360 34 0360 61(2) 0360 42(3) 0360 54(2) 0360 40 0360 61(2) 0360 42(3) 0360 63 0360 43 0360 65(2) 0360 47(3) 0360 64 0360 65(2) 0360 47(3) 0360 66 0360 67(3) 0360 68

For enclosure dimensions Height x Width (mm)

Plain plate weight (kg)

Lina 12·5 weight (kg)

300 x 220 0·9 0·47 300 x 300 1 0·6 300 x 400 1·3 0·8 400 x 300 1·3 0·8 400 x 400 1·7 1·1 400 x 600 3·3 2·2 500 x 400 2·7 1·5 500 x 500 3·5 1·85 600 x 400 3·3 2·2 600 x 600 6·2 3·7 600 x 800 8·4 5·2 600 x 1 000 10·6 6·8 700 x 500 6 3·7 800 x 600 8·4 5·2 800 x 800 11·4 7 800 x 1 000 14·4 9·2 1 000 x 600 10·6 6·8 1 000 x 800 14·4 9·2 1 000 x 1 000 20·5 11·5 1 000 x 1 200 23 13·9 1 200 x 800 18·5 1 200 x 1 000 23 13·9 1 200 x 1 200 34·4 26·4 1 400 x 800 1 400 x 1 000 32·2 Fixing accessories are supplied in each enclosure Lina 25 perforated Zinc plated sheet metal 1·5 mm thick up to 600 x 400 2 mm thick from 600 x 600 Accepts clip nut fixings (see p. 252)

Lina 25

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0360 12 0360 15 0360 16 0360 17 0360 18 0360 19 0360 21

For enclosure dimensions Height x Width (mm)

400 x 500 x 600 x 600 x 700 x 800 x 1 000 x

300 400 400 600 500 600 800

Fixing accessories are supplied in each enclosure

Internal doors grey RAL 7035 - IP xxB Fit Marina and Atlantic stainless steel enclosures. Also suitable for Atlantic steel enclosures when used with mounting kit Cat. No. 0363 69 For mounting of control and signalling units Reversible, easy to fix, robust 4 mm thick GRP construction For enclosures (mm) HxW

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Dim. (mm) HxW

Usable area (mm) HxW

0363 59 400 x 300 341 x 236 305 x 185 0363 60 500 x 400 441 x 336 405 x 250 0363 61 600 x 400 541 x 336 505 x 250 0363 62 700 x 500 642 x 436 500 x 340 0363 63 800 x 600 742 x 536 600 x 440 0363 64 1 000 x 800 942 x 736 800 x 640 0363 65 1 200 x 800 942 x 736 800 x 640 0363 69 Mounting kit for Atlantic steel enclosures

Insulated modular chassis grey RAL 7035 Separate ABS front plate per row Supplied in kit form with metal uprights and crosspieces Grey RAL 7035 front plate Symmetrical rails 3 depth 15 mm Fixings supplied with enclosure For enclosure dimensions Height x Width x Depth (mm)

0361 01 400 x 300 x 200 30 modules (3 rows of 10) Supplied with 1 blanking plate

0361 02 500 x 400 x 200 48 modules (3 rows of 16) Supplied with 1 blanking plate

90 110 110 90 100 150 150 100 150

Weight (kg)

0·6 0·9 1·3 2·1 2 3·1 4·9

Cat. Nos.

0361 03 600 x 400 x 250 48 modules (3 rows of 16) Supplied with 1 blanking plate 0361 05 700 x 500 x 250 84 modules (4 rows of 21) Supplied with 1 blanking plate 0361 06 800 x 600 x 300 108 modules (4 rows of 27) Supplied with 2 blanking plates

150 150 150 125 150 150 150 125 230 170 150 150 100 245

0361 09 1 000 x 800 x 300 190 modules (5 rows of 38) Supplied with 2 blanking plates

180 150 150 150 125

Blanking plate for windows (1) Marina only (2) The same plate is used for both vertical and horizontal enclosures (3) For Atlantic steel and Atlantic stainless steel enclosures

0361 00 For enclosures up to 800 mm wide Blanking plate to suit up to 670 x 45 mm window To be cut to required length

251

equipment and accessories for wall mounting enclosures

0364 40

0365 81

Uprights + crosspieces (subject to size) Pocket Cat. No. 0365 80 Pack

Cat. Nos.

Lina 25 sectioned uprights For enclosures height (mm)

0361 51 0361 53 0361 54 0361 55 0361 56

Pack

Length of uprights (mm)

400 600 700 800 1 000

Thickness (mm)

337 537 637 737 937

Fixings

100 100

Clip nuts for perforated plates Supplied without screws 0364 40 For M4 screw 0364 42 For M6 screw

100

0364 78 For M4 mm screw

0044 16 Claw width 10 mm Threaded hole For M4 screw

0044 17 Claw width 17·5 mm Smooth hole Ø 3·8 mm Supplied with fixing screw Ø 3·5 mm Length 13 mm

0364 69 Fixomega for M4 screw

500

0366 44 Insulated plastic rivets Ø 6 mm for 6 mm holes

100

0347 45 Self piercing-tapping hex head screws 4·8 x 16 mm for Ø 3·3 mm holes

200

0347 50 Plastic insulating cap for above

Profile

2·5 2·5 2·5 2·5 2·5

Cat. Nos.

On to rails EN 60715

Crosspieces

0374 02

Crosspiece length (mm)

300 400 500 600

243 343 443 543

32 .5 16

0374 07

15 9

Rail 2 m length

0394 49 2 brackets with four 6 mm dia. bolts, nuts and washers

Self-adhesive document pockets RAL 7035 External dimensions (mm) Width x Height

20 20

252

0365 80 0365 81

340 x 235 260 x 165

Internal dimensions (mm) Width x Height x Depth

310 x 200 x 18 230 x 130 x 18

27 35

47 53·5

1, 2

For Lina 12·5 perforated plates

32·5

Mounting bracket for rail fixing at 45° 10

1.5

0367 80 0367 81 0367 82 0367 83

For enclosures width (mm)

1.5

10 10 10 10

On to rail EN 60715

Crosspieces ready to assemble (excluding fixings)

0347 50

0366 44

0367 80

Set of 2 sectioned uprights

5 5 5 5 5

0347 45

equipment for wall mounting enclosures

■ Mounting plates

■ Chassis assembled

■ Insulated modular chassis

Pre-galvanised plain and Lina 12·5 plates

Uprights and crosspieces

Fixes to corner fixings inside enclosure Chassis can fit steel or polyester enclosures

Lina 25 perforations 25.9

■ Sectioned uprights

3.9

8.5

4.1

12.3

10.9

0361 03 fitted into 0354 94

Ø 6.5

14. 5

Ø 8.5

Space between door and chassis front • Atlantic steel Depth 200 : 70 mm • Atlantic stainless steel Depth 250 : 80 mm • Marina Depth 300 : 90 mm

}

■ Clip nuts

The front sections can only be removed using a tool (flat blade screwdriver)

1.5

■ Crosspieces/rails

27 35

5 .5 16 32

15 9

Glow wire tested : 5s at 750 °C See p. 252 for clip nuts

See p. 252 for crosspieces/rails Enclosure dimensions Height x Width (mm)

Mounting plate dimensions A (mm)

B (mm)

200 220

256 275

156 192

300 x 300 300 x 400 400 x 300 400 x 400 400 x 600 500 x 400 500 x 500 600 x 400 600 x 600 600 x 800 600 x 1 000 700 x 500 800 x 600 800 x 800 800 x 1 000 1 000 x 600 1 000 x 800 1 000 x 1 000 1 000 x 1 200 1 200 x 800 1 200 x 1 000 1 200 x 1 200 1 400 x 800 1 400 x 1 000

256 256 356 356 356 456 456 556 556 556 556 656 756 756 756 956 956 956 956 1 156 1 156 1 156 1 356 1 356

256 356 256 356 556 356 456 356 556 756 956 456 556 756 956 556 756 956 1 156 756 956 1 156 756 956

300 x 300 x

Usable space for equipment (dm2)

Plate/Chassis fixing points

Height of Length of upright crosspiece

C (mm)

D (mm)

E (mm)

F (mm)

4·2 5·3

225 263

125 163

– –

6·2 8·2 8·2 11·7 18·7 15·2 19·2 18·7 29·7 40·7 51·7 28·7 40·7 55·7 71·7 51·7 70·7 89·7 108·7 85·7 108·7 131·7 100·7 127·7

225 225 325 325 325 425 425 525 525 525 525 625 725 725 725 925 925 925 925 1 125 1 125 1 125 1 325 1 325

225 325 225 325 525 325 425 325 525 725 925 425 525 725 925 525 725 925 1 125 725 925 1 125 725 925

237 237 337 337 337 437 437 537 537 – – 637 737 737 737 937 937 937 – 1 137 1 137 1 137 1 337 1 337

243 343 243 343 543 343 443 343 543 – – 443 543 743 943 543 743 943 – 743 943 1 143 743 943

253

universal locking system

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Lock housings and cams for rebate or cylinder locks Interchangeable for Atlantic and Marina enclosures

0368 04 Plastic housing (excludes barrel and cam)

0368 05 Handle With blank (excludes cam)

0368 06 Handle Fitted with locking barrel 2433 A (excludes cam)

10 10 10

Locking cams 0368 43 For Atlantic 1 door enclosures 0368 44 For Atlantic 2 door enclosures 0365 30 For Marina enclosures Note : Cam nuts are supplied with the handle or housing

0368 16 0368 17 0368 18 0368 19 0368 20

Metal lock barrels 8 mm male square 6·5 mm male triangle 8 mm male triangle 11 mm male triangle Double bar

10 10 10 10 10 10 10

0368 22 0368 23 0368 24 0368 25 0368 26 0368 27 0365 45

Key barrels Supplied with set of 2 keys For key No : 405 421 455 1242 E 2433 A 3113 A Set of two 2433 A keys

10 10 10

Keys for metal barrels 0365 39 For 6·5 mm male triangle lock 0365 40 For 8 mm male triangle lock 0365 41 For 11 mm male triangle lock

0365 42 Double bar

10 10 10 10 10

Accessory 1

Padlock adaptor 0365 11 Metal painted black-grey RAL 7021 Fits over door handles to provide security Accepts up to 3 padlocks

locking accessories universal locking system

■ Universal locking system(1) The locks can be assembled and fitted to all Atlantic and Marina enclosures Lock barrels

Detail of cut-out

8 mm square male Cat. No. 0368 16 23 mm

locking accessories

6·5 mm triangle male Cat. No. 0368 17

8 mm male triangle Cat. No. 0368 18

19.3 mm

11 mm male triangle Cat. No. 0368 19

Double bar Cat. No. 0368 20

Handle Key barrels

No. 405 Cat. No. 0368 22

Plastic housing

No. 421 Cat. No. 0368 23

No. 455 Cat. No. 0368 24

1242 E Cat. No. 0368 25

2433 A Cat. No. 0368 26

3113 A Cat. No. 0368 27

Dimensions of special triangle locks 8 mm male

11 mm male

11 mm

8 mm

6·5 mm

6·5 mm male CNOMO

(1) The metal locks (special barrels and key barrels) and lock barrels are all compatible with each other

254

ventilation and heating for enclosures

0348 17

0348 04

0348 52

0348 89

0348 05

0348 35

0365 79

0348 02

0348 47

Technical information and dimensions (p. 256-257) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Ventilation fan kit with metal grill

IP 32 - IK 10 230 V - 50/60 Hz 0348 17 30 m3/h with filter - 160 m3/h without filter installed (free flowing) Pack comprising a pair of metal RAL 7035 louvres and a pair of anti-insect grills, plus internal finger protection

Pack

2 2

1 1

Ventilation louvres - metal IP 32 - IK 10 RAL 7035 Pack comprising a pair of metal louvres and a pair of anti-insect grills 0348 04 138 x 138 mm 0348 05 248 x 248 mm

1 1 1

1 1

Ventilation louvres - plastic RAL 7035 Supplied with 10 mm thick filter EU 3, G3 0348 34 IP 44 - 150 x 150 mm Supplied with 20 mm thick filter EU 3, G3 0348 35 IP 54 - 250 x 250 mm 0348 36 IP 54 - 325 x 325 mm

Heating

±=

Resistance heaters 110 V / 240 V IP 20 Prevent condensation forming inside the enclosure " PTC " auto-regulated and surface temperature limited : t = 70 °C Heat dissipator in black aluminium oxide Fix on rail Power

Current rating

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0348 00(1) 0348 01(1) 0348 02(1) 0353 06(2) 0353 07(2) 0353 08(2) 0353 09(2)

Thermostat 12 to 250 V (requires neutral) Contact rating : 10 A max. (5 A closing) Fix on rail 0348 47 Adjustable from 5 to 60 °C with NO/NC contact

Spacers for vent kits IP 54 maintained RAL 7035 Used to reduce the internal projection and increase the internal usable volume 0348 88 150 x 150 mm 0348 89 250 x 250 mm

Natural ventilation

Ventilation glands IP 44 - IK 08 for outdoor use Grey polyamide 0365 78 Ø 15 mm aperture needed 0365 79 Ø 30·5 mm aperture needed

Ventilation fan kits with plastic grill IP 54 - IK 08 230 V - 50/60 Hz RAL 7035 plastic housing Supplied with finger protection guards External projection 7-10 mm Accepts mounting spacer Cat. No. 0348 88/89 Used to reduce internal projection and improve wiring space Fitted externally on to the enclosure with rapid fix Screws, 1 mm to 4 mm panel thickness An extra louvre can be fitted to improve air flow and extraction 40/160 m3/h 0348 50 40 m3 with filter 160 m3 with extra grill/filter Cat. No. 0348 34 160 m3 without filter installed (free flowing) Pack comprising a pair of RAL 7035 plastic grills 150 x 150 mm and washable electrostatic filter EU3, G3 120/160 m3/h 0348 51 120 m3 with filter 130 m3 with extra grill/filter Cat. No. 0348 35 160 m3 without filter installed (free flowing) Pack comprising a pair of RAL 7035 plastic grills 250 x 250 mm and washable filter EU3, G3 240/450 m3/h 0348 52 240 m3 with filter 260 m3 with extra grill/filter Cat. No. 0348 35 450 m3 without filter installed (free flowing) Pack comprising a pair of RAL 7035 plastic grills 250 x 250 mm and washable filter EU3, G3

Cat. Nos.

20 W 60 W 120 W 20 W 50 W 100 W 150 W

0·8 A 1·5 A 3·2 A 2·5 A 2·5 A 4·5 A 8·0 A

± 4

(1) Available until March 2010 (2) Available January 2010

255

ventilation and heating for enclosures

■ Operating principle

■ Natural ventilation Dimensions and cut-outs Cat. No. 0348 05

Cat. No. 0348 04 Cut-out dimension Ø 116.5

Cut-out dimension 200 x 200

215

Ø 4.5

138

130

248

105

138

105

215 130

248 Ø 4.5

Ventilators, louvres and spacers

Natural ventilation

Heating Cat. No. 0365 79

Cat. No. 0365 78 Ø 31

Dimensions and cut-outs

15 50

7. 9

4 holes Ø 4.5

■ Heating Dimensions

. 116 5

105 119

105

Cat. No. 0348 17

■ Ventilation fan kits, louvres and spacers

Ø 54

Cat. Nos. 0348 00/01/02

AIR

70 105

105 119

Cat. Nos. 0348 50/51/52/34/35/36

Rating

0348 00

20 W

H (mm) 80

0348 01

60 W

140

0348 02

120 W

220

With spacer

Cat. Nos.

Cut-out dimensions

A (mm)

B (mm)

C (mm)

D (mm)

E (mm)

F (mm)

G (mm)

H (mm)

0348 50

150

125

0348 51

250

105

223

0348 52

250

123

223

0348 34

150

125

0348 35

250

223

0348 36

325

291

Vertical installation at the bottom of the enclosure Air circulation : - ensure clearance >50 mm all round the device - do not cover Cat. No. 0348 47 50

C 10

3040

Cat. Nos.

Technical characteristics Cat. Nos. Voltage (V) /phase Frequency (Hz)

0365 71/0348 17

0348 50

0348 51

0348 52

220-240/1

230/1

220-240/1

50/60

No load flow ventilation only (m3/h)

160

240

On load flow - with an output louvre (supplied)

100

170

Static pressure (mm of water)

100

111

Power down (W)

0·14

0·125

0·426

32/10

54/08

0·72

0·8

1·4

1·7

Current drown (A) Operating temperature IP/IK Sound level (dB) Weight (kg)

256

–10 °C/+50 °C 54/08

■ Technical information Three factors should be considered : • The surface area of the enclosure : Sc (m2) • The maximum permissible temperature : ∆t (°C) • The power dissipation of the equipment : P(W) Operating procedure : 1. Determine the surface area (Sc) of the enclosure using the charts below. The values indicated take into account the shape of the enclosure Atlantic enclosures Dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth 300 300 300 400 400 500 600 400 500 500 600 600 700 800 800 800 1000 1000

x 200 x x 300 x x 400 x x 300 x x 400 x x 400 x x 400 x x 600 x x 400 x x 500 x x 400 x x 600 x x 500 x x 600 x x 800 x x 1 000 x x 600 x x 800 x

Sc (m2)

160 200 200 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

Dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth

0·15 0·28 0·28 0·25 0·32 0·35 0·36 0·46 0·41 0·47 0·46 0·61 0·56 0·71 0·87 0·97 0·77 0·96

Marina enclosures Dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth

Sc (m2)

300 x

220 x 160

0·14

405 x

305 x 200

0·31

505 x

405 x 200

0·36

605 x

405 x 250

0·41

728 x

518 x 250

0·52

828 x

618 x 300

0·72

1028 x

818 x 300

0·96

1508 x

908 x 400

1·50

1800 x

800 x 400

1·10

600 700 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1200 1200 1200 1400 600 800 1000 1200 1200 1400

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

600 500 600 800 1 000 600 800 1000 800 1000 1200 1000 600 600 800 800 1200 800

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Sc (m2)

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 400 400 400 400 400 400

0·76 0·79 0·78 0·95 1·08 0·86 1·05 1·16 1·15 1·36 1·55 1·41 0·79 1·07 1·55 1·33 1·75 1·72

2. Calculation : Once you know the Sc of your enclosure and the admissible temperature ∆t (°C), determine the maximum power dissipation of the unequipped enclosure. If the result is less than the heat dissipation required then a cooling system must be installed

Note : Heat exchangers and air conditioners are available to special order, details are available on request

3. Consult the relevant curve to check that heat dissipation is at least equal to the heat dissipation value corresponding to maximum permissible heat-up

■ Ventilation

■ Heating

The curves below enable the user to determine whether the enclosure must have a ventilation system, based on 3 parameters : - ∆t °C between t° ambient and t° maximum to be obtained at the hottest point - power dissipated in watts [P(W)] - effective surface area of enclosure Sc Natural dissipation for an unequipped enclosure

Determine the overall power absorbed by heating elements to be installed according to the effective surface area - Sc - of the enclosure and the desired increase ∆t

Sc up to 3 m2

400

Sc above 3 m2 t max

P (W)

Sc above 1 m2 t max

P(W)

25 °C 20 °C

300

t max

P (W)

Sc up to 1 m2

15 °C

20 °C

200

400

500

25 °C

20 °C

t max

15 °C

700 600 500 400

10 °C

300 200

5 °C

100 0

200

5 °C

15 °C

300 15 °C

10 °C

100

20 °C

P(W) 800

0.5

Sc (m2)

1.5

2.5

3 Sc (m2)

10 °C

10 °C 5 °C 5 °C

100

Sc (m2)

9 Sc (m2)

257

pour exemple XXXXXXxxxxxx industrial boxes xxxxxxxx

DIMENSIONS

INDUSTRIAL BOXES Cable entry type

With IP 55 plain clip-on covers

Internal dimensions (mm) Height x Width x Depth

With IP 55 covers

Opaque

Transparent

ACCESSORIES With IP 55 plain hinged covers 2 x 1/4 turn fixings

With IP 66 plain covers

Mounting plates

Hinge kit accessories

Ø 60 x 40

membrane

0921 00

–

Ø 70 x 45

membrane

0921 01

–

65 x 65 x 40

membrane

0921 04

–

80 x 80 x 45

none

0921 28

–

80 x 80 x 45

membrane

0921 26

–

80 x 80 x 45

knockout

0921 27

–

105 x 105 x 55

membrane

–

0921 36

–

105 x 105 x 55

none

–

0921 38

–

105 x 105 x 55

knockout

–

0921 37

–

130 x 75 x 74

none

–

0359 00

0359 01

–

0350 07

–

130 x 130 x 74

membrane

–

0920 32

–

0358 10

–

130 x 130 x 74

none

–

0359 30

0359 31

–

0350 13

0358 10

0358 00

155 x 110 x 74

membrane

–

0920 42

–

0358 11

–

155 x 110 x 74

none

–

0359 40

0359 41

–

0350 17

0358 11

0358 00

180 x 140 x 86

none

–

0359 50

0359 51

–

0350 22

0358 12

0358 00

220 x 170 x 86

none

–

0359 60

0359 61

–

0350 28

0358 13

0358 00

220 x 170 x140

none

–

0921 22

–

0350 90

–

265 x 174 x154

none

–

0350 43

–

0350 92

–

270 x 170 x 86

none

–

0359 70

0359 71

–

0350 33

0358 14

0358 00

310 x 240 x124

none

–

0359 80

0359 81

–

0350 44

0358 15

0358 01

310 x 240 x160

none

–

0922 84

–

0350 93

–

359 x 265 x154

none

–

0350 58

–

0350 94

–

360 x 270 x124

none

–

0359 90

0359 91

–

0350 47

0358 16

0358 01

258

pour exemple XXXXXXxxxxxx industrial boxes xxxxxxxx PS range

industrial boxes PS range

■ Dimensions (mm) Cat. Nos. 0921 00 and 0921 01 C

0921 01

0921 26

Ø (mm)

A (mm)

B (mm)

C (mm)

D (mm)

E (mm)

0921 00

44·5

0921 01

49·5

Cat. Nos.

Cat. No. 0921 04 0921 36

5.7

16 78

IP 55 - IK 07 Grey RAL 7035 Conform to EN 60695-2-1 Material : polystyrene box and polypropylene cover - halogen free Temperature rating : –25 °C to +40 °C Self-extinguishing 650 °C Membrane glands Opaque cover

R23 11 46

78 Pack

Cat. Nos.

Weatherproof round boxes With fixing slots for easy alignment Use 5 mm Ø screws Clip-on cover

Cat. No. 0921 26 50

Nominal internal dimensions : Ø x Depth

Ø 70 mm x 45 mm 0921 01 4 glands

5/100

20 5.7

Ø 60 mm x 40 mm 0921 00 4 glands 94 34

5/100

R23

Weatherproof square boxes

Cat. No. 0921 36

5/50

80 x 80 x 45 mm 0921 27 With pre-cut knockouts

Weatherproof square box class II

* Fixings for accessories (screws Ø 4 mm)

116 132

80 x 80 x 45 mm 0921 26 7 glands

116

5/100

132

5/100

80 mm*

41.8

13.4

Nominal internal dimensions : Height x Width x Depth

65 x 65 x 40 mm 0921 04 7 glands

80 mm*

With fixing slots for easy alignment Use 5 mm Ø screws Clip-on cover

Mounting by : • either internal fixing points - use 5 mm Ø screws • or at three corners outside the wiring area Use 4 mm Ø screws Provision for anti-tamper seal Cover with 4 x 1/4 turn fixings, indicated I-O, can be retained open during installation Nominal internal dimensions : Height x Width x Depth

5/50

105 x 105 x 55 mm 0921 36 7 glands

5/50

105 x 105 x 55 mm 0921 37 With pre-cut knockouts

259

industrial boxes

PS and PP range

PC range

0921 28 0350 13 0350 28

0359 40 0359 61 with IP 2x terminals and 0358 02 wall brackets, horizontal or vertical mounting

picto loupe-65765j.eps

0359 41

Dimensions (p. 261)

Grey RAL 7035 Conform to EN 60695-2-1 Temperature rating : – 25 °C to + 40 °C Undrilled with smooth sides Pack

Cat. Nos.

0358 02

0358 00

picto loupe-65765j.eps

Grey TO 29 Temperature rating : – 25 °C to + 80 °C Undrilled with smooth sides

Weatherproof boxes IP 55 - IK 07 class II

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Conform to EN 60695-2-1 Material : polycarbonate - halogen free Self-extinguishing 750 °C Detachable clip-on cover retainer except for 310 x 240 and 360 x 270 mm boxes Side mounts for IP 2X terminals provided except for 130 x 75 x 74 mm boxes Sealable opaque cover with 1/4 turn fixings

Self-extinguishing 650 °C Material : polystyrene box and polypropylene cover - halogen free With fixing slots for easy alignment - use 5 mm Ø screws Clip-on opaque cover Nominal internal dimensions : Height x Width x Depth (mm)

5/50

0921 28

Nominal internal dimensions : Height x Width x Depth (mm)

80 x 80 x 45 As above but mounting by : • either internal fixing points - use 5 mm Ø screws • or at three corners outside the wiring area - use 4 mm Ø screws Provision for anti-tamper seal Cover with 4 x 1/4 turn fixings, indicated I-O, can be retained open during installation

Weatherproof boxes IP 66 - IK 08 class II 500 V

1/10 1/10 1/10 1/5 1/5 1/2 1/2 1

0350 07 0350 13(1) 0350 17(1) 0350 22(1) 0350 28(1) 0350 33(2) 0350 44(2) 0350 47(2)

130 x 75 x 74 130 x 130 x 74 155 x 110 x 74 180 x 140 x 86 220 x 170 x 86 270 x 170 x 86 310 x 240 x 124 360 x 270 x 124

Nominal internal dimensions : Height x Width x Depth (mm)

5/50

0921 38

Weatherproof boxes IP 55 - IK 07 class II 500 V Self-extinguishing 750 °C Material : polypropylene box and opaque or clear polycarbonate cover - halogen free Detachable clip-on cover retainer except 310 x 240 and 360 x 270 boxes Side mounts for IP 2x terminals provided except for 130 x 75 x 74 mm boxes Sealable cover with 1/4 turn fixings With fixing slots for easy alignment Opaque or transparent cover Nominal internal dimensions : Cover Opaque Transparent Height x Width x Depth (mm)

1/10 1/10 1/20 1/10 1/20 1/5 1/5 1/2 1/2 1

Accessories

105 x 105 x 55

0359 00 0359 01 130 x 75 x 74 0359 30(1) 0359 31(1) 130 x 130 x 74 0920 32 130 x 130 x 74 10 membrane gland fitted for 4-25 mm cable or conduit (1) (1) 0359 40 0359 41 155 x 110 x 74 0920 42 155 x 110 x 74 10 membrane gland fitted for 4-25 mm cable or conduit (1) (1) 0359 50 0359 51 180 x 140 x 86 (1) (1) 0359 60 0359 61 220 x 170 x 86 0359 70(2) 0359 71(2) 270 x 170 x 86 0359 80(2) 0359 81(2) 310 x 240 x 124 0359 90(2) 0359 91(2) 360 x 270 x 124

Metal mounting plates(1) Galvanised steel - 1·5 mm thick For box size : 130 x 130 mm 155 x 110 mm 180 x 140 mm 220 x 170 mm 270 x 170 mm 310 x 240 mm 360 x 270 mm

5 5 5 5 5 5 5

0358 10 0358 11 0358 12 0358 13 0358 14 0358 15 0358 16

1 1

Set of 2 hinges(1) UV protected polyamide in dark grey (RAL 7016) 0358 00 For box 130 x 130 mm to 270 x 170 mm 0358 01 For box 310 x 240 mm to 360 x 270 mm

0358 02 Set of 4 wall lugs(1)

For Nylbloc terminal strips and IP 2x terminals see p. 263 and 294

(1) Accepts Cat. No. 0358 00 hinges (2) Accepts Cat. No. 0358 01 hinges

260

(1) Not suitable for PVC range

industrial boxes PS, PP and PC range

■ Dimensions (mm)

■ Mounting plates for PS, PP and PC boxes 45

Cat. No. 0921 28 Ø5

R30

Cat. Nos.

A (mm)

B (mm)

C (mm)

D (mm)

0358 10

114

106

0358 11

139

131

0358 12

124

164

116

156

0358 13

154

204

146

196

0358 14

154

254

146

246

0358 15

211

271

200

260

0358 16

241

321

230

310

A C

Ø 20

12 50

Cat. No. 0921 38

■ IP 2x terminal acceptance(2) chart (see p. 294)

* Fixings for accessories (screws Ø 4 mm)

80 mm*

Not suitable for direct mounting on to PVC range nor 130 x 75 x 74 mm boxes

41.8

13.4

116

80 mm*

Boxes

116

13 way

17 way

22 way

28 way

–

155 x 110 x 74

–

180 x 140 x 86

–

220 x 170 x 86

–

310 x 240 x124

360 x 270 x 124

(2) Also accepts partly shrouded terminals M

Boxes IP 55 – IK 07 and IP 66 – IK 08 C D

8 way

B O

4 way

130 x 130 x 74

Fixings for accessories (screw Ø 4 mm) Dimensions (mm)

Boxes

Fixing accessories (screw Ø 4 mm)

Fixing points (mm)

Cat. Nos.

0359 00/01 0350 07(1)

140

65 120

0359 30/31 0350 13

150 150

70 120 103 106 106

0359 40/41 0350 17

175 130

50 100 128

86 131

0359 50/51 0350 22

200 160

80 104

50 130 153 116 156

0359 60/61 0350 28

240 190

80 144

80 160 193 146 196 124

0359 70/71 0350 33

290 190

80 194

80 160 243 146 246 122

0359 80/81 0350 44

332 262 132

116 220 160 222 276 200 260 150

0359 90/91 0350 47

382 292 132

116 270 190 252 326 230 310 150

51 106

Q –

Example of box fitted with 4 x IP 2x terminals

(1) Not suitable for direct mounting of IP 2x terminals, use with DIN rail or 12 x 2 mm metal rail (Cat. No. 0048 19 p. 294)

Cat. Nos. 0920 32 and 0920 42 G

M L

C D

B O Q

Fixing points (mm)

Dimensions (mm)

Boxes A

Fixing accessories (screw Ø 4 mm) O

0920 32

150 150

149

120

103

106

0920 42

175 130

173

128

100

128

131

Cat. Nos.

Fixings for accessories (screw Ø 4 mm)

261

industrial boxes

PVC range

■ Dimensions (mm) Cat. No. 0921 22

0921 22

Mounting plate

200

233

140

0350 43 132.6

183

Dimensions (opposite)

60.7 146

Grey RAL 7035 Temperature rating : – 25 °C to + 40 °C Material : PVC Self-extinguishing 960 °C Undrilled with smooth sides

Weatherproof boxes IP 55 Nominal internal dimensions : Height x Width x Depth (mm)

Depth 140 mm IK 07 0921 22 220 x 170 x 140 - 4 x 1/4 turn cover fixings

Depth 154 mm IK 08 0350 43 265 x 174 x 154 - 2 x 1/4 turn cover fixings + hinges 0350 58 359 x 265 x 154 - 2 x 1/4 turn cover fixings + hinges

Depth 160 mm IK 08 0922 84 310 x 240 x 160 - 4 x 1/4 turn cover fixings

212

Cat. Nos.

144

Pack

79.6

162

Cat. No. 0922 84

0350 90 0350 92 0350 93 0350 94

Set of 4 wall lugs 0364 08 For PVC box size 310 x 240 mm only

5 5 5

9.2

220 x 170 mm 265 x 174 mm 310 x 240 mm 359 x 265 mm

146 12.3 78 82

251

190

271

262

342

4·5

282

PVC boxes are not provided with side mounts for IP 2x terminals

211

282

Metal mounting plates Galvanised steel - 1·5 mm thick For PVC box size :

321

Accessories

industrial boxes

terminal strips

PVC range (continued)

Nylbloc

■ Dimensions (mm) Cat. Nos. 0350 43/58

0342 13

0342 25

148.5 3.8 62 92

Pack

Cat. Nos.

165

Nylbloc 12 way strips with captive screws Conform to BS EN 60998 Supplied with screws open Polypropylene –25 °C to +100 °C (temperature) Ambient temperature –25 °C to +55 °C

Black

10 10 10 10 10

0342 0342 0342 0342 0342

10 10 10 10

0342 0342 0342 0342

11 13 15 17 19

Capacity Nom. rating Diameter Current (mm2) (A) Ø max. (A)

Dimensions (mm)

4 6 10 16 25

2·5 6 10 16 25

2·5 3·5 4·5 5·5 7

24 41 57 76 101

15·6 x 94 18 x 107 20·8 x 135·1 24·2 x 156·8 33 x 214

x x x x x

12·3 14·4 17·4 22·5 27·5

4 6 10 16

2·5 6 10 16

2·5 3·5 4·5 5·5

24 41 57 76

15·6 x 94 18 x 107 20·8 x 135 24·2 x 156·8

x x x x

12·3 14·4 17·4 22·5

White

4·5

Dimensions

Fixing points C D (mm) (mm)

Weight (kg)

Cat. Nos.

A (mm)

0350 43

273

182

246

155

1·08

0350 58

367

273

340

246

1·80

B (mm)

21 23 25 27

■ Mounting plates for PVC boxes 0

326

185

280

0350 94

202

250

0350 93

234

212

0350 92

200

0350 90

154 142 202 214

242 258

For industrial boxes

see p. 258 263

P. 266 Filtered and non-filtered power supplies

Power supplies and transformers

P. 276 NEW Terminal blocks selection charts

Viking 3 68527a.eps

P. 294 Distribution terminal blocks

Distribution blocks

Cable ducting, ferrules and cable marking

Power control, connection and cabling accessories

Cable ties

P. 292 Heavy duty terminal blocks

as032043a

P. 298 Transcab cable ducting

P. 306 Colring cable ties

NEW IN 2010 Viking 3

terminal blocks with screw and spring connection (p. 282)

264

Starfix ferrules and crimping tools (p. 301)

P. 269 Control transformers

P. 271 Compact transformers

P. 282 NEW Terminal blocks with screw connection

P. 284 NEW Terminal blocks with spring connection

P. 273 Electrical characteristics

68528a.eps

P. 286 Accessories for terminal blocks

P. 293 Dimensions

68527a.eps

P. 295 Modular distribution blocks 40 to 160 A

031916-20878m.eps P. 299

Lina 25 cable ducting

P. 274 How to calculate rated power and transformer protection 68527a.eps

P. 288 Dimensions

68527a.eps

P. 296 Four pole distribution blocks 125 to 400 A

P. 297 Busbars and supports

P. 301 Starfix ferrules

P. 303 Marker sheets

NEW

P. 303 CAB 3 marking system

P. 306 Colson cable ties

265

filtered and non-filtered power supplies open type single phase

■ Dimensions

0470 53

0470 24

Cat. Nos.

A (mm) Width

0470 01

0470 02

121

105

0470 03

105

135

115

0470 04

126

186

175

0470 20

0470 21

0470 22

121

105

0470 23

105

135

115

0470 24

126

186

175

0470 25

126

206

0470 52

0470 53 0470 54

0047 98

Dimensions (opposite) Technical information (p. 267-268) Filtered power supplies for PLCs and other equipment requiring a voltage of 12 V DC or 24 V DC Non-filtered power supplies for installations requiring a 24 V DC voltage Include : • twin output terminals for ease of connection • safety transformer with interference filtration • fuse protection on output (except modular) • green LED output voltage indicator (except modular) • capacitor in filtered range • PTC thermal protection on input (modular only) • class II when installed with approved protection (modular only) Supplied with a connection link for quick connection between - and up to 15 A (except modular)

Cat. Nos.

C (mm) Height

Ø (mm)

4 4 DIN 4

Weight (Kg)

DIN

–

1·00

DIN

4·6

2·45

4·6

3·60

75 x 150

5·5

6·35

–

1·00

4 DIN 4 DIN 4 DIN 4 DIN

–

1·00

4·6

2·45

4·6

3·60

75 x 150

5·5

6·40

175

75 x 150

5·5

7·60

106

105

DIN

4·6

1·70

105

135

115

4·6

3·40

126

186

175

75 x 150

5·5

6·10

0470 55

126

206

175

75 x 150

5·5

7·30

0047 95

–

1·00

0047 97

–

1·00

0047 98

–

1·00

4 DIN 4

4 DIN 4 DIN 4 DIN

Single phase filtered A

Single phase filtered

F x G (mm) Fixing ctrs

B B

Pack

B (mm) Depth

12 V output 230-400 V ± 15 V

± (input) / 12 V= (output)

1 1 1 1

0470 01 0470 02 0470 03 0470 04

Terminal capacity (mm2) Flexible cable Input Output

Current rating (A)

12 30 60 120

1 2·5 5 10

6 6 6 6

Cat. Nos. 0470 01/02/03 and 0470 20/21/22/23

12 24 60 120 240 360

0·5 1 2·5 5 10 15

6 6 6 6 6 6

Single phase non-filtered

= = ±

0470 52 0470 53 0470 54 0470 55

60 120 240 360

2·5 5 10 15

Cat. Nos. 0470 54/55

60 44

6 6 6 6

1 1 1 1

Single phase filtered modular Terminal capacity (mm2) Flexible cable Output Input

Current rating (A)

Cat. Nos. 0470 52/53

24 V output 230-400 V ± 15 V (input) 24 V (output) Power (W)

Cat. Nos. 0470 04/24/25

Terminal capacity (mm2) Flexible cable Input Output

6 6 6 6 6 6

0470 20 0470 21 0470 22 0470 23 0470 24 0470 25

1 1 1 1 1 1

± (input) / 24 V= (output)

Current rating (A)

Single phase non-filtered

24 V output 230-400 V ± 15 V Power (W)

G C

Power (W)

Single phase filtered modular

12 V output 230 ± 15 V (input) / 12 V Power (W)

0047 95

0047 97 0047 98

12 21·5

Terminal capacity (mm ) Flexible cable Output Input

Current rating (A)

1·3 15 24 V output 230 ± 15 V (input) / 24 V Power (W)

1 1

= (output)

Current rating (A)

0·5 0·9

Terminal capacity (mm2) Flexible cable Input Output

6 6

Cat. Nos. 0047 95/97/98

= (output)

Stabilised power supplies available to special order

6 6

266

filtered power supplies open type single phase

■ Technical information

■ Circuit protection (double pole MCB)

Cat. Nos. 0470 01/02/03/04/20/21/22/23/24 and 25

Single phase

Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-6, UL 60950 CAN/CSA C22.2 N° 60 950.00 Products are compatible with EN 61131-2, EN 60204 and EN 60439-1 apparatus Input voltage : 230/400 V ±15 V single phase 50/60 Hz - Class I Output voltage : 12 V or 24 V Insulation voltage : Input/Output 4 510 V Input/Earth 2 260 V Output/Earth 500 V Max. ambient temperature without derating : 60 °C Ripple factor : <3 % Cooling by natural convection Integral fuse protection on output Can be fixed to symmetrical rail 7·5 mm or 15 mm depth EN 60715 Screw fix only Cat. Nos. 0470 04/24 and 25 Screw fix or clip on to DIN rail Cat. Nos. 0470 02/03/22 and 23 Supplied with a connection link for quick connection between terminals and earth Note : To conform to UL, product must be mounted in the vertical position (mounting against support) for Class A ambient temperature rating 25 °C

= ± =

Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-6, UL 60950, CAN/CSA C22.2 N° 60 950.00 Products are compatible with EN 61131-2, EN 60204 and EN 60439-1 apparatus Input voltage : 230 V ±15 V single phase 50/60 Hz Output voltage : 12 V or 24 V Insulation voltage : Input/Output 3 550 V Max. ambient temperature without derating : 60 °C Ripple factor : <3 % PTC thermal protection on input 046901-6825s.eps Insulation : Class II after enclosing behind insulated modular protection Fix to symmetrical rail 7·5 mm or 15 mm depth EN 60715 (5 x 17·5 mm modules)

±=

-15 V 0 +15 V

+ +

Filtered Voltage (V)

Current rating (A)

Weight (Kg)

Input under load 230 V (A)

Input under load 400 V (A)

External

Internal

Power supply 0·5 A

T 0·5 A L(1)

PTC

0069 12 (1 A) 0047 98(2)

Power supply MCB/Fuse

PTC

Power supply 1A

MCB/Fuse

T 1 A L(1)

MCB/Fuse

T 1 A L(1)

T 2·5 A L(1)

0470 22

0069 14 (3 A)

T 2·5 A L(1)

0470 03 T 5 A L(1)

0069 16 (6 A)

T 5 A L(1)

0470 04 T 10 A L(1)

0069 14 (3 A)

0470 23 0069 16 (16 A) 0470 24

0069 18 (10 A)

T 10 A L(1)

Power supply 15 A

0069 12 (1 A)

0069 13 (2 A) 0470 02

Power supply MCB/Fuse

0069 12 (1 A)

PTC

Power supply 5A

0470 21

0047 95(2)

Power supply 2·5 A

0069 12 (1 A)

0470 01

Power supply 1·3 A

0069 12 (1 A)

0047 97(2)

Power supply MCB/Fuse

0·9 A

External 0470 20

MCB/Fuse

0069 18 (10 A)

0470 25 0133 16(3)

MCB/Fuse

0069 20 (16 A)

(1) T type fuse is a time delay fuse (5 x 20 mm) (2) Filtered modular power supply (3) Type gG fuse 10 x 38 mm

■ Primary fuse protection required for UL conformity Supply 230 V : Use 250 V time delay HRC fuse UL Category Code JDYX2 Supply 400 V : Use 500 V time delay HRC fuse UL Category Code JDYX Secondary voltage 230 V

12 V

0470 01 0·315 A 0470 02 0·8 A 0470 03 1·6 A 0470 04 3·15 A

Fuse rating Power supply Fuse rating

■ Electrical characteristics

Cat. Nos.

Internal

Power supply Fuse rating Power supply Fuse rating Power supply Fuse rating Power supply Fuse rating Power supply

230 V

24 V

Protection

Primary voltage

400 V

Operating current up to 15 A

Input 230/400 V ±15 V 12 V

10 A

Cat. Nos. 0047 95/97 and 98

■ Operating diagram

400 V

230 V

Underload

(V)

24 V

0470 20 0·315 A T 0470 21 0·4 A 0470 22 1A 0470 23 2A 0470 24 4A

2/10 A 4/10 A 8/10 A 11/2 A

400 V

2/10 A 2/10 A 6/10 A 1A 21/4 A

0470 25 6·3 A

Operating voltage No-load

(V)

With 100 mA load and input voltage +10%

With nominal load input voltage –15%

No-load loss (W)

Total loss at nominal load 100 % (W)

Voltage drop (%)

Output 12 V 0470 01

0·12

0·06

14·4

11·7

15·5

10·3

4·4

7·3

23·5

0470 02

2·5

2·45

0·33

0·19

13·9

11·6

15·2

10·2

8·3

11·9

19·4

0470 03

3·6

0·60

0·34

14·1

12·1

15·5

10·5

11·4

17·1

17·2

0470 04

6·35

1·24

0·72

14·7

11·8

16·1

10·4

20·2

33·7

24·7

Output 24 V 0470 20

0·5

0·12

0·06

27·6

22·9

29·4

20·1

4·4

7·3

20·66

0470 21

0·18

0·10

29·0

22·8

31·2

20·2

4·4

10·3

27·03

0470 22

2·5

2·45

0·47

0·27

27·8

23·3

30·4

20·4

8·3

16·3

19·46

0470 23

3·6

0·88

0·51

27·5

23·2

30·2

20·3

11·4

25·4

18·68

0470 24

6·35

1·88

1·09

27·7

23·5

30·5

20·5

45·3

18·20

0470 25

7·6

2·53

1·46

27·5

23·2

30·2

20·2

54·7

18·70

No-load

Underload

Filtered modular Operating voltage With nominal load input voltage –15%

No-load loss (W)

Total loss at nominal load 100 % (W)

Voltage drop (%)

(V)

Current rating (A)

(Kg)

Input under load 230 V (A)

(V)

With 100 mA load load input voltage +10%

0047 95

1·3

0·15

15·1

11·8

16·3

10·4

3·4

8·7

28·5

0047 97

0·5

0·13

28·9

23·6

30·6

20·7

3·4

7·1

22·3

0047 98

0·9

0·17

29·9

22·8

32·0

20·3

3·4

10·4

31·0

Cat. Nos.

Voltage

Weight

267

non-filtered power supplies open type single phase

■ Technical information

■ Circuit protection (double pole MCB)

Cat. Nos. 0470 52/53/54 and 55

Single phase

Input 230/400 V ±15 V

Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-6, UL 60950, CAN/CSA C22.2 N° 60 950.00

= ±

24 V

Input voltage : 230/400 V ±15 V single phase 50/60 Hz - Class I Output voltage : 24 V Insulation voltage : Input/Output 4 510 V Input/Earth 2 260 V Output/Earth 500 V Max. ambient temperature without derating : 60 °C Ripple factor : 48 % Cooling by natural convection Integral fuse protection on output All except Cat. Nos. 0470 54 and 55 can be fixed to symmetrical rail 7·5 mm or 15 mm depth EN 60715 Screw fix or clip on to DIN rail Cat. Nos. 0470 52 and 53 Screw fix only Cat. Nos. 0470 54 and 55 Supplied with a connection link for quick connection between terminals and earth up to 15 A

Protection I

Internal

External

Power supply 2·5 A

0470 52 T 2·5 A L(1)

Fuse/MCB Power supply

T 5 A L(1)

Fuse/MCB Power supply

10 A

0069 16 (6 A) 0470 54

T 10 A L(1)

Fuse/MCB Power supply

15 A

0069 14 (3 A) 0470 53

0069 18 (10 A) 0470 55

0133 16(2)

Fuse/MCB

0069 20 (16 A)

(1) T type fuse is a time delay fuse (5 x 20 mm) (2) Type gG fuse 10 x 38 mm

■ Operating diagram Operating current up to 15 A 400 V 230 V -15 V 0 +15 V

+ +

■ Electrical characteristics Input under load Cat. Nos.

Voltage (V)

268

Current rating (A)

Operating voltage

Weight (Kg)

230 V (A)

400 V (A)

No-load (V)

Underload (V)

No-load loss (W)

Total loss at nominal load 100 % (W)

Voltage drop (%) 17·5

0470 52

2·5

1·7

0·39

0·23

27·5

23·4

6·2

17·8

0470 53

3·4

0·77

0·44

27·0

24·0

11·4

26·9

12·7

0470 54

6·1

1·49

0·86

26·3

23·8

10·7

0470 55

7·3

2·13

1·22

25·5

23·5

47·6

8·6

control transformers open type single phase

0442 35

0442 68

0442 71

Dimensions and technical information (p. 270) IP 2x or xxB up to 400 VA IP xxA above 400 VA - IK 04 Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-2 and 2-4 or 2-6 UL506 and CSA C22-2-N°66 Products suitable for building into equipment conforming to EN 61131-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 60439-1 standards Insulated covers up to 1 000 VA provided Interference/disturbance filter included Screw fix to mounting plate or clip on to DIN rail up to 250 VA Supplied with 0V/Earth connection link up to 1 000 VA Pack

Cat. Nos.

Single phase

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Primary : 230-400 V ± 15 V Secondary : 24-48 V Supplied with 2 links Power in VA according to according IEC and CSA to UL

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0442 31 0442 32 0442 33 0442 34 0442 35 0442 36 0442 37 0442 38 0442 39 0442 40

40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1 000 1 600 2 500

40 63 100 140 210 300 500 700 700 1 400

Safety isolating transformers Primary : 230-400 V ± 15 V Secondary : 115-230 V Supplied with 2 links

Admissible instantaneous power at cos ϕ = 0·5

52 87 150 250 420 900 1 700 2 000 8 500 3 300

Single phase (continued)

Power in VA according to according IEC and CSA to UL

24 V

48 V

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0442 61 0442 62 0442 63 0442 64 0442 65 0442 66 0442 67 0442 68 0442 69 0442 70 0442 71

40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1 000 1 600 2 500 4 000

40 63 100 140 210 300 500 700 700 1 300 2 400

Admissible instananeous power at cos ϕ = 0·5

50 86 150 250 430 1 200 1 600 2 000 6 100 7 100 11 400

For modular transformers see p. 225 269

control transformers open type single phase

■ Dimensions Fig. 2 : 630 to 1 000 VA

Fig. 1 : 40 to 400 VA

F Ø

6 C G

C G

Oblong fixings : Attachment at 3 points possible

Fig. 3 : 1 600 to 2 500 VA

Fig. 4 : 4 000 to 8 000 VA Cat. Nos.

0442 31/61 0442 32/62 0442 33/63 0442 34/64 0442 35/65 0442 36/66 0442 37/67 0442 38/68 0442 39/69 0442 40/70 0442 71

Ø Ø

Fig.

40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1 000 1 600 2 500 4 000

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4

Dimensions (mm) A B C 94 94 94 94 106 120 150 150 220 300 230

78 85 94 112 123 140 158 199 245 292 340

113 113 113 113 115 140 206 206 191 171 205

Fixing(1) (mm) G

50 50 50 50 50 62·5 100 100 150 200 180

100 100 100 100 100 125 175 175 153 114 130

5·2 5·2 5·2 5·2 5·2 5·2 7 7 9 9 11

Weight (Kg) 1·23 1·56 1·95 2·6 3·82 5·62 9·9 14·9 25·6 33·1 31

G F

Power (VA)

Note : 40-250 VA transformers have juxtaposed windings with an insulated barrier to provide insulation and interference filtering. Higher ratings have an electrostatic screen between windings. (1) Up to 250 VA may be fixed to symmetrical

4 DIN rail

■ Characteristics Single phase 50-60 Hz - Class 1 Insulation voltage between windings : 4 510 V Maximum ambient operating temperatures : 50 °C without derating Voltage adjustment O

+ 15 V

– 15 V

230 V

400 V

+ 15 V

– 15 V

230 V

400 V

+ 15 V

– 15 V

230 V

400 V

U supply (U1)

1) if U1 > 230 or 400 V 2) if I2 < I2n (if the load is less than the nominal load reduce the secondary voltage)

Cat. Nos. Power (VA)

(2) Total losses at nominal load

270

if U1 = 230 or 400 V with load I2 = I2n

Admissible instantaneous power (VA) at cos ϕ of :

0·2 0·3 0·4 0·5 0·6 Primary 230-400 V ± 15 V - Secondary 24-48 V 0442 31 40 63 58 55 52 50 0442 32 63 110 102 94 87 83 0442 33 100 200 180 160 150 140 0442 34 160 340 300 270 250 230 450 420 400 490 550 0442 35 250 0442 36 400 1 800 1 300 1 100 900 800 0442 37 630 2 700 2 200 1 900 1 700 1 500 0442 38 1 000 3 400 2 800 2 300 2 000 1 800 0442 39 1 600 12 800 10 900 9 500 8 500 7 700 0442 40 2 500 4 300 3 900 3 600 3 300 3 100 Primary 230-400 V ± 15 V - Secondary 115-230 V 0442 61 40 62 57 53 50 48 0442 62 63 110 100 93 86 82 180 160 150 140 200 0442 63 100 0442 64 160 330 300 270 250 240 0442 65 250 560 510 460 430 410 0442 66 400 2 200 1 700 1 400 1 200 1 000 0442 67 630 2 700 2 200 1 800 1 600 1 400 0442 68 1 000 3 400 2 800 2 300 2 000 1 800 0442 69 1 600 8 700 7 500 6 600 6 100 5 400 0442 70 2 500 9 200 8 300 7 600 7 100 6 700 0442 71 4 000 16 500 14 300 12 700 11 400 10 500

U supply (U1)

0·7

Noload loss (W)

Onload loss(2) (W)

0·8

0·9

48 79 130 220 380 700 1 300 1 600 7 100 3 000

48 77 130 210 370 600 1 200 1 500 6 700 2 900

49 78 130 210 370 600 1 200 1 400 6 400 2 900

60 91 150 230 430 500 1 200 1 300 6 600 3 400

3·9 6·0 8·2 11·2 14·9 18·3 24·1 44·2 65·5 86·5

47 78 140 230 390 910 1 200 1 600 5 000 6 300 9 800

46 76 130 220 380 830 1 100 1 500 4 700 6 200 9 200

47 76 130 220 370 760 1 000 1 400 4 500 6 100 8 900

57 90 150 250 430 730 1 000 1 300 4 700 7 100 9 500

3·9 6·0 8·2 11·2 14·9 18·3 24·1 44·2 65·5 86·5 87·4

if U1 < 230 or 400 V with load I2 = I2n

Voltage drop as (%) with cos ϕ :

Efficiency (%) with cos ϕ :

Ucc (%)

Connection capacity Primary Secondary cable (mm2) cable (mm2) flexible rigid flexible rigid

0·3

0·6

0·3

0·6

7·3 14·2 15·1 24·6 31·4 46·3 49·4 74·4 94·7 143·4

8·7 7·5 7·3 5·8 5·2 2·1 2·0 1·3 1·1 1·8

10·5 9·4 9·3 7·6 6·6 3·7 3·0 1·9 1·6 2·2

8·5 8·5 8·9 7·7 6·2 5·6 3·9 2·9 1·9 2·0

62 57 66 66 70 72 79 80 84 84

77 73 80 80 83 84 88 89 91 91

84 82 87 87 89 90 93 93 94 95

10·0 1 to 4 9·0 1 to 4 8·9 1 to 4 7·2 1 to 4 6·1 1 to 4 4·2 1 to 4 3·3 1 to 16 2·4 1 to 16 1·7 2·5 to 10 1·9 4 to 16

7·4 11·8 17·3 23·4 31·7 43·9 53·2 73·6 95·3 150·1 234·8

8·7 7·6 7·2 5·8 5·2 2·1 2·1 1·3 1·1 1·8 2·1

10·5 9·6 9·2 7·4 6·6 3·6 3·3 2·0 1·5 2·3 2·9

8·8 8·9 8·6 7·1 6·2 5·2 4·5 2·7 1·8 2·2 3·3

62 62 63 67 70 73 78 80 83 83 84

76 76 78 80 83 85 88 89 91 91 91

84 84 85 87 89 90 92 93 94 94 94

10·1 1 to 4 1 to 4 9·2 1 to 4 1 to 4 8·7 1 to 4 1 to 4 6·9 1 to 4 1 to 4 6·1 1 to 4 1 to 4 4·1 1 to 4 1 to 4 3·6 1 to 16 1 to 16 2·2 1 to 16 1 to 16 1·5 2·5 to 10 1·5 to 16 2·0 4 to 16 1·5 to 25 2·7 4 to 16 1·5 to 25

1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 16 1 to 16 1·5 to 16 1·5 to 25

1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 16 1 to 16 1 to 16 1 to 16 4 to 16 1·5 to 25 4 to 35 2·5 to 50 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 16 1 to 16 2·5 to 10 4 to 16 4 to 16

1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 16 1 to 16 1·5 to 16 1·5 to 25 1·5 to 25

compact transformers open type single phase

Connection strip supplied up to 450 VA

picto loupe-65765j.eps

0428 41 supplied with connection strip

0428 75

0427 89

0427 92

Technical information and dimensions (p. 272-273) Transformer protection (p. 275) Isolating and safety isolating <50 V transformers Designed to meet the needs of users with specific VA ratings such as original equipment manufacturers The ‘Compact’ range up to 220 VA and the new styles above 220 VA boast an elegant design that will enhance your panel The terminals are designed to provide easy and quick connections rail using accessory or directly fixed using screws through the easily accessible fixing points Transformers up to 160 VA can be clipped to Recommended protection : • for 40 and 63 VA : Type T fuses (5x20) time delay fuse to IEC 60127 • for >100 VA use MCB Type C

In d ice p r o t ect io n - 1061s

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Single phase

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Isolating transformers Primary : 230-400 V Secondary : 115 V With centre tap

Safety isolating transformers Primary : 230-400 V Secondary : 12-24 V Power in VA according to IEC/EN

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0428 40 0428 41 0428 42 0428 43 0428 44 0428 45 0428 47

40 VA 63 VA 100 VA 160 VA 220 VA 310 VA 630 VA

Admissible instantaneous power at cos ϕ 0·5

55 91 140 205 290 345 1 520

Power in VA according to IEC/EN

1 6423 62 1 6423 63 1 6423 64 1 6423 65 1 6423 66 protection-1062.eps In d ice Indice p r o t ect io1n - 1061s 6423 68

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0428 70 0428 71 0428 72 0428 73 0428 74 0428 75 0428 77

40 VA 63 VA 100 VA 160 VA 220 VA 310 VA 630 VA

Admissible instantaneous power at cos ϕ 0·5

55 91 140 205 290 345 1 520

63 VA 100 VA 160 VA 220 VA 310 VA 630 VA

Admissible instantaneous power at cos ϕ 0·5

91 140 205 290 345 1 520

Indice protection-1062.eps

Isolating transformers Primary : 230-400 V Secondary : 115-230 V

Safety isolating transformers (24 V) Isolating transformers (48 V) Primary : 230-400 V Secondary : 24-48 V Power in VA according to IEC/EN

Indice protection-1062.eps

Single phase

Power in VA according to IEC/EN

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0427 85 0427 86 0427 87 0427 88 0427 89 0427 90 0427 92

40 VA 63 VA 100 VA 160 VA 220 VA 310 VA 630 VA

Admissible instantaneous power at cos ϕ 0·5

55 91 140 205 290 345 1 520

006187-5342o.eps

Clips for fixing up to 160 VA on to rail EN 60715

0044 16 Claw width 10 mm Threaded hole for M4 screws (Use two clips per transformer) Note : Other VA ratings available on request. Please consult us

For modular transformers see p. 225

For protection devices see p. 220 271

compact transformers open type single phase

■ Technical information Conform to IEC/EN 61558-2-4 for 48 V, 115 V and 230 V and IEC/EN 61558-2-6 for 12 V and 24 V secondary Products suitable for building into equipment conforming to EN 61131-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 60439-1 standards IP 2x or xxB up to 250 VA - IK 04 Single phase 50-60 Hz - class I Insulation voltage: Primary/Secondary 4 470 V Primary/Earth 2 240 V Secondary/Earth (12 - 24 V) = 250 V ; 48, 115 and 230 V = 1 780 V Max. ambient operating temperature : 35 °C without derating Protected against accidental contact with live parts up to 220 VA

■ Dimensions Fig. 2 - 310 VA(1)

Fig. 1 - 40 to 220 VA

Fig. 3 - 450 to 630 VA

Ø A F

Slotted fixing hole G

Ø G

F A

(1) Subject to secondary voltage (see tables)

Primary : 230 - 400 V Secondary : 12 - 0 - 12 V 0 - 12 - 24 V Cat. Nos. 0428 40 to 0428 45

Primary : 230 - 400 V Secondary : 24 - 0 - 24 V 0 - 24 - 48 V Cat. Nos. 0428 70 to 0428 77

230 - 400

12 0

0 12 P max

0 P max

272

Primary : 230 - 400 V Secondary : 115 - 0 - 115 V 0 - 115 - 230 V Cat. Nos. 0427 85 to 0427 92 230 - 400

230 - 400

12 24

24 0

0 24 P max

P max

24 48

115 0

0 115 P max

115 230

115 P max

■ Electrical characteristics for 230-400 V primary - 24 V or 2 x 12 V secondary Cat. Nos.

Power (VA)

Fixing (mm)

Dimensions (mm) A

Weight (kg)

Voltage drop as Total No-load % with losses loss @ 100% cos ϕ cos ϕ (W) load (W) 0·45 1

Efficiency with cos ϕ 1

cos ϕ 0·45

Ucc %

Primary connection cable mm2 flexible

rigid

Secondary connection cable mm2

ø mm flexible

rigid

ø mm

Fig.

0428 40

4·5

0·9

3·7

13·1

18·3

12·7

0·75

0·6

15·6

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 41

4·5

1·3

4·9

16·3

13·5

10·2

0·8

0·6

11·8

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 42

100

4·5

1·6

6·2

21·0

10·5

8·7

0·8

0·7

9·5

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 43

160

104

4·5

2·4

9·1

31·8

8·8

7·4

0·8

0·7

7·9

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 44

220

115

110

4·5

3·4

12·6

40·0

6·9

6·3

0·85

0·7

6·5

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 45

310

106

123

115

100

5·2

3·8

14·2

54·9

7·3

6·2

0·85

0·7

8·2

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

■ Electrical characteristics for 230-400 V primary - 48 V or 2 x 24 V secondary Cat. Nos.

Power (VA)

Fixing (mm)

Dimensions (mm) A

Weight (kg)

Voltage drop as Total No-load % with losses loss @ 100% cos ϕ cos ϕ (W) load (W) 0·45 1

Efficiency with cos ϕ 1

cos ϕ 0·45

Ucc %

Primary connection cable mm2 flexible

rigid

Secondary connection cable mm2

ø mm flexible

rigid

ø mm

Fig.

0428 70

4·5

0·9

3·7

12·9

12·5

0·8

0·6

15·4

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 71

4·5

1·3

4·9

16·5

13·7

10·3

0·8

0·6

11·9

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 72

100

4·5

1·6

6·2

21·0

10·4

8·7

0·8

0·7

9·4

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 73

160

104

4·5

2·4

9·1

31·6

8·7

7·3

0·8

0·7

7·8

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

1 1

0428 74

220

115

110

4·5

3·4

12·6

39·5

6·7

6·2

0·85

0·7

6·3

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 75

310

106

123

115

100

5·2

3·8

14·2

54·9

7·3

6·2

0·85

0·7

8·2

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0428 77

630

126

141

105

6·5

25·5

63·3

4·2

2·6

0·9

0·8

3·5

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 16 1 to 25

6·5

■ Electrical characteristics for 230-400 V primary - 115/230 V secondary Cat. Nos.

Power (VA)

Fixing (mm)

Dimensions (mm) A

Weight (kg)

Voltage drop as Total No-load % with losses loss @ 100% cos ϕ cos ϕ (W) load (W) 0·45 1

Efficiency with cos ϕ 1

cos ϕ 0·45

Ucc %

Primary connection cable mm2 flexible

rigid

Secondary connection cable mm2

ø mm flexible

rigid

ø mm

Fig.

0427 85

4·5

3·7

10·9

18·5

12·7

0·75

0·58

15·7

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0427 86

4·5

1·3

4·9

15·6

12·5

9·7

0·80

0·65

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0427 87

100

4·5

1·6

6·2

21·1

10·7

8·9

0·83

0·68

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0427 88

160

104

4·5

2·4

9·1

32·3

8·8

7·3

0·83

0·69

7·9

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0427 89

220

115

110

4·5

3·4

12·6

40·1

6·8

6·2

0·85

0·71

6·4

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

9·7

0427 90

310

106

123

115

100

5·2

3·8

14·2

7·3

6·2

0·85

0·7

8·2

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

0427 92

630

126

123

105

6·5

7·8

25·5

64·6

4·3

2·6

0·91

0·81

3·5

1 to 4

4·5

1 to 4

4·5

273

how to calculate

the rated power of a transformer

In equipment containing control devices, the transformer power depends on the maximum power required at a given moment (inrush power), the permanent power, the voltage drop and power factor When determining the permissible instantaneous power (inrush power) required, the following factors should always be taken into account : • two inrush currents cannot occur at the same time • power factor cos ϕ equals 0·5 • at maximum, 80% of devices are supplied at the same time (this percentage can be calculated precisely for each device)

■ Determination of the inrush power Where a simplified calculation of the power is required, the following formula can be used : P inrush = 0·8 (ΣPm + ΣPv + Pa) ΣPm : sum of all contactor steady state power levels (holding power) ΣPv : sum of all power levels of indicators and LEDs* Pa : inrush power of the largest contactor Example : A machine tool control cabinet comprising : • 10 contactors for 4 kW motors, with a steady state power of 8 VA • 2 contactors for 18·5 kW motor, with a steady state power of 20 VA • 1 contactor for 45 kW motor, with a steady state power of 20 VA, and an inrush power of 250 VA cos ϕ 0·5 • 20 remote control relays, with a steady state power of 4 VA • 30 signalling LEDs, with a consumption of 1 VA each - ΣPm = 220 VA { (10 x 8 VA) + (2 x 20 VA) + (1 x 20 VA) + (20 x 4 VA) } - ΣPv = 30 VA (30 x 1 VA) - Pa = 250 VA P inrush = 0·8 (220 + 30 + 250) = 400 VA at cos ϕ 0·5

■ Determination of the rated power of a transformer For control transformers, in particular, simply start with an inrush power at cos ϕ 0·5 and read the size from the table below Rated power in VA IEC and CSA 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1 000 1 600 2 500 4 000

Admissible instantaneous power in VA IEC/EN 61558-2-2 with cos ϕ of: 0·2

0·3

0·4

0·5

0·6

0·7

0·8

0·9

61 51 90 66 80 53 57 53 72 110 90 160 120 140 100 90 90 130 150 130 240 160 190 140 130 140 170 270 200 480 300 400 240 220 190 350 450 330 830 510 690 400 360 310 590 900 700 1 600 1 400 1 200 1 000 800 800 700 2 000 1 800 1 500 1 400 1 200 1 100 1 100 1 000 1 000 5 400 4 600 4 000 3 600 3 200 3 000 2 700 2 600 2 500 9 000 8 000 7 200 6 600 6 100 5 700 5 400 5 300 5 600 7 300 6 600 6 000 5 700 5 200 4 900 4 700 4 600 5 100 34 500 28 800 24 400 17 000 16 600 16 400 14 800 13 400 12 400

From the example above, an inrush of 460 VA at cos ϕ 0·5 gives a transformer size of 250 VA

■ Checking the selection As a precaution, make the following checks on each of your devices : - first calculate the sum of the steady state power for the coils and the LEDs powered at the same time - then apply a coefficient : use either our hypothetical figure of 80% of devices at steady state power, or the actual calculation for your equipment - the power of the chosen transformer shall be greater than or equal to the result of the calculation

* LED = Light Emitting Diode ■ General information

■ Identification of markings

Transformers take around 25 times the load at switch on

• Changing voltage

VA ÷ V = current in the winding either PRIMARY or SECONDARY

Isolation transformer (functional insulation between primary and secondary)

i.e. 300 VA = 25 A x 25 = 625 A 12 V

Auto transformer (no insulation between primary and secondary)

The power triangle :

Control transformer (functional insulation between primary and secondary)

P V

• Control circuit power supply

• Electric shock protection - Protection against direct and indirect contact by :

■ Secondary power/voltage information Example : compact transformer 100 VA - 12/24 V Cat. No. 0428 42

Safety transformers (reinforced insulation between primary and secondary, no-load voltage < 50 V) - Protection against indirect contact by : Circuit separation transformers (reinforced insulation between primary and secondary)

12 V 50 VA

Link

12 V 100 VA OR Link 24 V 100 VA

274

The transformer function(s) can either be defined by the equipment designer or can be imposed by installation guidelines or the equipment standard Definitions of electrical shock : - Electric shocks : physiopathological effect resulting from an electrical current passing through the human body - Direct contact : persons coming into contact with live parts (connected to the mains) - Indirect contact : persons coming into contact with grounding which is accidentally live following an insulation fault

protection of transformers, primary and secondary circuits

■ Protection of transformers

■ Protection of the secondary circuit

In accordance with the IEC/EN 61558 standard, transformers must be protected against overload and short-circuit conditions which may occur during normal operation.

The secondary circuit must be protected against overload and shortcircuit conditions. For overload, check that the protection rating chosen is lower than or equal to the transformer secondary current. For short-circuit, ensure that a short-circuit occurring at the furthest point of the circuit will trigger the protective device within 5 seconds. Legrand offers two possibilities : • type gG cartridge fuses • type C MCBs (with magnetic tripping set at 7 ln average) If the transformer only supplies a single circuit, and provided the calculations show perfect compatibility, transformer protection (if on secondary) and circuit protection can be one and the same. A single protective device performs both functions (see table of transformer protective devices). If the transformer supplies several circuits, overload and short-circuit calculations must be performed for each individual circuit. To check that the device chosen is suitable, an approximate minimum shortcircuit value can be obtained using the following formula.

The standard does not specify the type or location of the protective device : it is the manufacturer’s responsibility to choose the most suitable position, either on the primary or secondary side. The rating, type and location of the protective device are to be indicated on the device identification plate.

■ Protection of the primary and secondary circuits General Circuits must be protected against overload and short-circuit conditions. Protection against overload is compulsory if the circuit is likely to be affected by an overload current. This protection can be installed at the supply source or end of the circuit. Protection against a short-circuit is compulsory in all installations ; this protection has to be installed at the supply source of the circuit. Supply circuits (transformer primary) The transformer is a device which cannot itself generate overload. Its supply circuit therefore only requires protection against a short-circuit. When a transformer is energised, a very high inrush current (around 25 ln)(1) is produced for approximately 10 ms. When protecting the circuit, both factors must be considered. Legrand offers three possibilities : • type aM cartridge fuses, • type D MCBs (with magnetic tripping set at 12 ln average) • type C MCBs (with magnetic tripping set at 7 ln average) Example : control transformer 630 VA - 230/24 V Cat. No. 0442 37 In primary 2·74 A (VA ÷ V) I inrush at power-up 68·5 A (25 x 2·74 A) Protection against a short-circuit can be provided by : • type aM 6 A cartridge fuse • type D 6 A MCBs • type C 13 A MCBs - (16 A nearest UK)

■ Formula for determining the secondary protection rating Calculate the minimum short-circuit at the furthest point on the circuit : Us I c/c min. = 2 U s U c/c % 2ρl x + P 100 S Us = transformer secondary voltage P = transformer power U c/c % = transformer short-circuit voltage I = line length in m S = line cross-section in mm2 ρ copper = 0·027 Ω mm2/m Choose the protection rating so as to obtain a cut-off time of 5 seconds max. for a current I c/c defined above : I c/c min. type gG fuse : In ≤ 4 I c/c min. type C MCB: In ≤ 8 Example : control transformer 630 VA - 230/24 V Cat. No. 0442 37

(

)

2 x 1·52

■ Primary protection

Transformer protection 25 A gG

Minimum protection rating for primary supply of the transformer : Power (VA) 40 50 63 100 150 160 200 250 300 400 500 630 750 1 000 1 250 1 500 1 600 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 5 000

230 V single-phase aM C D fuse MCB MCB 0·5 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 10 10 10 10 12 16 16 20 20 25

1 1 2 3 6 6 6 6 10 10 16 16 16 20 25 32 32 40 50 50 50 80 100

1 1 1 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6 10 10 16 16 16 16 20 32 32 32 40

400 V single-phase aM C D fuse MCB MCB 0·25 0·5 0·5 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 12 16 16 16

1 1 1 2 3 3 3 6 6 6 10 10 10 16 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 63

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 10 10 10 10 16 20 20 20 25

400 V three-phase aM C D fuse MCB MCB

Operation

24 = 44·42 A = Use either : 242 3·3 2 x 0·027 x 15 x + 630 100 1·5 44·42 44·42 = 5·55 → C type MCB 5 A max. = 11·10 → gG fuse 10 A max. 8 4 I c/c min. =

(

)

■ Secondary protection

Ratings and types of protective devices to be used for single phase transformer protection according to VA rating and secondary voltage :

Rated power (VA) IEC/CSA

2 2 2 4 4 4 6

6 6 10 10 16 16

2 3 3 6 6 6

10 12

32 32

16 16

These values are given for information only for transformers with inrush currents of around 25 ln.

(1) In = nominal rating of circuit

15 m Circuit protection

40 50 63 100 150 160 200 250 300 400 500 630 750 1 000 1 250 1 500 1 600 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 5 000

48 V

24 V Fuse A

2 2 3·15 4 6 8 8 10 12 16 20 25 40

63 100

Curve C Type MCB

T T T gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG

1 1 1·6 2 4 4 4 6 6 8 10 12 16 20

100

2 4 6 8 8 10 12 16 20 25

110 V

Fuse

Curve C Type MCB

T T T gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG

1 2 4 4 4 6 6 8 10 12 16 20

32 50

230 V

Fuse A

400 m 500 m 630 m 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 12 16 16 20 20 32 32 32 50

Curve C Type MCB

T T T gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG

1 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 12 13 13 20 20 32 32

gG gG

32 50

0·5

Fuse A

Type

200 m 200 m 315 m 0·5 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 4

T T T gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG gG

8 8 8 10

gG gG

Curve C MCB

0·2 0·5 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 4 8 8 8 10

275

NEW

Viking 3 terminal blocks with screw connection and accessories for copper cable

CSA Recognized (Canada) (Etats-Unis)

VDE IMQ (Allemagne) (Italie)

ELECTRICAL FUNCTION

0371 63

0371 61

0371 64

1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit

0371 66

0371 68

0371 69

0371 00

Connecting (p. 282)

0371 08

1 connection - 2 entries/2 exits

2 connections on 2 levels 0371 20

0371 30

3 connections on 3 levels

1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit - metal base 0371 71

For protection conductor (p. 282)

0371 76

1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit - plastic base(1) 0371 78

1 connection - 2 entries/2 exits - metal base

0371 79

Open (to be equipped) For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever

0371 80

0371 84

0371 81

For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever + blown fuse indicator Disconnect (p. 283)

For neutral circuit with handle lever

1 connection

For standard circuit For circuit not broken

0371 86

0371 87

For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with screwed plug Modular

1 connection Function blocks (p. 283) 0371 53

PNE (p. 282) 0371 52

0371 92

Measurement (p. 283)

(1) Can be used for protection conductor inside class II equivalent assemblies (2) Blown fuse indicator 12/24/48 V = /A Cat. No. 0375 24 or 110/250 VA Cat. No. 0375 25 (3) Or end stop Cat. No. 0375 10

276

Diode carrier 1N4007

2 connections on 2 levels

0371 56

For sensors and actuator (p. 283)

0371 51

With handle lever With mini lever With handle lever With mini lever

Diode carrier 1N4007 With voltage presence LED

Sensor 3 connections Actuator on 3 levels Phase/Neutral/Earth 1 connection

Disconnect for measuring circuit

(4) Upper level only (5) Lower level only (6) Lower and intermediate levels

Nominal Width cross-section (mm) (mm2) 2.5

Colour

TERMINAL BLOCK Cat. Nos. 0371 60 0371 00 0371 20 0371 30 0371 61 0371 01 0371 21 0371 31 0371 77 0371 62 0371 02 0371 78 0371 63 0371 03 0371 64 0371 04 0371 65 0371 05 0371 66 0371 69 0371 09 0371 67 0371 07 0371 68 0371 08

INSULATION

Separation Comb for Comb for Comb for End cap / insulation 2 blocks, 3 blocks, 10 blocks, divider auto. front auto. front auto. front 0375 50(3)

0375 60

ASSOCIATED PROTECTION MEASUREMENT PRODUCTS

EQUIPOTENTIAL LINK

0375 02

–

0375 01

Comb for Bar for Single Cut to 12 blocks, 12 blocks, pole length side front screen screen –

–

0375 65 0375 68

Test socket

0375 27 End stops (p. 286)

0375 50(3)

0375 60

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

0375 65 0375 68

0375 27

0375 50(3)

0375 60

0375 08

0375 07

–

0375 66 0375 68

0375 27

0375 50(3)

0375 60

–

0375 40 0375 66 0375 68

0375 75

0375 51

0375 61

–

0375 42 0375 67 0375 69

0375 76

0375 51

0375 61

–

0375 44 0375 67 0375 69

0375 76

built-in

–

0375 52

0375 62

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

0375 27

0375 53

0375 63

0375 02

–

0375 01

–

0375 27(4)

0375 53

0375 63

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

0375 27(4)

0371 51 0375 54

0375 54

0375 02(4)

–

0375 01(4)

–

0375 27(4)

2.5 4 6 10 16 35 35 4 6

5 6 8 10 12 15 15 6 8

0371 70 0371 71 0371 72 0371 73 0371 74 0371 75 0371 76 0371 77 0371 78

0375 50(3)

–

0375 51

–

– 0375 50 0375 50

– 0375 60 0375 60

– 0375 05 0375 08

– – 0375 07

– 0375 04 –

– – –

0371 79 0375 52

–

0371 80 0375 55

0375 62

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

0375 27

0375 62

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

2.5

0375 46 0375 47

(6) (6)

– – 0375 65 0375 68 0375 66 0375 68

– – –

Label holder for end stop (p. 286)

Handle lever / mini lever (p. 287)

Joining rods for disconnect blocks (p. 287)

Blown fuse indicators (p. 287)

0371 81

2.5

0371 81 + 0375 24 / 25(2) 0375 55

Shielding (p. 287)

0371 82 0371 83 0371 84 0375 55 0371 85 0375 55 0371 86 0375 55

0375 62 0375 62 0375 62

0375 05 0375 05 0375 05

– – –

0375 04 0375 04 0375 04

– – –

0375 27 – 0375 27

0371 87 0375 56

–

0375 02

–

0375 01

–

0375 27

0371 55 0375 53

0375 63

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

0375 27(4)

0371 56 0375 53

0375 63

0375 05(5)

–

0375 04(5)

–

0375 54

0375 02(4)

–

0375 01(4)

–

0375 27(4)

–

0375 77

0371 53 0371 54

0375 55

CAB 3 (p. 304)

0371 51 2.5

0371 52

0375 54

0371 92 0375 57

0375 46 0375 47

–

(6) (6)

277

NEW

Viking 3 terminal blocks with spring connection and accessories for copper cable

CSA Recognized (Canada) (Etats-Unis)

VDE IMQ (Allemagne) (Italie)

ELECTRICAL FUNCTION

0372 61

0372 60

1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit

0372 64

0372 40

Connecting (p. 284) 1 connection - 1 entry/2 exits

0372 68

0372 69

1 connection - 2 entries/2 exits

0372 47

0372 02

2 connections - 2 levels 0372 21

0372 42

1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit - metal base 0372 71

0372 70

For protection conductor (p. 284) 1 connection - 1 entry/2 exits - metal base

0372 72

1 connection - 2 entries/2 exits - metal base

0372 12

Open (to be equipped) For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever 0372 80

0372 82

Disconnect (p. 285)

For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever + blown fuse indicator 1 connection

For neutral circuit with handle lever For standard With handle lever circuit With mini lever

0372 83

For circuit not broken

0372 84

1 connection 2 entries/2 exits Function blocks (p. 285) 0372 54 (1) Blown fuse indicator 12/24/48V= /A Cat. No. 0375 24 or 110/250VA Cat. No. 0375 25 (2) Lower level only (3) Upper level only

278

2 connections 2 entries

With handle lever With mini lever

Diode carrier 1N4007 Diode carrier 1N4007 With voltage presence LED

Nominal Width cross-section (mm) (mm2)

Colour

TERMINAL BLOCK Cat. Nos.

INSULATION

EQUIPOTENTIAL LINK

MEASUREMENT

End cap

Separation and insulation divider

Comb for 2 blocks

Comb for 3 blocks

Comb for 10 blocks

Test socket

0375 86

0375 95

0375 02

–

0375 01

0375 27

ASSOCIATED PRODUCTS

0372 60 4

0372 00

End stops (p. 286)

0372 20 0372 61 4

0372 01

built-in

0375 95

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27

built-in

–

0375 08

0375 07

–

0375 27

built-in

–

0375 82

–

built-in

–

0375 85

–

0375 87

0375 95

0375 02

–

0375 01

0375 27

built-in

0375 95

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27

0375 88

0375 95

0375 02

–

0375 01

0375 27

built-in

–

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27

0375 89

0375 96

0375 02

–

0375 01

0375 27(3)

built-in

0375 96

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27(3)

0375 86

–

built-in

–

0372 21 6

0372 62 0372 02 0372 63 0372 03 0372 64 0372 04

Label holder for end stop (p. 286)

0372 40 0372 41 0372 42 4

0372 43 0372 44 0372 46 0372 47 0372 69 0372 09 0372 67 0372 07 0372 68 0372 08 0372 70

0372 71

0372 72

0372 73

0372 74

0372 10

0375 87

–

0372 11

built-in

–

Handle lever / mini lever (p. 287)

Joining rods for disconnect blocks (p. 287)

Blown fuse indicators (p. 287)

0372 12

0375 88

–

0372 79

built-in

–

0372 80

0375 90

–

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27

Shielding (p. 287)

0375 90

–

0375 05

–

0375 04

–

CAB 3 (p. 304)

0375 90

–

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27

0372 81

2.5

0372 81 + 0375 24/25 (1) 0372 82 0372 83 0372 84

0372 85

0375 90

–

0375 05

–

0375 04

0372 86

0375 90

–

0375 05

–

0375 04

0375 27

0372 54

0375 88

0375 95

0375 02

–

0375 01

–

0372 55

0375 89

0375 96

0375 02

–

0375 01

–

0372 56

0375 89

0375 96

0375 02(2)

–

0375 01(2)

–

279

Viking 3 heavy duty terminal blocks CSA Recognized (Canada) (Etats-Unis)

INSULATION EQUIPOTENTIAL PROTECTION ASSOCIATED LINK PRODUCTS

TERMINAL BLOCK ELECTRICAL FUNCTION

0390 11

Heavy duty terminal blocks (p. 292) 0390 21

Max. Width connection (mm) (mm2)

Cat. Nos. Rail Rail 3 1

Shunt

– –

0394 46 0394 47

–

42 55

Cable lug cable lug

0390 13

–

0394 46

–

0390 14

–

0394 46

–

0390 15

–

0394 47

–

Cable lug cable

–

Cable cable lug

–

For busbars or eyelets 0390 14

– –

Cover Cover 4 blocks 3 blocks

Cable - cable

35 70 120 240

0390 10 0390 11

Separation and insulation divider

– –

0390 17

–

0394 46

–

0390 18

–

0394 47

–

0390 20

–

0394 46

–

0390 21

–

0394 47

26 34 34 46

0390 71 0390 72 0390 73 0390 74

0390 31 0390 32 0390 33 0390 34

0394 77 0394 78 0394 78 0394 78

– – – –

CAB 3 (p. 304)

0394 88 – 0394 86 – 0394 86 – 0394 89 0394 86

old range: Viking 3 terminal blocks and accessories and equivalences between old/new range

1 connection Standard 1 connection - 1 entry - 2 exits 2 connections - 2 levels 3 connections - 3 levels

V.O. - UL 94 1 connection

Shunted Function blocks

2 connections Diode carrier 2 levels With voltage presence LED Blade type Neutral equipped 1 connection

Disconnect

For cartridge 5 x 20

(Autriche)

(Russie)

TERMINAL BLOCKS Cat. Nos. (old range)

(Etats-Unis)

Nominal capacity (mm2) Width(mm)

TERMINAL BLOCKS

0390 60 0371 60

2.5

5 0393 00 0371 00

0390 61 0371 61

6 0393 01 0371 01

0390 62 0371 62

8 0393 02 0371 02

10 0390 64 0371 63 For neutral 1 connection 12 0390 66 0371 64 conductor

6 10

15 0390 68 0371 65

12 0393 04 0371 04

22 0390 70 0371 66

6 0393 07 0371 08

0390 82 0371 69

2.5

0390 77 0371 67

4 2.5

2.5

0390 00

–

0390 01

–

0390 02

–

0390 78 0371 68 For circuit 1 connection not broken 0390 51 0371 51 1 disconnect connection

0390 76 0371 69

0390 80 0371 55

4 4 4

2 connections - 2 levels

–

0371 56

Sensor/power supply unit

2.5

1 connection - Metal base

0390 84 0371 84

For 8 0390 85 0371 82 protection conductor 12 – 0371 87 2 connections - 2 levels - Metal base 8 0390 86 0371 81 0371 81 1 connection - Plastic base 8 – +037525 1 connection - Metal base - bare 8 0390 88 – terminal

– –

0371 03 0371 05 0371 20

6 0393 39 0371 21

6 0393 38 0371 85

2.5

5 0390 51 0371 51

For sensor/ 3 connections actuator Actuator/power supply unit 3 levels 2.5 PNE Phase/Neutral/Earth For special 1 connection - red circuits 1 connection - red

–

Cat. Nos. (new range)

2.5

2 connections For cartridge 2 levels 5 x 20

280

CSA ÖVE SCREW CONNECTION (CONTINUED) GOST Recognized (Canada)

Cat. Nos. (old range)

GOST (Russie)

Width(mm)

(Etats-Unis)

(Autriche)

Nominal capacity (mm2)

CSA SCREW CONNECTION ÖVE Recognized (Canada)

5 0390 52 0371 52

2.5

–

0371 30

–

0371 31

2.5

5 0371 70 0371 70

6 0371 71 0371 71

8 0393 72 0371 72

10 0393 74 0371 73

12 0393 76 0371 74

15 0393 78 0371 75

6 0393 73 0371 79

6 0393 81 0371 77

8 0393 82 0371 78

–

0371 76

old range: Viking 3 terminal blocks and accessories and equivalences between old/new range (continued)

SPRING CONNECTION

SCREW CONNECTION ACCESSORIES

2 cables 1 connection Standard

3 cables 1 entry - 2 exits

2 connections 4 cables 2 levels

2 cables For neutral conductor

1 connection 3 cables 1 entry - 2 exits 4 cables 1 entry - 2 exits

2 cables For protection conductor

1 connection 3 cables 1 entry - 2 exits

Cat. Nos. (new range)

Cat. Nos. (old range)

0375 50

Block with 1 connection - width 5-6

0394 51

0375 55

Block with 1 connection - width 8-10

0394 52

0375 51

Block with 1 connection - width 12-15

–

5 0396 01 0372 60 6 0396 04 0372 61

0394 55

0375 53

Block with 2 connections - width 5-6

–

0372 62

0394 53

0375 54

Sensor/actuator block - 3 connections Cat. Nos. 0390 51/52

–

0372 63

0394 73

–

Block with 1 connection V.O. - UL 94 - width 5-6

16 2.5

–

0372 64

0394 74

–

Block with 1 connection V.O. - UL 94 - width 8-10

5 0396 02 0372 40

0393 49

–

Disconnect terminal - 1 connection Cat. Nos. 0390 85/86

0393 48

–

Disconnect terminal - 2 connections Cat. No. 0390 88

0393 09

–

Neutral block - 1 connection - width 5-6

0393 11

–

Neutral block - 1 connection - width 8-10

–

0372 43

Block with 1 connection 1 entry/2 exits - width 6

2.5

5 0396 03 0372 46

1.5

5 0396 27 0372 67

0393 13

–

Neutral block - 1 connection - width 12-15

4 2.5

6 0396 36 0372 68

0393 15

0375 53

Neutral block - 2 connections - width 5-6

–

0372 00

0393 46

–

Block for circuit not broken - 1 connection Cat. No. 0393 39

–

0372 01

0393 45

0375 55

Block for circuit not broken - 1 connection Cat. No. 0393 38

–

0372 02

0393 84

0375 52

Block for cond. protection - 2 connections Cat. No. 0393 73

–

0372 03

0393 87

–

Block for cond. protection - 1 connection Cat. No. 0393 81

16 2.5

–

0372 04

0393 88

–

Block for cond. protection - 1 connection Cat. No. 0393 82

–

0372 41

–

0372 44

0394 66

0375 60

Block with 1 connection width 5-6-8-10 and disconnect. width 6

0372 47

0394 69

0375 63

Blocks with 2 connections width 5-6

0394 67

0375 62

Blocks with 1 connection width 12-15 and disconnect. width 8

0394 53

0375 54

Blocks with 3 connections width 5

0394 31

–

Width 5 - 12 blocks

0375 04

Width 6 - 12 blocks

–

0372 08

–

0372 84

Separation/insulation divider

Equipotential bridging comb

–

0372 81

0394 20 0394 21

–

Width 8 - 12 blocks

2.5 2.5

–

0372 54

0394 40

0375 02

Width 5 - 2 blocks

5 0396 21 0372 70

0394 43

0375 05

Width 6 - 2 blocks

6 0396 24 0372 71

0394 41

–

Width 5 - 3 blocks

8 0396 25 0372 72

0394 44

–

Width 6 - 3 blocks

–

0372 73

0394 22

0375 47

Sens./act. - width 5 - blue - 12 blocks

16 2.5

–

0372 74

0394 23

0375 46

Sens./act. - width 5 - brown - 12 blocks

–

0372 10

0394 26

–

Sens./act. - width 5 - green - 12 blocks

0394 10

0375 01

Insulated - width 5 - 12 blocks

0394 11

0375 04

Insulated - width 6 - 12 blocks

0394 12

–

Insulated - width 8 - 12 blocks

0394 34

–

Insulated - width 5 - 2 blocks

0394 37

0375 05

Insulated - width 6 - 2 blocks

0394 35

–

Insulated - width 5 - 3 blocks

0394 38

0375 02

Insulated - width 6 - 3 blocks

6 0396 30 0372 11

2.5

2 connections 4 cables 2 levels

0394 50

End cap

4 cables 1 entry - 2 exits

Cat.Nos. (new range)

0394 82

2.5

2 connections 4 cables 2 levels Blade type 2 Disconnect 1 connection cables for cartridge 5 x 20 Diode carrier 1 connection 4 cables

Cat.Nos. (old range)

2.5

4 cables 1 entry - 2 exits

Width (mm)

TERMINAL BLOCKS

GOST (Russie)

Nominal capacity (mm2)

CSA Recognized (Canada) (Etats-Unis)

– –

0372 12 0372 79

END STOPS

Equipotential bridging bar

12 width end stop, tri-rail

Cat. Nos. (old range) 0394 00

Cat. Nos. (new range) 0375 13

8 width end stop, rail 1

0394 02

–

0394 13

0375 40

Bare - width 10 - 12 blocks

8 width end stop, rail 2 10 width stop, bar support

0394 03

0375 11

0394 14

0375 42

Bare - width 12 - 12 blocks

–

0375 12

0394 15

0375 44

Bare - width 15 - 12 blocks

0394 16

0375 40

Bare - width 10 - 12 blocks - low spacer

0394 17

0375 42

Bare - width 12 - 12 blocks - low spacer

0394 18

0375 44

Bare - width 15 - 12 blocks - low spacer

0394 92

0375 65

Single pole for block with 1 connection - width 5-6

0394 93

0375 66

Single pole for block with 1 connection - width 8-10

0394 94

0375 67

Single pole for block with 1 connection - width 12-15

0394 80

0375 68

Cut to length - width 5-6-8-10 (on Cat. No. 0394 66)

0394 81

0375 69

Cut to length - width 12-15 (on Cat. No. 0394 67)

SPRING CONNECTION ACCESSORIES Cat. Nos Cat. Nos. (old (new End cap range) range) Std term. block - 2 cables 0396 31 037586 width 5-6 Std term. block - 3 cables 0396 32 037587 width 5 Std term. block - 3 cables 0396 77 – width 6 Std/diode term. block 0396 33 037588 4 cables - width 5 Std term. block - 4 cables 0396 48 037589 2 levels - width 5 Std term. block - 4 cables 0396 85 – 2 levels - width 6

Cat. Nos Cat. Nos. (old (new Separation/insulation divider range) range) Block with 2 cables - width 0396 49 – 5-6

Protection cond. term. 0396 43 037586 block 2 cables - width 5-6

0396 62

–

Block - width 6 - 3 poles

0396 63

–

Block - width 6 - 10 poles

0396 50

–

Block with 3 cables - width 5 Equipotential bridging comb

0396 58

–

Block - width 5 - 2 poles

0396 59

–

Block - width 5 - 3 poles

0396 60

–

Block - width 5 - 10 poles

0396 61

Protective screen

Miscellaneous

037505 Block - width 6 - 2 poles 0394 05

0375 35

0394 95

–

Screening continuity bracket for 1 connection blocks - width 5-6-8-10 Protection cap for separable combs/ bars - width 5-6

281

Viking 3 terminal blocks with screw connection

0371 60 + 0371 00 + 0371 20 + 0371 30

NEW

0371 68

0371 69

0371 70 on rail 4

0371 74

0371 76

0371 60 + 0371 61 + 0371 62 + 0371 63 + 0371 64 + 371 65 + 371 66

0371 79

Technical characteristics (p. 288) Used to make the electrical connection between 2 rigid or flexible copper cables 2 areas for bridging combs for alternating equipotential connection up to 8 width For rails 2 depth 15 mm, 2 EN 60715 depth 7·5 mm and 15 mm Pack

Cat. Nos.

Connecting

Pack

Cat. Nos.

1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit - metal base Screwless fixing on rail up to 10 mm width PEN from 10 mm2

Grey for standard circuit, blue for neutral conductor, orange for circuit not broken by the master isolating device, red for special circuits (safety, protected, etc) 1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit 60 60 60 60 50 50 50 50 40 40 30 30 20 20 20 20 10 25 25 60 60 60 60 50

Colour

Capacity Nominal cross-section Rigid cable Flexible (mm²) (mm2) cable (mm2) Width (mm)

0371 60 Grey 0371 00 Blue 2·5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 0371 20 Orange 0371 30 Red 0371 61 Grey 0371 01 Blue 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 0371 21 Orange 0371 31 Red 0371 62 Grey 6 0.5 to 10 0.25 to 6 0371 02 Blue 0371 63 Grey 10 1.5 to 16 2.5 to 10 0371 03 Blue 0371 64 Grey 16 1.5 to 25 4 to 16 0371 04 Blue 0371 65 Grey 35 2.5 to 50 4 to 35 0371 05 Blue 0371 66 (1) Grey 70 25 to 95 16 to 70 1 connection - 2 entries/2 exits 0371 69 Grey 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 0371 09 Blue 2 connections on 2 levels 0371 67 Grey 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 0371 07 Blue 0371 68 Grey 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 0371 08 Blue 3 connections on 3 levels 0371 51 (2) Grey 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5

60 50 40 30 10 10

0371 70 0371 71 0371 72 0371 73 0371 74 0371 75

0371 76

0371 79

50 40

0371 77 0371 78

8 10 12 15 22

Colour

Nominal crosssection (mm²)

Capacity Rigid cable (mm2)

Flexible cable (mm2)

3 connections on 3 levels - metal base Green/yellow marking for the lower level Screwless fixing on rail

5 50

0371 52 (2)

Colour

Grey

Capacity Nominal cross-section Rigid cable Flexible (mm²) (mm2) cable (mm2) Width (mm)

2.5

0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5

CAB 3 marking system

(1) Built-in end cap (2) Cable capacity: 2.5 mm2 max. with equipotential bridging comb

282

Width (mm)

Green/yellow 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 5 Green/yellow 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 6 . . Green/yellow 6 0 5 to 10 0 25 to 6 8 . . Green/yellow 10 1 5 to 16 2 5 to 10 10 . Green/yellow 16 1 5 to 25 4 to 16 12 Green/yellow 35 2.5 to 50 4 to 35 15 1 connection - bare block - metal base 35 2.5 to 50 4 to 35 15 1 connection - 2 entries/2 exits metal base Screwless fixing on rail Green/yellow 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 6 1 connection - 1 entry/1 exit - plastic base Can be used for protection conductor inside class II equivalent assemblies Green 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 6 Green 6 0.5 to 10 0.25 to 6 8

PNE - Phase/Neutral/Earth

For protection conductor

see p. 304

Viking 3 terminal blocks with screw connection (continued)

0371 80 + automotive-type fuse

0371 84 + 0371 86

NEW

0371 53

0371 87

0371 82 + 0371 83 + 0371 85

0371 55

0371 51

0371 52

0371 92

Technical characteristics (p. 288-289) Used to make the electrical connection between 2 rigid or flexible copper cables 2 areas for bridging combs for alternating equipotential connection up to 8 width For rails 2 depth 15 mm, 2 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm and 15 mm Pack

Cat. Nos.

Disconnect terminal blocks 1 connection Disconnection by means of blade type lever, handle lever or mini lever (with tool) Open (to be equipped) Can take a blade-type automotive fuse or a miniature circuit breaker, or blade type levers Cat. Nos. 0375 15/16/17/18

0371 80

0371 81

0371 82

0371 83

0371 84

0371 85

0371 86

0371 87

0371 88

Colour

Nominal crosssection (mm²)

Capacity Rigid cable (mm2)

Flexible cable (mm2)

Width (mm)

Grey 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever Grey 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For neutral circuit with blue handle lever Grey/blue 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For standard circuit with handle lever Grey 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For standard circuit with mini lever Grey 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For circuit not broken with handle lever Circuit not broken by the master isolating device Orange 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For circuit not broken with mini lever Circuit not broken by the master isolating device Orange 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 0.25 to 2.5 6 For cartridge 5 x 20 with screwed plug Grey 10 0.25 to 16 0.25 to 10 12 For cartridge 6·3 x 32 with screwed plug Grey 10 0.25 to 16 0.25 to 10 12

Pack

Cat. Nos.

1 connection - modular Component connected with screws

0371 53

0371 54

0371 55

0371 56

see p. 301

Colour

Nominal cross-section (mm²)

Capacity Rigid cable Flexible (mm2) cable (mm2)

Grey 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 1 connection - diode carrier Grey 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 2 connections on 2 levels - diode carrier Grey 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4 2 connections on 2 levels - with LED Voltage presence indicator (12/24V= /A) Grey 4 0.25 to 6 0.25 to 4

Width (mm)

5 6

For sensors and actuators For connecting sensors (Cat. No. 0371 51) or actuators (Cat. No. 0371 52), and their shared power supply unit using equipotential bridging comb Cat. Nos. 0375 46/47 (wiring diagram p. 289) 3 connections on 3 levels - for sensor 50

Colour

Nominal cross-section (mm²)

Capacity Rigid cable Flexible 2 (mm ) cable (mm2)

0371 51 Grey 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 3 connections on 3 levels - for actuator Green/yellow marking for the lower level Metal base. Screwless fixing on rail (1) 0371 52 Grey 2.5 0.25 to 4 0.25 to 2.5 (1)

Width (mm)

Disconnect for measurement 1 connection With its accessories, allows intervention (measurements, maintenance, etc) on a current, voltage and power measuring circuit by keeping the current transformer secondary circuit closed

Blade type levers, joining rods and blown fuse indicators (p. 287)

New Starfix crimping tools

Function blocks

0371 92

Colour

Grey

Capacity Nominal cross-section Rigid cable Flexible (mm²) (mm2) cable (mm2) Width (mm)

0.25 to 4 0.25 to 4

Accessories (p. 286)

End stops (p. 286)

(1) Rigid cable capacity: 2.5 mm² max with equipotential brigding comb

283

Viking 3 terminal blocks with spring connection

0372 60 + 0372 00 + 0372 20

0372 01

Automatic insertion of stripped cable with ferrule cap or rigid cable up to width of 6 mm

0372 21

NEW

0372 40

0372 63

0372 72

0372 70 Automatic fixing on rail 4

0372 79

Technical characteristics (p. 290) Screwless connection system, stainless steel spring type Used to make the electrical connection between 2 rigid copper cables, or flexible cables with or without ferrules (p. 301) Direct tool-free insertion of a rigid cable or flexible cable with ferrule, up to 6 mm width 2 areas for bridging combs for alternating equipotential connection For rails 2 depth 15 mm, 2 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm and 15 mm Pack

Cat. Nos.

Connecting

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Grey for standard circuit, blue for neutral conductor, orange for circuit not broken by the master isolating device 1 connection - 2 cables - 1 entry/1 exit

60 60 60 50 50 50 50 50 40 40 10 10 60 60 60 50 50 60 60 50 50 60 60 50 50

Colour

Nominal crosssection Rigid cable (mmÂ˛) (mm2)

Capacity Flexible cable (mm2)

Flexible cable with ferrule (mm2)

Width (mm)

0372 60 Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 0372 00 Blue 0372 20 Orange 0372 61(1) Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 0372 01(1) Blue 0372 21(1) Orange 0372 62(1) Grey 6 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 6 8 0372 02(1) Blue (1) 0372 63 Grey 10 0.75 to 10 0.75 to 10 0.75 to 10 10 0372 03(1) Blue 0372 64(1) Grey 16 4 to 16 4 to 16 4 to 16 12 0372 04(1) Blue 1 connection - 3 cables - 1 entry/2 exits 0372 40 Grey 0372 41 Blue 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 0372 42 Orange 0372 43(1) Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 0372 44(1) Blue 1 connection - 4 cables - 2 entries/2 exits 0372 46 Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 0372 47 Blue 0372 69(1) Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 0372 09(1) Blue 2 connections - 4 cables - 2 levels 0372 67 Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 0372 07 Blue (1) 0372 68 Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 0372 08(1) Blue

For protection conductor Metal base Screwless fixing on rail PEN from 10 mm2 1 connection - 2 cables - 1 entry/1 exit

0372 70

0372 71(1)

0372 72(1)

0372 73(1)

0372 74(1)

0372 10

0372 11(1)

0372 12

0372 79(1)

Colour

Nominal crosssection Rigid cable (mmÂ˛) (mm2)

Capacity Flexible cable (mm2)

284

Width (mm)

Green/ 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 yellow Green/ 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 yellow Green/ 6 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 6 8 yellow Green/ 10 0.75 to 10 0.75 to 10 0.75 to 10 10 yellow Green/ 16 4 to 16 4 to 16 4 to 16 12 yellow 1 connection - 3 cables - 1 entry/2 exits Green/ 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 yellow Green/ 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 yellow 1 connection - 4 cables - 2 entries/2 exits Green/ 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 yellow Green/ 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 4 6 yellow

CAB 3 marking system

see p. 304 (1) Built-in end cap

Flexible cable with ferrule (mm2)

Viking 3 terminal blocks with spring connection (continued)

0372 81 with blown fuse indicator (p. 287)

0372 81 open

0372 80 with automotive-type fuse

NEW

0372 82 + 0372 83 + 0372 85

0372 54

0372 84

Technical characteristics (p. 290) Screwless connection system, stainless steel spring type Used to make the electrical connection between 2 rigid copper cables, or flexible cables with or without ferrule (p. 301) Direct tool-free insertion of a rigid cable or flexible cable with ferrule, up to 6 mm width 2 areas for bridging combs for alternating equipotential connection For rails 2 depth 15 mm, 2 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm and 15 mm Pack

Cat. Nos.

Disconnect terminal blocks

Pack

1 connection - 2 cables Disconnection by means of blade type lever, handle lever or mini lever (with tool) Open (to be equipped) Can take a blade-type automotive fuse or a miniature circuit breaker, blade type levers Cat. Nos. 0375 15/16/17/18

0372 80

0372 81

0372 82

0372 83

0372 84

0372 85

0372 86

Colour

Nominal crosssection Rigid cable (mmÂ˛) (mm2)

Capacity Flexible cable (mm2)

Flexible cable with ferrule (mm2)

60 60

Function blocks 1 connection - 4 cables - 2 entries/2 outlets diode-carrier

Width (mm)

Grey 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 For fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever Grey 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 For neutral circuit with blue handle lever Grey/blue 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 For standard circuit with handle lever Grey 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 For standard circuit with mini lever Grey 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 For circuit not broken with handle lever Circuit not broken by the master isolating device Orange 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 For circuit not broken with mini lever Circuit not broken by the master isolating device Orange 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5

Cat. Nos.

Colour

Nominal crosssection Rigid cable (mmÂ˛) (mm2)

Capacity Flexible cable (mm2)

Flexible cable with ferrule (mm2)

Width (mm)

Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 2 connections - 4 cables - 2 levels - diode carrier 0372 55 Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5 2 connections - 4 cables - 2 levels - with LED Voltage presence indicator (12/24V= /A) 0372 56 Grey 4 0.5 to 6 0.5 to 4 0.5 to 2.5 5

0372 54

6 6 6

Accessories (p. 286)

End stops (p. 286)

Blade type levers, joining rods and blown fuse indicators (p. 287)

New Starfix crimping tools

see p. 301 285

Viking 3 accessories for terminal blocks

Automatic bridging combs Cat. Nos. 0375 01 to 0375 08 for terminal blocks with screw or spring connection

Equipotential bars Cat. Nos. 0375 40/42/44 for terminal blocks with screw connection

0375 62

Bridging combs Cat. Nos. 0375 46/47 for 3 level terminal blocks with screw connection

0375 95 End stop 0375 10, screwless mounting

0375 54

0375 52 0375 89

0375 11 with label holder 0395 96

0375 12 with CAB 3 labelling

0375 13 with label holder

CAB 3 label holders Cat. No. 0383 92 for terminal blocks with screw connection

CAB 3 markers

Technical characteristics (p. 291) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Rails for cutting to length

0374 04 0374 07

Length 2 m 4 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm 3 depth 15 mm

45° mounting bracket 10

0394 49 Set of 2 supports for tilting a rail at an angle of 45° Supplied with 4 x M6 screws, nuts and washers

End stops

0375 10

0375 11

0375 12

0375 13

Accept CAB 3 markers Automatic 6 mm width Screwless mounting For rails 4 depth 15 mm and 4 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm and 15 mm Accepts label holder Cat. No. 0395 96 Acts as end cap for screw terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm width 8 mm width For rails 4 depth 15 mm and 4 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm and 15 mm Accepts label holder Cat. No. 0395 96 10 mm width For rails 4 depth 15 mm and 4 EN 60715 depth 7.5 mm (except for rail fixed on plate) and 15 mm For supporting protection conductor bar: - Brass bar Cat. Nos. 0373 00/01 - Copper bar 12 x 4 mm with clamps Cat. No. 0373 02 - IP 2X terminal block with flat steel bar 12 x 2 mm Cat. No. 0048 19 - Copper bar 12 x 4 mm Cat. No. 0373 49 or 0373 89 - Shielding bar 10 x 3 mm Cat. No. 0375 34 12 mm width For rails 1 EN 60715, 4 depth 15 mm and 4 EN 60715 depth 7·5 mm and 15 mm After cutting out the upper divider, can be labelled

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Grey 100 20 20 20 20 20 20 10

For screw terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm width 1 entry/1 exit 12 and 15 mm width 2 entries/2 exits 2 levels 3 levels Disconnect terminal 6 mm width and function blocks 5 mm width 0375 56 Disconnect terminal fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with screwed plug 0375 57 Disconnect for measurement

0375 50 0375 51 0375 52 0375 53 0375 54 0375 55

20 10

0395 96 Transparent label holder with variable angle Fixing on end stops Cat. Nos. 0375 10/11 Supplied with label 32 x 9.5 mm Can take label Cat. No. 0395 97 0395 97 Label for engraving 28 x 9.5 mm For label holder Cat. No. 0395 96. Flexible ABS White background, black engraving 0395 98 Black felt tip pen for permanent marking

CAB 3® marking system (p. 303-305)

For spring terminal blocks with 5 mm width Allows the block to become 6 mm width and take a flexible cable fitted with a ferrule 4 mm2 1 entry/1 exit 1 entry/2 exits 2 entries/2 exits 2 levels

0375 86 0375 87 0375 88 0375 89

For spring terminal blocks with 6 mm width 0375 90 Disconnect type

50 50 20

Separation and insulation dividers

20 10 10

0375 60 0375 61 0375 62

10 20

0375 63 0375 64

0375 95

0375 96

Grey For screw terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm width 1 entry/1 exit 12 and 15 mm width 2 entry/2 exits and disconnect 6 mm width blocks 2 levels 3 levels For spring terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit, 1 entry/2 exits and 2 entry/2 exits 5 and 6 mm width 2 levels

Equipotential bridging accessories

Identification accessories 20

End caps

20 50 20 50 20 20

0375 01(1) 0375 02(1) 0375 04(1) 0375 05(1) 0375 07(1) 0375 08(1)

Bridging combs for screw and spring terminal blocks Front mounting (automatic insertion), screwless Isolated and separable. Consecutive or alternating connection. Red For 10 blocks with 5 mm width For 2 blocks with 5 mm width For 10 blocks with 6 mm width For 2 blocks with 6 mm width For 3 blocks with 8 mm width For 2 blocks with 8 mm width (1) Blocks Cat. Nos. 0371 51/52: upper level only Block Cat. No. 0372 56: lower level only

286

Viking 3 accessories for terminal blocks (continued)

0375 15

0371 80 + 0375 15 + 0375 25

0372 81 + 0375 24

0375 17

0375 16

0375 18

Shielding terminal block with end stops 0375 12, bar 0375 34 and clamps 0375 30/31

0375 66 + 0371 63 + 0371 03

0375 27 + 0371 61

0375 76 + 0371 64

0375 77 + 0371 92 open

Technical characteristics (p. 291) Pack

10 10 10

Cat. Nos.

Equipotential bridging accessories (continued)

Bars for screw terminal blocks Front mounting with screws. Pre-assembled Consecutive or alternating connection 0375 40 For 12 blocks with 10 mm width (1) 0375 42 For 12 blocks with 12 mm width 0375 44 For 12 blocks with 15 mm width

10 10

Bridging combs for 3-level screw terminal blocks For lower and intermediate levels of blocks Cat. Nos. 0371 51/52. Side mounting Isolated and separable 0375 46 Brown. For 12 blocks with 5 mm width 0375 47 Blue. For 12 blocks with 5 mm width

20 20

Bridging combs for spring terminal blocks Front mounting (automatic insertion), screwless Isolated. Red 0375 82 For 2 blocks with 10 mm width 0375 85 For 2 blocks with 12 mm width

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Ensure safe, simple connection of cable shielding

10 50

Shielding bar For screw and spring terminal blocks. Steel. Length 1 m. For use with end stops Cat. No. 0375 12 0375 34 10 x 3 mm Screening continuity bracket 0375 35 For screw terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm width Connected with 2.8 x 0.8 mm clips or welded on. Capacity: 1 mm2

Protective screens 10 10 10

0375 65 0375 66 0375 67

0375 68

0375 69

Accessories for disconnect blocks

10 10 10 10

20 20

0375 15 0375 16 0375 17 0375 18

0375 21 0375 22

0375 24

0375 25

For screw and spring terminal blocks Blade type levers For open blocks Cat. Nos. 0371 80 and 0372 80 Manual disconnection for handle type, tool required for mini lever type With handle lever for fuse cartridge 5 x 20 Blue handle lever for neutral Grey handle lever Mini lever Joining rods For handle and mini lever For 2 blocks For 3 blocks Blown fuse indicators Clip directly on to blocks Cat. Nos. 0371 81, 0372 81 or handle lever 0375 15 (with power off) 12/24/48 V= /A for block with fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever 110/250 VA for block with fuse cartridge 5 x 20 with handle lever

Shielding accessories (continued)

1 pole For screw terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit 5 and 6 mm width 8 and 10 mm width 12 and 15 mm width Cut to length Length 1 m Mounted on separation and insulation divider For screw terminal blocks 1 entry/1 exit 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm width (divider Cat. No. 0375 60) 12 and 15 mm width (divider Cat. No. 0375 61)

Measurement accessories 10

50 20 10

For screw and spring terminal blocks 0375 27(2) Measurement socket for Ø4 mm plug for blocks with 5 and 6 mm width For screw terminal blocks 0375 75 Measurement socket for Ø2 mm plug for blocks with 10 mm width Cat. Nos. 0371 03/63 0375 76 Measurement socket for Ø4 mm plug for blocks with 12 and 15 mm width Cat. Nos. 0371 04/05/64/65 0375 77 Measurement socket for Ø4 mm plug for disconnect block for measurement Cat. No. 0371 92

Shielding accessories

10 10 4

Ensure safe, simple connection of cable shielding Shielding clamps For screw and spring terminal blocks - mounted by pivoting on collector bar 10 x 3 mm Cat. No. 0375 34 - mounted on plate with M4 screws (supplied) - mounted on rail 4 with Cat. No. 0364 69 0375 30 For cable diameter 3 to 8 mm 0375 31 For cable diameter 4 to 13.5 mm 0375 32 For cable diameter 10 to 20 mm

(1) Except for Cat. No. 0371 87 (2) Except for disconnect blocks with handle lever, screw terminal block with LED and spring function blocks. 2 and 3-level terminal blocks: upper level only

287

Viking 3 terminal blocks with screw connection

n Characteristics and dimensions (mm)

Blocks for protection conductor

CSA

20 30 50 60 85 115 20 30 30 200 30 50

Cat. Nos. 0371 00/01/ 02/03/20/21/30/31/60/ 61/62/63/77/78

Cat. Nos. 0371 04/05/64/65

52·2 45·8

(1) PEN terminal blocks

Cat. Nos. 0371 70/71/72/73

Cat. Nos. 0371 74/75

52·2 45·8

Cat. No. 0371 66

Cat. Nos. 0371 77/78

50·5

Cat. No. 0371 79

52·2 45·8

57 54·4

51·2 58·7

46·4 53·9

63 70·5

62·9 70·4

Cat. Nos. 0371 09/69

Cat. No. 0371 76

54·5

64·6 62

57·1 54·5 46·4 53·9

29·3 41·5

IEC

0371 00/20/30/60 27 24 0371 01/21/31/61 36 32 0371 02/62 48 41 800 600 600 0371 03/63 63 57 0371 04/64 85 76 0371 05/65 138 125 0371 07/67 27 24 0371 08/68 500 300 300 36 32 0371 09/69 36 32 600 213 192 0371 66 1 000 600 0371 77 36 32 800 600 600 0371 78 48 41 Cat. No. 0371 51: see blocks for sensors IEC 60947-7-1, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059 Ie: Rated current NF C 15100 table 52H, column 4

Nominal cross-section UL IEC CSA (mm2) (AWG) (AWG) 2.5 12 12 4 10 10 6 8 8 10 6 6 16 4 4 35 2 2 . 25 12 12 4 10 10 4 10 10 70 000 000 4 10 10 6 8 8

CSA

49 36·8

IEC

Current (A)

Nominal cross-section

IEC (mm2) CSA (AWG) UL (AWG) 0371 70 2.5 12 12 0371 71 4 10 10 0371 72 6 8 8 800 600 600 10 6 6 0371 73(1) (1) 16 4 4 0371 74 35 2 2 0371 75(1) 0371 76 35 0371 77 4 10 10 800 600 600 0371 78 6 8 8 0371 79 500 300 300 4 10 10 IEC 60947-7-1/7-2, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059 IEC

63 70·5

Voltage (V) Cat. Nos.

Voltage (V)

Cat. Nos.

46·4 53·9

V2 polyamide according to UL 94, 960°C according to IEC EN 60695-2-11 Connecting blocks

Cat. Nos. 0371 07/08/67/68

57 54·4

74·8 72·2

Voltage (V)

62·5 70

51·2 58·7

Disconnect terminals

Approved by ATEX: LCIE 07 ATEX 0010 U-0081

Cat. Nos.

II 1 or 2 G or D Ex e/i/tD/iD II

The terminal blocks with screw connection covered by this certificate are 1-, 2- and 3-level connecting terminal blocks, and blocks for protection conductor with metal(1) and plastic base (detailed list on p. 276) The main characteristics are: Operating temperature: - 30°C to + 55°C Maximum temperature of materials: + 85°C Working voltage acc. to EN 60079-7: 1-level terminal blocks: 500 V Blocks with 2 entries - 2 exits: 250 V 2 and 3-level terminal blocks: 250 V Rated current:

IEC

0371 80 500 300 300 15 0371 81 or 250 250 6.3 0371 80 + 0375 15 250 0371 82 0371 83 0371 84 500 300 300 15 0371 85 0371 86 0371 87 250 250 250 10 IEC 60947-7-1/7-3, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059

CSA

15 6.3

6.3

Nominal cross-section CSA UL IEC (mm2) (AWG) (AWG)

2.5

Power according to EN 60947-7-3 Short-circuit

Cat. Nos. 0371 81 or 0371 80 + 0375 15(1) 0371 87

Short-circuit + overload

Separate blocks Assembled blocks Separate blocks Assembled blocks 4 W / 6.3 A 1.6 W/6.3 A 1.6 W/6.3 A Pvk = 4.75 W Pvk = 2 W Pv = 1.65 W 4W 2.5 W 1.6 W . . Pvk = 5 W Pvk = 2 7 W Pv = 1 8 W -

(1) With or without blown fuse indicator Cat. No. 0375 25 10

Rated current (A)

144

Cat. No. 0371 80

Cat. Nos. 0371 81/82/83/85 Cat. Nos. 0371 84/86

71·2

91·6

84·2

26·8

Certificate of conformity of component for the customer is available on request

46·4 53·9

26·8

(1) Except for Cat. No. 0371 76

Cat. No. 0371 87

65·5 73

65·5

71·2

26·8

71·2

46·5 54

83·8 76·3

52·3 59·8

2.5

90·6 83·1

Conductor cross-section (mm2)

288

CSA

Current (A)

Function blocks

Block for actuator Cat. No. 0371 52

Voltage (V) Cat. Nos.

IEC

CSA

Current (A) UL

IEC

CSA

1 30

0371 53 250 0371 54 250 1 0371 55 500 300 300 1 0371 56 12 to 24 12 to 24 12 to 24 32 IEC 60947-7-1, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059

Cat. Nos. 0371 53/54

IEC (mm2) 2.5 2.5 4 4

CSA (AWG) 10 10

UL (AWG) 10 10

Phase Neutral

Signal common

Signal Automation Bridging comb Cat.No 0375 47

Cat. Nos. 0371 55/56

71·2 65·9

PNE block Cat. No. 0371 52 To actuators

Nominal cross-section

74·8 72·2 26·8

46·5 54

62·5 70

Disconnect block for measurement Voltage (V) Cat. Nos. 0371 92

Nominal cross-section

IEC

CSA

IEC

CSA

800

CSA UL IEC (mm2) (AWG) (AWG) 4 -

IEC EN 60947-7-1

Cat. No. 0371 54

Cat. No. 0371 92

Cat. No. 0371 55

73·2

62 69·5

Schematic diagrams Cat. No. 0371 53

Current (A)

Cat. No. 0371 56 +

Diode for Cat. Nos. 0371 54/55 - 1N4007 type 1A - direct current = 1 A - peak inverse voltage 1 000 V - inverse current 5 µA at 25°C

Wiring diagram for measurement blocks Cat. No. 0371 92 Ammeter circuit Wattmeter circuit

Blocks for sensors and actuators/PNE Voltage (V) Cat. Nos.

IEC

CSA

Current (A) UL

IEC

CSA

0371 51 400 300 300 27 24 0371 52 IEC 60947-7-1/7-2, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059 Ie: Rated current NF C 15100 table 52H, column 4

Nominal crosssection CSA UL IEC 2 (mm ) (AWG) (AWG) 2.5

Cat. Nos. 0371 51/52 Normal position

84·5

Short-circuit position

Per circuit: 2 x Disconnect blocks for measurement Cat. No. 0371 92 4 x Measurement sockets for Ø4 mm plug Cat. No. 0375 77 1 x End cap Cat. No. 0375 57 1 x Shunt with Ø4 mm plugs

67·4 74·9

38·8

Test position

Stripped lengths (mm) Wiring diagram Block for sensor Cat. No. 0371 51

Screw terminal width (mm)

Sensors Signal

5 6 8 10 12 15 22

L1 L2 L3 N PE

10 x Disconnect blocks for measurement Cat. No. 0371 92 12 x Measurement sockets for Ø4 mm plug Cat. No. 0375 77 1 x End cap Cat. No. 0375 57 3 x Shunts with Ø4 mm plugs

Rigid or flexible cable 6 to 8 10 to 12 13 to 17 14 to 18 15 to 22

Signal Automation Bridging comb Cat.No 375 47

Power supply or Ph - N

Power supply (shared)

Protection against fire and panic risks in public buildings/UTE C 12-201 guide Art. EL 3, definitions: "Security installations are those that have to be put into or maintained in service to ensure the evacuation of the public" or facilitate the intervention of the first-aid Art. EL 16, power supply circuits in security installations section 1a: "…the corresponding junction or deviation devices and their enclosures except for the waterproofing systems must satisfy the incandescent cable test defined in the standard in force, the temperature of the incandescent cable being 960 °C" Viking 3 terminal blocks satisfy the incandescent cable test 960 °C according to standard IEC 60695-2-11

289

Viking 3 terminal blocks with spring connection

n Characteristics and dimensions (mm)

Schematic diagrams

V2 polyamide according to UL 94, 960°C according to IEC EN 60695-2-11 Connecting blocks

Cat. No. 0372 54

Voltage (V) IEC

CSA

Current (A) UL

Nominal cross-section UL IEC CSA (mm2) (AWG) (AWG)

IEC

CSA

41 57 76

30 50 65

6 10 16

10 8 6

30 50 65

10 8 6

0372 00 36 0372 01 0372 02 800 600 600 48 0372 03 63 0372 04 85 0372 07 500 300 300 0372 08 0372 09 0372 20 0372 21 0372 40 0372 41 36 0372 42 0372 43 800 600 600 0372 44 0372 46 0372 47 0372 60 0372 61 0372 62 48 0372 63 63 0372 64 85 0372 67 500 300 300 0372 68 36 0372 69 800 600 600 IEC 60947-7-1, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059 Ie: Rated current NF C 15100 table 52H, column 4

41 57 76 32

6 10 16 4

Cat. Nos.

IEC

CSA

Nominal cross-section UL

IEC (mm2) CSA (AWG) UL (AWG)

0372 10 0372 11 0372 12 4 0372 70 0372 71 800 600 600 0372 72 6 10 0372 73(1) (1) 16 0372 74 0372 79 4 IEC 60947-7-2, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059 (1) PEN terminal blocks

Voltage (V)

0372 54 0372 55 0372 56

8 6 10

Current (A)

CSA

IEC

CSA

500

300

Rated current (A)

IEC (mm2)

CSA (AWG)

UL (AWG)

IEC

CSA

Current (A) UL

IEC

0372 80 500 300 300 15 0372 81 or 250 250 6.3 0372 80 + 375 15 250 0372 82 0372 83 0372 84 500 300 300 15 0372 85 0372 86 IEC 60947-7-1/7-3, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059

48·7 56·2

51·5

74·3

Cat. No. 0372 80

CSA (AWG)

UL (AWG)

2.5

Short-circuit + overload

42·1 49·6

90·5 83

46·6

Cat. No. 0372 84/86 27

46·5 54

80 83·8 76·3

56·1 63·6

Cat. Nos. 0372 09/12/ 46/47/54/69/79

Cat. Nos. 0372 07/08/55/56/67/68

290

91·7

83·3

42·4

15 6.3

Cat. Nos. 0372 81/82/83/85

84·7 42·1 49·6

69·4

89·1

15 6.3

IEC (mm2)

Separate blocks Assembled blocks Separate blocks Assembled blocks 4 W / 6.3 A 1.6 W / 6.3 A 1.6 W / 6.3 A 0372 81 or 0372 80 + 0375 15(1) Pvk = 4.75 W Pvk = 2 W Pv = 1.65 W (1): With or without blown fuse indicator Cat. No. 0375 25

54·1

Cat. Nos. 0372 10/11/ 40/41/42/43/44

51·3 58·8

84·9

Short-circuit

Cat. Nos.

Cat. Nos. 0372 04/ 64/74

CSA

Nominal cross-section

Power according to EN 60947-7-3

66·4

42·1

Voltage (V)

Cat. Nos. 0372 00/01/ 20/21/60/61/70/71 Cat. Nos. 0372 02/62/72 Cat. Nos. 0372 03/63/73

49·6

Conductor cross-section (mm2)

Cat. Nos.

IEC 60947-7-1, CSA no. 22-2 no. 158, UL 1059

Working voltage acc. to EN 60079-7: 1-level terminal blocks: 500 V Blocks with 2 entries - 2 exits: 500 V 2-level terminal blocks: 250 V

Disconnect blocks

Nominal cross-section

IEC

12 to 24 12 to 24 12 to 24

Approved by ATEX: LCIE 07 ATEX 0010 U-0081 II 1 or 2 G or D Ex e/i/tD/iD II The terminal blocks with spring connection covered by this certificate are 1- and 2-level connecting terminal blocks, and blocks for protection conductor with metal base (detailed list on p. 278) The main characteristics are: Operating temperature: - 30°C to + 55°C Maximum temperature of materials: + 85°C

Certificate of conformity of component for the customer is available on request

Function blocks Cat. Nos.

Diode for Cat. Nos. 0372 54/55 - 1N4007 type 1A - direct current = 1 A - peak inverse voltage 1 000 V - inverse current 5 µA at 25°C

Rated current:

Blocks for protection conductor Voltage (V)

Cat. No. 0372 56

52·3 59·8

Cat. Nos.

Cat. No. 0372 55

Viking 3 accessories for terminal blocks

Stripped lengths (mm) Spring terminal width (mm)

8 to 12

End stops Cat. No. 0375 10

Cat. No. 0375 11

52·7 45·9

8 to 13 8 to 15

48·4

46·4 53·9

Protection against fire and panic risks in public buildings/UTE C 12-201 guide

Cat. No. 0375 12

Cat. No. 0375 13 114

40·3 38·8 46·3

49·7

59 51·5

Separation and insulation dividers

End caps Cat. Nos. 0375 50 0375 51 0375 52 0375 53 0375 54 0375 55 0375 56 0375 57 0375 86 0375 87 0375 88 0375 89 0375 90

Cat. Nos. 0375 54 0375 60 0375 61 0375 62 0375 63 0375 95 0375 96

Thickness (mm) 2 2.5 2 2 2.5 2 1.4 1.4 1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2

Thickness (mm) 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.5 2.8 2.7

Equipotential bridging combs/bars Cat. Nos. 0375 01 0375 02 0375 04 0375 05 0375 07 0375 08 0375 40 0375 42 0375 44 0375 46 0375 47 0375 82 0375 85

Cross-section (mm2) 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 6 10 16 35 2.5 2.5 10 16

Shielding clamps Mounting on rail with accessory Cat. No. 0364 69(1)

Mounting on bar 10 x 3 Cat. No. 0375 34

Mounting on plate

Art. EL 3, definitions: "Security installations are those that have to be put into or maintained in service to ensure the evacuation of the public" or facilitate the intervention of the first-aid Art. EL 16, power supply circuits in security installations section 1a: "…the corresponding junction or deviation devices and their enclosures except for the waterproofing systems must satisfy the incandescent cable test defined in the standard in force, the temperature of the incandescent cable being 960 °C" Viking 3 terminal blocks satisfy the incandescent cable test 960 °C according to standard IEC 60695-2-11

39·3

31·8

5 6 8 10 12

n Characteristics and dimensions (mm) Rigid or flexible cable

Cat. Nos. 0375 30 0375 31 0375 32

A 13.5 20 24.8

18 20.3 26

26 31.4 40

D 5.6 5.3 5.3

(1) For more information please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

291

Viking 3 heavy duty terminal blocks

With CAB 3 marking

0390 11 (interior view)

0390 11

Direct connection Al/Cu

0390 10

Possibility of sealing

Technical characteristics (p. 293) Pack

Cat. Nos.

For copper and aluminium cables

Pack

Bridging the gap between the enclosure and external cables Fixed using metal clip for rails 4 15 mm depth and 4 EN 60715, 15 mm depth or on plate with screws Fitted with covers with cut-outs Permits the use of CAB 3 markers Test via test plug Ø4 closed covers Blocks with identical width can be joined using a threaded rod Supports shunt with Cat. Nos. 0394 46/47 Cable/cable 5 5

5 5 5

5 5

Rigid or flexible connecting cable (mm²)

Width (mm)

Connecting plate max. (mm²)

Width (mm)

Connecting plate max. (mm²)

Rigid or flexible connecting cable (mm²)

0390 10 Al/Cu 35 to 120 Cu 35 to 70 42 0390 11 Al/Cu 70 to 300 Cu 70 to 150 55 Terminal for cable lug/terminal for cable lug 0390 13 0390 14 0390 15

0390 17 0390 18

Al/Cu 95 Al/Cu 95 Al/Cu 150 Al/Cu 150 Al/Cu 300 Al/Cu 300 Terminal for cable lug/cable Al/Cu 150 Al/Cu 300

Cu 35 to 95 Cu 70 to 150

36 42 55

Shunt 0394 46 For blocks with width 36 and 42 mm 0394 47 For blocks with width 55 mm

Heavy duty terminal blocks Bridging the gap between the enclosure and external cables Plastic foot For use with terminal marker sheets For symmetrical rails Fixed using metal clip on rails 4 15 mm depth and 4 EN 60715, 15 mm depth

5 5 5 5

0390 71 0390 72 0390 73 0390 74

5 5 5 5

0390 31 0390 32 0390 33 0390 34

Connecting max. (mm²)

Width of plate (mm)

Stud (Ø)

Width (mm)

42 55

10 10

0394 77 0394 78

0394 86

5 5

0394 88 0394 89

Separation barriers Take protective covers Marking possible with CAB 3 For terminals with width 26 mm For terminals with width 34 and 46 mm Protective covers For mounting on separation barriers For 3 terminals with width 46 mm or for 4 terminals with width 34 mm For 4 terminals with width 26 mm For 4 terminals with width 46 mm

End stops (p. 286)

(1) Previously M 12 + block length 78·5 mm (2) Previously M 16 + block length 94 mm

292

Width (mm)

35 15 M8 70 20 M 10 120 25 M 10 240 35 M 12 For asymmetrical rails Fixed using metal clip on rails 1 EN 60715 35 15 M8 70 20 M 10 120 25 M 10(1) 240 35 M 12 (2)

26 34 34 46

Accessories for heavy duty plate terminal blocks

Accessories for heavy duty terminal blocks for copper and aluminium cables 5 5

Cat. Nos.

Viking 3 heavy duty terminal blocks

n Characteristics of heavy duty terminal blocks for copper and aluminium cables IK 04 Conform to IEC 60947-7-1, EN 60947-7-1 UL 1059 and 486 E - CSA 22-2 Fire resistant IEC 60695-2-11: 960°C (except cover) V2 according to UL 94 Insulation voltage Ui: 1 000 V Impulse voltage Uimp: 12 kV Insulating material: - polyamide body - 30 °C to + 100 °C - polypropylene cover - 25 °C to + 100 °C

Cable section equivalence table mm2

120

150

185

300

AWG

0000

250

300

350

600

F G H

Dimensions (mm)

E C D

Connection table

Cat. Nos. Connection Width of Screw (mm2) plate (mm) Ø Cable - Cable

Connection Width of Screw (mm2) plate (mm) Ø

Rigid or flexible Rigid or flexible – – – – 0390 10 Cu/Al: 35 to 120 Cu: 35 to 70 Rigid or flexible Rigid or flexible – – – – 0390 11 Cu/Al: 70 to 300 Cu: 70 to 150 Terminal for cable lug - Terminal for cable lug 0390 13 Cu/Al: max. 95 28 M 8 0390 14 Cu/Al: max. 150 34 M 10 0390 15 Cu/Al: max. 300 46 M 12 Terminal for cable lug - Cable 0390 17 Cu/Al: max. 150 34 M 10 0390 18 Cu/Al: max. 300 46 M 12

Cu/Al: max. 95 Cu/Al: max. 150 Cu/Al: max. 300

28 34 46

M 8 M 10 M 12

Rigid or flexible – – Cu: 35 to 95 Rigid or flexible – – Cu: 70 to 150

Width (mm) 42

36 42 55

Cat. Nos.

A max. A min.

0390 13 0390 10/14/17 0390 11/15/18

227 296 337

155 200 216

36 42 55

82 83.5 107.3

73 74.5 98.5

88 89.5 113.5

176 212 257

185 221 266

191 227 272

42 55

n Characteristics of heavy duty plate terminal blocks IEC EN 60947-7-1 Fire resistance: 960°C, IEC EN 60695-2-11 V2 according to UL 94 Insulating material: polyamide - 30 °C to + 100 °C

Voltage (V) Intensity (A) Cat. Nos. IEC IEC 0390 31/71 1 000 125 0390 32/72 1 000 192 0390 33/73 1 000 269 0390 34/74 1 000 415

Terminal for cable lug terminal for cable lug

Cable - cable

A min. A max.

Dimensions (mm) A

Cable - terminal for cable lug

Terminal for cable lug - cable

Currents table

Cat. Nos. 0390 31/32/33/34

Current (A)

Short-circuit current (kA)

Tightening torque (Nm)

0390 10

340

250

200

170

14·4

8·4

0390 11

570

400

300

285

Cat. Nos. 0390 31 0390 32 0390 33(1) 0390 34(2) 0390 71 0390 72 0390 73 0390 74

n Separation barriers

at. Nos. Shunted C input IEC

I/O currents IEC CSA UL

Shunted input

I/O

Site

Factory

Width (mm)

Cable - Cable

A M8 M 10 M 10 M 12 M8 M 10 M 10 M 12

B 56 61 61 64

Cat. Nos. 0390 71/72/73/74 B'

C 84 84 84 86 84 84 84 86

55.3 60.4 60.4 63.5

Terminal for cable lug - Terminal for cable lug 0390 13

310

250

230

11·4

0390 14

415

340

285

0390 15

670

520

420

Dimensions (mm) B

Terminal for cable lug - Cable 0390 17

415

315

210

230

11·4

0390 18

670

420

325

285

55 A

Shunts 0394 46 450 max.

–

0394 47 700 max.

–

Cat. Nos. A 0394 77 106 Cat. Nos. 0394 77/78 0394 78 188

B 82 102

Thickness 8 12

(1) Previously M 12 + block length 78·5 mm (2) Previously M 16 + block length 94 mm

293

distribution terminal blocks

■ Connection protection IP 2x finger protection

Shroud available in 3 colours

Captive screw with universal head (cross/ flat blade screwdriver)

0048 03 0048 22 0048 32 0048 12

Conform to standard IEC 60998-2-1 Supplied ready for use (screws backed-off) 100 A max. - 400 V with 25 mm2 incoming 80 A max. - 400 V with 16 mm2 incoming Ipk (kA) 60 : Icw (kA) 3·5

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Multiple fixing options – see details

Unshrouded terminal blocks Fix using M4 dia. screw from rear of mounting plate Terminal Incoming capacity

10 10 10 10 10

Outgoing capacity

length (mm)

1 x 6 to 25 mm2 4 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 8 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 14 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 19 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 24 x 1·5 to 16 mm2

0048 01 0048 03 0048 05 0048 06 0048 07

45 73 122 157 192

Fixes into side supports to construct a distribution block

■ Use of terminal supports Cat. No. 0048 10 0048 10

Partly shrouded terminals on base For fixing to 12 x 2 mm rail Supplied with Duplix markers(1) Incoming capacity

10 10 10 10

(1)

0048 20 0048 22(1)(2) 0048 24(1)(2) 0048 25(1)

Terminal length (mm)

Outgoing capacity 2

– 4 x 1·5 to 16 mm – 8 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 2 1 x 6 to 25 mm 12 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 16 x 1·5 to 16 mm2

47 75 113 141

Fully shrouded terminals providing finger protection IP 2x

10 10 10 10 10 10

Phase (black)

Neutral (blue)

0048 50 0048 52(2) 0048 54(2) 0048 55 0048 56 0048 58

0048 40 0048 42(2) 0048 44(2) 0048 45 0048 46 0048 48

For fixing to 12 x 2 mm rail Incoming capacity

Outgoing capacity

Terminal length (mm)

– – 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 2 x 6 to 25 mm2

4 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 8 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 12 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 16 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 21 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 33 x 1·5 to 16 mm2

47 75 113 141 176 276

Terminal supports Cat. No. 0048 10 fitted with fully shrouded terminals providing custom made distribution

0048 50 0048 11

Earth (green)

10 10 10 10 10 10

0048 30 0048 32(2) 0048 34(2) 0048 35 0048 36 0048 38

– 4 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 47 – 8 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 75 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 12 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 113 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 16 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 141 1 x 6 to 25 mm2 21 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 176 2 x 6 to 25 mm2 33 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 276 Fully shrouded terminals for looping Supplied with Duplix markers(1) Terminal

0048 12(1)

6 x 6 to 25 mm2 – 54 Fully shrouded terminal blocks 3 phase + neutral (3 black + 1 blue)

Incoming capacity

0048 14

Outgoing capacity

Neutral x 1 1 x 4 to 25 mm2 12 x 1·5 to 16 mm2 Phase x 3 1x1·5 to16 mm2 3 x 1·5 to 16 mm2

length (mm)

0048 40

0048 22

0048 34

Adaptor support Cat. No. 0048 11 showing method of fixing terminals

Terminal length (mm)

227

Supports for terminal blocks 1

0048 10

0048 11

0048 19

Consists of two side supports enabling the positioning of up to 4 x IP 2x terminal blocks with the same dimensions to create a 2, 3 or 4 pole distribution block Adaptor support for or rail. Provides a firm fixing allowing IP 2x terminal blocks to be side or top mounted on to adaptor 1 metre length of 12 x 2 mm terminal mounting rail - accepts partly and fully shrouded terminals

4 1

(1) Each terminal supplied with : - 2 green Duplix markers ( ) - 2 blue Duplix markers (N) - 2 red Duplix markers (L) (2) Can be fixed directly to DIN rail without accessory

294

IP 2x terminals are the ideal companion for Plexo boxes, see p. 258

distribution blocks 40 to 160 A

modular style - rail or screw fixing

Conform to standard EN 60947-1 Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 500 V Impulse (surge) voltage (Uimp) : 8 kV Degree of pollution : 3 (conductive dust) Self-extinguishing 960 °C for supports and active parts

■ Dimensions

Double pole 40 - 100 - 125 A

0048 88 + 0048 45 44 L

Length

0048 80 0048 81 0048 82 0048 84 0048 85 0048 86 0048 88 0048 79

70 105 140 70 105 105 140 179

88.5

Four pole 40 - 100 - 125 A

Cat. Nos.

0048 79 44

Connection with or without Starfix ferrules (p. 301) L

Modular style blocks

Ways per bar

0048 81 40 A

0048 80 100 A

0048 82 125 A

11 2 5 2 11 2 2

Capacity rigid flexible (mm2) (mm2)

1·5 to 4 6 to 16 2·5 to 10 10 to 25 2·5 to 10 10 to 25 10 to 35

0·75 to 4 4 to 10 1·5 to 10 6 to 16 1·5 to 10 6 to 16 10 to 25

Ipk peak withstand Icw current (kA) (kA)

Four pole 160 A

96.8

Fixing on rail or on plate using 2 screws Supplied complete with rear insulated plate and transparent cover Bar identification possible using CAB 3 markers When installing under a front plate a blank can also be clipped on to the front plate Additional IP 2x terminals can be fitted (see table opposite) Double pole

Cat. Nos.

91.5

Pack

Number of modules

44 L

4·5

Four pole Ways per bar

0048 85 40 A

0048 84 100 A

0048 86 125 A

0048 88 125 A

0048 79 160 A

11 2 5 2 7 2 2 11 4 1 8 4 2

Capacity flexible rigid (mm2) (mm2)

1·5 to 4 6 to 16 2·5 to 10 10 to 25 2·5 to 10 10 to 25 10 to 35 2·5 to 10 10 to 35 35 to 70 2·5 to 10 10 to 25 10 to 35

0·75 to 4 4 to 10 1·5 to 10 6 to 16 1·5 to 10 6 to 16 10 to 25 1·5 to 10 6 to 25(1) 35 to 70 1·5 to 10 6 to 16 10 to 25(1)

Ipk peak withstand Icw current (kA) (kA)

Number of modules

4·5

14·5

4·2

8·4

0048 88 + 0048 45

Extend your wiring capability using IP 2x fully shrouded terminals on the following : (see p. 294) Distribution block Cat. Nos. 0048 80 0048 81 0048 82 0048 84 0048 85 0048 86 0048 88 0048 79

IP 2x Terminal (1)

0048 32 0048 34(1) 0048 35(1) 0048 42(2) 0048 44(2) 0048 44(2) 0048 45(2) 0048 45(2)

Characteristics Rating Voltage 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V

80 A 40 A 100 A 80 A 40 A 100 A 100 A 100 A

0048 80 + 0048 32

(1) Supplied with short ferrule

(1) (green cover) (2) Neutral (blue cover)

295

distribution blocks 125 to 400 A

four pole

■ Extra-flat distribution blocks for lugs 125 A Cat. No. 0374 47 - Ipk peak withstand current 25 kA Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 500 V Self-extinguishing : 960 °C 58 61.5

265

135 59

289

0374 00

250 A Cat. No. 0374 00 - Ipk peak withstand current 60 kA Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 1 000 V : 960 °C Self-extinguishing 0

0373 08

Extra-flat distribution blocks for lugs

Neutral outgoing

1 x 35 mm2

10 x 16 mm2 17 x 16 mm2 M5 M5 Connection possible using connector Cat. No. 0373 65 (p. 297)

0374 03 Connector for Cat. No. 0374 00 converts outgoing terminal to : • 1 x 1·5 to 6 mm2 Ø 5·3 mm • 2 x 6 to 16 mm2 Ø 7·5 mm Dimensions : 29 x 29 x 16·8 mm

125 A (77 mm depth) 0373 95 Fix to (15 mm high) or by M4 screws Four 12 x 4 mm bars each equipped with : • Five 2 x 10 mm2 claw connectors per bar (not mounted)

125 A (125 mm depth) 0374 30 Fix to mounting plate by M6 screws Four 15 x 4 mm bars each equipped with : Incoming

Outgoing

1 x 35 mm2 - M8 screw

5 x 25 mm2 - M6 screw

160 A (125 mm depth) 0374 31 Fix to mounting plate by M6 screws Four 18 x 4 mm bars each equipped with : Incoming

Outgoing

1 x 70 mm2 - M8 screw

5 x 35 mm2 - M6 screw

250 A (155 mm depth) 0374 35 Fix to mounting plate by M6 screws Four 25 x 4 mm bars each equipped with : Incoming

1 x 120 mm2 - M10 screw 1

228

77 71

1 connector Cat. No. 0374 03

Stepped distribution blocks for lugs 1

125 A Cat. No. 0373 95 - Ipk peak withstand current 20 kA Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 600 V Self-extinguishing : 850 °C

Outgoing

5 x 50 mm2 - M8 screw

400 A (107 mm depth) 0373 08 With front insulation sheet Four 32 x 5 mm bars equipped with : Incoming

Outgoing

2 x Ø 8·5 mm holes for bar/flexible bar

21 x M6 holes for 70 mm2 max cable lugs

108

14.5 122.5

125/160/250 A Cat. Nos. 0374 30/31/35 - Ipk peak withstand current 35 kA Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 1 000 V Impulse (surge) voltage (Uimp) : 12 kV Degree of pollution : 3 (conductive dust) Self-extinguishing : 850 °C

1 x 70 mm2 or 1 x 50 mm2 plus 1 x 35 mm2 or 2 x 35 mm2

C D E F

Dimensions (mm) Rating

125 A

225

125

110

125

165

189

6·5

117·5

165

108

160 A

240

125

110

125

165

189

6·5

117·5

180

120

250 A

260

155

110

125

185

209

6·5

147·5

195

120

400 A(1) Cat. No. 0373 08 - Ipk peak withstand current 42 kA Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 1 000 V Impulse (surge) voltage (Uimp) : 12 kV Degree of pollution : 3 (conductive dust) Self-extinguishing : 960 °C 4 460 395 300

260

101

either

200

■ Stepped distribution blocks for lugs

Outgoing

83.5

150 mm2

125 150 165

75.5

250 A (75·5 mm depth) 0374 00 Fix to mounting plate by M6 screws Four bars each equipped with : Incoming

6.5

No. of 17·5 mm modules

Phase outgoing

Incoming

M8 Plate width : 35 mm 140

220

125 A screw type (60 mm depth) 0374 47 Fix to (15 mm high) or by M6 screws Four bars each equipped with :

Cat. Nos.

107

Pack

2 250

440

(1) It is recommended that the unit is fitted horizontally with a minimum face plate height of 300 mm

296

distribution blocks

for assembly

■ Copper connector bars with threaded holes Cat. Nos. 0373 88/89

Cat. No. 0374 33/34

c 9

0373 96

0373 98

0374 37

990 15/18

990

M5 18

M6 9

Cat. No. 0374 38

For making up distribution blocks of varying lengths using bars and connectors below Supplied with insulated screws for mounting optional protective cover (except 0373 98) 5

Set of 2 insulated 4 pole supports 0373 96 For bars 12 x 2 or 12 x 4 mm

10 10

Single pole supports 0373 98 For bars 12 x 2 or 12 x 4 mm 0374 37 For bars 15 x 4, 18 x 4 or 25 x 4 mm

Copper connector bars With threaded holes

0373 88 0373 89 0374 33 0374 34 0374 38 0374 19

12 x 2 12 x 4 15 x 4 18 x 4 25 x 4 32 x 5

M5 M5 M6 M6 M6 M6

18 18 18 18 18 25

110 160 200 245 280 450

Length (mm)

990 990 990 990 990 1 750

Size

Ithe (A)

Ic (A)

0373 88 0373 89 0374 33 0374 34 0374 38 0374 19

12 x 2 12 x 4 15 x 4 18 x 4 25 x 4 32 x 5

110 160 200 245 280 450

80 125 160 200 250 400

Clamp type – For bars with threaded holes 12 x 4 (mm) For one or two conductors 0373 65 1·5 to 10 mm2 (supplied with Ø 5 mm screw)

Current ratings according to EN 60947-1 : • Ith : bars in free air • Ithe : bars enclosed with ventilation • Ic : bars totally enclosed in a weatherproof enclosure

Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : Cat. No. 0373 96 : 690 V - Impulse voltage (surge) (Uimp) : 8 kV Degree of pollution (conductive dust) : 3 Distance between supports (mm) Cat. Nos. Bar size In (A) Peak withstand current (kA) 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

0373 96 12 x 4 (12 x 2) 125 (80)

Cat. No. 0373 96

400 (200) 300 (150) 200 (125) 150 (100) – – –

■ Insulated supports single pole

Cat. No. 0373 98

Cat. No. 0374 37

4.5 8.7 8.7 25.5

Front view for 12 x 4 mm bar

6.2

For mounting on rail EN 60715 and 15 mm depth 0044 16 10 mm width With threaded Ø 4 mm hole

2 12.4

6.2

View from above

Capacity

0373 60 1·5 to 4 mm2 0373 61 6 to 16 mm2 0373 62 10 to 35 mm2 (supplied with hexagonal 5 mm M6 screw)

12.4

25 =

17.5

25.5

Clips

■ Insulated supports four pole :

Front view for 12 x 2 mm bar

Cage type – For bare 12 x 4 mm bars 100 10 10

Insulation voltage according to EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1 : 500 V Impulse voltage (surge) (Uimp) : 8 kV Degree of pollution (conductive dust) : 3

Connectors

100

Cat. Nos.

10 10 10 10 10 4

Threaded Max. holes thermal Ø mm Pitch rating (A)

by M4 screws supplied

M6 9

Size (mm)

Mounting by claws 0044 16 supplied or M4 screws not supplied

Insulated supports

Cat. Nos.

25.5

Pack

0374 33

1 750

M6 18

Cat. No. 0374 19 990

Max. space between 2 supports : bar size 12 x 2 : 20 cm, 12 x 4 : 25 cm

The distance between supports can be determined using the chart Select the peak withstand current (kA rating) and the distance between bars - dimension E (mm) after choosing your bar and support Distance between supports (mm) Cat. Nos. Bar size In (A) E (mm) Peak withstand current (kA) 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

0373 98 12 x 2/12 x 4 80/125 75 100

125

400 300 250 200 – – –

600 450 350 250 – – –

– 800 600 400 – – –

350 250 150 125 100 – –

800 600 450 300 – – –

0374 37 15 x 4/18 x 4/25 x 4 160/200/245 75 100

600 400 225 150 125 100 –

750 500 300 200 150 125 –

125

– 700 375 250 175 150 –

297

Transcab cable ducting

Transcab® open slot cable ducting PVC and PC/ABS halogen free

Ideal for almost any industrial application, Transcab is used by professional panel builders all over the world. 6361 25

6361 17

6362 17

6362 07

Dimensions and technical information (p. 300) Accessories (p. 299) Conforms to EN 50085 Parts 2 and 3, UL and CSA Material : PVC self-extinguishing or PC/ABS halogen free Colour : grey RAL 7030 (PVC) or light grey RAL 7035 (PC/ABS) PC/ABS range passes IEC 695-2-1 850 °C glow wire test Operating temp. : –5 to +60 °C UL classification : UL94 VO Oxygen index : 43 % (PVC) or 37 % (PC/ABS) EN ISO 4589 (low fume) Metric size body in 2 m lengths (6 mm gap/6·5 mm finger width) DIN fixing centres of 12·5/25 mm Maximum space for cables with good heat dissipation Exit cables at terminal or base level Pre-scored base enables the ducting to be snapped to length, once the reinforcement bar is removed Rounded fingers are easily removed at the terminal or base level, without injury during wiring Cover can be cut without surface damage due to the raised edges which also provide a guide for labels Pack(1)

Cat. Nos. PVC Grey RAL 7030

Transcab’s body has 6 mm gaps and 6·5 mm fingers with unique support ribs for a rigid construction. Its rounded-end fingers can be removed at support rib or base level, making it easy to break to length and create T-junctions without the need for a saw. Covers clip into place and have raised lines making it easy to align labels. 298

32 60 56 40 56 48 32 24 24 56 48 32 24 24 40 40 32 24 16 16 24 24 20 16 12

6360 95 6361 00 6361 05 6360 96 6361 01 6361 06 6361 11 6361 15 6361 19 6361 02 6361 07 6361 12 6361 16 6361 20 6361 03 6361 08 6361 13 6361 17 6361 21 6361 25 6361 09 6361 14 6361 18 6361 22 6361 23

PC/ABS Grey RAL 7030 halogen free

6362 02 6362 07 6362 12

6362 13 6362 17 6362 25

Plastic cable ducting (base + cover) 2 metre lengths Width x Height (mm)

15 x 25 25 x 25 40 x 25 15 x 40 25 x 40 40 x 40 60 x 40 80 x 40 100 x 40 25 x 60 40 x 60 60 x 60 80 x 60 100 x 60 25 x 80 40 x 80 60 x 80 80 x 80 100 x 80 120 x 80 40 x 100 60 x 100 80 x 100 100 x 100 150 x 100

Capacity (mm2)

264 391 692 455 720 1 245 1 932 2 647 3 363 1 159 2 007 3 115 4 200 5 307 1 600 2 717 4 216 5 715 7 215 8 729 3 354 5 216 7 078 8 960 13 683

Spare covers 2 metre lengths PVC

36 36 36 36 36

PC/ABS

0370 10 0370 11 0370 12 0370 13 6362 93 0370 14 6362 94

Width (mm)

15 - also used for marking(2) 25 40 60 80 (1) Metres contained in each pack (2) Clips to label holder cat. No. 0367 02

Lina 25® open slot cable ducting PVC

Transcab® and Lina 25® accessories

0367 01 Cable retainer

6360 17 0367 10 Reinforcement bar cutting tool 6360 13

0367 02 Label holder

0361 95 Rivet

Dimensions and technical information (p. 300) Accessories (opposite) Conforms to EN 50085 Parts 2 and 3, UL and CSA Material : PVC Colour : grey RAL 7030 with white strips on the cover Metric size body in 2 metre lengths (6 mm gap/6·5 mm finger width) DIN fixing centres of 12·5/25 mm Maximum space for cables with good heat dissipation Exit cables at terminal or base level Pre-scored base enables the ducting to be snapped to length, once the reinforcement bar is removed Reinforcement bar provides not only rigidity but also an anchor for cable ties Cover clips easily into position and remains firmly in place Additional accessories enable faster fixing and marking

Lina 25 plastic cable ducting

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Metres per pack

Length 2m

Width x Height (mm)

Capacity (mm2)

60 56 56 48 32 40 32 24

6360 00 6360 01 6360 02 6360 07 6360 12 6360 08 6360 13 6360 17

25 x 25 25 x 40 25 x 60 40 x 60 60 x 60 40 x 80 60 x 80 80 x 80

391 720 1 159 2 007 3 115 2 717 4 216 5 716

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Ducting accessories

100

6361 90 Insulated Nylon fixing screws Ø 6 mm

500

6361 95 Insulated plastic rivets Ø 6 mm

0367 01 Cable retainer

0367 02 Label holder (clips to finger)

0367 10 Tool for cutting 6 mm reinforcement bar

Linafix fixing accessory

Material : polyamide 6/6 For fixing ducting to enclosure duct 0366 42 Fits under warning lights or other auxiliary controls attached to door. Enables direct mounting of ducting by a manual 1/4 turn

Braided sleeving Material: black polyester 25 m roll in dispenser box Used to protect runs of cables to door equipment Cable bunch diameter

0366 38 Ø 20 mm

10 - 30 mm

0366 39 Ø 30 mm

18 - 54 mm

0395 98 Indelible for marking

Black felt tip pen

299

Transcab® and Lina 25® open slot cable ducting

■ Dimensions C

Ducting width 25 to 120 mm 6 mm gap – 6·5 mm finger width

■ Detail of base perforations

Transcab Cat. Nos.

Lina 25 Cat. Nos.

6361 00 6361 01 6361 06 6361 11 6361 02 6361 07 6361 12 6361 16 6361 20 6361 03 6361 08 6361 13 6361 17 6361 21 6361 25 6361 14 6361 22 6361 23

6360 00 6360 01

B (mm)

C (mm)

D (mm)

25 25 40 60 25 40 60 80 100 25 40 60 80 100 120 60 100 150

25 40 40 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 80 100 100 100

6 5 10 – 6 10 10 10 – – 10 10 10 – – – – –

10·1 12·6 12·6 16·1 16·1 16·1 16·1 16·1 16·1 18·6 18·6 18·6 18·6 18·6 18·6 20·6 20·6 20·6

6360 02 6360 07 6360 12

6360 08 6360 13 6360 17

Calculating the ducting usable cross-section Graph for H 05 V-K and H 07 V-K cables with 0·75 packing coefficient

2 000 8

Usable 2 cross-section (mm )

7079

m 1

7000

1 .5

12.5

Cat. No. 0362 25

8000

Width 15 mm

12.5

8960

2 .5

4.5

9000 8730

1 950 12.5

6000 5716

2 000 1 950

Cat. No. 6361 13 Cat. No. 6361 16

4.5

6.5

Width 25 to 60 mm

3354 3000 2717 2000

1000 730 460 300

12.5 12.5

3115

Cat. No. 6361 12 Cat. No. 6361 08 Cat. No. 6361 07

2008 1932 1246 1159

Cat. No. 6361 11 Cat. No. 6361 02

720 692 391

Cat. No. 6361 01 Cat. No. 6361 05 Cat. No. 6361 00 100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800 900 Number of conductors

Example : 150 conductors 0·75 mm2 → 1 230 mm2 cross-section and 120 conductors 1·5 mm2 → 1 700 mm2 cross-section Makes a total of 2 930 mm2

2 000 1 950

Cat. No. 6361 17

4216 4200

2 m

75 0.

5216 5000

12.5

A (mm)

4m m2

1.8

6 mm

12.5

10 mm2

6.25

6.5

25 4.5

6.5

Width 80 to 120 mm

The correct cable ducting is Cat. No. 6361 12, 60 x 60, with a capacity of 3 115 mm2 Faster base build without a saw

6.5

Remove reinforcement bars at required length and break ‘T’ junctions made easy

12.5

1 Clip out the required section width reinforcement bars and snap out section 2 Form tee section and fix into place 3 Ready for wiring – cut cover to suit

300

Starfix® ferrules and crimping tools

0376 50

0376 87

0376 66

Adjustable cross-section

0376 09 + refill 0376 43

0376 06

Pack

Cat. Nos.

NEW 0376 50 0376 60 0376 61 0376 62 0376 63 0376 64 0376 66 0376 67 0376 68

100 100 50

0376 69 0376 70 0376 71

100 100 100 100

0376 87 0376 88 0376 89 0376 90

Ferrules with insulating flange

Pack

For cables cross-section (mm²)

Colour

Strips

0.25 turquoise 0.34 green . 05 white . 0 75 blue 1 red . 15 black . 25 grey 4 orange 6 green Single ferrules (individual) 10 brown 16 white 25 black Double ferrules 2 x 0.75 blue 2x1 red . 2x15 black . 2x25 grey

10 12 12 12 25 25 25 10 10

50 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 25

Large capacity Starfix refills

Cross-section Colour (mm2)

0376 41 0376 42 0376 43 0376 44 0376 45

0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2.5

White Blue Red Black Grey

NEW 0376 08

0376 09

0376 39

NEW

Large capacity for less frequent applicator reloading Translucent packaging For direct mounting on crimping tool Cat. No. 0376 09

3 000 3 000 3 000 3 000 2 500

Cat. Nos.

Ferrules

0376 92

0376 39

Provide an equipotential link for all the strands of a flexible conductor Active part in tinned electrolytic copper Conform to NF C 63-023 Single ferrules (in strips)

500 500 480 480 1 000 1 000 1 000 250 250

0376 43

0376 10

0376 97

Cut and carry out 4-point crimping of ferrules from 0.25 to 6 mm2 in one operation Recommended for spring connections Dedicated applicator for each crimping tool for dispensing strips Starfix crimping tool for 0. 25 and 0.34 mm2 cross-sections Supplied with empty applicator fitted Starfix crimping tool for 0.5 to 2 .5 mm2 cross-sections Fitted with an adjustment wheel Supplied with empty applicator fitted Assorted kit, comprising : - 1 Starfix crimping tool, Cat. No. 0376 09 with empty applicator fitted - 120 x 0.5 mm2 ferrules - 120 x 0.75 mm2 ferrules - 240 x 1 mm2 ferrules - 320 x 1.5 mm2 ferrules - 200 x 2.5 mm2 ferrules Starfix crimping tool for 4 and 6 mm2 cross-sections Fitted with an adjustment wheel Supplied complete with empty applicator Starfix S multi-purpose crimping tool for 0.5 to 2 .5 mm2 cross-sections Tool cuts, strips, twists, crimps Supplied complete with 5 empty applicators For left and right-handed usage

Crimping tool for single and double ferrules

Number of ferrules per strip

300 300 300 300 250

Crimping tools for ferrules in strips

Starfix crimping tool for 0.25 to 6 mm2 cross-sections For 4-point crimping of ferrules from 0.25 to 6 mm2 NEW Recommended for spring connections 0376 06 Crimping tool with disengageable control system, crimping at end Right or left-handed

Starfix clamp for 10 to 50 mm2 cross-section 1

0376 92 Assorted kit. Supplied with : - 1 tool with crimping operation control system for individual ferrules 10 to 50 mm2 - 30 individual ferrules 10 mm2 - 20 individual ferrules 16 mm2 - 15 individual ferrules 25 mm2 - 10 individual ferrules 35 mm2 - 10 individual ferrules 50 mm2

301

Starfix® applicators

n Correspondance table Cross-section (mm2) 0376 47

0376 81 Ferrule

Single ferrule

Large capacity ferrule - refills

Starfix applicator

Starfix S applicator

0.5

0376 61

0376 41

0376 47

0376 80

0.75

0376 62

0376 42

0376 47

0376 81

1 1.5

0376 63

0376 43

0376 47

0376 82

0376 64

0376 44

0376 47

0376 83

2.5

0376 66

0376 45

0376 47

0376 84

Cat. Nos.

Cross-section (mm2) 0.25 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25

n Dimensions (mm)

Example of single/double ferrules on cables

Single ferrules Example of different cables and ferrules

Example of use with Viking 3 terminals

NEW 10 10 10

0376 46 0376 47 0376 48

5 5 5 5 5

0376 80 0376 81 0376 82 0376 83 0376 84

Starfix applicators For Starfix crimping tool For dispensing strips of ferrules in Starfix crimping tools Cat. Nos. 0376 08/09/10/97 For ferrules cross-section (mm²)

For ferrules cross-section (mm²)

0.5 0.75 (1) 1(1) 1.5 2.5

E A

Colour

0.25 and 0.34 yellow 0.5 to 2.5 red 4 and 6 orange For Starfix S multi-purpose crimping tool For dispensing colour-coded strips of ferrules Removable transparent cover

0376 41 0376 42 0376 43 0376 44 0376 45

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 18 18

14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 21 23 21 29 31

1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 1.7 2 2.6 3.2 3.9 4.9 6.3 7.9

3 3 3.4 3.4 3.6 4.1 4.8 5.7 7.2 8.1 9.8 12

Double ferrules Cat. Nos. D

Cat. Nos.

Pack

0376 50 0376 60 0376 61 0376 62 0376 63 0376 64 0376 66 0376 67 0376 68 0376 69 0376 70 0376 71

0376 87 0376 88 0376 89 0376 90

Cross-section (mm2) 2 x 0.75 2x1 2 x 1.5 2 x 2.5

8 8 8 10

15 15 16 18.5

2.1 2.35 2.6 3.3

6 6 7.2 8.4

3.3 4 4.2 4.8

Colour

white blue red black grey

n Starfix usage example

1 Fit the applicator

2 Adjust

3 Insert the cable

4 Crimp

The 2 material handle gives an excellent grip

n Starfix S usage example Starfix S tool

(1) If Tri-rated use one size larger applicator

302

1 Adjust the cross-section

2 Strip and twist

3 Crimp

marking system

CAB 3® marking system

for Viking 3 terminal blocks

for cables and Viking 3 terminal blocks

Another image needed

0395 20

0395 05 on Viking 3 terminal blocks 0395 98 Same markers for cable and terminal blocks

Strips of 20 markers For cables or Viking 3 terminal blocks Technical information (p. 305)

Pack

1 000 1 000 1 000

Cat. Nos.

Blank markers

Displayed by sheet of 100 pre-cut markers Manual marking or via Logicab 2 0395 00 For blocks 5 mm width 0395 01 For blocks 6 mm width 0395 02 For blocks 8 mm width

Numbers

1 000 0395 05 1 000 0395 06 1 000 0395 09 1 000 0395 10

Horizontal format Width of 5 mm From 1 to 10 (10 times) From 11 to 20 (10 times) From 1 to 50 (2 times) From 1 to 100

1 000 0395 15 1 000 0395 16 1 000 0395 19 1 000 0395 20 1 000 0395 21

Width of 6 mm From 1 to 10 (10 times) From 11 to 20 (10 times) From 1 to 50 (2 times) From 1 to 100 From 101 to 200

Black felt tip pen

Pack

Cat. Nos.

240 0381 60 240 0381 61 240 0381 62 240 0381 63

Markers for cables 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 cross-section and terminal blocks Numbers : black on white background (available in black on yellow background on request) 01 to 20 21 to 40 41 to 60 61 to 80

0395 98 Permanent marker

303

CAB 3® marking system

for cables and Viking 3 terminal blocks

0382 12

Perfect alignment of markers

Pack(1)

Markers for cables 0.15 to 0.5 mm2 and 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 cross-section and terminal blocks

Cat. Nos.

On Viking 3 terminal blocks - 4 markers 0.15 to 0.5 mm2 max. - 3 markers 0.15 to 1.5 mm2 max. 0.15 to 0.52 0.5 to 1.52 Digits : international colour code 1 000 1 200 0381 00 0382 10 0 Black 1 000 1 200 0381 01 0382 11 1 Brown 1 000 1 200 0381 02 0382 12 2 Red 0381 06 1 000 1 200 0381 03 0382 13 3 Orange 1 000 1 200 0381 04 0382 14 4 Yellow 1 000 1 200 0381 05 0382 15 5 Green 1 000 1 200 0381 06 0382 16 6 Blue 1 000 1 200 0381 07 0382 17 7 Purple 1 000 1 200 0381 08 0382 18 8 Grey 1 000 1 200 0381 09 0382 19 9 White Letters : black on yellow background 300 0381 10 0383 00 A 300 0381 11 0383 01 B 300 0381 12 0383 02 C 300 0381 13 0383 03 D 300 0381 14 0383 04 E 300 0381 15 0383 05 F 300 0381 16 0383 06 G 300 0381 17 0383 07 H 300 0381 18 0383 08 I 300 0381 19 0383 09 J 300 0381 20 0383 10 K 300 0381 21 0383 11 L 300 0381 22 0383 12 M 0383 17 300 0381 23 0383 13 N 300 0381 24 0383 14 O 300 0381 25 0383 15 P 0381 28 300 0381 26 0383 16 Q 300 0381 27 0383 17 R 300 0381 28 0383 18 S 300 0381 29 0383 19 T 300 0381 30 0383 20 U 300 0381 31 0383 21 V 300 0381 32 0383 22 W 300 0381 33 0383 23 X 300 0381 34 0383 24 Y 300 0381 35 0383 25 Z Conventional symbols : black on yellow background 300 0381 40 0382 70 / 300 0381 41 0382 71 • 0382 72 300 0381 42 0382 72 + 300 0381 43 0382 73 – 300 0381 44 0382 74 ± 300 0382 75 = 300 0382 76 T 0381 43

(1) Up to 0.5 mm2: strips of 25 markers From 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2: strips of 30 markers Upper 2.5 mm2: strips of 20 markers Price per marker

304

Terminal block with CAB 3 markers and label holders

Pack(1)

Cat. Nos.

Markers for cables 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 and 4 to 6 mm2 cross-section

1.5 to 2.52 4 to 62 Digits : international colour code 0382 20 0382 30 0 Black 0382 21 0382 31 1 Brown 0382 22 0382 32 2 Red 0382 32 0382 23 0382 33 3 Orange 0382 24 0382 34 4 Yellow 0382 25 0382 35 5 Green 0382 26 0382 36 6 Blue 0382 26 0382 27 0382 37 7 Purple 0382 28 0382 38 8 Grey 0382 29 0382 39 9 White Letters : black on yellow background 300 0383 30 0383 60 A 300 0383 31 0383 61 B 300 0383 32 0383 62 C 300 0383 33 0383 63 D 300 0383 34 0383 64 E 300 0383 35 0383 65 F 300 0383 36 0383 66 G 300 0383 37 0383 67 H 300 0383 38 0383 68 I 300 0383 39 0383 69 J 300 0383 40 0383 70 K 300 0383 41 0383 71 L 300 0383 42 0383 72 M 300 0383 43 0383 73 N 300 0383 44 0383 74 O 0383 46 300 0383 45 0383 75 P 300 0383 46 0383 76 Q 300 0383 47 0383 77 R 300 0383 48 0383 78 S 0383 79 300 0383 49 0383 79 T 300 0383 50 0383 80 U 300 0383 51 0383 81 V 300 0383 52 0383 82 W 300 0383 53 0383 83 X 300 0383 54 0383 84 Y 300 0383 55 0383 85 Z Conventional symbols : black on yellow background 300 0382 80 0382 90 / 300 0382 81 0382 91 • 300 0382 82 0382 92 + 0382 82 300 0382 83 0382 93 – 300 0382 84 0382 94 ± 300 0382 85 0382 95 = 300 0382 86 0382 96 T 0382 94

1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200

800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800

CAB 3® marking system

accessories

for cables and Viking 3 terminal blocks

n Dimensions Markers Polyamide 6/6 A

0384 92

0383 92 + CAB 3 markers

0384 90

Cable cross-section (mm ) 0.15 to 0.5 0.5 to 1.5 1.5 to 2.5 4 to 6 5 5 5.6 8 2

Dimensions A (mm)

5.05 3.7

B (mm) C (mm)

2.3

0.8/2.2

2.2/3

D (mm) C

Ø min./max. (mm)

6.4 4.3

7.6 4.9

9.6 7.1

2.8/3.8

4.3/5.3

Marker holders Cat. No. 0384 90

Cat. No. 0384 91

Cat. No. 0384 92 ·3

26 6·3

0383 97

·3 B

0382 00 Cat. Nos.

100 0384 90 50 0384 91 50 0384 92 100 0383 92

CAB 3 accessories Marker holders For cables cross-section from 10 mm2 to 70 mm2 Capacity : 8 digits, letters or symbols markers from 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 or 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 cross section Black, cross-section (mm2) 10 to 16 25 to 35 50 to 70 Support for markers Can be clipped on to Viking 3 terminal blocks Capacity : 7 markers from 0.15 to 0.5 mm2 6 markers from 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 Transparent applicators For rapid selection and application of markers on to cable For markers cross-section (mm2)

Applicator colour for identification of cross-section

10 0383 94 0.15 to 0.5 CAB 3 10 0383 95 0.5 to 1.5 CAB 3 10 0383 96 1.5 to 2.5 CAB 3 10 0383 97 4 to 6 CAB 3 Set of markers 1 0382 01 0.15 to 0.5 mm2 : 2 500 markers + 10 applicators (250 digits from 0 to 9) 1 0382 02 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 : 3 000 markers + 10 applicators (300 digits from 0 to 9) 1 0382 03 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 : 3 000 markers + 10 applicators (300 digits from 0 to 9) 1 0382 04 4 to 6 mm2 : 2 000 markers + 10 applicators (200 digits from 0 to 9)

On-site toolbox 1 0382 00 With removable tray for CAB 3 markers and applicators, Starfix ferrules etc. Height 85 mm, depth 280 mm, width 450 mm Metal, padlockable

Dim.

Section of cable for marking (mm ) 10 to 16 25 to 35 50 to 70 A (mm) 18 24.3 27.2 B (mm) 8.9 12.2 17.2 C (mm)

Support for markers Cat. No. 0383 92 On cable with marker holder Cat. No. 0384 92

10·7

Pack

n Characteristics and dimensions of on-site toolbox Cat. No. 0382 00

280

Bottom tray consists of : • 8 medium slots (each slot takes 1 box of CAB 3) • 1 large slot Top tray consists of : • 12 small slots (<=> approx. 6 boxes of CAB 3) • 1 medium slot for applicators Capacity : approx. 15 000 CAB 3 markers

450 85

On terminal blocks, with label holder Cat. No. 0383 92

On heavy duty terminal blocks

305

Colson® cable ties

Colring® cable ties

0319 16

0320 15/37/22/24

0319 55

0319 50

0320 42 supplied in blister pack

0320 65

0319 96

0320 72

0320 70

0320 88

Technical information (p. 307)

Technical information (p. 307) Pack

Cat. Nos.

Colring cable ties with internal teeth

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Blister packing

1000/10000 1000/10000 1000/6000 1000 1000 100/2000 100 1000/4000 100/2000

0320 30 0320 31 0320 32 0320 37 0320 38 0320 39 0320 40 0320 42 0320 43

Width (mm)

Flat length (mm)

Max. Ø grip capacity (mm)

Min. Ø grip capacity (mm)

Weight (g)

2·4 2·4 2·4 3·5 3·5 3·5 3·5 4·6 4·6

95 140 180 140 180 280 360 180 280

18 33 46 33 46 77 102 46 77

1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6

0·26 0·37 0·47 0·57 0·73 1·13 1·46 1·20 1·88

100/1000 100/1000 100/1000 100/500 100 100 100/1000

0319 13 0319 16 0319 19 0319 20 0319 21 0319 22 0319 25

100 100 100 100

0320 12 0320 15 0320 22 0320 24

Width (mm)

Flat length (mm)

Max. Ø grip capacity (mm)

Min. Ø grip capacity (mm)

Weight (g)

9 9 9 9 9 6 6

185 265 355 500 750 119 180

42 62 92 140 220 25 45

10 26 26 74 74 4 10

3·2 4·7 6·9 12·7 16·9 1·6 2·0

Accessories

Polyamide 6/6 black High temperature UV protected Blister packing 2·4 95 3·5 140 4·6 180 360 4·6

Colson cable ties Ultra-violet (U.V.) resistant cable ties External teeth Black polyamide 12

Polyamide 6/6 colourless

Black

100

18 33 46 102

1·6 1·6 1·6 1·6

0·26 0·57 1·20 2·38

Screw-on base for ties max. width 9 mm

0319 50 Height : 12 mm for cartridge-fired stud and rag-bolt Ø 6·35 and 7 and countersunk screws Ø 5 mm Wall plug bases Ø 8 mm drilling

100/1000

0319 55 Standard Tool for Colson cable ties

Accessories Self-adhesive bases 100/2000

For ties up to 4·6 mm max. width 0320 65 Colourless Screw mounting bases

1000 100

0320 70 For ties 4·6 mm max. width Central fixing (screw Ø 4 mm) 0320 72 For ties all widths Central fixing (screw Ø 5 mm) Tool for Colring cable ties Max. width 4·6 mm Direct adjustment of clamping tension by using the milled screw at the base of the handle After clamping, a blade automatically cuts the surplus length close to the head without leaving a burr

306

0320 88 P 46 tool for cable ties max. width 4·6 mm

1/10

0319 96 Black and red finish Allows tightening and trimming of Colson ties

Colring® and Colson® cable ties

■ Technical data - all cable ties

■ Technical data - Colson

Conform to EN 50146 Type

Colring colourless(4)

Colring black(4)

Colson black

UV protection

yes

Polyamide material

6/6

internal or external

internal

external

Teeth Halogen free(1)

yes

2·5 %

<0·7 %

- 20,000 hrs

85 °C

105 °C

85 °C

- 1,000 hrs

100 °C

120 °C

100 °C

- fitted

–15 °C

–40 °C

- assembly

–10 °C

0 °C

–30 °C

Humidity absorbtion(2)

Constant high quality Colson Type tests • Raw material test • Product test on the production line and in the laboratory • Packaging test Resistance to external agents

Resistance to rain

• Good resistance to oils, greases, petroleum products, saline mist and diluted acids

• Humidity absorption: ≤ 0·7%

Resistance to low temperatures

Resistance to sun

• Assembly –30 °C • Fitted –40 °C

Maximum temperatures : • 85 °C continuous • 100 °C @ 1000 hrs • UV resistant

Operating temperature

Resistance to low tempratures

Flame retardancy

UL 94 V2

UL 94 HB

Oxygen index (LOI) (EN ISO 4589-1/ASTM D 2863-00)

28·5 %

26 %

20 %

Self-extinguishing(3)

850 °C

650 °C

(1) Conform to Class I ASTM D 4066 (Class 2 for Colring black) (2) Conform to ISO 62 (EH 0-23 °C (3) Conform to IEC 60695-2-12 for Colring, IEC 60695-2-11 for Colson (4) Conform to UL 1565, SAE-AS 33671

■ Technical data - Colring Good resistance to bases, oils, greases and petroleum products Limited resistance to acids, sensitive to mineral acids and no resistance to phenol Cable ties Polyamide 6/6

Tensile strength

Max. rachet According to EN 50146 force max Black Min. (daN) High temperature Test dia. guaranteed U.V. protected strength (mm) (daN)

Colourless Non U.V. protected 0320 30

0320 12

Colson approvals Oxygen index : EN ISO 4589-1 and ASTM D 2863-00, 20 % Corrosiveness of fumes : NFC 20-453, < 5 % Flame retardancy : UL 94 HB

0·50

8·0

0·50

8·0

0·50

8·0

0·50

13·0

Colson traceability Each Colson cable tie can be identified, underlining Legrand’s commitment to the consumer, so that you can always be sure you are using a genuine Colson

0320 38

0·50

13·0

Tensile strength (according to EN 50146)

0320 39

0·50

13·0

0·50

13·0

0·50

22·0

0·50

22·0

0·50

22·0

0320 31 0320 32 0320 37

0320 15

0320 40 0320 42

0320 22

0320 43 0320 24

Test conditions • Temperature 23 °C • Relative humidity of air 50 % • Traction speed 25·4 mm/mn • Time of flame application : 10 sec Quality of tensile strength

■ Dimensions Accessories for Colring Cat. No. 0320 65 30

4·2

2·4

Ø 4·2 2

Diagram (A) Max. ratchet force max (daN)

0319 13 0319 16

10 5

Cat. No. 0320 72 9·5 Ø 5·2

Diagram (B) - Tensile strength Test dia. (mm) According to EN 50146

Min. strength (daN)

0319 19

0319 20

5·5

0319 21

5·5

0319 22

0319 25

Cat. No. 0320 70

8·8

Cat. Nos.

(B)

(A)

16·5

F (d aN)

Accessories for Colson Cat. No. 0319 55

Cat. No. 0319 50

Ø 15

9·5 14

6·5

Ø 10

12 18

18·5

21·5

Ø5

43·5 9·2

307

Hypra® IP 44

P. 310 Panel and surface mounting sockets ELV 16 A and LV 16 to 63 A

Hypra® Prisinter IP 44/55

P. 312 Panel and surface mounting sockets LV 16 A

Hypra® IP 66/67-55 IP 66/67

Industrial plugs, sockets and combined units

P. 314 Panel and surface mounting sockets LV 16 to 125 A 059219-20913m.eps

Hypra® combined units

P. 324 IP 44 combined units 16 to 63 A

P 17 Tempra® IP 44

P. 329 Panel and surface mounting sockets LV 16 and 32 A

P 17 Tempra® IP 66/67

P. 329 Panel and surface mounting sockets LV 16 to 125 A

P 17 Tempra® self assembly combined units

P. 335 Self-assembly IP 44 and IP 55 LV 16 and 32 A

Clang® heavy duty trailer plugs and sockets

P. 338 NEW Heavy duty 24 V plugs

NEW IN 2010 Hypra® IP 66/67-55 combined units with interlocked switched socket (p. 325)

308

Clang®

heavy duty trailer plugs and sockets (p. 338)

as052541

P. 310 Straight and angled plugs ELV 16 A and LV 16 to 63 A

P. 311 Panel and surface mounting appliance inlets LV 16 to 63 A

P. 313 Panel and surface mounting sockets LV 32 to 63 A

P. 315 Dimensions

68528a.eps

as0520

P. 314 Mobile sockets LV 16 to 125 A

P. 314 Panel and surface mounting appliance inlets LV 16 to 125 A

P. 325 NEW IP 66/67-55 combined units LV 16 to 63 A

P. 325 Undrilled empty boxes with window

P. 326 Dimensions

P. 329 Straight plugs LV 16 and 32 A

P. 329 Mobile sockets LV 16 and 32 A

P. 314 Straight plugs LV 16 to 125 A

68528a.eps

P. 317 Dimensions

68528a.eps

P. 329 Appliance inlets LV 16 and 32 A

P. 330 Dimensions

as0520

P. 329 Straight plugs LV 16 to 125 A

P. 329 Mobile sockets LV 16 to 125 A

P. 336 Dimensions

68528a.eps

P. 332 Dimensions

68528a.eps

P. 339 Dimensions

P. 338 NEW Heavy duty 24 V sockets

68528a.eps

P. 340 Plugs and sockets pin configurations

68528a.eps

309

Hypra® IP 44 metal, plastic and rubber plugs and sockets ELV 16 A and LV 16/32/63 A

Conform to : BS EN 60309-1, BS EN 60309-2, IEC 60309-1 and IEC 60309-2 IP 44 according to BS EN 60529 and IEC 60529 IK 09 plastic and rubber IK 10 metal according to BS EN 62262 and IEC 62262 Self-extinguishing : 850 °C for insulated parts (960 °C for Prisinter) 650 °C for housing conforms to BS EN 60695-2-10 and IEC 60695-2-10 Temp. rating : –50 °C to +100 °C (- 20 °C for Prisinter)

Technical information and dimensions (p. 315-323)

Panel mounting sockets inclined

ELV

20 to 25 V 50/60 Hz

20 to 50 V D.C.

METAL

(1) PLASTIC MODULAR PLASTIC

Surface mounting sockets inclined(2) METAL

PLASTIC

–

0524 01

–

0524 02

–

0524 01+ 0524 19 0524 02+ 0524 19

16 A 2 P

–

0524 05

–

0524 05+ 0524 19

16 A

Through wiring surface mounting sockets(2)

Straight plugs

Angled plugs

PLASTIC

RUBBER

METAL

PLASTIC RUBBER

–

0524 21

–

0524 41

–

0524 22

–

0524 42

–

0524 25

–

LV 100 to 130 V 50/60 Hz

T 2P+T 3P+T

16 A 2 P +

16 A 200 to 250 V

3P+N+

50/60 Hz

T 3P+T 3P+T 2P+

32 A

16 A

3P+N+ 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz

3P+ 32 A

3P+N+ 3P+ 63 A

T T

3P+N+

0519 30 0519 20

0519 19

0519 30+ 0519 20+ 0520 39 0520 29

0519 20+ 0520 89

0519 40

–

0520 32 0520 22

0520 18

–

0520 23

0520 19

0520 43

–

0520 24

–

0520 22+ 0520 89 0520 23+ 0522 89 0520 24+ 0522 89

0520 42

–

0520 32+ 0520 22+ 0520 39 0520 29 0520 23+ – 0522 29 0520 24+ – 0522 29

0520 44

–

0527 32

–

0527 18

–

0527 19

0527 18+ 0529 90 0527 19+ 0529 90

0527 42

–

0527 32+ 0527 18+ 0529 39 0529 40 0527 19+ – 0529 40

0527 43

–

0522 33+ 0522 39 0522 34+ 0522 39 0529 33+ 0529 39 0529 34+ 0529 39

0522 23+ 0522 89 0522 24+ 0522 89 0529 19+ 0529 90 0529 20+ 0529 90

0522 43

–

0522 44

0522 54

0529 43

0529 53

0529 44

0529 54

0522 33 0522 23

0522 19

0522 34 0522 24

0522 20

0529 33

–

0529 19

0529 34

–

0529 20

0522 23+ 0522 29 0522 24+ 0522 29 0529 19+ 0529 40 0529 20+ 0529 40

0527 72 0527 62 –

–

– –

0522 73 0522 63 0521 53 0522 74 0522 64 –

–

0529 63 0528 53

0529 74 0529 64

–

0538 33 0538 23

–

0537 33

–

0538 43

–

0538 73

–

0538 34 0538 24

–

0537 34

0537 24

–

0538 44

–

0538 74

–

For voltages/arrangements not listed in this table, please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

(1) 70 x 70 mm fixing centres (2) Order both Cat. Nos. for surface mounting units For pack quantities, please refer to our current Legrand trade price list

310

0520 72 0520 62 0521 52

Hypra® IP 44/55 Prisinter LV 16/32/63 A

(Supplied without cover) Mobile sockets

Panel appliance inlets

Prisinter(2) Surface mounting appliance inlets(1)

Panel mounting sockets

PLASTIC

RUBBER

METAL

PLASTIC

METAL

PLASTIC

METAL

0524 61

–

0524 85

–

0519 70

PLASTIC

Surface mounting sockets(1)

Auxiliary c/o contact microswitch

METAL

PLASTIC

–

0519 10

–

0519 10+ 0520 49

0521 96 0521 96(3)

0519 80

–

0520 82

0520 92

0521 62

0521 72

0521 62+ 0520 69

–

0520 02

0520 12+ 0520 59

0520 83

–

0520 03

–

0520 94

–

0520 04

–

0527 82

0527 92

0528 62

0528 72

0528 62+ 0529 69

0528 72+ 0529 79

–

0527 02

–

0527 83

–

0527 03

0527 13+ 0522 59

0520 02+ 0520 49 0520 03+ 0520 49 0520 04+ 0522 49 0527 02+ 0529 49 0527 03+ 0529 49

0522 83

0522 93

0521 63

0521 73

0521 63+ 0522 69

0522 13

0522 03

0522 84

0522 94

–

0521 74

–

0522 14

0522 04

0529 83

0529 93

0528 63

0528 73

0529 13

0529 03

0529 84

0529 94

0528 64

0528 74

0528 63+ 0529 69 0528 64+ 0529 69

0521 73+ 0522 79 0521 74+ 0522 79 0528 73+ 0529 79 0528 74+ 0529 79

0529 14

0529 04

0538 83

–

0537 63

–

0538 00

0536 03

0538 84

–

0537 64

0537 74

–

0538 74+ 0538 79

0538 01

0536 04

0522 13+ 0520 59 0522 14+ 0529 59 0529 13+ 0522 59 0529 14+ 0522 59 0538 00+ 0538 09 0538 01+ 0538 09

0522 03+ 0520 49 0522 04+ 0522 49 0529 03+ 0529 49 0529 04+ 0529 49 0536 03+ 0537 49 0536 04+ 0537 49

0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3) 0521 96(3)

ACCESSORIES Appliance inlet covers

Appliance inlet covers(4) Conform to BS EN 60309-1, BS EN 60309-2, IEC 60309-1 and IEC 60309-2 Material : Rubber Self-extinguishing : 650 °C Temp. rating : –20 °C to +40 °C

2P+

16 A

3P+

3P+N+ 2P+

Adaptor(4) Conform to BS EN 60309-1, BS EN 60309-2, IEC 60309-1 and IEC 60309-2 Self-extinguishing : 850 °C Temp. rating : –15 °C to +40 °C

T T

32 A

3P+

T T

3P+N+

T 3P+T

T T

2P+

63 A and 125 A

T IEC 2 P + T plug – 13 A 2 P + T B.S. socket 3P+N+

16 A – 230 V

Adaptor

Pack

Cat. Nos.

0521 25

–

0521 26

–

0521 27

–

0521 27

–

0521 27

–

0527 99

–

0536 99

–

0536 99

–

0536 99

–

Pack

Cat. No.

0521 01

(1) Order both Cat. Nos. for surface mounting units (2) Index of protection and switching capacity, see p. 352 (3) Late make early break c/o contact for LV only : (for ELV please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333) (4) See p. 322 for dimensions

311

Hypra® IP 44/55 - LV 16 A

Prisinter - interlocked switched sockets

0522 13

0520 02

0522 49

Technical information and dimensions (p. 315) IP 44 when plug inserted IP 55 with cover closed or used with IP 66/67-55 angled plugs Stainless steel screws Pack

Cat. Nos.

Prisinter panel mounting sockets

Load break disconnect at the push of the button Accepts Ø 6 mm padlock with cover closed Terminals accept 1·5 mm2 to 4 mm2 rigid cable (BS EN 60309-1 and IEC 60309-1) Possibility to fit 2 auxiliary C/O contacts Cat. Nos. 0521 96 Plastic 100/130 V 0519 10 2 P +

1 1 1

0520 04 3 P + N +

Metal

T 0520 02 2 P + T 0520 03 3 P + T

± 200/250 V± T

380/415 V

1 1

312

T T

0522 13 0522 03 3 P + 0522 14 0522 04 3 P + N +

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Surface mounting boxes Reversible entry box with 3 x M20 entries with 2 blanking plugs plus rear knockout entries

Metal

1 1

Plastic

T T T

0520 49 For 2 P + / 3 P + sockets 0529 59 0522 49 For 3 P + N + sockets

Hypra® IP 44/55 - LV 32 A

® Hypraexemple pour IP 44/55 : xxxxxxx - LV 63 A

Prisinter - interlocked switched sockets

0529 13

xxxxxxxx - interlocked switched sockets Prisinter

0529 04 + 0529 49 0538 00 + 0538 09

Technical information and dimensions (p. 315)

IP 44 when plug inserted IP 55 with cover closed or used with IP 66/67-55 angled plugs

Pack

Cat. Nos.

Metal

1 1

Plastic

0527 02 0527 03

1 1

0529 13 0529 03 0529 14 0529 04

Prisinter panel mounting sockets Load break disconnect at the push of the button Accepts Ø 6 mm padlock with cover closed Terminals accept 2·5 mm2 to 10 mm2 rigid cable (BS EN 60309-1 and IEC 60309-1) Possibility to fit 2 auxiliary C/O contacts Cat. Nos. 0521 96 200/250 V 2P+ 3P+ 380/415 V 3P+ 3P+N+

TT T T

Pack

± ±

1 1

Cat. Nos.

Prisinter panel mounting sockets

Load break disconnect at the push of the button Accepts 3 x Ø 8 mm padlocks with cover closed IP 2x protection against direct contact Terminals accept 6 mm2 to 25 mm2 rigid cable Possibility to fit 2 auxiliary C/O contacts Cat. Nos. 0521 96 Metal Plastic 380/415 V 0538 00 0536 03 3 P + 0538 01 0536 04 3 P + N +

Surface mounting boxes Surface mounting boxes

Reversible entry box with 2 x M32 and 1 x M20 entries with 1 x M32 and 1 x M20 blanking plugs

Reversible entry box with 2 x M25 and 1 x M20 entries with 1 x M25 and 1 x M20 blanking plugs plus rear knockout entries Metal

Plastic

0522 59 0529 49 For 2 P +

T / 3 P + T / 3 P + N + T sockets

Metal

Plastic

0538 09 0537 49 For 3 P +

Prisinter mobile socket

Rubber/Plastic

0527 05

Load break disconnect at the push of the button, at the end of an extension lead Accepts Ø 6 mm padlock with cover closed Terminals accept 2·5 mm2 to 6 mm2 flexible cable (IEC 60309.1) 200/250 V 2P+

T / 3 P + N + T sockets

Rubber/Plastic

0537 07

Load break disconnect at the push of the button, at the end of an extension lead Accepts 3 x Ø 8 mm padlocks with cover closed Terminals accept 6 mm2 to 16 mm2 flexible cable 380/415 V 3P+N+

313

Hypra IP 66/67-55 plastic plugs and sockets

D 125 A CTION 63 A ANN/DISCONNE IO T C E N SY CON

LV 16/32/63/125 A

IP 66/67-55 - LV 16, 32, 63 AND 125 A

Conform to : BS EN 60309-1, BS 60309-2, IEC 60309-1 and IEC 60309-2 IP according to BS EN 60529 and IEC 60529 IK 09 Self-extinguishing : 850 °C for insulated parts 650 °C for housing Stainless steel external screws Temp. rating : - 50 °C to + 100 °C 63/125 A units have a pilot pin

Technical information and dimensions (p. 317-322)

Panel mounting sockets inclined inclined outlets

modular(1) with single fixing centres

16 A 2 P +

0511 25

–

16 A

0511 26 0511 46

Surface mounting Through entry sockets surface mounting inclined(2) sockets(2)

Straight plugs

Mobile sockets

Panel appliance inlets straight

Surface appliance inlets

LV 100 to 130 V 50/60 Hz

200 to 250 V 50/60 Hz

32 A

16 A

T 2P+T 2P+T 3P+T 3P+N+

380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz

3P+ 32 A

3P+ 63 A 50/60 Hz

3P+ 125 A

T T

3P+N+

380 to 415 V

3P+N+

0511 25 + 0520 89

0511 55

0511 75

–

0511 26 + 0520 29

0511 26 + 0520 89

0511 56

0511 76

–

0511 86

0530 46

0530 46 + 0529 40

0530 46 + 0529 90

0530 56

0530 76

–

0511 30 0511 50

0511 30 + 0522 29

0511 30 + 0522 89

0511 60

0511 80

–

0511 31 0511 51

0511 31 + 0522 29

0511 31 + 0522 89

0511 61

0511 81

–

0511 91

–

3P+N+

0511 25 + 0520 29

–

0530 50

0530 50 + 0529 40

0530 50 + 0529 90

0530 60

0530 80

–

0530 51

0530 51 + 0529 40

0530 51 + 0529 90

0530 61

0530 81

–

0594 27

–

0594 37

0594 27 + 0538 89

0594 47

0594 87

0594 77(3)

–

0594 28

–

0594 38

0594 28 + 0538 89

0594 48

0594 88

0594 78(3)

–

0595 12

–

0595 02

–

0595 22

0595 32

0595 42

0595 44

0595 13

–

0595 03

–

0595 23

0595 33

0595 43

0595 45

For voltages/arrangements not listed in this table, please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

(1) 70 x 70 mm fixing centres (2) Order both Cat. Nos. for surface mounting units (3) Can be fixed on 0538 89 to obtain a straight surface mounting appliance inlet For pack quantities, please refer to our current Legrand trade price list

314

IP 55 guaranteed with IP 66/67-55 plug inserted and cover in place over spigot on plug

IP 66/67-55 obtained with locking ring secured

IP 55 assured automatically with cover flap down without locking ring secured IP 66/67-55 obtained with locking ring secured

Hypra® IP 44/55 Prisinter LV 16/32/63 A

■ Technical information Icc 10 kA according to BS EN 60309-1, BS EN 60309-2, IEC 60309-1 and IEC 60309-2 IP rating according to BS EN 60529 and IEC 60529 : IP 55 - cover closed - connected with an angled plug IP 66/67-55 IP 44 - in all other cases Hypra Prisinter breaking capacity at 3 x 400 V according to BS EN 60947-1, BS EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-3 :